1 files changed, 12972 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/old/enaid10.txt b/old/enaid10.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6988fb5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/enaid10.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,12972 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of By England's Aid or The Freeing of the Netherlands (1585-1604)
+by G.A. Henty
+(#12 in our series by G.A. Henty)
+
+Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the
+copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing
+this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook.
+
+This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project
+Gutenberg file.  Please do not remove it.  Do not change or edit the
+header without written permission.
+
+Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the
+eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file.  Included is
+important information about your specific rights and restrictions in
+how the file may be used.  You can also find out about how to make a
+donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved.
+
+
+**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts**
+
+**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971**
+
+*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!*****
+
+
+Title: By England's Aid or The Freeing of the Netherlands (1585-1604)
+
+Author: G.A. Henty
+
+Release Date: November, 2004  [EBook #6953]
+[This file was first posted on February 17, 2003]
+
+Edition: 10
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, BY ENGLAND'S AID OR THE FREEING OF THE NETHERLANDS (1585-1604) ***
+
+
+
+
+By England's Aid or The Freeing of the Netherlands (1585-1604)
+by G. A. Henty
+This etext was produced by Martin Robb (MartinRobb@ieee.org)
+
+
+PREFACE.
+
+MY DEAR LADS,
+
+In my preface to By Pike and Dyke I promised in a future story to deal
+with the closing events of the War of Independence in Holland. The
+period over which that war extended was so long, and the incidents
+were so numerous and varied, that it was impossible to include the
+whole within the limit of a single book. The former volume brought
+the story of the struggle down to the death of the Prince of Orange
+and the capture of Antwerp; the present gives the second phase of
+the war, when England, who had long unofficially assisted Holland,
+threw herself openly into the struggle, and by her aid mainly
+contributed to the successful issue of the war. In the first part
+of the struggle the scene lay wholly among the low lands and cities
+of Holland and Zeeland, and the war was strictly a defensive one,
+waged against overpowering odds. After England threw herself into
+the strife it assumed far wider proportions, and the independence
+of the Netherlands was mainly secured by the defeat and destruction
+of the great Armada, by the capture of Cadiz and the fatal blow
+thereby struck at the mercantile prosperity of Spain, and by the
+defeat of the Holy League by Henry of Navarre, aided by English
+soldiers and English gold. For the facts connected with the
+doings of Sir Francis Vere and the British contingent in Holland,
+I have depended much upon the excellent work by Mr. Clement Markham
+entitled the Fighting Veres. In this full justice is done to the
+great English general and his followers, and it is conclusively
+shown that some statements to the disparagement of Sir Francis
+Vere by Mr. Motley are founded upon a misconception of the facts.
+Sir Francis Vere was, in the general opinion of the time, one of
+the greatest commanders of the age, and more, perhaps, than any
+other man with the exception of the Prince of Orange contributed
+to the successful issue of the struggle of Holland to throw off
+the yoke of Spain.
+
+Yours sincerely,
+
+G.A. HENTY
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I
+
+AN EXCURSION
+
+
+"And we beseech Thee, 0 Lord, to give help and succour to Thy servants
+the people of Holland, and to deliver them from the cruelties and
+persecutions of their wicked oppressors; and grant Thy blessing,
+we pray Thee, upon the arms of our soldiers now embarking to aid
+them in their extremity."
+
+These were the words with which the Rev. John Vickars, rector of
+Hedingham, concluded the family prayers on the morning of December
+6th, 1585.
+
+For twenty years the first portion of this prayer had been repeated
+daily by him, as it had been in tens of thousands of English
+households; for since the people of the Netherlands first rose
+against the Spanish yoke the hearts of the Protestants of England
+had beat warmly in their cause, and they had by turns been moved
+to admiration at the indomitable courage with which the Dutch
+struggled for independence against the might of the greatest power
+in Europe, and to horror and indignation at the pitiless cruelty
+and wholesale massacres by which the Spaniards had striven to stamp
+out resistance.
+
+From the first the people of England would gladly have joined
+in the fray, and made common cause with their co-religionists;
+but the queen and her counsellors had been restrained by weighty
+considerations from embarking in such a struggle. At the commencement
+of the war the power of Spain overshadowed all Europe. Her infantry
+were regarded as irresistible. Italy and Germany were virtually her
+dependencies, and England was but a petty power beside her. Since
+Agincourt was fought we had taken but little part in wars on the
+Continent. The feudal system was extinct; we had neither army nor
+military system; and the only Englishmen with the slightest experience
+of war were those who had gone abroad to seek their fortunes, and
+had fought in the armies of one or other of the continental powers.
+Nor were we yet aware of our naval strength. Drake and Hawkins and
+the other buccaneers had not yet commenced their private war with
+Spain, on what was known as the Spanish Main -- the waters of
+the West Indian Islands -- and no one dreamed that the time was
+approaching when England would be able to hold her own against the
+strength of Spain on the seas.
+
+Thus, then, whatever the private sentiments of Elizabeth and her
+counsellors, they shrank from engaging England in a life and death
+struggle with the greatest power of the time; though as the struggle
+went on the queen's sympathy with the people of the Netherlands
+was more and more openly shown. In 1572 she was present at a parade
+of three hundred volunteers who mustered at Greenwich under Thomas
+Morgan and Roger Williams for service in the Netherlands. Sir Humphrey
+Gilbert, half brother of Sir Walter Raleigh, went out a few months
+later with 1500 men, and from that time numbers of English volunteers
+continued to cross the seas and join in the struggle against the
+Spaniards. Nor were the sympathies of the queen confined to allowing
+her subjects to take part in the fighting; for she sent out large
+sums of money to the Dutch, and as far as she could, without openly
+joining them, gave them her aid.
+
+Spain remonstrated continually against these breaches of neutrality,
+while the Dutch on their part constantly implored her to join them
+openly; but she continued to give evasive answers to both parties
+until the assassination of William of Orange on 10th July, 1584,
+sent a thrill of horror through England, and determined the queen
+and her advisers to take a more decisive part in the struggle. In the
+following June envoys from the States arrived in London, and were
+received with great honour, and a treaty between the two countries
+was agreed upon. Three months later the queen published a declaration
+to her people and to Europe at large, setting forth the terrible
+persecutions and cruelties to which "our next neighbours, the people
+of the Low Countries," the special allies and friends of England,
+had been exposed, and stating her determination to aid them to
+recover their liberty. The proclamation concluded: "We mean not
+hereby to make particular profit to ourself and our people, only
+desiring to obtain, by God's favour, for the Countries, a deliverance
+of them from war by the Spaniards and foreigners, with a restitution
+of their ancient liberties and government.
+
+Sir Thomas Cecil was sent out at once as governor of Brill, and
+Sir Philip Sidney as governor of Flushing, these towns being handed
+over to England as guarantees by the Dutch. These two officers,
+with bodies of troops to serve as garrisons, took charge of their
+respective fortresses in November. Orders were issued for the
+raising of an army for service in the Low Countries, and Dudley,
+Earl of Leicester, was appointed by the queen to its command.
+The decision of the queen was received with enthusiasm in England
+as well as in Holland, and although the Earl of Leicester was not
+personally popular, volunteers flocked to his standard.
+
+Breakfast at Hedingham Rectory had been set at an earlier hour than
+usual on the 6th of December, 1585. There was an unusual stir and
+excitement in the village, for young Mr. Francis Vere, cousin of
+the Earl of Oxford, lord of Hedingham and of all the surrounding
+country, was to start that morning to ride to Colchester, there
+to join the Earl of Leicester and his following as a volunteer. As
+soon as breakfast was over young Geoffrey and Lionel Vickars, boys
+of fourteen and thirteen years old, proceeded to the castle close
+by, and there mounted the horses provided for them, and rode with
+Francis Vere to Colchester.
+
+Francis, who was at this time twenty-five years old, was accompanied
+by his elder brother, John, and his two younger brothers, Robert
+and Horace, and by many other friends; and it was a gay train that
+cantered down the valley of the Colne to Colchester. That ancient
+town was all astir. Gentlemen had ridden in from all the country
+seats and manors for many miles round, and the quiet streets were
+alive with people. At two o'clock in the afternoon news arrived
+that the earl was approaching, and, headed by the bailiffs of the
+town in scarlet gowns, the multitude moved out to meet the earl on
+the Lexden road. Presently a long train was seen approaching; for
+with Leicester were the Earl of Essex, Lords North and Audley, Sir
+William Russell, Sir Thomas Shirley, and other volunteers, to the
+number of five hundred horse. All were gaily attired and caparisoned,
+and the cortege presented a most brilliant appearance. The multitude
+cheered lustily, the bailiffs presented an address, and followed by
+his own train and by the gentlemen who had assembled to meet him,
+the earl rode into the town. He himself took up his abode at the
+house of Sir Thomas Lucas, while his followers were distributed
+among the houses of the townsfolk. Two hours after the arrival of
+the earl, the party from Hedingham took leave of Mr. Francis Vere.
+
+"Goodbye, lads," he said to the young Vickars, "I will keep my
+promise, never fear; and if the struggle goes on till you are old
+enough to carry arms, I will, if I am still alive, take you under
+my leading and teach you the art of war."
+
+Upon the following day the Earl of Leicester and his following rode
+to Manningtree, and took boat down the Stour to Harwich, where the
+fleet, under Admiral William Borough, was lying. Here they embarked,
+and on the 9th of December sailed for Flushing, where they were
+joined by another fleet of sixty ships from the Thames.
+
+More than a year passed. The English had fought sturdily in Holland.
+Mr. Francis Vere had been with his cousin, Lord Willoughby, who
+was in command of Bergen op Zoom, and had taken part in the first
+brush with the enemy, when a party of the garrison marched out and
+attacked a great convoy of four hundred and fifty wagons going to
+Antwerp, killed three hundred of the enemy, took eighty prisoners,
+and destroyed all their wagons except twenty-seven, which they
+carried into the town. Leicester provisioned the town of Grave,
+which was besieged by the Duke of Parma, the Spanish commander
+in chief. Axel was captured by surprise, the volunteers swimming
+across the moat at night, and throwing open the gates. Doesburg
+was captured, and Zutphen besieged.
+
+Parma marched to its relief, and, under cover of a thick fog,
+succeeded in getting close at hand before it was known that he
+was near. Then the English knights and volunteers, 200 in number,
+mounted in hot haste and charged a great Spanish column of 5000
+horse and foot. They were led by Sir William Russell, under whom
+were Lord Essex, North, Audley, and Willoughby, behind the last
+of whom rode Francis Vere. For two hours this little band of horse
+fought desperately in the midst of the Spanish cavalry, and forced
+them at last to fall back, but were themselves obliged to retreat
+when the Spanish infantry came up and opened fire upon them. The
+English loss was 34 killed and wounded, while 250 of the Spaniards
+were slain, and three of their colours captured. Among the wounded
+on the English side was the very noble knight Sir Philip Sidney,
+who was shot by a musket ball, and died three weeks afterwards.
+
+The successes of the English during these two years were counterbalanced
+by the cowardly surrender of Grave by its governor, and by the
+treachery of Sir William Stanley, governor of Deventer, and of Roland
+Yorke, who commanded the garrisons of the two forts known as the
+Zutphen Sconces. Both these officers turned traitors and delivered
+up the posts they commanded to the Spaniards. Their conduct not
+only caused great material loss to the allies, but it gave rise
+to much bad feeling between the English and Dutch, the latter
+complaining that they received but half hearted assistance from
+the English.
+
+It was not surprising, however, that Leicester was unable to effect
+more with the little force under his command, for it was necessary
+not only to raise soldiers, but to invent regulations and discipline.
+The Spanish system was adopted, and this, the first English regular
+army, was trained and appointed precisely upon the system of the
+foe with whom they were fighting. It was no easy task to convert a
+body of brave knights and gentlemen and sturdy countrymen into regular
+troops, and to give them the advantages conferred by discipline
+and order. But the work was rendered the less difficult by the
+admixture of the volunteers who had been bravely fighting for ten
+years under Morgan, Rowland Williams, John Norris, and others. These
+had had a similar experience on their first arrival in Holland.
+Several times in their early encounters with the Spaniards the
+undisciplined young troops had behaved badly; but they had gained
+experience from their reverses, and had proved themselves fully
+capable of standing in line even against the splendid pikemen of
+Spain.
+
+While the English had been drilling and fighting in Holland things
+had gone on quietly at Hedingham. The village stands near the
+headwaters of the Colne and Stour, in a rich and beautiful country.
+On a rising ground behind it stood the castle of the Veres, which
+was approached from the village by a drawbridge across the moat.
+There were few more stately piles in England than the seat of
+the Earl of Oxford. On one side of the great quadrangle was the
+gatehouse and a lofty tower, on another the great hall and chapel
+and the kitchens, on a third the suites of apartments of the
+officials and retinue. In rear were the stables and granaries, the
+butts and tennis court, beyond which was the court of the tournaments.
+
+In the centre of the quadrangle rose the great keep, which still
+stands, the finest relic of Norman civil architecture in England.
+It possessed great strength, and at the same time was richly
+ornamented with carving. The windows, arches, and fireplaces were
+decorated with chevron carvings. A beautiful spiral pattern enriched
+the doorway and pillars of the staircase leading to galleries cut
+in the thickness of the wall, with arched openings looking into the
+hall below. The outlook from the keep extended over the parishes of
+Castle Hedingham, Sybil Hedingham, Kirby, and Tilbury, all belonging
+to the Veres -- whose property extended far down the pretty valley
+of the Stour -- with the stately Hall of Long Melford, the Priory of
+Clare, and the little town of Lavenham; indeed, the whole country
+was dotted with the farm houses and manors of the Veres. Seven
+miles down the valley of the Colne lies the village of Earl's Colne,
+with the priory, where ten of the earls of Oxford lie buried with
+their wives.
+
+The parish church of Castle Hedingham stood at the end of the little
+village street, and the rectory of Mr. Vickars was close by. The
+party gathered at morning prayers consisted of Mr. Vickars and his
+wife, their two sons, Geoffrey and Lionel, and the maidservants,
+Ruth and Alice. The boys, now fourteen and fifteen years old
+respectively, were strong grown and sturdy lads, and their father
+had long since owned with a sigh that neither of them was likely
+to follow his profession and fill the pulpit at Hedingham Church
+when he was gone. Nor was this to be wondered at, for lying as it
+did at the entrance to the great castle of the Veres, the street of
+the little village was constantly full of armed men, and resounded
+with the tramp of the horses of richly dressed knights and gay
+ladies.
+
+Here came great politicians, who sought the friendship and support
+of the powerful earls of Oxford, nobles and knights, their kinsmen
+and allies, gentlemen from the wide spreading manors of the family,
+stout fighting men who wished to enlist under their banner. At night
+the sound of music from the castle told of gay entertainments and
+festive dances, while by day parties of knights and ladies with
+dogs and falcons sallied out to seek sport over the wide domains.
+It could hardly be expected, then, that lads of spirit, brought
+up in the midst of sights and sounds like these, should entertain
+a thought of settling down to the tranquil life of the church. As
+long as they could remember, their minds had been fixed upon being
+soldiers, and fighting some day under the banner of the Veres. They
+had been a good deal in the castle; for Mr. Vickars had assisted
+Arthur Golding, the learned instructor to young Edward Vere, the
+17th earl, who was born in 1550, and had succeeded to the title at
+the age of twelve, and he had afterwards been tutor to the earl's
+cousins, John, Francis, Robert, and Horace, the sons of Geoffrey,
+fourth son of the 15th earl. These boys were born in 1558, 1560,
+1562, and 1565, and lived with their mother at Kirby Hall, a mile
+from the Castle of Hedingham.
+
+The earl was much attached to his old instructor, and when he was
+at the castle there was scarce a day but an invitation came down
+for Mr. Vickars and his wife to be present either at banquet or
+entertainment. The boys were free to come and go as they chose,
+and the earl's men-at-arms had orders to afford them all necessary
+teaching in the use of weapons.
+
+Mr. Vickars considered it his duty to accept the invitations of
+his friend and patron, but he sorely grudged the time so abstracted
+from his favourite books. It was, indeed, a relief to him when the
+earl, whose love of profusion and luxury made serious inroads even
+into the splendid possessions of the Veres, went up to court, and
+peace and quietness reigned in the castle. The rector was fonder
+of going to Kirby, where John, Geoffrey's eldest son, lived quietly
+and soberly, his three younger brothers having, when mere boys,
+embraced the profession of arms, placing themselves under the care
+of the good soldier Sir William Brownie, who had served for many
+years in the Low Countries. They occasionally returned home for
+a time, and were pleased to take notice of the sons of their old
+tutor, although Geoffrey was six years junior to Horace, the youngest
+of the brothers.
+
+The young Vickars had much time to themselves, much more, indeed,
+than their mother considered to be good for them. After their
+breakfast, which was finished by eight o'clock, their father took
+them for an hour and heard the lessons they had prepared the day
+before, and gave them instruction in the Latin tongue. Then they
+were supposed to study till the bell rang for dinner at twelve; but
+there was no one to see that they did so, for their father seldom
+came outside his library door, and their mother was busy with her
+domestic duties and in dispensing simples to the poor people, who,
+now that the monasteries were closed, had no medical aid save that
+which they got from the wives of the gentry or ministers, or from
+the wise women, of whom there was generally one in every village.
+
+Therefore, after half an hour, or at most an hour, spent in getting
+up their tasks, the books would be thrown aside, and the boys
+be off, either to the river or up to the castle to practice sword
+play with the men-at-arms, or to the butts with their bows, or to
+the rabbit warren, where they had leave from the earl to go with
+their dogs whenever they pleased. Their long excursions were,
+however, generally deferred until after dinner, as they were then
+free until suppertime -- and even if they did not return after that
+hour Mrs. Vickars did not chide them unduly, being an easygoing
+woman, and always ready to make excuses for them.
+
+There were plenty of fish in the river; and the boys knew the
+pools they loved best, and often returned with their baskets well
+filled. There were otters on its banks, too; but, though they
+sometimes chased these pretty creatures, Tan and Turk, their two
+dogs, knew as well as their masters that they had but small chance
+of catching them. Sometimes they would take a boat at the bridge
+and drop down the stream for miles, and once or twice had even
+gone down to Bricklesey at the mouth of the river. This, however,
+was an expedition that they never performed alone, making it each
+time in charge of Master Lirriper, who owned a flat barge, and took
+produce down to Bricklesey, there to be transhipped into coasters
+bound for London. He had a married daughter there, and it was at
+her house the boys had slept when they went there; for the journey
+down and up again was too long to be performed in a single day.
+
+But this was not the only distant expedition they had made, for they
+had once gone down the Stour as far as Harwich with their father
+when he was called thither on business. To them Harwich with its
+old walls and the houses crowned up within them, and its busy port
+with vessels coming in and going out, was most delightful, and they
+always talked about that expedition as one of the most pleasant
+recollections of their lives.
+
+After breakfast was over on the 1st of May, 1587, and they had
+done their lessons with their father, and had worked for an hour
+by themselves, the boys put by their books and strolled down the
+village to the bridge. There as usual stood their friend Master
+Lirriper with his hands deep in his pockets, a place and position
+in which he was sure to be found when not away in his barge.
+
+"Good morning, Master Lirriper."
+
+"Good morning, Master Geoffrey and Master Lionel."
+
+"So you are not down the river today?"
+
+"No, sir. I am going tomorrow, and this time I shall be away four
+or five days -- maybe even a week."
+
+"Shall you?" the boys exclaimed in surprise. "Why, what are you
+going to do?"
+
+"I am going round to London in my nephew Joe Chambers' craft."
+
+"Are you really?" Geoffrey exclaimed. "I wish we were going with
+you. Don't you think you could take us, Master Lirriper?"
+
+The bargeman looked down into the water and frowned. He was slow
+of speech, but as the minutes went on and he did not absolutely
+refuse the boys exchanged glances of excitement and hope.
+
+"I dunno how that might be, young sirs," John Lirriper said slowly,
+after long cogitation. "I dussay my nephew would have no objection,
+but what would parson say about it?"
+
+"Oh, I don't think he would object," Geoffrey said. "If you go up
+and ask him, Master Lirriper, and say that you will take care of
+us, you know, I don't see why he should say no."
+
+"Like enough you would be ill," John Lirriper said after another
+long pause. "It's pretty rough sometimes.
+
+"Oh, we shouldn't mind that," Lionel protested. "We should like to
+see the waves and to be in a real ship."
+
+"It's nothing much of a ship," the boatman said. "She is a ketch
+of about ten tons and carries three hands."
+
+"Oh, we don't care how small she is if we can only go in her; and
+you would be able to show us London, and we might even see the
+queen. Oh, do come up with us and ask father, Master Lirriper."
+
+"Perhaps parson wouldn't be pleased, young sirs, and, might say I
+was putting wandering thoughts into your heads; and Mistress Vickars
+might think it a great liberty on my part."
+
+"Oh, no, she wouldn't, Master Lirriper. Besides, we will say we
+asked you."
+
+"But suppose any harm comes to you, what would they say to me then?"
+
+"Oh, there's no fear of any harm coming to us. Besides, in another
+year or two we mean to go over to the Low Countries and fight the
+Spaniards, and what's a voyage to London to that?"
+
+"Well, I will think about it," John Lirriper said cautiously.
+
+"No, no, Master Lirriper; if you get thinking about it it will
+never be done. Do come up with us at once," and each of them got
+hold of one of the boatman's arms.
+
+"Well, the parson can but say no," he said, as he suffered himself
+to be dragged away. "And I don't say as it isn't reasonable that
+you should like to see something of the world, young sirs; but I
+don't know how the parson will take it."
+
+Mr. Vickars looked up irritably from his books when the servant
+came in and said that Master Lirriper wished to see him.
+
+"What does he want at this hour?" he said. "You know, Ruth, I never
+see people before dinner. Any time between that and supper I am at
+their service, but it's too bad being disturbed now."
+
+"I told him so, sir; but Master Geoffrey and Master Lionel were
+with him, and they said he wanted particular to see you, and they
+wanted particular too."
+
+The clergyman sighed as he put his book down.
+
+"If Geoffrey and Lionel have concerned themselves in the matter,
+Ruth, I suppose I must see the man; but it's very hard being
+disturbed like this. Well, Master Lirriper, what is it?" he asked,
+as the boatman accompanied by Geoffrey and Lionel entered the room.
+Master Lirriper twirled his hat in his hand. Words did not come
+easily to him at the best of times, and this was a business that
+demanded thought and care. Long before he had time to fix upon an
+appropriate form of words Geoffrey broke in:
+
+"This is what it is, father. Master Lirriper is going down the river
+to Bricklesey tomorrow, and then he is going on board his nephew's
+ship. She is a ketch, and she carries ten tons, though I don't
+know what it is she carries; and she's going to London, and he is
+going in her, and he says if you will let him he will take us with
+him, and will show us London, and take great care of us. It will
+be glorious, father, if you will only let us go."
+
+Mr. Vickars looked blankly as Geoffrey poured out his torrent of
+words. His mind was still full of the book he had been reading,
+and he hardly took in the meaning of Geoffrey's words.
+
+"Going in a ketch!" he repeated. "Going to catch something, I
+suppose you mean? Do you mean he is going fishing?"
+
+"No, father, -- going in a ketch. A ketch is a sort of ship, father,
+though I don't quite know what sort of ship. What sort of ship is
+a ketch, Master Lirriper?"
+
+"A ketch is a two masted craft, Master Geoffrey," John Lirriper
+said. "She carries a big mizzen sail."
+
+"There, you see, father," Geoffrey said triumphantly; "she carries
+a big mizzen sail. That's what she is, you see; and he is going to
+show us London, and will take great care of us if you will let us
+go with him."
+
+"Do you mean, Master Lirriper," Mr. Vickars asked slowly, "that
+you are going to London in some sort of ship, and want to take my
+sons with you?"
+
+"Well, sir, I am going to London, and the young masters seemed to
+think that they would like to go with me, if so be you would have
+no objection."
+
+"I don't know," Mr. Vickars said, "It is a long passage, Master
+Lirriper; and, as I have heard, often a stormy one. I don't think
+my wife --"
+
+"Oh, yes, father," Lionel broke in. "If you say yes, mother is sure
+to say yes; she always does, you know. And, you see, it will be a
+great thing for us to see London. Every one else seems to have seen
+London, and I am sure that it would do us good. And we might even
+see the queen."
+
+"I think that they would be comfortable, sir," John Lirriper put
+in. "You see, my nephew's wife is daughter of a citizen, one Master
+Swindon, a ship's chandler, and he said there would be a room there
+for me, and they would make me heartily welcome. Now, you see,
+sir, the young masters could have that room, and I could very well
+sleep on board the ketch; and they would be out of all sort of
+mischief there."
+
+"That would be a very good plan certainly, Master Lirriper. Well,
+well, I don't know what to say."
+
+"Say yes, father," Geoffrey said as he saw Mr. Vickars glance
+anxiously at the book he had left open. "If you say yes, you see
+it will be a grand thing for you, our being away for a week with
+nothing to disturb you."
+
+"Well, well," Mr. Vickars said, "you must ask your mother. If she
+makes no objection, then I suppose you can go," and Mr. Vickars
+hastily took up his book again.
+
+The boys ran off to the kitchen, where their mother was superintending
+the brewing of some broth for a sick woman down the village.
+
+"Mother!" Geoffrey exclaimed, "Master Lirriper's going to London
+in a ketch -- a ship with a big mizzen sail, you know -- and he
+has offered to take us with him and show us London. And father has
+said yes, and it's all settled if you have no objection; and of
+course you haven't."
+
+"Going to London, Geoffrey!" Mrs. Vickars exclaimed aghast. "I
+never heard of such a thing. Why, like enough you will be drowned
+on the way and never come back again. Your father must be mad to
+think of such a thing."
+
+"Oh, no, mother; I am sure it will do us a lot of good. And we may
+see the queen, mother. And as for drowning, why, we can both swim
+ever so far. Besides, people don't get drowned going to London. Do
+they, Master Lirriper?"
+
+John was standing bashfully at the door of the kitchen. "Well,
+not as a rule, Master Geoffrey," he replied. "They comes and they
+goes, them that are used to it, maybe a hundred times without
+anything happening to them."
+
+"There! You hear that, mother? They come and go hundreds of times.
+Oh, I am sure you are not going to say no. That would be too bad
+when father has agreed to it. Now, mother, please tell Ruth to run
+away at once and get a wallet packed with our things. Of course we
+shall want our best clothes; because people dress finely in London,
+and it would never do if we saw the queen and we hadn't our best
+doublets on, for she would think that we didn't know what was seemly
+down at Hedingham."
+
+"Well, my dears, of course if it is all settled --"
+
+"Oh, yes, mother, it is quite all settled."
+
+"Then it's no use my saying anything more about it, but I think
+your father might have consulted me before he gave his consent to
+your going on such a hazardous journey as this."
+
+"He did want to consult you, mother. But then, you see, he wanted
+to consult his books even more, and he knew very well that you
+would agree with him; and you know you would too. So please don't
+say anything more about it, but let Ruth run upstairs and see to
+our things at once.
+
+"There, you see, Master Lirriper, it is all settled. And what time
+do you start tomorrow? We will be there half an hour before, anyhow."
+
+"I shall go at seven from the bridge. Then I shall just catch the
+turn of the tide and get to Bricklesey in good time."
+
+"I never did see such boys," Mrs. Vickars said when John Lirriper
+had gone on his way. "As for your father, I am surprised at him
+in countenancing you. You will be running all sorts of risks. You
+may be drowned on the way, or killed in a street brawl, or get mixed
+up in a plot. There is no saying what may not happen. And here it
+is all settled before I have even time to think about it, which is
+most inconsiderate of your father."
+
+"Oh, we shall get back again without any harm, mother. And as to
+getting killed in a street brawl, Lionel and I can use our hangers
+as well as most of them. Besides, nothing of that sort is going
+to happen to us. Now, mother, please let Ruth go at once, and tell
+her to put up our puce doublets that we had for the jousting at the
+castle, and our red hose and our dark green cloth slashed trunks."
+
+"There is plenty of time for that, Geoffrey, as you are not going
+until tomorrow. Besides, I can't spare Ruth now, but she shall see
+about it after dinner."
+
+There was little sleep for the boys that night. A visit to London had
+long been one of their wildest ambitions, and they could scarcely
+believe that thus suddenly and without preparation it was about
+to take place. Their father had some time before promised that he
+would someday make request to one or other of the young Veres to
+allow them to ride to London in his suite, but the present seemed
+to them an even more delightful plan. There would be the pleasure
+of the voyage, and moreover it would be much more lively for them
+to be able to see London under the charge of John Lirriper than to
+be subject to the ceremonial and restraint that would be enforced
+in the household of the Veres. They were, then, at the appointed
+place a full hour before the time named, with wallets containing
+their clothes, and a basket of provisions that their mother had
+prepared for them. Having stowed these away in the little cabin,
+they walked up and down impatiently until Master Lirriper himself
+appeared.
+
+"You are up betimes, my young masters," the boatman said. "The
+church has not yet struck seven o'clock."
+
+"We have been here ever so long, Master Lirriper. We could not sleep
+much last night, and got up when it chimed five, being afraid that
+we might drop off to sleep and be late."
+
+"Well, we shall not be long before we are off. Here comes my man
+Dick, and the tide is just on the turn. The sky looks bright, and
+the weather promises well. I will just go round to the cottage and
+fetch up my things, and then we shall be ready."
+
+In ten minutes they pushed off from the shore. John and his man got
+out long poles shod with iron, and with these set to work to punt
+the barge along. Now that they were fairly on their way the boys
+quieted down, and took their seats on the sacks of flour with which
+the boat was laden, and watched the objects on the bank as the boat
+made her way quietly along.
+
+Halstead was the first place passed. This was the largest town near
+Hedingham, and was a place of much importance in their eyes. Then
+they passed Stanstead Hall and Earl's Colne on their right, Colne
+Wake on their left, and Chapel Parish on their right. Then there
+was a long stretch without any large villages, until they came in
+sight of the bridge above Colchester. A few miles below the town
+the river began to widen. The banks were low and flat, and they
+were now entering an arm of the sea. Half an hour later the houses
+and church of Bricklesey came in sight. Tide was almost low when
+they ran on to the mud abreast of the village, but John put on a
+pair of high boots and carried the boys ashore one after the other
+on his back, and then went up with them to the house where they
+were to stop for the night.
+
+Here, although not expected, they were heartily welcomed by John's
+daughter.
+
+"If father had told me that you had been coming, Masters Vickars,
+I would have had a proper dinner for you; but though he sent word
+yesterday morning that he should be over today, he did not say a
+word about your coming with them."
+
+"He did not know himself," Geoffrey said; "it was only settled at
+ten o'clock yesterday. But do not trouble yourself about the dinner.
+In the first place, we are so pleased at going that we don't care
+a bit what we eat, and in the second place we had breakfast on
+board the boat, and we were both so hungry that I am sure we could
+go till supper time without eating if necessary."
+
+"Where are you going, father?" the young woman asked.
+
+"I am going to set about unloading the flour."
+
+"Why, it's only a quarter to twelve, and dinner just ready. The
+fish went into the frying pan as you came up from the boat. You
+know we generally dine at half past eleven, but we saw you coming
+at a distance and put it off. It's no use your starting now."
+
+"Well, I suppose it isn't. And I don't know what the young masters'
+appetite may be, but mine is pretty good, I can tell you."
+
+"I never knew it otherwise, father," the woman laughed. "Ah, here
+is my Sam. Sam, here's father brought these two young gentlemen.
+They are the sons of Mr. Vickars, the parson at Hedingham. They
+are going to stop here tonight, and are going with him in the Susan
+tomorrow to London."
+
+"Glad to see you, young masters," Sam said. "I have often heard
+Ann talk of your good father. I have just been on board the Susan,
+for I am sending up a couple of score sides of bacon in her, and
+have been giving Joe Chambers, her master, a list of things he is
+to get there and bring down for me.
+
+"Now then, girl, bustle about and get dinner on as soon as you can.
+We are half an hour late. I am sure the young gentlemen here must
+be hungry. There's nothing like being on the water for getting an
+appetite."
+
+
+A few minutes later a great dish of fish, a loaf of bread and some
+wooden platters, were placed on the table, and all set to at once.
+Forks had not yet come into use, and tablecloths were unknown,
+except among the upper classes. The boys found that in spite of
+their hearty breakfast their appetites were excellent. The fish were
+delicious, the bread was home baked, and the beer from Colchester,
+which was already famous for its brewing. When they had finished,
+John Lirriper asked them if they would rather see what there was
+to be seen in the village, or go off to the ketch. They at once
+chose the latter alternative. On going down to the water's edge
+they found that the tide had risen sufficiently to enable Dick to
+bring the barge alongside the jetty. They were soon on board.
+
+"Which is the Susan, Master Lirriper?"
+
+"That's her lying out there with two others. She is the one lowest
+down the stream. We shall just fetch her comfortably."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II
+
+A MEETING IN CHEPE
+
+
+A row of ten minutes took the boat with Master Lirriper and the
+two boys alongside the ketch.
+
+"How are you, Joe Chambers?" Master Lirriper hailed the skipper as
+he appeared on the deck of the Susan. "I have brought you two more
+passengers for London. They are going there under my charge."
+
+"The more the merrier, Uncle John," the young skipper replied. "There
+are none others going this journey, so though our accommodation is
+not very extensive, we can put them up comfortably enough if they
+don't mind roughing it."
+
+"Oh, we don't mind that," Geoffrey said, as they climbed on board;
+"besides, there seems lots of room."
+
+"Not so much as you think," the skipper replied. "She is a roomy
+craft is the Susan; but she is pretty nigh all hold, and we are
+cramped a little in the fo'castle. Still we can sleep six, and
+that's just the number we shall have, for we carry a man and a boy
+besides myself. I think your flour will about fill her up, Master
+Lirriper. We have a pretty full cargo this time."
+
+"Well, we shall soon see," John Lirriper said. "Are you ready to
+take the flour on board at once? Because, if so, we will begin to
+discharge."
+
+"Yes, I am quite ready. You told me you were going to bring forty
+sacks, and I have left the middle part of the hold empty for them.
+Sam Hunter's bacon will stow in on the top of your sacks, and just
+fill her up to the beams there, as I reckon. I'll go below and stow
+them away as you hand them across."
+
+In an hour the sacks of flour were transferred from the barge to the
+hold of the Susan, and the sides of bacon then placed upon them.
+
+"It's a pity we haven't all the rest of the things on board," the
+skipper said, "and then we could have started by this evening's tide
+instead of waiting till the morning. The wind is fair, and I hate
+throwing away a fair wind. There is no saying where it may blow
+tomorrow, but I shouldn't be at all surprised if it isn't round
+to the south, and that will be foul for us till we get pretty nigh
+up into the mouth of the river. However, I gave them till tonight
+for getting all their things on board and must therefore wait."
+
+To the boys the Susan appeared quite a large craft, for there
+was not water up at Hedingham for vessels of her size; and though
+they had seen ships at Harwich, they had never before put foot on
+anything larger than Master Lirriper's barge. The Susan was about
+forty feet long by twelve feet beam, and drew, as her skipper
+informed them, near five feet of water. She was entirely decked.
+The cabin in the bows occupied some fourteen feet in length. The
+rest was devoted to cargo. They descended into the cabin, which
+seemed to them very dark, there being no light save what came down
+through the small hatchway. Still it looked snug and comfortable.
+There was a fireplace on one side of the ladder by which they had
+descended, and on this side there were two bunks, one above the
+other. On the other side there were lockers running along the entire
+length of the cabin. Two could sleep on these and two on the bunks
+above them.
+
+"Now, young masters, you will take those two bunks on the top there.
+John Lirriper and I will sleep on the lockers underneath you. The
+man and the boy have the two on the other side. I put you on the
+top because there is a side board, and you can't fall out if she
+rolls, and besides, the bunks are rather wider than the lockers
+below. If the wind is fair you won't have much of our company,
+because we shall hold on till we moor alongside the wharves of
+London; but if it's foul, or there is not enough of it to take us
+against tide, we have to anchor on the ebb, and then of course we
+turn in."
+
+"How long do you take getting from here to London?"
+
+"Ah, that I can tell you more about when I see what the weather
+is like in the morning. With a strong fair wind I have done it in
+twenty-four hours, and again with the wind foul it has taken me
+nigh a week. Taking one trip with another I should put it at three
+days."
+
+"Well, now we will be going ashore," John Lirriper said. "I will
+leave my barge alongside till tide turns, for I could not get her
+back again to the jetty so long as it is running in strong, so I
+will be off again in a couple of hours."
+
+So saying he hauled up the dinghy that was towing behind the barge,
+and he and Dick rowed the two boys ashore. Then he walked along
+with them to a spot where several craft were hauled up, pointing
+out to them the differences in their rig and build, and explained
+their purpose, and gave them the names of the principal ropes and
+stays.
+
+"Now," he said, "it's getting on for supper time, and it won't do
+to keep them waiting, for Ann is sure to have got some cakes made,
+and there's nothing puts a woman out more than people not being
+in to meals when they have something special ready. After that I
+shall go out with Dick and bring the barge ashore. He will load up
+her tomorrow, and take her back single handed; which can be done
+easy enough in such weather as this, but it is too much for one
+man if there is a strong wind blowing and driving her over to the
+one side or other of the river."
+
+As John Lirriper had expected, his daughter had prepared a pile of
+hot cakes for supper, and her face brightened up when she saw the
+party return punctually. The boys had been up early, and had slept
+but little the night before, and were not sorry at eight o'clock
+to lie down on the bed of freshly cut rushes covered with home spun
+sheets, for regular beds of feathers were still but little used in
+England. At five o'clock they were astir again, and their hostess
+insisted on their eating a manchet of bread with some cheese, washed
+down by a stoup of ale, before starting. Dick had the boat at the
+jetty ready to row them off, and as soon as they were on board the
+Susan preparations were made for a start.
+
+The mainsail was first hoisted, its size greatly surprising the
+boys; then the foresail and jib were got up, and lastly the mizzen.
+Then the capstan was manned, and the anchor slowly brought on
+board, and the sails being sheeted home, the craft began to steal
+through the water. The tide was still draining up, and she had not
+as yet swung. The wind was light, and, as the skipper had predicted,
+was nearly due south. As the ketch made its way out from the mouth
+of the river, and the wide expanse of water opened before them, the
+boys were filled with delight. They had taken their seats, one on
+each side of the skipper, who was at the tiller.
+
+"I suppose you steer by the compass, Master Chambers?" Geoffrey
+said. "Which is the compass? I have heard about it, always pointing
+to the north."
+
+"It's down below, young sir; I will show it you presently. We steer
+by that at night, or when it's foggy; but on a fine day like this
+there is no need for it. There are marks put up on all the sands,
+and we steer by them. You see, the way the wind is now we can lay
+our course for the Whittaker. That's a cruel sand, that is, and
+stretches out a long way from a point lying away on the right there.
+Once past that we bear away to the southwest, for we are then, so
+to speak, fairly in the course of the river. There is many a ship
+has been cast away on the Whittaker. Not that it is worse than
+other sands. There are scores of them lying in the mouth of the
+river, and if it wasn't for the marks there would be no sailing in
+or out."
+
+"Who put up the marks?" Lionel asked.
+
+"They are put up by men who make a business of it. There is one
+boat of them sails backwards and forwards where the river begins
+to narrow above Sheerness, and every ship that goes up or down pays
+them something according to her size. Others cruise about with long
+poles, putting them in the sands wherever one gets washed away.
+They have got different marks on them. A single cross piece, or
+two cross pieces, or a circle, or a diamond; so that each sand has
+got its own particular mark. These are known to the masters of all
+ships that go up and down the river, and so they can tell exactly
+where they are, and what course to take. At night they anchor, for
+there would be no possibility of finding the way up or down in the
+dark. I have heard tell from mariners who have sailed abroad that
+there ain't a place anywhere with such dangerous sands as those we
+have got here at the mouth of the Thames."
+
+In the first three or four hours' sail Geoffrey and Lionel acquired
+much nautical knowledge. They learned the difference between the
+mainmast and the mizzen, found that all the strong ropes that kept
+the masts erect and stiff were called stays, that the ropes that
+hoist sails are called halliards, and that sheets is the name given
+to the ropes that restrain the sails at the lower corner, and are
+used to haul them in more tightly when sailing close to the wind,
+or to ease them off when the wind is favourable. They also learned
+that the yards at the head of the main and mizzen sails are called
+gaffs, and those at the bottom, booms.
+
+"I think that's about enough for you to remember in one day, young
+masters," John Lirriper said. "You bear all that in your mind,
+and remember that each halliard and sheet has the name of the sail
+to which it is attached, and you will have learnt enough to make
+yourself useful, and can lend a hand when the skipper calls out,
+`Haul in the jib sheet,' or `Let go the fore halliards.' Now sit
+yourselves down again and see what is doing. That beacon you can
+just see right ahead marks the end of the Whittaker Spit. When we
+get there we shall drop anchor till the tide turns. You see we are
+going across it now, but when we round that beacon we shall have it
+dead against us, and the wind would be too light to take us against
+it even if it were not from the quarter it is. You see there are
+two or three other craft brought up there."
+
+"Where have they come from, do you think, Master Lirriper?"
+
+"Well, they may have come out from Burnham, or they may have come
+down from London and be going up to Burnham or to Bricklesey when
+the tide turns. There is a large ship anchored in the channel beyond
+the Whittaker. Of course she is going up when tide begins to flow.
+And there are the masts of two vessels right over there. They are
+in another channel. Between us and them there is a line of sands
+that you will see will show above the water when it gets a bit
+lower. That is the main channel, that is; and vessels coming from
+the south with a large draught of water generally use that, while
+this is the one that is handiest for ships from the north. Small
+vessels from the south come in by a channel a good bit beyond those
+ships. That is the narrowest of the three; and even light draught
+vessels don't use it much unless the wind is favourable, for there
+is not much room for them to beat up if the wind is against them."
+
+"What is to beat up, Master Lirriper?"
+
+"Well, you will see about that presently. I don't think we shall
+be able to lay our course beyond the Whittaker. To lay our course
+means to steer the way we want to go; and if we can't do that we
+shall have to beat, and that is tedious work with a light wind like
+this."
+
+They dropped anchor off the beacon, and the captain said that this
+was the time to take breakfast. The lads already smelt an agreeable
+odour arising from the cabin forward, where the boy had been for
+some time busily engaged, and soon the whole party were seated on
+the lockers in the cabin devouring fried fish.
+
+"Master Chambers," Geoffrey said, "we have got two boiled pullets
+in our basket. Had we not better have them for dinner? They were
+cooked the evening before we came away, and I should think they
+had better be eaten now."
+
+"You had better keep them for yourselves, Master Geoffrey," the
+skipper said. "We are accustomed to living on fish, but like enough
+you would get tired of it before we got to London."
+
+But this the boys would not hear of, and it was accordingly arranged
+that the dinner should be furnished from the contents of the basket.
+
+As soon as tide turned the anchor was hove up and the Susan got under
+way again. The boys soon learnt the meaning of the word beating,
+and found that it meant sailing backwards and forwards across
+the channel, with the wind sometimes on one side of the boat and
+sometimes on the other. Geoffrey wanted very much to learn why,
+when the wind was so nearly ahead, the boat advanced instead of
+drifting backwards or sideways. But this was altogether beyond the
+power of either Master Lirriper or Joe Chambers to explain. They
+said every one knew that when the sails were full a vessel went in
+the direction in which her head pointed. "It's just the same way
+with yourself, Master Geoffrey. You see, when you look one way
+that's the way you go. When you turn your head and point another
+way, of course you go off that way; and it's just the same thing
+with the ship."
+
+"I don't think it's the same thing, Master Lirriper," Geoffrey
+said puzzled. "In one case the power that makes one go comes from
+the inside, and so one can go in any direction one likes; in the
+other it comes from outside, and you would think the ship would
+have to go any way the wind pushes her. If you stand up and I give
+you a push, I push you straight away from me. You don't go sideways
+or come forward in the direction of my shoulder, which is what the
+ship does."
+
+John Lirriper took off his cap and scratched his head.
+
+"I suppose it is as you say, Master Geoffrey, though I never thought
+of it before. There is some reason, no doubt, why the craft moves
+up against the wind so long as the sails are full, instead of drifting
+away to leeward; though I never heard tell of it, and never heard
+anyone ask before. I dare say a learned man could tell why it is;
+and if you ask your good father when you go back I would wager he
+can explain it. It always seems to me as if a boat have got some
+sort of sense, just like a human being or a horse, and when she
+knows which way you wants her to go she goes. That's how it seems
+to me -- ain't it, Joe?"
+
+"Something like that, uncle. Every one knows that a boat's got her
+humours, and sometimes she sails better than she does others; and
+each boat's got her own fancies. Some does their best when they are
+beating, and some are lively in a heavy sea, and seem as if they
+enjoy it; and others get sulky, and don't seem to take the trouble
+to lift their bows up when a wave meets them; and they groans and
+complains if the wind is too hard for them, just like a human being.
+When you goes to a new vessel you have got to learn her tricks
+and her ways and what she will do, and what she won't do, and just
+to humour her as you would a child. I don't say as I think she
+is actually alive; but every sailor will tell you that there is
+something about her that her builders never put there."
+
+"That's so," John Lirriper agreed. "Look at a boat that is hove
+up when her work's done and going to be broke up. Why, anyone can
+tell her with half an eye. She looks that forlorn and melancholy
+that one's inclined to blubber at the sight of her. She don't look
+like that at any other time. When she is hove up she is going to
+die, and she knows it."
+
+"But perhaps that's because the paint's off her sides and the ropes
+all worn and loose," Geoffrey suggested.
+
+But Master Lirriper waved the suggestion aside as unworthy even of
+an answer, and repeated, "She knows it. Anyone can see that with
+half an eye."
+
+Geoffrey and Lionel talked the matter over when they were sitting
+together on deck apart from the others. It was an age when there
+were still many superstitions current in the land. Even the upper
+classes believed in witches and warlocks, in charms and spells, in
+lucky and unlucky days, in the arts of magic, in the power of the
+evil eye; and although to the boys it seemed absurd that a vessel
+should have life, they were not prepared altogether to discredit an
+idea that was evidently thoroughly believed by those who had been
+on board ships all their lives. After talking it over for some time
+they determined to submit the question to their father on their
+return.
+
+It took them two more tides before they were off Sheerness. The
+wind was now more favourable, and having increased somewhat in
+strength, the Susan made her way briskly along, heeling over till
+the water ran along her scuppers. There was plenty to see now, for
+there were many fishing boats at work, some belonging, as Master
+Chambers told them, to the Medway, others to the little village of
+Leigh, whose church they saw at the top of the hill to their right.
+They met, too, several large craft coming down the river, and passed
+more than one, for the Susan was a fast boat.
+
+"They would beat us," the skipper said when the boys expressed
+their surprise at their passing such large vessels, "if the wind
+were stronger or the water rough. We are doing our best, and if the
+wind rises I shall have to take in sail; while they could carry all
+theirs if it blew twice as hard. Then in a sea, weight and power
+tell; a wave that would knock the way almost out of us would hardly
+affect them at all."
+
+So well did the Susan go along, that before the tide was much more
+than half done they passed the little village of Gravesend on their
+left, with the strong fort of Tilbury on the opposite shore, with
+its guns pointing on the river, and ready to give a good account
+of any Spaniard who should venture to sail up the Thames. Then at
+the end of the next reach the hamlet of Grays was passed on the
+right; a mile further Greenhithe on the left. Tide was getting
+slack now, but the Susan managed to get as far as Purfleet, and
+then dropped her anchor.
+
+"This is our last stopping place," Joe Chambers said. "The morning
+tide will carry us up to London Bridge."
+
+"Then you will not go on with tonight's tide?" Geoffrey asked.
+
+"No; the river gets narrower every mile, and I do not care to take
+the risk of navigating it after dark, especially as there is always
+a great deal of shipping moored above Greenwich. Tide will begin
+to run up at about five o'clock, and by ten we ought to be safely
+moored alongside near London Bridge. So we should not gain a great
+deal by going on this evening instead of tomorrow morning, and I
+don't suppose you are in a particular hurry."
+
+"Oh, no," Lionel said. "We would much rather go on in the morning,
+otherwise we should miss everything by the way; and there is the
+Queen's Palace at Greenwich that I want to see above all things."
+
+Within a few minutes of the hour the skipper had named for their
+arrival, the Susan was moored alongside some vessels lying off one
+of the wharves above the Tower. The boys' astonishment had risen with
+every mile of their approach to the city, and they were perfectly
+astounded at the amount of shipping that they now beheld. The great
+proportion were of course coasters, like themselves, but there were
+many large vessels among them, and of these fully half were flying
+foreign colours. Here were traders from the Netherlands, with the
+flag that the Spaniards had in vain endeavoured to lower, flying
+at their mastheads. Here were caravels from Venice and Genoa, laden
+with goods from the East. Among the rest Master Chambers pointed out
+to the lads the ship in which Sir Francis Drake had circumnavigated
+the world, and that in which Captain Stevens had sailed to India,
+round the Cape of Good Hope. There were many French vessels also
+in the Pool, and indeed almost every flag save that of Spain was
+represented. Innumerable wherries darted about among the shipping,
+and heavier cargo boats dropped along in more leisurely fashion.
+Across the river, a quarter of a mile above the point at which
+they were lying, stretched London Bridge, with its narrow arches
+and the houses projecting beyond it on their supports of stout
+timbers. Beyond, on the right, rising high above the crowded roofs,
+was the lofty spire of St. Paul's. The boys were almost awed by
+this vast assemblage of buildings. That London was a great city they
+had known, but they were not prepared for so immense a difference
+between it and the place where they had lived all their lives. Only
+with the Tower were they somewhat disappointed. It was very grand
+and very extensive, but not so much grander than the stately abode
+of the Veres as they had looked for.
+
+"I wouldn't change, if I were the earl, with the queen's majesty,"
+Geoffrey said. "Of course it is larger than Hedingham, but not so
+beautiful, and it is crowded in by the houses, and has not like our
+castle a fair lookout on all sides. Why, there can be no hunting
+or hawking near here, and I can't think what the nobles can find
+to do all day."
+
+"Now, young sirs," Master Lirriper said, "if you will get your
+wallets we will go ashore at once."
+
+The boys were quite bewildered as they stepped ashore by the bustle
+and confusion. Brawny porters carrying heavy packages on their
+backs pushed along unceremoniously, saying from time to time
+in a mechanical sort of way, "By your leave, sir!" but pushing
+on and shouldering passersby into the gutter without the smallest
+compunction. The narrowness and dinginess of the streets greatly
+surprised and disappointed the boys, who found that in these
+respects even Harwich compared favourably with the region they
+were traversing. Presently, however, after passing through several
+lanes and alleys, they emerged into a much broader street, alive
+with shops. The people who were walking here were for the most
+part well dressed and of quiet demeanour, and there was none of
+the rough bustle that had prevailed in the riverside lanes.
+
+"This is Eastchepe," their conductor said; "we have not far to go
+now. The street in which my friend dwells lies to the right, between
+this and Tower Street. I could have taken you a shorter way there,
+but I thought that your impressions of London would not be favourable
+did I take you all the way through those ill smelling lanes."
+
+In a quarter of an hour they arrived at their destination, and
+entered the shop, which smelt strongly of tar; coils of rope of
+all sizes were piled up one upon another by the walls, while on
+shelves above them were blocks, lanterns, compasses, and a great
+variety of gear of whose use the boys were ignorant. The chandler
+was standing at his door.
+
+"I am right glad to see you, Master Lirriper," he said, "and have
+been expecting you for the last two or three days. My wife would
+have it that some evil must have befallen you; but you know what
+women are. They make little allowance for time or tide or distance,
+but expect that every one can so arrange his journeys as to arrive
+at the very moment when they begin to expect him. But who have you
+here with you?"
+
+"These are the sons of the worshipful Mr. Vickars, the rector of
+our parish and tutor to the Earl of Oxford and several of the young
+Veres, his cousins -- a wise gentleman and a kind one, and much
+loved among us. He has entrusted his two sons to me that I might
+show them somewhat of this city of yours. I said that I was right
+sure that you and your good dame would let them occupy the chamber
+you intended for me, while I can make good shift on board the
+Susan."
+
+"Nay, nay, Master Lirriper; our house is big enough to take in you
+and these two young masters, and Dorothy would deem it a slight
+indeed upon her hospitality were you not to take up your abode here
+too.
+
+"You will be heartily welcome, young sirs, and though such
+accommodation as we can give you will not be equal to that which
+you are accustomed to, I warrant me that you will find it a pleasant
+change after that poky little cabin on board the Susan. I know it
+well, for I supply her with stores, and have often wondered how
+men could accustom themselves to pass their lives in places where
+there is scarce room to turn, to say nothing of the smell of fish
+that always hangs about it. But if you will follow me I will take
+you up to my good dame, to whose care I must commit you for the
+present, as my foreman, John Watkins, is down by the riverside
+seeing to the proper delivery of divers stores on board a ship
+which sails with the next tide for Holland. My apprentices, too,
+are both out, as I must own is their wont. They always make excuses
+to slip down to the riverside when there is aught doing, and I am
+far too easy with the varlets. So at present, you see, I cannot
+long leave my shop."
+
+So saying the chandler preceded them up a wide staircase that led
+from a passage behind the shop, and the boys perceived that the
+house was far more roomy and comfortable than they had judged from
+its outward appearance. Turning to the left when he reached the
+top of the stairs the chandler opened a door.
+
+"Dorothy," he said, "here is your kinsman, Master Lirriper, who
+has suffered none of the misadventures you have been picturing to
+yourself for the last two days, and he has brought with him these
+young gentlemen, sons of the rector of Hedingham, to show them
+something of London."
+
+"You are welcome, young gentlemen," Dame Dorothy said, "though why
+anyone should come to London when he can stay away from it I know
+not."
+
+"Why, Dorothy, you are always running down our city, though I know
+right well that were I to move down with you to your native Essex
+again you would very soon cry out for the pleasures of the town."
+
+"That would I not," she said. "I would be well contented to live
+in fresh country air all the rest of my life, though I do not say
+that London has not its share of pleasures also, though I care but
+little for them."
+
+"Ah, Master Lirriper," her husband said laughing, "you would not
+think, to hear her talk, that there is not a feast or a show that
+Dorothy would stay away from. She never misses an opportunity, I
+warrant you, of showing herself off in her last new kirtle and gown.
+But I must be going down; there is no one below, and if a customer
+comes and finds the shop empty he will have but a poor idea of me,
+and will think that I am away gossiping instead of attending to my
+business."
+
+"Are you hungry, young sirs?" the dame asked. "Because if so the
+maid shall bring up a manchet of bread and a cup of sack; if not,
+our evening meal will be served in the course of an hour."
+
+The boys both said that they were perfectly able to wait until the
+meal came; and Geoffrey added, "If you will allow us, mistress, as
+doubtless you have private matters to talk of with Master Lirriper,
+my brother and I will walk out for an hour to see something of the
+town."
+
+"Mind that you lose not your way," Master Lirriper said. "Do not go
+beyond Eastchepe, I beg you. There are the shops to look at there,
+and the fashions of dress and other matters that will occupy your
+attention well enough for that short time. Tomorrow morning I will
+myself go with you, and we can then wander further abroad. I have
+promised your good father to look after you, you know; and it will
+be but a bad beginning if you meet with any untoward adventure upon
+this the first day of your arrival here."
+
+"We will not go beyond the limits of Eastchepe; and as to adventures,
+I can't see very well how any can befall us."
+
+"Oh, there are plenty of adventures to be met with in London, young
+sir; and I shall be well content if on the day when we again embark
+on board the Susan none of them have fallen to your share."
+
+The two lads accordingly sallied out and amused themselves greatly
+by staring at the goods exhibited in the open shops. They were
+less surprised at the richness and variety of the silver work, at
+the silks from the East, the costly satins, and other stuffs, than
+most boys from the country would have been, for they were accustomed
+to the splendour and magnificence displayed by the various noble
+guests at the castle, and saw nothing here that surpassed the
+brilliant shows made at the jousting and entertainments at Hedingham.
+
+It was the scene that was novel to them: the shouts of the apprentices
+inviting attention to their employers' wares, the crowd that filled
+the street, consisting for the most part of the citizens themselves,
+but varied by nobles and knights of the court, by foreigners from
+many lands, by soldiers and men-at-arms from the Tower, by countrymen
+and sailors. Their amusement was sometimes turned into anger by
+the flippant remarks of the apprentices; these varlets, perceiving
+easily enough by the manner of their attire that they were from
+the country, were not slow, if their master happened for the moment
+to be absent, in indulging in remarks that set Geoffrey and Lionel
+into a fever to commit a breach of the peace. The "What do you lack,
+masters?" with which they generally addressed passersby would be
+exchanged for remarks such as, "Do not trouble the young gentlemen,
+Nat. Do you not see they are up in the town looking for some of
+their master's calves?" or, "Look you, Philip, here are two rustics
+who have come up to town to learn manners."
+
+"I quite see, Geoffrey," Lionel said, taking his brother by the
+arm and half dragging him away as he saw that he was clenching his
+fist and preparing to avenge summarily one of these insults even
+more pointed than usual, "that Master Lirriper was not very far
+out, and there is no difficulty in meeting with adventures in the
+streets of London. However, we must not give him occasion on this
+our first stroll in the streets to say that we cannot be trusted out
+of his sight. If we were to try to punish these insolent varlets we
+should have them on us like a swarm of bees, and should doubtless
+get worsted in the encounter, and might even find ourselves hauled
+off to the lockup, and that would be a nice tale for Master Lirriper
+to carry back to Hedingham."
+
+"That is true enough, Lionel; but it is not easy to keep one's
+temper when one is thus tried. I know not how it is they see so
+readily that we are strangers, for surely we have mixed enough with
+the earl's family and friends to have rubbed off the awkwardness
+that they say is common to country folk; and as to our dress, I
+do not see much difference between its fashion and that of other
+people. I suppose it is because we look interested in what is going
+on, instead of strolling along like those two youths opposite with
+our noses in the air, as if we regarded the city and its belongings
+as infinitely below our regard. Well, I think we had best be turning
+back to Master Swindon's; it will not do to be late for our meal."
+
+"Well, young sirs, what do you think of our shops?" Dame Swindon
+asked as they entered.
+
+"The shops are well enough," Geoffrey replied; "but your apprentices
+seem to me to be an insolent set of jackanapes, who take strange
+liberties with passersby, and who would be all the better for
+chastisement. If it hadn't been that Lionel and I did not wish to
+become engaged in a brawl, we should have given some of them lessons
+in manners."
+
+"They are free in speech," Dame Swindon said, "and are an impudent
+set of varlets. They have quick eyes and ready tongues, and are no
+respecters of persons save of their masters and of citizens in a
+position to lay complaints against them and to secure them punishment.
+They hold together greatly, and it is as well that you should not
+become engaged in a quarrel with them. At times they have raised
+serious tumults, and have even set not only the watch but the
+citizens at large at defiance. Strong measures have been several
+times taken against them; but they are a powerful body, seeing that
+in every shop there are one or more of them, and they can turn out
+with their clubs many thousand strong. They have what they call their
+privileges, and are as ready to defend them as are the citizens of
+London to uphold their liberties. Ordinances have been passed many
+times by the fathers of the city, regulating their conduct and the
+hours at which they may be abroad and the carrying of clubs and
+matters of this kind, but the apprentices seldom regard them, and
+if the watch arrest one for a breach of regulations, he raises a
+cry, and in two or three minutes a swarm of them collect and rescue
+the offender from his hands. Therefore it is seldom that the watch
+interferes with them."
+
+"It would almost seem then that the apprentices are in fact the
+masters," Geoffrey said.
+
+"Not quite as bad as that," Master Swindon replied. "There are the
+rules which they have to obey when at home, and if not they get a
+whipping; but it is difficult to keep a hand over them when they
+are abroad. After the shops are closed and the supper over they have
+from time immemorial the right to go out for two hours' exercise.
+They are supposed to go and shoot at the butts; but archery, I
+grieve to say, is falling into disrepute, and although many still
+go to the butts the practice is no longer universal. But here is
+supper."
+
+Few words were spoken during the meal. The foreman and the two
+apprentices came up and sat down with the family, and it was not
+until these had retired that the conversation was again resumed.
+
+"Where are you going to take them tomorrow, Master Lirriper?"
+
+"Tomorrow we will see the city, the shops in Chepe, the Guildhall,
+and St. Paul's, then we shall issue out from Temple Bar and walk
+along the Strand through the country to Westminster and see the
+great abbey, then perhaps take a boat back. The next day, if the
+weather be fine, we will row up to Richmond and see the palace
+there, and I hope you will go with us, Mistress Dorothy; it is a
+pleasant promenade and a fashionable one, and methinks the river
+with its boats is after all the prettiest sight in London."
+
+"Ah, you think there can be nothing pretty without water. That
+is all very well for one who is ever afloat, Master Lirriper; but
+give me Chepe at high noon with all its bravery of dress, and the
+bright shops, and the gallants of the court, and our own citizens
+too, who if not quite so gay in colour are proper men, better looking
+to my mind than some of the fops with their silver and satins."
+
+"That's right, Dorothy," her husband said; "spoken like the wife
+of a citizen."
+
+All these plans were destined to be frustrated. As soon as breakfast
+was over the next morning Master Lirriper started with the two
+boys, and they had but just entered Chepeside when they saw two
+young men approaching.
+
+"Why, Lionel, here is Francis Vere!" Geoffrey exclaimed. "I thought
+he was across in Holland with the Earl of Leicester." They doffed
+their caps. Captain Vere, for such was now his rank, looked at them
+in surprise.
+
+"Why!" he exclaimed, "here are Mr. Vickars' two sons. How came you
+here, lads? Have you run away from home to see the wonders of London,
+or to list as volunteers for the campaigns against the Dons?"
+
+"I wish we were, Mr. Francis," Geoffrey said. "You promised when
+you were at Hedingham a year and a half since that you would some
+day take us to the wars with you, and our father, seeing that
+neither of us have a mind to enter the church, has quite consented
+that we shall become soldiers, the more so as there is a prospect
+of fighting for the persecuted Protestants of Holland. And oh,
+Mr. Francis, could it be now? You know we daily exercise with arms
+at the castle, and we are both strong and sturdy for our age, and
+believe me you should not see us flinch before the Spaniards however
+many of them there were."
+
+"Tut, tut!" Captain Vere laughed. "Here are young cockerels, Allen;
+what think you of these for soldiers to stand against the Spanish
+pikemen?"
+
+"There are many of the volunteers who are not very much older than
+they are," Captain Allen replied.
+
+"There are two in my company who must be between seventeen and
+eighteen."
+
+"Ah! but these boys are three years younger than that."
+
+"Would you not take us as your pages, Mr. Francis?" Lionel urged.
+"We would do faithful service, and then when we come of age that
+you could enter us as volunteers we should already have learnt a
+little of war."
+
+"Well, well, I cannot stop to talk to you now, for I am on my way
+to the Tower on business. I am only over from Holland for a day or
+two with despatches from the Earl to Her Majesty's Council, and am
+lodging at Westminster in a house that faces the abbey. It is one
+of my cousin Edward's houses, and you will see the Vere cognizance
+over the door. Call there at one hour after noon, and I will have
+a talk with you; but do not buoy yourselves up with hopes as to
+your going with me." So saying, with a friendly nod of his head
+Francis Vere continued his way eastward.
+
+"What think you, Allen?" he asked his comrade as they went along.
+"I should like to take the lads with me if I could. Their father,
+who is the rector of Hedingham, taught my cousin Edward as well as
+my brothers and myself. I saw a good deal of the boys when I was
+at home. They are sturdy young fellows, and used to practise daily,
+as we did at their age, with the men-at-arms at the castle, and
+can use their weapons. A couple of years of apprenticeship would
+be good schooling for them. One cannot begin to learn the art of
+war too young, and it is because we have all been so ignorant of
+it that our volunteers in Holland have not done better."
+
+"I think, Vere, that they are too young yet to be enlisted
+as volunteers, although in another two years, perhaps, you might
+admit the elder of the two; but I see no reason why, if you are so
+inclined, you should not take them with you as pages. Each company
+has its pages and boys, and you might take these two for the
+special service of yourself and your officers. They would then be
+on pretty well the same footing as the five gentlemen volunteers
+you have already with you, and would be distinct from the lads who
+have entered as pages to the company. I suppose that you have not
+yet your full number of boys?"
+
+"No; there are fifteen boys allowed, one to each ten men, and I am
+several short of this number, and have already written my brother
+John to get six sturdy lads from among our own tenantry and to send
+them over in the first ship from Harwich. Yes, I will take these
+lads with me. I like their spirit, and we are all fond of their
+father, who is a very kindly as well as a learned man."
+
+"I don't suppose he will thank you greatly, Francis," Captain Allen
+laughed.
+
+"His goodwife is more likely to be vexed than he is," Captain Vere
+said, "for it will give him all the more time for the studies in
+which he is wrapped up. Besides, it will be a real service to the
+boys. It will shorten their probation as volunteers, and they may
+get commissions much earlier than they otherwise would do. We are
+all mere children in the art of war; for truly before Roger Morgan
+first took out his volunteers to fight for the Dutch there was
+scarce a man in England who knew how to range a company in order.
+You and I learned somewhat of our business in Poland, and some
+of our leaders have also had a few lessons in the art of war in
+foreign countries, but most of our officers are altogether new to
+the work. However, we have good masters, and I trust these Spaniards
+may teach us how to beat them in time; but at present, as I said,
+we are all going to school, and the earlier one begins at school
+the sooner one learns its lessons. Besides, we must have pages, and
+it will be more pleasant for me having lads who belong in a sort
+of way of our family, and to whom, if I am disposed, I can talk
+of people at home. They are high spirited and full of fun, and I
+should like to have them about me. But here we are at the Tower.
+We shall not be long, I hope, over the list of arms and munitions
+that the earl has sent for. When we have done we will take boat
+back to Westminster. Half an hour will take us there, as the tide
+will be with us."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III
+
+IN THE LOW COUNTRY
+
+
+Master Lirriper had stood apart while the boys were conversing with
+Francis Vere.
+
+"What do you think, Master Lirriper?" Geoffrey exclaimed as they
+joined him. "We have asked Mr. Vere to take us with him as pages
+to the war in the Low Country, and though he said we were not to
+be hopeful about his reply, I do think he will take us. We are to
+go round to Westminster at one o'clock to see him again. What do
+you think of that?"
+
+"I don't know what to think, Master Geoffrey. It takes me all by
+surprise, and I don't know how I stand in the matter. You see, your
+father gave you into my charge, and what could I say to him if I
+went back empty handed?"
+
+"But, you see, it is with Francis Vere," Geoffrey said. "If it
+had been with anyone else it would be different. But the Veres are
+his patrons, and he looks upon the earl, and Mr. Francis and his
+brothers, almost as he does on us; and, you know, he has already
+consented to our entering the army some day. Besides, he can't
+blame you; because, of course, Mr. Vere will write to him himself
+and say that he has taken us, and so you can't be blamed in the
+matter. My father would know well enough that you could not withstand
+the wishes of one of the Veres, who are lords of Hedingham and all
+the country round."
+
+"I should withstand them if I thought they were wrong," the boatman
+said sturdily, "and if I were sure that your father would object
+to your going; but that is what I am not sure. He may think it the
+best thing for you to begin early under the protection of Master
+Francis, and again he may think you a great deal too young for such
+wild work. He has certainly always let you have pretty much your
+own way, and has allowed you to come and go as you like, but this
+is a different business altogether. I am sorely bested as to what
+I ought to do."
+
+"Well, nothing is settled yet, Master Lirriper; and, besides, I
+don't see that you can help yourself in the matter, and if Mr. Vere
+says he will take us I suppose you can't carry us off by force."
+
+"It is Mistress Vickars that I am thinking of more than your father.
+The vicar is an easygoing gentleman, but Mistress Vickars speaks
+her mind, and I expect she will be in a terrible taking over it,
+and will rate me soundly; though, as you say, I do not see how I can
+help myself in the matter. Well now, let us look at the shops and
+at the Guildhall, and then we will make our way down to Westminster
+as we had proposed to do and see the abbey; by that time it will
+be near the hour at which you are to call upon Mr. Vere."
+
+But the sights that the boys had been so longing to see had for
+the time lost their interest in their eyes. The idea that it was
+possible that Mr. Vere would take them with him to fight against
+the cruel oppressors of the Low Country was so absorbing that they
+could think of nothing else. Even the wonders of the Guildhall and
+St. Paul's received but scant attention, and the armourers' shops,
+in which they had a new and lively interest, alone sufficed to
+detain them. Even the gibes of the apprentices fell dead upon their
+ears. These varlets might laugh, but what would they say if they
+knew that they were going to fight the Spaniards? The thought
+so altered them that they felt almost a feeling of pity for these
+lads, condemned to stay at home and mind their masters' shops.
+
+As to John Lirriper, he was sorely troubled in his mind, and divided
+between what he considered his duty to the vicar and his life long
+respect and reverence towards the lords of Hedingham. The feudal
+system was extinct, but feudal ideas still lingered among the people.
+Their lords could no longer summon them to take the field, had no
+longer power almost of life and death over them, but they were still
+their lords, and regarded with the highest respect and reverence.
+The earls of Oxford were, in the eyes of the people of those parts
+of Essex where their estates lay, personages of greater importance
+than the queen herself, of whose power and attributes they had but
+a very dim notion. It was not so very long since people had risen
+in rebellion against the queen, but such an idea as that of rising
+against their lords had never entered the mind of a single inhabitant
+of Hedingham.
+
+However, Master Lirriper came to the conclusion that he was,
+as Geoffrey had said, powerless to interfere. If Mr. Francis Vere
+decided to take the boys with him, what could he do to prevent it?
+He could hardly take them forcibly down to the boat against their
+will, and even could he do so their father might not approve, and
+doubtless the earl, when he came to hear of it, would be seriously
+angry at this act of defiance of his kinsman. Still, he was sure
+that he should have a very unpleasant time with Mistress Vickars.
+But, as he reassured himself, it was, after all, better to put up
+with a woman's scolding than to bear the displeasure of the Earl
+of Oxford, who could turn him out of his house, ruin his business,
+and drive him from Hedingham. After all, it was natural that these
+lads should like to embark on this adventure with Mr. Francis Vere,
+and it would doubtless be to their interest to be thus closely
+connected with him. At any rate, if it was to be it was, and he,
+John Lirriper, could do nothing to prevent it. Having arrived at
+this conclusion he decided to make the best of it, and began to
+chat cheerfully with the boys.
+
+Precisely at the appointed hour John Lirriper arrived with the two
+lads at the entrance to the house facing the abbey. Two or three
+servitors, whose doublets were embroidered with the cognizance of
+the Veres, were standing in front of the door.
+
+"Why, it is Master Lirriper!" one of them said. "Why, what has
+brought you here? I did not know that your trips often extended to
+London."
+
+"Nor do they," John Lirriper said. "It was the wind and my nephew's
+craft the Susan that brought me to London, and it is the will of
+Mr. Francis that these two young gentlemen should meet him here at
+one o'clock that has brought me to this door."
+
+"Captain Francis is in; for, you know, he is a captain now, having
+been lately appointed to a company in the Earl of Leicester's army.
+He returned an hour since, and has but now finished his meal. Do
+you wish to go up with these young masters, or shall I conduct them
+to him?"
+
+"You had best do that," John Lirriper answered. "I will remain here
+below if Captain Francis desires to see me or has any missive to
+intrust to me."
+
+The boys followed the servant upstairs, and were shown into a room
+where Francis Vere, his cousin the Earl of Oxford, and Captain
+Allen were seated at table.
+
+"Well, lads," the earl said, "so you want to follow my cousin
+Francis to the wars?"
+
+"That is our wish, my lord, if Captain Francis will be so good as
+to take us with him."
+
+"And what will my good tutor your father say to it?" the earl asked
+smiling.
+
+"I think, my lord," Geoffrey said boldly, "that if you yourself
+will tell my father you think it is for our good, he will say naught
+against it."
+
+"Oh, you want to throw the responsibility upon me, and to embroil
+me with your father and Mistress Vickars as an abettor of my cousin
+Francis in the kidnapping of children? Well, Francis, you had better
+explain to them what their duties will be if they go with you.
+
+"You will be my pages," Francis Vere said, "and will perform the
+usual duties of pages in good families when in the field. It is
+the duty of pages to aid in collecting firewood and forage, and in
+all other ways to make themselves useful. You will bear the same
+sort of relation to the gentlemen volunteers as they do towards
+the officers. They are aspirants for commissions as officers as
+you will be to become gentlemen volunteers. You must not think that
+your duties will be light, for they will not, and you will have to
+bear many discomforts and hardships. But you will be in an altogether
+different position from that of the boys who are the pages of the
+company. You will, apart from your duties, and bearing in mind
+the difference of your age, associate with the officers and the
+gentlemen volunteers on terms of equality when nor engaged upon duty.
+On duty you will have to render the same strict and unquestionable
+obedience that all soldiers pay to those of superior rank. What say
+you? Are you still anxious to go? Because, if so, I have decided
+to take you."
+
+Geoffrey and Lionel both expressed their thanks in proper terms,
+and their earnest desire to accompany Captain Vere, and to behave
+in all ways conformably to his orders and instructions.
+
+"Very well, that is settled," Francis Vere said. "The earl is
+journeying down to Hedingham tomorrow, and has kindly promised to
+take charge of a letter from me to your father, and personally to
+assure him that this early embarkation upon military life would
+prove greatly to your advantage."
+
+"Supposing that you are not killed by the Spaniards or carried
+off by fever," the earl put in; "for although possibly that might
+be an advantage to humanity in general, it could scarcely be
+considered one to you personally."
+
+"We are ready to take our risk of that, my lord," Geoffrey said;
+"and are indeed greatly beholden both to Captain Francis for his
+goodness in taking us with him, and to yourself in kindly undertaking
+the mission of reconciling our father to our departure."
+
+"You have not told me yet how it is that I find you in London?"
+Francis Vere said.
+
+"We only came up for a week, sir, to see the town. We are in charge of
+Master Lirriper, who owns a barge on the river, and plies between
+Hedingham and Bricklesey, but who was coming up to London in a
+craft belonging to his nephew, and who took charge of us. We are
+staying at the house of Master Swindon, a citizen and ship chandler."
+
+"Is Master Lirriper below?"
+
+"He is, sir."
+
+"Then in that case he had better go back to the house and bring
+your mails here. I shall sail from Deptford the day after tomorrow
+with the turn of tide. You had best remain here now. There will be
+many things necessary for you to get before you start. I will give
+instructions to one of my men-at-arms to go with you to purchase
+them."
+
+"I will take their outfit upon myself, Francis," the earl said.
+"My steward shall go out with them and see to it. It is the least
+I can do when I am abetting you in depriving my old tutor of his
+sons."
+
+He touched a bell and a servitor entered. "See that these young
+gentlemen are fed and attended to. They will remain here for the
+night. Tell Master Dotterell to come hither to me."
+
+The boys bowed deeply and retired.
+
+"It is all settled, Master Lirriper," they said when they reached
+the hall below. "We are to sail with Captain Francis the day after
+tomorrow, and you will be pleased to hear that the earl himself has
+taken charge of the matter, and will see our father and communicate
+the news to him."
+
+"That is a comfort indeed," John Lirriper said fervently; "for
+I would most as soon have had to tell him that the Susan had gone
+down and that you were both drowned, as that I had let you both slip
+away to the wars when he had given you into my charge. But if the
+earl takes the matter in hand I do not think that even your lady
+mother can bear very heavily on me. And now, what is going to be
+done?"
+
+"We are to remain here in order that suitable clothes may be
+obtained for us by the time we sail. Will you bring down tomorrow
+morning our wallets from Master Swindon's, and thank him and his
+good dame for their hospitality, and say that we are sorry to leave
+them thus suddenly without having an opportunity of thanking them
+ourselves? We will write letters tonight to our father and mother,
+and give them to you to take with you when you return."
+
+John Lirriper at once took his departure, greatly relieved in mind
+to find that the earl himself had taken the responsibility upon his
+shoulders, and would break the news long before he himself reached
+Hedingham. A few minutes later a servitor conducted the boys to an
+apartment where a meal was laid for them; and as soon as this was
+over they were joined by the steward, who requested them to set
+out with him at once, as there were many things to be done and but
+short time for doing them. No difficulty in the way of time was,
+however, thrown in the way by the various tradesmen they visited,
+these being all perfectly ready to put themselves to inconvenience
+to do pleasure to so valuable a patron as the powerful Earl of
+Oxford.
+
+Three suits of clothes were ordered for each of them: the one such
+as that worn by pages in noble families upon ordinary occasions,
+another of a much richer kind for special ceremonies and gaieties,
+the third a strong, serviceable suit for use when actually in the
+field. Then they were taken to an armourer's where each was provided
+with a light morion or head piece, breast plate and back piece,
+sword and dagger. A sufficient supply of under garments, boots, and
+other necessaries were also purchased; and when all was complete
+they returned highly delighted to the house. It was still scarce
+five o'clock, and they went across to the abbey and wandered for
+some time through its aisles, greatly impressed with its dignity
+and beauty now that their own affairs were off their mind.
+
+They returned to the house again, and after supper wrote their
+letters to their father and mother, saying that they hoped they
+would not be displeased at the step they had taken, and which they
+would not have ventured upon had they not already obtained their
+father's consent to their entering the army. They knew, of course,
+that he had not contemplated their doing so for some little time;
+but as so excellent an opportunity had offered, and above all, as
+they were going out to fight against the Spaniards for the oppressed
+people of the Low Countries, they hoped their parents would approve
+of the steps they had taken, not having had time or opportunity to
+consult them.
+
+At noon two days later Francis Vere with Captain Allen and the two
+boys took their seats in the stern of a skiff manned by six rowers.
+In the bow were the servitors of the two officers, and the luggage
+was stowed in the extreme stern.
+
+"The tide is getting slack, is it not?" Captain Vere asked the
+boatmen.
+
+"Yes, sir; it will not run up much longer. It will be pretty well
+slack water by the time we get to the bridge."
+
+Keeping close to the bank the boat proceeded at a rapid pace. Several
+times the two young officers stood up and exchanged salutations
+with ladies or gentlemen of their acquaintance. As the boatman
+had anticipated, tide was slack by the time they arrived at London
+Bridge, and they now steered out into the middle of the river.
+
+"Give way, lads," Captain Allen said. "We told the captain we would
+not keep him waiting long after high water, and he will be getting
+impatient if he does not see us before long."
+
+As they shot past the Susan the boys waved their hands to Master
+Lirriper, who, after coming down in the morning and receiving
+their letters for their parents, had returned at once to the city
+and had taken his place on board the Susan, so as to be able to
+tell their father that he had seen the last of them. The distance
+between London Bridge and Deptford was traversed in a very short
+time. A vessel with her flags flying and her canvas already loosened
+was hanging to a buoy some distance out in the stream, and as the
+boat came near enough for the captain to distinguish those on board,
+the mooring rope was slipped, the head sails flattened in, and the
+vessel began to swing round. Before her head was down stream the
+boat was alongside. The two officers followed by the boys ascended
+the ladder by the side. The luggage was quickly handed up, and the
+servitors followed. The sails were sheeted home, and the vessel
+began to move rapidly through the water.
+
+The boys had thought the Susan an imposing craft, but they were
+surprised, indeed, at the space on board the Dover Castle. In the
+stern there was a lofty poop with spacious cabins. Six guns were
+ranged along on each side of the deck, and when the sails were
+got up they seemed so vast to the boys that they felt a sense of
+littleness on board the great craft. They had been relieved to find
+that Captain Vere had his own servitor with him; for in talking it
+over they had mutually expressed their doubt as to their ability
+to render such service as Captain Vere would be accustomed to.
+
+The wind was from the southwest, and the vessel was off Sheerness
+before the tide turned. There was, however, no occasion to anchor,
+for the wind was strong enough to take them against the flood.
+
+During the voyage they had no duties to perform. The ship's cook
+prepared the meals, and the officers' servants waited on them, the
+lads taking their meals with the two officers. Their destination
+was Bergen op Zoom, a town at the mouth of the Scheldt, of the
+garrison of which the companies of both Francis Vere and Captain
+Allen formed a part.
+
+As soon as the low coasts of Holland came in sight the boys watched
+them with the most lively interest.
+
+"We are passing Sluys now," Captain Vere said. "The land almost
+ahead of us is Walcheren; and that spire belongs to Flushing. We
+could go outside and up the channel between the island and Beveland,
+and then up the Eastern Scheldt to Bergen op Zoom; but instead of
+that we shall follow the western channel, which is more direct."
+
+"It is as flat as our Essex coast," Geoffrey remarked.
+
+"Aye, and flatter; for the greater part of the land lies below the
+level of the sea, which is only kept out by great dams and dykes.
+At times when the rivers are high and the wind keeps back their
+waters they burst the dams and spread over a vast extent of country.
+The Zuider Zee was so formed in 1170 and 1395, and covers a tract
+as large as the whole county of Essex. Twenty-six years later the
+river Maas broke its banks and flooded a wide district. Seventy-two
+villages were destroyed and 100,000 people lost their life. The
+lands have never been recovered; and where a fertile country once
+stood is now a mere swamp."
+
+"I shouldn't like living there," Lionel said. "It would be terrible,
+every time the rivers are full and the wind blows, to think that
+at any moment the banks may burst and the flood come rushing over
+you."
+
+"It is all habit," Captain Vere replied; "I don't suppose they
+trouble themselves about it. But they are very particular in keeping
+their dykes in good repair. The water is one of the great defences
+of their country. In the first place there are innumerable streams
+to be crossed by an invader, and in the second, they can as a last
+resource cut the dykes and flood the country. These Dutchmen, as
+far as I have seen of them, are hard working and industrious people,
+steady and patient, and resolved to defend their independence to
+the last. This they have indeed proved by the wonderful resistance
+they have made against the power of Spain. There, you see the ship's
+head has been turned and we shall before long be in the channel.
+Sluys lies up that channel on the right. It is an important place.
+Large vessels can go no further, but are unloaded there and the
+cargoes taken to Bruges and thence distributed to many other towns.
+They say that in 1468 as many as a hundred and fifty ships a day
+arrived at Sluys. That gives you an idea of the trade that the
+Netherlands carry on. The commerce of this one town was as great
+as is that of London at the present time. But since the troubles
+the trade of Sluys has fallen off a good deal."
+
+The ship had to anchor here for two or three hours until the tide
+turned, for the wind had fallen very light and they could not make
+head against the ebb. As soon as it turned they again proceeded on
+their way, dropping quietly up with the tide. The boys climbed up
+into the tops, and thence could see a wide extent of country dotted
+with villages stretching beyond the banks, which restricted their
+view from the decks. In five hours Bergen op Zoom came in sight,
+and they presently dropped anchor opposite the town. The boat was
+lowered, and the two officers with the lads were rowed ashore. They
+were met as they landed by several young officers.
+
+"Welcome back, Vere; welcome, Allen. You have been lucky indeed
+in having a few days in England, and getting a view of something
+besides this dreary flat country and its sluggish rivers. What is
+the last news from London?"
+
+"There is little news enough," Vere replied. "We were only four
+days in London, and were busy all the time. And how are things
+here? Now that summer is at hand and the country drying the Dons
+ought to be bestirring themselves."
+
+"They say that they are doing so," the officer replied. "We have
+news that the Duke of Parma is assembling his army at Bruges, where
+he is collecting the pick of the Spanish infantry with a number of
+Italian regiments which have joined him. He sent off the Marquess
+Del Vasto with the Sieur De Hautepenne towards Bois le Duc. General
+Count Hohenlohe, who, as you know, we English always call Count
+Holland, went off with a large force to meet him, and we heard
+only this morning that a battle has been fought, Hautepenne killed,
+and the fort of Crevecoeur on the Maas captured. From what I hear,
+some of our leaders think that it was a mistake so to scatter our
+forces, and if Parma moves forward from Bruges against Sluys, which
+is likely enough, we shall be sorely put to it to save the place."
+
+As they were talking they proceeded into the town, and presently
+reached the house where Francis Vere had his quarters. The officers
+and gentlemen volunteers of his company soon assembled, and Captain
+Vere introduced the two boys to them.
+
+"They are young gentlemen of good family," he said, "who will act
+as my pages until they are old enough to be enrolled as gentlemen
+volunteers. I commend them to your good offices. Their father is
+a learned and reverend gentleman who was my tutor, and also tutor
+to my cousin, the Earl of Oxford, by whom he is greatly valued.
+They are lads of spirit, and have been instructed in the use of
+arms at Hedingham as if they had been members of our family. I am
+sure, gentlemen volunteers, that you will receive them as friends.
+I propose that they shall take their meals with you, but of course
+they will lodge here with me and my officers; but as you are in the
+next house this will cause no inconvenience. I trust that we shall
+not remain here long, but shall soon be on the move. We have now
+been here seven months, and it is high time we were doing something.
+We didn't bargain to come over here and settle down for life in a
+dull Dutch town."
+
+In a few hours the boys found themselves quite at home in their
+new quarters. The gentlemen volunteers received them cordially,
+and they found that for the present their duties would be extremely
+light, consisting chiefly in carrying messages and orders; for as
+the officers had all servants of their own, Captain Vere dispensed
+with their attendance at meals. There was much to amuse and interest
+them in Bergen op Zoom. It reminded them to some extent of Harwich,
+with its narrow streets and quaint houses; but the fortifications were
+far stronger, and the number of churches struck them as prodigious.
+The population differed in no very large degree in dress from that
+of England, but the people struck them as being slower and more
+deliberate in their motion. The women's costumes differed much more
+widely from those to which they were accustomed, and their strange
+and varied headdresses, their bright coloured handkerchiefs, and
+the amount of gold necklaces and bracelets that they wore, struck
+them with surprise.
+
+Their stay in Bergen op Zoom was even shorter than they had
+anticipated, for three days after their arrival a boat came with a
+letter from Sir William Russell, the governor at Flushing. He said
+that he had just received an urgent letter from the Dutch governor
+of Sluys, saying that Patina's army was advancing from Bruges towards
+the city, and had seized and garrisoned the fort of Blankenburg on
+the sea coast to prevent reinforcements arriving from Ostend; he
+therefore prayed the governor of Flushing to send off troops and
+provisions with all haste to enable him to resist the attack. Sir
+William requested that the governor of Bergen op Zoom would at once
+embark the greater portion of his force on board ship and send them
+to Sluys. He himself was having a vessel filled with grain for the
+use of the inhabitants, and was also sending every man he could
+spare from Flushing.
+
+In a few minutes all was bustle in the town. The trumpets of the
+various companies called the soldiers to arms, and in a very short
+time the troops were on their way towards the river. Here several
+ships had been requisitioned for the service; and as the companies
+marched down they were conducted to the ships to which they were
+allotted by the quartermasters.
+
+Geoffrey and Lionel felt no small pride as they marched down with
+their troop. They had for the first time donned their steel caps,
+breast and back pieces; but this was rather for convenience of
+carriage than for any present utility. They had at Captain Vere's
+orders left their ordinary clothes behind them, and were now attired
+in thick serviceable jerkins, with skirts coming down nearly to
+the knee, like those worn by the troops. They marched at the rear
+of the company, the other pages, similarly attired, following them.
+
+As soon as the troops were on board ship, sail was made, and the
+vessels dropped down the stream. The wind was very light, and it
+was not until thirty hours after starting that the little fleet
+arrived off Sluys. The town, which was nearly egg shaped, lay close
+to the river, which was called the Zwin. At the eastern end, in the
+centre of a detached piece of water, stood the castle, connected
+with the town by a bridge of boats. The Zwin formed the defence
+on the north side while the south and west were covered by a very
+wide moat, along the centre of which ran a dyke, dividing it into
+two channels. On the west side this moat extended to the Zwin, and
+was crossed at the point of junction by the bridge leading to the
+west gate.
+
+The walls inclosed a considerable space, containing fields and
+gardens. Seven windmills stood on the ramparts. The tower of the
+town hall, and those of the churches of Our Lady, St. John, and
+the Grey Friars rose high above the town.
+
+The ships from Flushing and Bergen op Zoom sailed up together, and
+the 800 men who landed were received with immense enthusiasm by
+the inhabitants, who were Protestants, and devoted to the cause
+of independence. The English were under the command of Sir Roger
+Williams, who had already seen so many years of service in the
+Low Countries; and under him were Morgan, Thomas Baskerville, and
+Huntley, who had long served with him.
+
+Roger Williams was an admirable man for service of this kind. He
+had distinguished himself by many deeds of reckless bravery. He
+possessed an inexhaustible fund of confidence and high spirits,
+and in his company it was impossible to feel despondent, however
+desperate the situation.
+
+The citizens placed their houses at the disposal of their new allies,
+handsome quarters were allotted to the officers, and the soldiers
+were all housed in private dwellings or the warehouses of the
+merchants. The inhabitants had already for some days been working
+hard at their defences, and the English at once joined them in their
+labours, strengthening the weak portions of the walls, mounting
+cannon upon the towers, and preparing in all ways to give a warm
+reception to the Spaniards.
+
+Captain Vere, his lieutenant and ensign and his two pages, were
+quartered in the house of a wealthy merchant, whose family did all
+in their power to make them comfortable. It was a grand old house,
+and the boys, accustomed as they were to the splendours of Hedingham
+Castle, agreed that the simple merchants of the Low Countries were
+far in advance of English nobles in the comforts and conveniences
+of their dwellings. The walls of the rooms were all heavily panelled;
+rich curtains hung before the casements. The furniture was not only
+richly carved, but comfortable. Heavy hangings before the doors
+excluded draughts, and in the principal apartments Eastern carpets
+covered the floors. The meals were served on spotless white linen.
+Rich plates stood on the sideboard, and gold and silver vessels of
+rare carved work from Italy glittered in the armoires.
+
+Above all, from top to bottom, the house was scrupulously clean.
+Nor a particle of dust dimmed the brightness of the furniture, and
+even now, when the city was threatened with siege, the merchant's
+wife never relaxed her vigilance over the doings of her maids, who
+seemed to the boys to be perpetually engaged in scrubbing, dusting,
+and polishing.
+
+"Our mother prides herself on the neatness of her house," Geoffrey
+said; "but what would she say, I wonder, were she to see one of
+these Dutch households? I fear that the maids would have a hard
+time of it afterwards, and our father would be fairly driven out
+of his library."
+
+"It is all very well to be clean," Lionel said; "but I think they
+carry it too far here. Peace and quietness count for something, and
+it doesn't seem to me that Dutchmen, fond of it as they say they
+are, know even the meaning of the words as far as their homes are
+concerned. Why, it always seems to be cleaning day, and they must
+be afraid of going into their own houses with their boots on!"
+
+"Yes, I felt quite like a criminal today," Geoffrey laughed, "when
+I came in muddy up to the waist, after working down there by the
+sluices. I believe when the Spaniards open fire these people will
+be more distracted by the dust caused by falling tiles and chimneys
+than by any danger of their lives."
+
+Great difficulties beset the Duke of Parma at the commencement of
+the siege. Sluys was built upon the only piece of solid ground in
+the district, and it was surrounded by such a labyrinth of canals,
+ditches, and swamps, that it was said that it was almost as
+difficult to find Sluys as it was to capture it. Consequently, it
+was impossible to find ground solid enough for a camp to be pitched
+upon, and the first labour was the erection of wooden huts for the
+troops upon piles driven into the ground. These huts were protected
+from the fire of the defenders by bags of earth brought in boats
+from a long distance. The main point selected for the attack was
+the western gate; but batteries were also placed to play upon the
+castle and the bridge of boats connecting it with the town.
+
+"There is one advantage in their determining to attack us at the
+western extremity of the town," John Menyn, the merchant at whose
+house Captain Vere and his party were lodging, remarked when his
+guest informed him there was no longer any doubt as to the point
+at which the Spaniards intended to attack, "for they will not be
+able to blow up our walls with mines in that quarter."
+
+"How is that?" Francis Vere asked.
+
+"If you can spare half an hour of your time I will show you," the
+merchant said.
+
+"I can spare it now, Von Menyn," Vere replied; "for the information
+is important, whatever it may be."
+
+"I will conduct you there at once. There is no time like the
+present."
+
+"Shall we follow you, sir?" Geoffrey asked his captain.
+
+"Yes, come along," Vere replied. "The matter is of interest, and
+for the life of me I cannot make out what this obstacle can be of
+which our host speaks."
+
+They at once set out.
+
+John Menyn led them to a warehouse close to the western wall, and
+spoke a few words to its owner, who at once took three lanterns
+from the wall and lighted them, handing one to Vere, another to
+John Menyn, and taking the other himself; he then unlocked a massive
+door. A flight of steps leading apparently to a cellar were visible.
+He led the way down, the two men following, and the boys bringing
+up the rear. The descent was far deeper than they had expected,
+and when they reached the bottom they found themselves in a vast
+arched cellar filled with barrels. From this they proceeded into
+another, and again into a third.
+
+"What are these great magazines?" Francis Vere asked in surprise.
+
+"They are wine cellars, and there are scores similar to those you
+see. Sluys is the centre of the wine trade of Flanders and Holland, and
+cellars like these extend right under the wall. All the warehouses
+along here have similar cellars. This end of the town was the driest,
+and the soil most easily excavated. That is why the magazines for
+wines are all clustered here. There is not a foot of ground behind
+and under the walls at this end that is not similarly occupied,
+and if the Spaniards try to drive mines to blow up the walls, they
+will simply break their way into these cellars, where we can meet
+them and drive them back again."
+
+"Excellent!" Francis Vere said. "This will relieve us of the work
+of countermining, which is always tiresome and dangerous, and would
+be specially so here, where we should have to dive under that deep
+moat outside your walls. Now we shall only have to keep a few men
+on watch in these cellars. They would hear the sound of the Spanish
+approaching, and we shall be ready to give them a warm reception
+by the time they break in. Are there communications between these
+cellars?"
+
+"Yes, for the most part," the wine merchant said. "The cellars are
+not entirely the property of us dealers in wine. They are constructed
+by men who let them, just as they would let houses. A merchant
+in a small way would need but one cellar, while some of us occupy
+twenty or more; therefore, there are for the most part communications,
+with doors, between the various cellars, so that they can be let
+off in accordance with the needs of the hirers."
+
+"Well, I am much obliged to you for telling me of this," Captain
+Vere said. "Williams and Morgan will be glad enough to hear that
+there is no fear of their being blown suddenly into the air while
+defending the walls, and they will see the importance of keeping
+a few trusty men on watch in the cellars nearest to the Spaniards.
+I shall report the matter to them at once. The difficulty," he
+added smiling, "will be to keep the men wakeful, for it seems to
+me that the very air is heavy with the fumes of wine."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV
+
+THE SIEGE OF SLUYS
+
+
+Until the Spaniards had established their camp, and planted some
+of their batteries, there was but little firing. Occasionally the
+wall pieces opened upon parties of officers reconnoitring, and a few
+shots were fired from time to time to harass the workmen in the
+enemy's batteries; but this was done rather to animate the townsmen,
+and as a signal to distant friends that so far matters were going
+on quietly, than with any hopes of arresting the progress of the
+enemy's works. Many sorties were made by the garrison, and fierce
+fighting took place, but only a score or two of men from each company
+were taken upon these occasions, and the boys were compelled to
+remain inactive spectators of the fight.
+
+In these sorties the Spanish works were frequently held for a few
+minutes, gabions thrown down, and guns overturned, but after doing
+as much damage as they could the assailants had to fall back again
+to the town, being unable to resist the masses of pikemen brought
+up against them. The boldness of these sorties, and the bravery
+displayed by their English allies, greatly raised the spirits of
+the townsfolk, who now organized themselves into companies, and
+undertook the work of guarding the less exposed portion of the
+wall, thus enabling the garrison to keep their whole strength at
+the points attacked. The townsmen also laboured steadily in adding
+to the defenses; and two companies of women were formed, under female
+captains, who took the names of May in the Heart and Catherine the
+Rose. These did good service by building a strong fort at one of
+the threatened points, and this work was in their honour christened
+Fort Venus.
+
+"It is scarcely a compliment to Venus," Geoffrey laughed to his
+brother. "These square shouldered and heavily built women do not
+at all correspond with my idea of the goddess of love."
+
+"They are strong enough for men," Lionel said. "I shouldn't like
+one of those big fat arms to come down upon my head. No, they are
+not pretty; but they look jolly and good tempered, and if they were
+to fight as hard as they work they ought to do good service."
+
+"There is a good deal of difference between them," Geoffrey said.
+"Look at those three dark haired women with neat trim figures. They
+do not look as if they belonged to the same race as the others."
+
+"They are not of the same race, lad," Captain Vere, who was standing
+close by, said. "The big heavy women are Flemish, the others come, no
+doubt, from the Walloon provinces bordering on France. The Walloons
+broke off from the rest of the states and joined the Spanish
+almost from the first. They were for the most part Catholics, and
+had little in common with the people of the Low Country; but there
+were, of course, many Protestants among them, and these were forced
+to emigrate, for the Spanish allow no Protestants in the country
+under their rule. Alva adopted the short and easy plan of murdering
+all the Protestants in the towns he took; but the war is now
+conducted on rather more humane principles, and the Protestants
+have the option given them of changing their faith or leaving the
+country.
+
+"In this way, without intending it, the Spaniards have done good
+service to Holland, for hundreds of thousands of industrious people
+have flocked there for shelter from Antwerp, Ghent, Bruges, and
+other cities that have fallen into the hands of the Spaniards,
+thus greatly raising the population of Holland, and adding to its
+power of defence. Besides this, the presence of these exiles, and
+the knowledge that a similar fate awaits themselves if they fall
+again under the yoke of Spain, nerves the people to resist to
+the utmost. Had it not been for the bigotry of the Spanish, and
+the abominable cruelties practised by the Inquisition, the States
+would never have rebelled; and even after they did so, terms might
+easily have been made with them had they not been maddened by the
+wholesale massacres perpetrated by Alva. There, do you hear those
+women speaking? Their language is French rather than Flemish."
+
+Just as they were speaking a heavy roar of cannon broke out from
+the eastern end of the town.
+
+"They have opened fire on the castle!" Vere exclaimed. "Run, lads,
+quick! and summon the company to form in the marketplace in front
+of our house. We are told off to reinforce the garrison of the
+castle in case of attack."
+
+The boys hurried away at the top of their speed. They had the list
+of all the houses in which the men of the company were quartered;
+and as the heavy roar of cannon had brought every one to their
+doors to hear what was going on, the company were in a very short
+time assembled.
+
+Francis Vere placed himself at their head, and marched them through
+the long streets of the town and out through the wall on to the
+bridge of boats. It was the first time the boys had been under
+fire; and although they kept a good countenance, they acknowledged
+to each other afterwards that they had felt extremely uncomfortable
+as they traversed the bridge with the balls whistling over their
+heads, and sometimes striking the water close by and sending a
+shower of spray over the troops.
+
+They felt easier when they entered the castle and were protected by
+its walls. Upon these the men took their station. Those with guns
+discharged their pieces against the Spanish artillerymen, the pikemen
+assisted the bombardiers to work the cannon, and the officers went
+to and fro encouraging the men. The pages of the company had little
+to do beyond from time to time carrying cans of wine and water to
+the men engaged. Geoffrey and Lionel, finding that their services
+were not required by Captain Vere, mounted on to the wall, and
+sheltering themselves as well as they could behind the battlements,
+looked out at what was going on.
+
+"It doesn't seem to me," Geoffrey said, "that these walls will long
+withstand the balls of the Spanish. The battlements are already
+knocked down in several places, and I can hear after each shot
+strikes the walls the splashing of the brickwork as it falls into
+the water. See! there is Tom Carroll struck down with a ball. It's
+our duty to carry him away."
+
+They ran along the wall to the fallen soldier. Two other pages came
+up, and the four carried him to the top of the steps and then down
+into the courtyard, where a Dutch surgeon took charge of him. His
+shoulder had been struck by the ball, and the arm hung only by a
+shred of flesh. The surgeon shook his head.
+
+"I can do nothing for him," he said. "He cannot live many hours."
+
+Lionel had done his share in carrying the man down but he now turned
+sick and faint.
+
+Geoffrey caught him by the arm. "Steady, old boy," he said; "it
+is trying at first, but we shall soon get accustomed to it. Here,
+take a draught of wine from this flask."
+
+"I am better now," Lionel said, after taking a draught of wine.
+"I felt as if I was going to faint, Geoffrey. I don't know why I
+should, for I did not feel frightened when we were on the wall."
+
+"Oh, it has nothing to do with fear; it is just the sight of that
+poor fellow's blood. There is nothing to be ashamed of in that. Why,
+I saw Will Atkins, who was one of the best fighters and singlestick
+players in Hedingham, go off in a dead swoon because a man he was
+working with crushed his thumb between two heavy stones. Look,
+Lionel, what cracks there are in the wall here. I don't think it
+will stand long. We had better run up and tell Captain Vere, for
+it may come toppling down with some of the men on it."
+
+Captain Vere on hearing the news ran down and examined the wall.
+
+"Yes," he said, "it is evidently going. A good earthwork is worth
+a dozen of these walls. They will soon have the castle about our
+ears. However, it is of no great importance to us. I saw you lads
+just now on the wall; I did not care about ordering you down at
+the time; but don't go up again except to help to carry down the
+wounded. Make it a rule, my boys, never to shirk your duty, however
+great the risk to life may be; but, on the other hand, never risk
+your lives unless it is your duty to do so. What is gallantry in the
+one case is foolishness in the other. Although you are but pages,
+yet it may well be that in such a siege as this you will have many
+opportunities of showing that you are of good English stock; but
+while I would have you shrink from no danger when there is a need
+for you to expose yourselves, I say also that you should in no way
+run into danger wantonly."
+
+Several times in the course of the afternoon the boys took their
+turn in going up and helping to bring down wounded men. As the time
+went on several yawning gaps appeared in the walls. The courtyard
+was strewn with fragments of masonry, and the pages were ordered
+to keep under shelter of the wall of the castle unless summoned on
+duty. Indeed, the courtyard had now become a more dangerous station
+than the wall itself; for not only did the cannon shot fly through
+the breaches, but fragments of bricks, mortar, and rubbish flew
+along with a force that would have been fatal to anything struck.
+
+Some of the pages were big fellows of seventeen or eighteen years
+old, who had been serving for some years under Morgan and Williams,
+and would soon be transferred into the ranks.
+
+"I like not this sort of fighting," one of them said. "It is all
+very well when it comes to push of pike with the Spaniards, but to
+remain here like chickens in a coop while they batter away at us
+is a game for which I have no fancy. What say you, Master Vickars?"
+
+"Well, it is my first experience, Somers, and I cannot say that
+it is agreeable. I do not know whether I should like hand to hand
+fighting better; but it seems to me at present that it would be
+certainly more agreeable to be doing something than to be sitting
+here and listening to the falls of the pieces of masonry and the
+whistling of the balls. I don't see that they will be any nearer
+when they have knocked this place to pieces. They have no boats,
+and if they had, the guns on the city wall would prevent their using
+them; besides, when the bridge of boats is removed they could do
+nothing if they got here."
+
+Towards evening a council was held, all the principal officers
+being present, and it was decided to evacuate the castle. It could
+indeed have been held for some days longer, but it was plain it
+would at length become untenable; the bridge of boats had already
+been struck in several places, and some of the barges composing it
+had sunk level with the water. Were it destroyed, the garrison of
+the castle would be completely cut off; and as no great advantage
+was to be gained by holding the position, for it was evident that
+it was upon the other end of the town the main attack was to be
+made, it was decided to evacuate it under cover of night. As soon
+as it became dark this decision was carried into effect, and for
+hours the troops worked steadily, transporting the guns, ammunition,
+and stores of all kinds across from the castle to the town.
+
+Already communication with their friends outside had almost ceased,
+for the first operation of the enemy had been to block the approach
+to Sluys from the sea. Floats had been moored head and stern right
+across Zwin, and a battery erected upon each shore to protect them;
+but Captains Hart and Allen twice swam down to communicate with
+friendly vessels below the obstacle, carrying despatches with them
+from the governor to the States General, and from Roger Williams
+to the English commanders, urging that no time should be lost in
+assembling an army to march to the relief of the town.
+
+Both contained assurances that the garrison would defend the place
+to the last extremity, but pointed out that it was only a question
+of time, and that the town must fall unless relieved. The Dutch
+garrison were 800 strong, and had been joined by as many English.
+Parma had at first marched with but 6000 men against the city, but
+had very speedily drawn much larger bodies of men towards him, and
+had, as Roger Williams states in a letter to the queen sent from
+Sluys at an early period of the siege, four regiments of Walloons,
+four of Germans, one of Italians, one of Burgundians, fifty-two
+companies of Spaniards, twenty-four troops of horse, and forty-eight
+guns. This would give a total of at least 17,000 men, and further
+reinforcements afterwards arrived.
+
+Against so overwhelming a force as this, it could not be hoped
+that the garrison, outnumbered by more than ten to one, could
+long maintain themselves, and the Duke of Parma looked for an easy
+conquest of the place. By both parties the possession of Sluys was
+regarded as a matter of importance out of all proportion to the
+size and population of the town; for at that time it was known in
+England that the King of Spain was preparing a vast fleet for the
+invasion of Britain, and Sluys was the nearest point to our shores
+at which a fleet could gather and the forces of Parma embark to
+join those coming direct from Spain. The English, therefore, were
+determined to maintain the place to the last extremity; and while
+Parma had considered its capture as an affair of a few days only,
+the little garrison were determined that for weeks at any rate they
+would be able to prolong the resistance, feeling sure that before
+that time could elapse both the States and England, knowing the
+importance of the struggle, would send forces to their relief.
+
+The view taken as to the uselessness of defending the castle was
+fully justified, as the Spaniards on the following day removed the
+guns that they had employed in battering it, to their works facing
+the western gate, and fire was opened next morning. Under cover
+of this the Spanish engineers pushed their trenches up to the very
+edge of the moat, in spite of several desperate sorties by the
+garrison. The boys had been forbidden by Captain Vere to take their
+place with the company on the walls.
+
+"In time," he said, "as our force decreases, we shall want every
+one capable of handling arms to man the breaches, but at present
+we are not in any extremity; and none save those whom duty compels
+to be there must come under the fire of the Spaniards, for to do
+so would be risking life without gain."
+
+They had, however, made friends with the wine merchant whose cellars
+they had visited, and obtained permission from him to visit the
+upper storey of his warehouse whenever they chose. From a window
+here they were enabled to watch all that was taking place, for the
+warehouse was much higher than the walls. It was not in the direct
+line of fire of the Spanish batteries, for these were chiefly
+concentrated against the wall a little to their right. After heavy
+fighting the Spaniards one night, by means of boats from the Zwin,
+landed upon the dyke which divided the moat into two channels, and
+thus established themselves so close under the ramparts that the
+guns could not be brought to bear upon them. They proceeded to
+intrench themselves at once upon the dyke.
+
+The governor, Arnold Groenvelt, consulted with the English leaders,
+and decided that the enemy must be driven off this dyke immediately,
+or that the safety of the city would be gravely imperilled. They
+therefore assembled a force of four hundred men, sallied out of the
+south gate, where two bastions were erected on the dyke itself, and
+then advanced along it to the assault of the Spaniards. The battle
+was a desperate one, the English and Dutch were aided by their
+comrades on the wall, who shot with guns and arquebuses against
+the Spaniards, while the later were similarly assisted by their
+friends along the outer edge of the moat, and received constant
+reinforcements by boats from their ships.
+
+The odds were too great for the assailants, who were forced at last
+to fall back along the dyke to the south gate and to re-enter the
+town. It was already five weeks since the English had arrived to
+take part in the defence, and the struggle now began upon a great
+scale -- thirty cannon and eight culverins opening fire upon the
+walls. The heaviest fire was on St. James' day, the 25th of July,
+when 4000 shots were fired between three in the morning and five
+in the afternoon. While this tremendous cannonade was going on,
+the boys could not but admire the calmness shown by the population.
+Many of the shots, flying over the top of the walls, struck the
+houses in the city, and the chimneys, tiles, and masses of masonry
+fell in the streets. Nevertheless the people continued their usual
+avocations. The shops were all open, though the men employed served
+their customers with breast and back pieces buckled on, and their
+arms close at hand, so that they could run to the walls at once
+to take part in their defence did the Spaniards attempt an assault
+upon them. The women stood knitting at their doors, Frau Menyn looked
+as sharply after her maids as ever, and washing and scouring went
+on without interruption.
+
+"I believe that woman will keep those girls at work after the
+Spaniards have entered the city, and until they are thundering
+at the door," Lionel said. "Who but a Dutch woman would give a
+thought to a few particles of dust on her furniture when an enemy
+was cannonading the town?"
+
+"I think she acts wisely after all, Lionel. The fact that everything
+goes on as usual here and in other houses takes people's thoughts
+off the dangers of the position, and prevents anything like panic
+being felt."
+
+The lads spent the greater part of the day at their lookout, and
+could see that the wall against which the Spanish fire was directed
+was fast crumbling. Looking down upon it, it seemed deserted of
+troops, for it would be needlessly exposing the soldiers to death
+to place them there while the cannonade continued; but behind the
+wall, and in the street leading to it, companies of English and
+Dutch soldiers could be seen seated or lying on the ground.
+
+They were leaning our of the dormer window in the high roof watching
+the Spanish soldiers in the batteries working their guns, when,
+happening to look round, they saw a crossbow protruded from a window
+of the warehouse to their right, and a moment afterwards the sharp
+twang of the bow was heard. There was nothing unusual in this; for
+although firearms were now generally in use the longbow and the
+crossbow had not been entirely abandoned, and there were still
+archers in the English army, and many still held that the bow was
+a far better weapon than the arquebus, sending its shafts well nigh
+as far and with a truer aim.
+
+"If that fellow is noticed," Geoffrey said, "we shall have
+the Spanish musketeers sending their balls in this direction. The
+governor has, I heard Captain Vere say, forbidden shooting from the
+warehouses, because he does not wish to attract the Spanish fire
+against them. Of course when the wall yields and the breach has to
+be defended the warehouses will be held, and as the windows will
+command the breach they will be great aids to us then, and it would
+be a great disadvantage to us if the Spaniards now were to throw
+shells and fireballs into these houses, and so to destroy them
+before they make their attack. Nor can much good be gained, for at
+this distance a crossbow would scarce carry its bolts beyond the
+moat."
+
+"Most likely the man is using the crossbow on purpose to avoid
+attracting the attention of the Spaniards, Geoffrey. At this distance
+they could not see the crossbow, while a puff of smoke would be
+sure to catch their eye."
+
+"There, he has shot again. I did not see the quarrel fall in the
+moat. See, one of the Spanish soldiers from that battery is coming
+forward. There, he has stooped and picked something up. Hallo! do
+you see that? He has just raised his arm; that is a signal, surely."
+
+"It certainly looked like it," Lionel agreed. "It was a sort of
+half wave of the hand. That is very strange!"
+
+"Very, Lionel; it looks to me very suspicious. It is quite possible
+that a piece of paper may have been tied round the bolt, and that
+someone is sending information to the enemy. This ought to be looked
+to."
+
+"But what are we to do, Geoffrey? Merely seeing a Spanish soldier
+wave his arm is scarcely reason enough for bringing an accusation
+against anyone. We are not even sure that he picked up the bolt;
+and even if he did, the action might have been a sort of mocking
+wave of the hand at the failure of the shooter to send it as far
+as the battery."
+
+"It might be, of course, Lionel. No, we have certainly nothing to
+go upon that would justify our making a report on the subject, but
+quite enough to induce us to keep a watch on this fellow, whoever
+he may be. Let us see, to begin with, if he shoots again.
+
+They waited for an hour, but the head of the crossbow was not again
+thrust out of the window.
+
+"He may have ceased shooting for either of two reasons," Geoffrey
+said. "If he is a true man, because he sees that his bolts do nor
+carry far enough to be of any use. If he is a traitor, because he
+has gained his object, and knows that his communication has reached
+his friends outside. We will go down now and inquire who is the
+occupier of the next warehouse."
+
+The merchant himself was not below, for as he did business with
+other towns he had had nothing to do since Sluys was cut off from
+the surrounded country; but one of his clerks was at work, making
+out bills and accounts in his office as if the thunder of the guns
+outside was unheard by him. The boys had often spoken to him as
+they passed in and out.
+
+"Who occupies the warehouse on the right?" Geoffrey asked him
+carelessly.
+
+"William Arnig," he replied. "He is a leading citizen, and one
+of the greatest merchants in our trade. His cellars are the most
+extensive we have, and he does a great trade in times of peace with
+Bruges, Ghent, Antwerp, and other towns."
+
+"I suppose he is a Protestant like most of the townspeople?" Geoffrey
+remarked.
+
+"No, he is a Catholic; but he is not one who pushes his opinions
+strongly, and, he is well disposed to the cause, and a captain in
+one of the city bands. The Catholics and Protestants always dwell
+quietly together throughout the Low Countries, and would have
+no animosities against each other were it nor for the Spaniards.
+Formerly, at least, this was the case; but since the persecutions
+we have Protestant towns and Catholic towns, the one holding to
+the States cause, the other siding with the Spaniards. Why do you
+ask?"
+
+"Oh, I hadn't heard the name of your next neighbour, and, was
+wondering who he might be."
+
+The boys had now been nearly two months in Holland, and were beginning
+to understand the language, which is not difficult to acquire, and
+differed then even less than now from the dialect spoken in the
+eastern counties of England, between whom and Holland there had
+been for many generations much trade and intimate relations.
+
+"What had we better do next, Geoffrey?" Lionel asked as they left
+the warehouse.
+
+"I think that in the first place, Lionel, we will take our post at
+the window tomorrow, and keep a close watch all day to see whether
+this shooting is repeated. If it is, we had better report the matter
+to Captain Vere, and leave him to decide what should be done. I do
+not see that we could undertake anything alone, and in any case,
+you see, it would be a serious matter to lay an accusation against
+a prominent citizen who is actually a captain of one of the bands."
+
+Upon the following day they took their post again at the window,
+and after some hours watching saw three bolts fired from the next
+window. Watching intently, they saw the two first fall into the
+moat. They could not see where the other fell; but as there was no
+splash in the water, they concluded that it had fallen beyond it,
+and in a minute they saw a soldier again advance from the battery,
+pick up something at the edge of the water, raise his arm, and
+retire. That evening when Captain Vere returned from the ramparts
+they informed him of what they had observed.
+
+"Doubtless it is an act of treachery," he said, "and this merchant
+is communicating with the enemy. At the same time what you have
+seen, although convincing evidence to me, is scarce enough for me
+to denounce him. Doubtless he does not write these letters until
+he is ready to fire them off, and were he arrested in his house
+or on his way to the warehouse we might fail to find proofs of his
+guilt, and naught but ill feeling would be caused among his friends.
+No, whatever we do we must do cautiously. Have you thought of any
+plan by which we might catch him in the act?"
+
+"If two or three men could be introduced into his warehouse,
+and concealed in the room from which he fires, they might succeed
+in catching him in the act, Captain Vere; but the room may be an
+empty one without any place whatever where they could be hidden,
+and unless they were actually in the room they would be of little
+good, for he would have time, if he heard footsteps, to thrust any
+letter he may have written into his mouth, and so destroy it before
+it could be seized."
+
+"That is so," Captain Vere agreed. "The matter seems a difficult one,
+and yet it is of the greatest importance to hinder communications
+with the Spaniards. Tonight all the soldiers who can be spared,
+aided by all the citizens able to use mattock and pick, are to set
+to work to begin to raise a half moon round the windmill behind
+the point they are attacking, so as to have a second line to fall
+back upon when the wall gives way, which it will do ere long, for
+it is sorely shaken and battered. It is most important to keep this
+from the knowledge of the Spaniards. Now, lads, you have shown your
+keenness by taking notice of what is going on, see if you cannot
+go further, and hit upon some plan of catching this traitor at his
+work. If before night we can think of no scheme, I must go to the
+governor and tell him frankly that we have suspicions of treachery,
+though we cannot prove them, and ask him, in order to prevent the
+possibility of our plans being communicated to the enemy, to place
+some troops in all the warehouses along that line, so that none
+can shoot there from any message to the Spaniards."
+
+Just as Captain Vere finished his supper, the boys came into the
+room again.
+
+"We have thought of a plan, sir, that might succeed, although it
+would be somewhat difficult. The dormer window from which these
+bolts have been fired lies thirty or forty feet away from that from
+which we were looking. The roof is so steep that no one could hold
+a footing upon it for a moment, nor could a plank be placed upon
+which he could walk. The window is about twelve feet from the top
+of the roof. We think that one standing on the ledge of our window
+might climb on to its top, and once there swing a rope with a stout
+grapnel attached to catch on the ridge of the roof; then two or
+three men might climb up there and work themselves along, and then
+lower themselves down with a rope on to the top of the next window.
+They would need to have ropes fastened round their bodies, for the
+height is great, and a slip would mean death.
+
+"The one farthest out on the window could lean over when he hears
+a noise below him, and when he saw the crossbow thrust from the
+window, could by a sudden blow knock it from the fellow's hand,
+when it would slide down the roof and fall into the narrow yard
+between the warehouse and the walls. Of course some men would be
+placed there in readiness to seize it, and others at the door of
+the warehouse to arrest the traitor if he ran down."
+
+"I think the plan is a good one, though somewhat difficult of
+execution," Captain Vere said. "But this enterprise on the roof
+would be a difficult one and dangerous, since as you say a slip
+would mean death."
+
+"Lionel and myself, sir, would undertake that with the aid of two
+active men to hold the ropes for us. We have both done plenty of
+bird nesting in the woods of Hedingham, and are nor likely to turn
+giddy."
+
+"I don't think it is necessary for more than one to get down on to
+that window," Captain Vere said. "Only one could so place himself
+as to look down upon the crossbow. However, you shall divide
+the honour of the enterprise between you. You, as the eldest and
+strongest, Geoffrey, shall carry out your plan on the roof, while
+you, Lionel, shall take post at the door with four men to arrest
+the traitor when he leaves. I will select two strong and active
+men to accompany you, Geoffrey, and aid you in your attempt; but
+mind, before you try to get out of the window and to climb on to
+its roof, have a strong rope fastened round your body and held by
+the others; then in case of a slip, they can haul you in again. I
+will see that the ropes and grapnels are in readiness."
+
+The next morning early Geoffrey proceeded with the two men who had
+been selected to accompany him to his usual lookout. Both were
+active, wiry men, and entered fully into the spirit of the undertaking
+when Geoffrey explained its nature to them. They looked out of the
+dormer window at the sharp roof slanting away in front of them and
+up to the ridge above.
+
+"I think, Master Vickars," one of them, Roger Browne by name, said,
+"that I had best go up first. I served for some years at sea, and
+am used to climbing about in dizzy places. It is no easy matter to
+get from this window sill astride the roof above us, and moreover
+I am more like to heave the grapnel so that it will hook firmly on
+to the ridge than you are."
+
+"Very well, Roger. I should be willing to try, but doubtless you
+would manage it far better than I should. But before you start we
+will fasten the other rope round your body, as Captain Vere directed
+me to do. Then in case you slip, or anything gives way with your
+weight, we can check you before you slide far down below us."
+
+A rope was accordingly tied round the man's body under his arms.
+Taking the grapnel, to which the other rope was attached, he got
+out on to the sill. It was not an easy task to climb up on to the
+ridge of the dormer window, and it needed all his strength and
+activity to accomplish the feat. Once astride of the ridge the rest
+was easy. At the first cast he threw the grapnel so that it caught
+securely on the top of the roof. After testing it with two or three
+pulls he clambered up, leaving the lower end of the rope hanging
+by the side of the window. As soon as he had gained this position
+Geoffrey, who was to follow him, prepared to start.
+
+According to the instructions Browne had given him he fastened
+the end of the rope which was round Browne's body under his own
+shoulders, then leaning over and taking a firm hold of the rope to
+which the grapnel was attached, he let himself out of the window.
+Browne hauled from above at the rope round his body, and he pulled
+himself with his hands by that attached to the grapnel, and presently
+reached the top.
+
+"I am glad you came first, Roger," he said. "I do not think I could
+have ever pulled myself up if you had not assisted me."
+
+He unfastened the rope, and the end was thrown down to the window,
+and Job Tredgold, the other man, fastened it round him and was
+hauled up as Geoffrey had been.
+
+"We will move along now to that stack of chimneys coming through
+the roof four feet below the ridge on the town side," Geoffrey
+said. "We can stand down there out of sight of the Spaniards. We
+shall be sure to attract attention sitting up here, and might have
+some bullets flying round our ears, besides which this fellow's
+friends might suspect our object and signal to him in some way. It
+is two hours yet to the time when we have twice seen him send his
+bolts across the moat."
+
+This was accordingly done, and for an hour and a half they sat down
+on the roof with their feet against the stack of chimneys.
+
+"It is time to be moving now," Geoffrey said at last. "I think the
+best way will be for me to get by the side of the dormer window
+instead of above it. It would be very awkward leaning over there,
+and I should not have strength to strike a blow; whereas with
+the rope under my arms and my foot on the edge of the sill, which
+projects a few inches beyond the side of the window, I could stand
+upright and strike a downright blow on the crossbow."
+
+"That would be the best way, I think," Roger Browne agreed; "and
+I will come down on to the top of the window and lean over. In the
+first place your foot might slip, and as you dangle there by the
+rope he might cut it and let you shoot over, or he might lean out
+and shoot you as you climb up the roof again; but if I am above
+with my pistol in readiness there will be no fear of accidents."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V
+
+AN HEROIC DEFENCE
+
+
+The plan Roger Browne suggested was carried out. Geoffrey was
+first lowered to his place by the side of the window, and bracing
+himself against its side with a foot on the sill he managed to
+stand upright, leaning against the rope that Job Tredgold held from
+above. Job had instructions when Geoffrey lifted his arm to ease
+the rope a few inches so as to enable the lad to lean forward. After
+two or three attempts Geoffrey got the rope to the exact length
+which would enable him to look round the corner and to strike a blow
+with his right hand, in which he held a stout club. Roger Browne
+then descended by the aid of the other rope, and fastening it round
+his body lay down astride of the roof of the window with his head
+and shoulders over the end, and his pistol held in readiness.
+
+It seemed an age to Geoffrey before he heard the sound of a footstep
+in the loft beside him. He grasped his cudgel firmly and leaned
+slightly forward. For ten minutes there was quiet within, and Geoffrey
+guessed that the traitor was writing the missive he was about to
+send to the enemy; then the footstep approached the window, and a
+moment later a crossbow was thrust out. A glance at it sufficed to
+show that the bolt was enveloped in a piece of paper wound round it
+and secured with a string. Steadying himself as well as he could
+Geoffrey struck with all his force down upon the crossbow. The
+weapon, loosely held, went clattering down the tiles. There was
+an exclamation of surprise and fury from within the window, and at
+the same moment Job Tredgold, seeing that Geoffrey's attempt had
+been successful, hauled away at the rope and began to drag him
+backward up the tiles.
+
+The lad saw a man lean out of the window and look up at him, then
+a pistol was levelled; but the report came from above the window,
+and not from the threatening weapon. A sharp cry of pain was heard,
+as the pistol fell from the man's hand and followed the crossbow
+down the roof. A few seconds later Geoffrey was hauled up to the
+ridge, where he was at once joined by Roger Browne. Shifting the
+ropes they moved along till above the window from which they had
+issued. Geoffrey was first lowered down. As soon as he had got
+in at the window he undid the rope and Job Tredgold followed him,
+while Roger Browne slid down by the rope attached to the grapnel;
+then they ran downstairs.
+
+As soon as they sallied out below they saw that Lionel and the
+men with him had captured a prisoner; and just as they joined the
+party the guard came round from the other side of the warehouse,
+bringing with them the crossbow, its bolt, and the pistol. The
+prisoner, whose shoulder was broken by Roger Browne's shot, was
+at once taken to Captain Vere's quarters. That officer had just
+arrived from the walls, knowing the time at which the capture would
+probably be made.
+
+"So you have succeeded," he said. "Well done, lads; you have earned
+the thanks of all. We will take this man at once to the governor,
+who is at present at the town hall."
+
+By the time they issued out quite a crowd had assembled, for the
+news that William Von Arnig had been brought a prisoner and wounded
+to Captain Vere's quarters had spread rapidly. The crowd increased
+as they went along, and Captain Vere and his party had difficulty
+in making their way to the town hall, many of the people exclaiming
+loudly against this treatment of one of the leading citizens. The
+governor was, when they entered, holding council with the English
+leader, Sir Roger Williams.
+
+"Why, what is this, Captain Vere?" he asked in surprise as that
+officer, accompanied by the two boys and followed by Roger Browne
+and Job Tredgold guarding the prisoner, entered.
+
+"I have to accuse this man of treacherously communicating with the
+enemy," Francis Vere said.
+
+"What?" Arnold de Groenvelt exclaimed in surprise. "Why, this is
+Mynheer Von Arnig, one of our most worshipful citizens! Surely,
+Captain Vere, there must be some error here?"
+
+"I will place my evidence before you," Captain Vere said; "and it
+will be for you to decide upon it. Master Geoffrey Vickars, please
+to inform the governor what you know about this matter."
+
+Geoffrey then stated how he and his brother, being at the upper
+window of the warehouse, had on two days in succession seen a
+crossbow discharged from a neighbouring window, and had noticed a
+Spanish soldier come out of a battery and pick up something which
+they believed to be the bolt, and how he and his brother had reported
+the circumstances to Captain Vere. That officer then took up the
+story, and stated that seeing the evidence was not conclusive, and
+it was probable that if an attempt was made to arrest the person,
+whomsoever he might be, who had used the crossbow, any evidence
+of treasonable design might be destroyed before he was seized, he
+had accepted the offer of Master Vickars to climb the roof, lower
+himself to the window from which the bolt would be shot, and, if
+possible, strike it from the man's hands, so that it would fall
+down the roof to the courtyard below, where men were placed to
+seize it.
+
+Geoffrey then related how he, with the two soldiers guarding the
+prisoner, had scaled the roof and taken a position by the window;
+how he had seen the crossbow thrust out, and had struck it from
+the hands of the man holding it; how the latter had leaned out,
+and would have shot him had not Roger Browne from his post above
+the window shot him in the shoulder.
+
+"Here are the crossbow and pistol," Captain Vere said; "and this
+is the bolt as it was picked up by my men. You see, sir, there is
+a paper fastened round it. I know not its contents, for I judged it
+best to leave it as it was found until I placed it in your hands."
+
+The governor cut the string, unrolled the paper and examined it.
+It contained a statement as to the state of the wall, with remarks
+where it was yielding, and where the enemy had best shoot against
+it. It said that the defenders had in the night begun to form a half
+moon behind it, and contained a sketch showing the exact position
+of the new work.
+
+"Gentlemen, what think you of this?" the governor asked the English
+officers.
+
+"There can be no doubt that it is a foul act of treachery," Williams
+said, "and the traitor merits death."
+
+"We will not decide upon it ourselves," the governor said. "I will
+summon six of the leading citizens, who shall sir as a jury with
+us. This is a grave matter, and touches the honour of the citizens
+as well as the safety of the town."
+
+In a few minutes the six citizens summoned arrived. The evidence
+was again given, and then the prisoner was asked what he had to
+say in his defence.
+
+"It is useless for me to deny it," he replied. "I am caught in the
+act, and must suffer for it. I have done my duty to the King of
+Spain, my sovereign; and I warn you he will take vengeance for my
+blood."
+
+"That we must risk," the governor said. "Now, gentlemen, you citizens
+of this town now attacked by the Spaniards, and you, sir, who are
+in command of the soldiers of the queen of England, have heard the
+evidence and the answer the prisoner has made. What is your opinion
+thereon? Do you, Sir Roger Williams, being highest in rank and
+authority, first give your opinion."
+
+"I find that he is guilty of an act of gross treason and treachery.
+For such there is but one punishment -- death." And the six citizens
+all gave the same decision.
+
+"You are found guilty of this foul crime," the governor said, "and
+are sentenced to death. In half an hour you will be hung in the
+marketplace, as a punishment to yourself and a warning to other
+traitors, if such there be in this town of Sluys. As to you, young
+sirs, you have rendered a great service to the town, and have
+shown a discernment beyond your years. I thank you in the name of
+the city and of its garrison, and also in that of the States, whose
+servant I am."
+
+A guard of armed citizens were now called in, the prisoner was handed
+to them, and orders given to their officer to carry the sentence
+into effect. A statement of the crime of the prisoner, with the
+names of those who had acted as his judges, and the sentence, was
+then drawn out, signed by the governor, and, ordered by him to be
+affixed to the door of the town hall. The two lads, finding that
+they were no longer required, hastened back to their quarters,
+having no wish to be present at the execution of the unhappy wretch
+whose crime they had been the means of detecting.
+
+A few days later considerable portions of the battered wall fell,
+and shortly afterwards a breach of two hundred and fifty paces
+long was effected, and a bridge of large boats constructed by the
+enemy from the dyke to the foot of the rampart.
+
+This was not effected without terrible loss. Hundreds of the bravest
+Spanish soldiers and sailors were killed, and three officers who
+succeeded each other in command of the attack were badly wounded.
+The Spanish had laboured under great difficulties owing to the lack
+of earth to push their trenches forward to the edge of the moat,
+arising from the surrounding country being flooded. They only
+succeeded at last by building wooden machines of bullet proof planks
+on wheels, behind each of which four men could work. When all was
+prepared the Spaniards advanced to the attack, rushing up the breach
+with splendid valour, headed by three of their bravest leaders; but
+they were met by the English and Dutch, and again and again hurled
+back.
+
+Day and night the fighting continued, the Spaniards occasionally
+retiring to allow their artillery to open fire again upon the
+shattered ruins. But stoutly as the defenders fought, step by step
+the Spaniards won their way forward until they had captured the
+breach and the west gate adjoining it, there being nothing now beyond
+the hastily constructed inner work between them and the town. The
+finest regiment of the whole of the Spanish infantry now advanced
+to the assault, but they were met by the defenders -- already sadly
+diminished in numbers, but firm and undaunted as ever, -- and their
+pikes and their axes well supplied the place of the fallen walls.
+
+Assault after assault was met and repulsed, Sir Roger Williams,
+Thomas Baskerville, and Francis Vere being always in the thick of
+the fight. Baskerville was distinguished by the white plumes of
+his helmet, Vere by his crimson mantle; and the valour of these
+leaders attracted the admiration of the Duke of Parma himself,
+who watched the fight from the summit of the tower of the western
+gate. Francis Vere was twice wounded, but not disabled. Sir Roger
+Williams urged him to retire, but he replied that he would rather
+be killed ten times in a breach than once in a house.
+
+Day by day the terrible struggle continued. The Spaniards were
+able constantly to bring up fresh troops, but the defenders had
+no relief. They were reduced in numbers from 1600 to 700 men, and
+yet for eighteen days they maintained the struggle, never once
+leaving the breach.
+
+The pages brought their food to them, and when the attacks were
+fiercest joined in the defence, fighting as boldly and manfully as
+the soldiers themselves. Geoffrey and Lionel kept in close attendance
+upon Francis Vere, only leaving him to run back to their quarters
+and bring up the meals cooked for him and his two officers by Frau
+Menyn and her handmaids. Both kept close to him during the fighting.
+They knew that they were no match in strength for the Spanish
+pikemen; but they had obtained pistols from the armoury, and with
+these they did good service, several times freeing him from some
+of his assailants when he was sorely pressed. On one occasion when
+Francis Vere was smitten down by a blow from an axe, the boys rushed
+forward and kept back his assailants until some of the men of the
+company came to his aid.
+
+"You have done me brave service indeed," Captain Vere said to them
+when he recovered; for his helmet had defended him from serious
+injury, though the force of the blow had felled him. "It was a
+happy thought of mine when I decided to bring you with me. This is
+not the first time that you have rendered me good service, and I
+am sure you will turn our brave and valiant soldiers of the queen."
+
+When each assault ceased the weary soldiers threw themselves down
+behind the earthen embankment, and obtained such sleep as they
+could before the Spaniards mustered for fresh attack. When, after
+eighteen days' terrible fighting, the Duke of Parma saw that even
+his best troops were unable to break through the wall of steel, he
+desisted from the assault and began the slower process of mining.
+The garrison from their lookout beheld the soldiers crossing the
+bridge with picks and shovels, and prepared to meet them in this
+new style of warfare. Captain Uvedale was appointed to command the
+men told off for this duty, and galleries were run from several of
+the cellars to meet those of the enemy.
+
+As every man was employed either on the rampart or in mining, many
+of the pages were told off to act as watchers in the cellars, and
+to listen for the faint sounds that told of the approach of the
+enemy's miners. As the young Vickars were in attendance on the
+officers, they were exempted from this work; but they frequently
+went down into the cellars, both to watch the process of mining by
+their own men and to listen to the faint sounds made by the enemy's
+workmen. One day they were sitting on two wine kegs, watching four
+soldiers at work at the end of a short gallery that had been driven
+towards the Spaniards. Suddenly there was an explosion, the miners
+were blown backwards, the end of the gallery disappeared, and a
+crowd of Walloon soldiers almost immediately afterwards rushed in.
+
+The boys sprang to their feet and were about to fly, when an idea
+occurred to Geoffrey. He seized a torch, and, standing by the
+side of a barrel placed on end by a large tier, shouted in Dutch,
+"Another step forward and I fire the magazine!"
+
+The men in front paused. Through the fumes of smoke they saw dimly
+the pile of barrels and a figure standing with a lighted torch
+close to one of them. A panic seized them, and believing they had
+made their way into a powder magazine, and that in another instant
+there would be a terrible explosion, they turned with shouts of "A
+magazine! a magazine! Fly, or we are all dead men!"
+
+"Run, Lionel, and get help," Geoffrey said, and in two or three
+minutes a number of soldiers ran down into the cellar. The Walloons
+were not long before they recovered from their panic. Their officers
+knew that the wine cellars of the city were in front of them, and
+reassured them as to the character of the barrels they had seen.
+They were, however, too late, and a furious conflict took place at
+the entrance into the cellar, but the enemy, able only to advance
+two or three abreast, failed to force their way in.
+
+Captain Uvedale and Francis Vere were soon on the spot, and when at
+last the enemy, unable to force an entrance, fell back, the former
+said, "This is just as I feared. You see, the Spaniards drove this
+gallery, and ceased to work immediately they heard us approaching
+them. We had no idea that they were in front of us, and so they
+only had to put a barrel of powder there and fire it as soon as
+there was but a foot or two of earth between us and them."
+
+"But how was it," Francis Vere asked, "that when they fired it they
+did not at once rush forward? They could have captured the whole
+building before we knew what had happened."
+
+"That I cannot tell," Captain Uvedale replied. "The four men at
+work must have been either killed or knocked senseless. We shall
+know better another time, and will have a strong guard in each
+cellar from which our mines are being driven."
+
+"If it please you, Captain Uvedale," Lionel said, "it was my brother
+Geoffrey who prevented them from advancing; for indeed several of
+them had already entered the cellar, and the gallery behind was
+full of them."
+
+"But how did he do that?" Captain Uvedale asked in surprise.
+
+Lionel related the ruse by which Geoffrey had created a panic in
+the minds of the Spaniards.
+
+"That was well thought of indeed, and promptly carried out!"
+Captain Uvedale exclaimed. "Francis, these pages of yours are truly
+promising young fellows. They detected that rascally Dutchman who
+was betraying us. I noticed them several times in the thick of
+the fray at the breach; and now they have saved the city by their
+quickness and presence of mind; for had these Spaniards once got
+possession of this warehouse they would have speedily broken a way
+along through the whole tier, and could then have poured in upon
+us with all their strength."
+
+"That is so, indeed," Francis Vere agreed. "They have assuredly
+saved the town, and there is the greatest credit due to them. I
+shall be glad, Uvedale, if you will report the matter to our leader.
+You are in command of the mining works, and it will come better
+from you than from me who is their captain."
+
+Captain Uvedale made his report, and both Sir Roger Williams and
+the governor thanked the boys, and especially Geoffrey, for the
+great service they had rendered.
+
+Very shortly the galleries were broken into in several other places,
+and the battle became now as fierce and continuous down in the
+cellars as it had before been on the breach. By the light of torches,
+in an atmosphere heavy with the fumes of gunpowder, surrounded by
+piled up barrels of wine, the defenders and assailants maintained
+a terrible conflict, men staggering up exhausted by their exertion
+and by the stifling atmosphere while others took their places below,
+and so, night and day, the desperate struggle continued.
+
+All these weeks no serious effort had been made for the relief of
+the beleaguered town. Captains Hall and Allen had several times
+swum down at night through the bridge of boats with letters from
+the governor entreating a speedy succour. The States had sent a
+fleet which sailed some distance up the Zwin, but returned without
+making the slightest effort to break through the bridge of boats.
+The Earl of Leicester had advanced with a considerable force from
+Ostend against the fortress of Blankenburg, but had retreated
+hastily as soon as Parma despatched a portion of his army against
+him; and so the town was left to its fate.
+
+The last letter that the governor despatched said that longer
+resistance was impossible. The garrison were reduced to a mere
+remnant, and these utterly worn out by constant fighting and the
+want of rest. He should ask for fair and honourable terms, but if
+these were refused the garrison and the whole male inhabitants in
+the city, putting the women and children in the centre, would sally
+out and cut their way through, or die fighting in the midst of the
+Spaniards. The swimmer who took the letter was drowned, but his
+body was washed ashore and the letter taken to the Duke of Parma.
+
+Three days afterwards a fresh force of the enemy embarked in forty
+large boats, and were about to land on an unprotected wharf by
+the riverside when Arnold de Groenvelt hung out the white flag.
+His powder was exhausted and his guns disabled, and the garrison
+so reduced that the greater portion of the walls were left wholly
+undefended. The Duke of Parma, who was full of admiration at the
+extraordinary gallantry of the defenders, and was doubtless also
+influenced by the resolution expressed in his letter by the governor,
+granted them most honourable terms. The garrison were to march out
+with all their baggage and arms, with matches lighted and colours
+displayed. They were to proceed to Breskans, and there to embark
+for Flushing. The life and property of the inhabitants were to be
+respected, and all who did not choose to embrace the Catholic faith
+were to be allowed to leave the town peaceably, taking with them
+their belongings, and to go wheresoever they pleased.
+
+When the gates were opened the garrison sallied out. The Duke of
+Parma had an interview with several of the leaders, and expressed
+his high admiration of the valour with which they had fought, and
+said that the siege of Sluys had cost him more men than he had lost
+in the four principal sieges he had undertaken in the Low Country
+put together. On the 4th of August the duke entered Sluys in triumph,
+and at once began to make preparations to take part in the great
+invasion of England for which Spain was preparing.
+
+After their arrival at Flushing Captains Vere, Uvedale, and others,
+who had brought their companies from Bergen op Zoom to aid in the
+defence of Sluys, returned to that town.
+
+The Earl of Leicester shortly afterwards resigned his appointment
+as general of the army. He had got on but badly with the States
+General, and there was from the first no cordial cooperation between
+the two armies. The force at his disposal was never strong enough
+to do anything against the vastly superior armies of the Duke
+of Parma, who was one of the most brilliant generals of his age,
+while he was hampered and thwarted by the intrigues and duplicity
+of Elizabeth, who was constantly engaged in half hearted negotiations
+now with France and now with Spain, and whose capricious temper
+was continually overthrowing the best laid plans of her councillors
+and paralysing the actions of her commanders. It was nor until
+she saw her kingdom threatened by invasion that she placed herself
+fairly at the head of the national movement, and inspired her
+subjects with her energy and determination.
+
+Geoffrey Vickars had been somewhat severely wounded upon the last
+day of the struggle in the cellar, a Spanish officer having beaten
+down his guard and cleft through his morion. Lionel was unwounded,
+but the fatigue and excitement had told upon him greatly, and soon
+after they arrived at Bergen Captain Vere advised both of them to
+return home for a few months.
+
+"There is nothing likely to be doing here until the spring. Parma
+has a more serious matter in hand. They talk, you know, of invading
+England, and after his experience at Sluys I do not think he will
+be wasting his force by knocking their head against stone walls.
+I should be glad if I could return too, but I have my company to
+look after and must remain where I am ordered; but as you are but
+volunteers and giving your service at your pleasure, and are not
+regularly upon the list of the pages of the company, I can undertake
+to grant you leave, and indeed I can see that you both greatly need
+rest. You have begun well and have both done good service, and have
+been twice thanked by the governor of Sluys and Sir Roger Williams.
+
+"You will do yourselves no good by being shut up through the winter
+in this dull town, and as there is a vessel lying by the quay which
+is to set sail tomorrow, I think you cannot do better than go in
+her. I will give you letters to my cousin and your father saying
+how well you have borne yourselves, and how mightily Sir Roger
+Williams was pleased with you. In the spring you can rejoin, unless
+indeed the Spaniards should land in England, which Heaven forfend,
+in which case you will probably prefer to ride under my cousin's
+banner at home."
+
+The boys gladly accepted Francis Vere's proposal. It was but three
+months since they had set foot in Holland, but they had gone through
+a tremendous experience, and the thought of being shut up for eight
+or nine months at Bergen op Zoom was by no means a pleasant one.
+Both felt worn out and exhausted, and longed for the fresh keen air
+of the eastern coast. Therefore the next morning they embarked on
+board ship. Captain Vere presented them each with a handsome brace
+of pistols in token of his regard, and Captains Uvedale, Baskerville,
+and other officers who were intimate friends of Vere's, and had met
+them at his quarters, gave them handsome presents in recognition
+of the services they had rendered at Sluys.
+
+The ship was bound for Harwich, which was the nearest English port.
+Landing there, they took passage by boat to Manningtree and thence
+by horse home, where they astounded their father and mother by
+their sudden appearance.
+
+"And this is what comes of your soldiering," Mrs. Vickars said
+when the first greeting was over. "Here is Geoffrey with plasters
+all over the side of his head, and you, Lionel, looking as pale and
+thin as if you had gone through a long illness. I told your father
+when we heard of your going that you ought to be brought back
+and whipped; but the earl talked him over into writing to Captain
+Francis to tell him that he approved of this mad brained business,
+and a nice affair it has turned out."
+
+"You will not have to complain of our looks, mother, at the end
+of a week or two," Geoffrey said. "My wound is healing fast, and
+Lionel only needs an extra amount of sleep for a time. You see, for
+nearly a month we were never in bed, but just lay down to sleep by
+the side of Captain Vere on the top of the ramparts, where we had
+been fighting all day.
+
+"It was a gallant defence," Mr. Vickars said, "and all England
+is talking of it.  It was wonderful that 800 English and as many
+Dutchmen should hold a weak place for two months against full twelve
+times their number of Spaniards, led by the Duke of Parma himself,
+and there is great honour for all who took part in the defence.
+The governor and Sir Roger Williams especially mentioned Francis
+Vere as among the bravest and best of their captains, and although
+you as pages can have had nought to do with the fighting, you will
+have credit as serving under his banner."
+
+"I think, father," Geoffrey said, touching the plasters on his
+head, "this looks somewhat as if we had had something to do with
+the fighting, and here is a letter for you from Captain Vere which
+will give you some information about it."
+
+Mr. Vickars adjusted his horn spectacles on his face and opened
+the letter.  It began:  "My dear Master and Friend, -- I have had
+no means of writing to you since your letter came to me, having
+had other matters in mind, and being cut off from all communication
+with England.  I was glad to find that you did not take amiss my
+carrying off of your sons.  Indeed that action has turned out more
+happily than might have been expected, for I own that they were
+but young for such rough service.
+
+"However, they have proved themselves valiant young gentlemen.
+They fought stoutly by my side during our long tussle with the
+Spaniards, and more than once saved my life by ridding me of foes
+who would have taken me at a disadvantage.  Once, indeed, when I
+was down from a blow on the pate from a Spanish axe, they rushed
+forward and kept my assailants at bay until rescue came.  They
+discovered a plot between a traitor in the town and the Spaniards,
+and succeeded in defeating his plans and bringing him to justice.
+
+"They were also the means of preventing the Spaniards from breaking
+into the great wine cellars and capturing the warehouses, and for
+each of these services they received the thanks of the Dutch governor
+and of Sir Roger Williams, our leader.  Thus, you see, although
+so young they have distinguished themselves mightily, and should
+aught befall me, there are many among my friends who will gladly
+take them under their protection and push them forward.  I have
+sent them home for a time to have quiet and rest, which they need
+after their exertions, and have done this the more willingly since
+there is no chance of fighting for many months to come. I hope that
+before the Spaniards again advance against us I may have them by
+my side."
+
+"Well, well, this is wonderful," Mrs. Vickars said when her husband
+had finished reading the letter. "If they had told me themselves I
+should not have believed them, although they have never been given
+to the sin of lying; but since it is writ in Master Vere's own hand
+it cannot be doubted. And now tell us all about it, boys."
+
+"We will tell you when we have had dinner, mother. This brisk Essex
+air has given us both an appetite, and until that is satisfied you
+must excuse us telling a long story. Is the earl at the castle,
+father? because we have two letters to him from Captain Francis
+-- one, I believe, touching our affairs, and the other on private
+matters. We have also letters from him to his mother and his brother
+John, and these we had better send off at once by a messenger, as
+also the private letters to the earl."
+
+"That I will take myself," Mr. Vickars said. "I was just going up
+to him to speak about my parish affairs when you arrived."
+
+"You had better have your dinner first," Mrs. Vickars said decidedly.
+"When you once get with the earl and begin talking you lose all
+account of the time, and only last week kept dinner waiting for two
+hours. It is half past eleven now, and I will hurry it on so that
+it will be ready a few minutes before noon."
+
+"Very well, my dear; but I will go out into the village at once and
+find a messenger to despatch to Crepping Hall with the letters to
+Dame Elizabeth and John Vere."
+
+The boys' story was not told until after supper, for as soon as
+dinner was over Mr. Vickars went up to the castle with the letters
+for the earl. The latter, after reading them, told him that his
+cousin spoke most highly of his two sons, and said they had been
+of great service, even as far as the saving of his life. The earl
+told Mr. Vickars to bring the boys up next day to see him in order
+that he might learn a full account of the fighting at Sluys, and
+that he hoped they would very often come in, and would, while they
+were at home, practise daily with his master of arms at the castle.
+
+"I know, Mr. Vickars, that you had hoped that one of them would
+enter the church; but you see that their tastes lie not in that
+direction, and it is evident that, as in the case of my cousin
+Francis, they are cut out for soldiers."
+
+"I am afraid so," Mr. Vickars said; "and must let them have their
+own way, for I hold, that none should be forced to follow the
+ministry save those whose natural bent lies that way."
+
+"I don't think they have chosen badly," the earl said. "My cousin
+Francis bids fair to make a great soldier, and as they start in
+life as his pages they will have every chance of getting on, and
+I warrant me that Francis will push their fortunes. Perhaps I may
+be able to aid them somewhat myself. If aught comes of this vapouring
+of the Spaniards, before the boys return to Holland, they shall
+ride with me. I am already arming all the tenantry and having them
+practised in warlike exercises, and in the spring I shall fit out
+two ships at Harwich to join the fleet that will put to sea should
+the Spaniards carry out their threats of invading us."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI
+
+THE LOSS OF THE SUSAN
+
+
+There were few people in Hedingham more pleased to see the two lads
+on their return than John Lirriper, to whom they paid a visit on
+the first day they went out.
+
+"I am glad to see you back, young masters; though, to say the truth,
+you are not looking nigh so strong and well as you did when I last
+parted from you."
+
+"We shall soon be all right again, John. We have had rather a rough
+time of it over there in Sluys."
+
+"Ah, so I have heard tell, Master Geoffrey. Your father read out
+from the pulpit a letter the earl had received from Captain Francis
+telling about the fighting, and it mentioned that you were both
+alive and well and had done good service; but it was only a short
+letter sent off in haste the day after he and the others had got
+out of the town. I was right glad when I heard it, I can tell you,
+for there had been nought talked of here but the siege; and though
+your lady mother has not said much to me, I always held myself ready
+to slip round the corner or into a house when I saw her come down
+the street, for I knew well enough what was in her mind. She was
+just saying to herself, `John Lirriper, if it hadn't been for you
+my two boys would not be in peril now. If aught comes to them, it
+will be your doing.' And though it was not my fault, as far as I
+could see, for Captain Francis took you off my hands, as it were,
+and I had no more to say in the matter than a child, still, there
+it was, and right glad was I when I heard that the siege was over
+and you were both alive.
+
+"I had a bad time of it, I can tell you, when I first got back,
+young sirs, for your mother rated me finely; and though your father
+said it was not my fault in any way, she would not listen to him,
+but said she had given you into my charge, and that I had no right
+to hand you over to any others save with your father's permission
+-- not if it were to the earl himself, -- and for a long time
+after she would make as if she didn't see me if she met me in the
+street. When my wife was ill about that time she sent down broths
+and simples to her, but she sent them by one of the maids, and
+never came herself save when she knew I was away in my boat.
+
+"However, the day after the reading of that letter she came in
+and said she was sorry she had treated me hardly, and that she had
+known at heart all along that it was not altogether my fault, and
+asked my pardon as nice as if I had been the earl. Of course I said
+there was nothing to ask pardon for, and indeed that I thought it
+was only natural she should have blamed me, for that I had often
+blamed myself, though not seeing how I could have done otherwise.
+However, I was right glad when the matter was made up, for it is
+not pleasant for a man when the parson's wife sets herself against
+him."
+
+"It was certainly hard upon you, John," Geoffrey said; "but I am sure
+our mother does not in any way blame you now. You see, we brought
+home letters from Captain Vere, or rather Sir Francis, for he has
+been knighted now, and he was good enough to speak very kindly of
+what we were able to do in the siege. Mother did not say much, but
+I am sure that at heart she is very grateful, for the earl himself
+came down to the Rectory and spoke warmly about us, and said that
+he should always be our fast friend, because we had given his cousin
+some help when he was roughly pressed by the Spaniards. I hope we
+shall have another sail with you in a short time, for we are not
+going back to the Netherlands at present, as things are likely to
+be quiet there now. Although he did not say so, I think Sir Francis
+thought that we were over young for such rough work, and would be
+more useful in a year's time; for, you see, in these sieges even
+pages have to take their share in the fighting, and when it comes
+to push of pike with the Spaniards more strength and vigour are needed
+than we possess at present. So we are to continue our practice at
+arms at the castle, and to take part in the drilling of the companies
+the earl is raising in case the Spaniards carry out their threat
+of invading England."
+
+Mrs. Vickars offered no objection whatever the first time Geoffrey
+asked permission to go down to Bricklesey with John Lirriper.
+
+"I have no objection, Geoffrey; and, indeed, now that you have
+chosen your own lives and are pages to Sir Francis Vere, it seems
+to me that in matters of this kind you can judge for yourself.
+Now that you have taken to soldiering and have borne your part in
+a great siege, and have even yourselves fought with the Spaniards,
+I deem it that you have got beyond my wing, and must now act in all
+small matters as it pleases you; and that since you have already
+run great danger of your lives, and may do so again ere long, it
+would be folly of me to try to keep you at my apron strings and to
+treat you as if you were still children."
+
+So the two lads often accompanied John Lirriper to Bricklesey,
+and twice sailed up the river to London and back in Joe Chambers'
+smack, these jaunts furnishing a pleasant change to their work of
+practising with pike and sword with the men-at-arms at the castle,
+or learning the words of command and the work of officers in drilling
+the newly raised corps. One day John Lirriper told them that his
+nephew was this time going to sail up the Medway to Rochester,
+and would be glad to take them with him if they liked it; for they
+were by this time prime favourites with the master of the Susan.
+Although their mother had told them that they were at liberty to
+go as they pleased, they nevertheless always made a point of asking
+permission before they went away.
+
+"If the wind is fair we shall not be long away on this trip, mother.
+Two days will take us up to Rochester; we shall be a day loading
+there, and shall therefore be back on Saturday if the wind serves,
+and may even be sooner if the weather is fine and we sail with
+the night tides, as likely enough we shall, for the moon is nearly
+full, and there will be plenty of light to keep our course free of
+the sands."
+
+The permission was readily given. Mrs. Vickars had come to see that
+it was useless to worry over small matters, and therefore nodded
+cheerfully, and said she would give orders at once for a couple of
+chickens to be killed and other provision prepared for their voyage.
+
+"I do not doubt you are going to have a rougher voyage than usual
+this time, young masters," John Lirriper said when the boat was
+approaching Bricklesey. "The sky looks wild, and I think there is
+going to be a break in the weather. However, the Susan is a stout
+boat, and my nephew a careful navigator."
+
+"I should like a rough voyage for a change, John," Geoffrey said.
+"We have always had still water and light winds on our trips, and
+I should like a good blow."
+
+"Well, I think you will have one; though may be it will only come
+on thick and wet. Still I think there is wind in those clouds, and
+that if it does come it will be from the southeast, in which case
+you will have a sharp buffeting. But you will make good passage
+enough down to the Nore once you are fairly round the Whittaker."
+
+"Glad to see you, young masters," Joe Chambers said, as the boat
+came alongside his craft. "You often grumbled at the light winds,
+but unless I am mistaken we shall be carrying double reefs this
+journey. What do you think, Uncle John?"
+
+"I have been saying the same, lad; still there is no saying. You
+will know more about it in a few hours' time."
+
+It was evening when the boys went on board the Susan, and as soon
+as supper was over they lay down, as she was to start at daybreak
+the next morning. As soon as they were roused by the creaking of
+the blocks and the sound of trampling of feet overhead they went up
+on deck. Day had just broken; the sky was overspread by dark clouds.
+
+"There is not much wind after all," Geoffrey said as he looked
+round.
+
+"No, it has fallen light during the last two hours," the skipper
+replied, "but I expect we shall have plenty before long. However,
+we could do with a little more now."
+
+Tide was half out when they started. Joe Chambers had said the night
+before that he intended to drop down to the edge of the sands and
+there anchor, and to make across them past the Whittaker Beacon
+into the channel as soon as there was sufficient water to enable
+him to do so. The wind was light, sometimes scarcely sufficient
+to belly out the sails and give the boat steerage way, at others
+coming in short puffs which heeled her over and made her spring
+forward merrily.
+
+Before long the wind fell lighter and lighter, and at last Joe
+Chambers ordered the oars to be got out.
+
+"We must get down to the edge of the Buxey," he said, "before the
+tide turns, or we shall have it against us, and with this wind we
+should never be able to stem it, but should be swept up the Crouch.
+At present it is helping us, and with a couple of hours' rowing we
+may save it to the Buxey."
+
+The boys helped at the sweeps, and for two hours the creaking of
+the oars and the dull flapping of the sail alone broke the silence
+of the calm; and the lads were by no means sorry when the skipper
+gave the order for the anchor to be dropped.
+
+"I should like to have got about half a mile further," he said;
+"but I can see by the landmarks that we are making no way now. The
+tide is beginning to suck in."
+
+"How long will it be before we have water enough to cross the Spit?"
+Lionel asked as they laid in the oars.
+
+"Well nigh four hours, Master Lionel. Then, even if it keeps a
+stark calm like this, we shall be able to get across the sands and
+a mile or two up the channel before we meet the tide. There we must
+anchor again till the first strength is past, and then if the wind
+springs up we can work along at the edge of the sands against it.
+There is no tide close in to the sands after the first two hours.
+But I still think this is going to turn into wind presently; and
+if it does it will be sharp and heavy, I warrant. It's either that
+or rain."
+
+The sky grew darker and darker until the water looked almost black
+under a leaden canopy.
+
+"I wish we were back into Bricklesey," Joe Chambers said. "I have
+been well nigh fifteen years going backwards and forwards here, and
+I do not know that ever I saw an awkwarder look about the sky. It
+reminds me of what I have heard men who have sailed to the Indies
+say they have seen there before a hurricane breaks. If it was
+not that we saw the clouds flying fast overhead when we started,
+I should have said it was a thick sea fog that had rolled in upon
+us. Ah, there is the first drop. I don't care how hard it comes
+down so that there is not wind at the tail of it. A squall of wind
+before rain is soon over; but when it follows rain you will soon
+have your sails close reefed. You had best go below or you will be
+wet through in a minute."
+
+The great drops were pattering down on the deck and causing splashes
+as of ink on the surface of the oily looking water. Another half
+minute it was pouring with such a mighty roar on the deck that the
+boys below needed to shout to make each other heard. It lasted but
+five minutes, and then stopped as suddenly as it began. The lads
+at once returned to the deck.
+
+"So it is all over, Master Chambers."
+
+"Well the first part is over, but that is only a sort of a beginning.
+Look at that light under the clouds away to the south of east. That
+is where it is coming from, unless I am mistaken. Turn to and get
+the mainsail down, lads," for although after dropping anchor the
+head sails had been lowered, the main and mizzen were still on her.
+
+The men set to work, and the boys helped to stow the sail and
+fasten it with the tiers. Suddenly there was a sharp puff of wind.
+It lasted a few seconds only, then Joe Chambers pointed towards
+the spot whence a hazy light seemed to come.
+
+"Here it comes," he said. "Do you see that line of white water?
+That is a squall and no mistake. I am glad we are not under sail."
+
+There was a sharp, hissing sound as the line of white water
+approached them, and then the squall struck them with such force
+and fury that the lads instinctively grasped at the shrouds. The
+mizzen had brought the craft in a moment head to wind, and Joe
+Chambers and the two sailors at once lowered it and stowed it away.
+
+"Only put a couple of tiers on," the skipper shouted. "We may have
+to upsail again if this goes on."
+
+The sea got up with great rapidity, and a few minutes after the
+squall had struck them the Susan was beginning to pitch heavily. The
+wind increased in force, and seemed to scream rather than whistle
+in the rigging.
+
+"The sea is getting up fast!" Geoffrey shouted in the skipper's
+ear as he took his place close to him.
+
+"It won't be very heavy yet," Joe Chambers replied; "the sands
+break its force. But the tide has turned now, and as it makes over
+the sand there will be a tremendous sea here in no time; that is
+if this wind holds, and it seems to me that it is going to be an
+unusual gale altogether."
+
+"How long will it be before we can cross the Spit?"
+
+"We are nor going to cross today, that's certain," the skipper
+said. "There will be a sea over those sands that would knock the
+life out of the strongest craft that ever floated. No, I shall wait
+here for another hour or two if I can, and then slip my cable and
+run for the Crouch. It is a narrow channel, and I never care about
+going into it after dark until there is water enough for a craft
+of our draught over the sands. It ain't night now, but it is well
+nigh as dark. There is no making out the bearings of the land, and
+we have got to trust to the perches the fishermen put up at the
+bends of the channel. However, we have got to try it. Our anchors
+would never hold here when the sea gets over the sands, and if they
+did they would pull her head under water.
+
+In half an hour a sea had got up that seemed to the boys tremendous.
+Dark as it was they could see in various directions tracts of white
+water where the waves broke wildly over the sands. The second anchor
+had been let go some time before. The two cables were as taut as
+iron bars, and the boat was pulling her bow under every sea. Joe
+Chambers dropped a lead line overboard and watched it closely.
+
+"We are dragging our anchors," he said. "There is nothing for it
+but to run."
+
+He went to the bow, fastened two logs of wood by long lines to
+the cables outside the bow, so that he could find and recover the
+anchors on his return, then a very small jib was hoisted, and as it
+filled two blows with an axe severed the cables inboard. The logs
+attached to them were thrown over, and the skipper ran aft and put
+up the helm as the boat's head payed off before the wind. As she
+did so a wave struck her and threw tons of water on board, filling
+her deck nearly up to the rails. It was well Joe had shouted to
+the boys to hold on, for had they not done so they would have been
+swept overboard.
+
+Another wave struck them before they were fairly round, smashing in
+the bulwark and sweeping everything before it, and the boys both
+thought that the Susan was sinking under their feet. However she
+recovered herself. The water poured our through the broken bulwark,
+and the boat rose again on the waves as they swept one after
+another down upon her stern. The channel was well marked now, for
+the sands on either side were covered with breaking water. Joe
+Chambers shouted to the sailors to close reef the mizzen and hoist
+it, so that he might have the boat better under control. The wind
+was not directly astern but somewhat on the quarter; and small as
+was the amount of sail shown, the boat lay over till her lee rail
+was at times under water; the following waves yawing her about so
+much that it needed the most careful steering to prevent her from
+broaching to.
+
+"It seems to me as the wind is northering!" one of the men shouted.
+
+The skipper nodded and slackened out the sheet a bit as the wind
+came more astern. He kept his eyes fixed ahead of him, and the men
+kept gazing through the gloom.
+
+"There is the perch," one of them shouted presently, "just on her
+weather bow!"
+
+The skipper nodded and held on the same course until abreast of the
+perch, which was only a forked stick. The men came aft and hauled
+in the mizzen sheer. Chambers put up the helm. The mizzen came
+across with a jerk, and the sheet was again allowed to run out.
+The jib came over with a report like the shot of a cannon, and at
+the same moment split into streamers.
+
+"Hoist the foresail!" the skipper shouted, and the men sprang forward
+and seized the halliards; but at this moment the wind seemed to
+blow with a double fury, and the moment the sail was set it too
+split into ribbons.
+
+"Get up another jib!" Joe Chambers shouted, and one of the men
+sprang below. In half a minute he reappeared with another sail.
+
+"Up with it quick, Bill. We are drifting bodily down on the sand."
+
+Bill hurried forward. The other hand had hauled in the traveller,
+to which the bolt rope of the jib was still attached, and hauling
+on this had got the block down and in readiness for fastening on
+the new jib. The sheets were hooked on, and then while one hand
+ran the sail out with the out haul to the bowsprit end, the other
+hoisted with the halliards. By this time the boat was close to the
+broken water. As the sail filled her head payed off towards it.
+The wind lay her right over, and before she could gather way there
+was a tremendous crash. The Susan had struck on the sands. The next
+wave lifted her, but as it passed on she came down with a crash
+that seemed to shake her in pieces. Joe Chambers relaxed his grasp
+of the now useless tiller.
+
+"It is all over," he said to the boys. "Nothing can save her now.
+If she had been her own length farther off the sands she would have
+gathered way in time. As it is another ten minutes and she will be
+in splinters."
+
+She was now lying over until her masthead was but a few feet above
+water. The seas were striking her with tremendous force, pouring
+a deluge of water over her.
+
+"There is but one chance for you," he went on. "The wind is dead
+on the shore, and Foulness lies scarce three miles to leeward."
+
+He went into the cabin and fetched out a small axe fastened in the
+companion where it was within reach of the helmsman. Two blows cut
+the shrouds of the mizzen, a few vigorous strokes were given to the
+foot of the mast, and, as the boat lifted and crashed down again
+on the sand, it broke off a few inches above the deck.
+
+"Now, lads, I will lash you loosely to this. You can both swim,
+and with what aid it will give you may well reach the shore. There
+are scarce three feet of water here, and except where one or two
+deeps pass across it there is no more anywhere between this and
+the land. It will not be rough very far. Now, be off at once; the
+boat will go to pieces before many minutes. I and the two men will
+take to the mainmast, but I want to see you off first."
+
+Without hesitation the boys pushed off with the mast. As they did
+so a cataract of water poured over the smack upon them, knocking
+them for a moment under the surface with its force.
+
+For the next few minutes it was a wild struggle for life. They
+found at once that they were powerless to swim in the broken water,
+which, as it rushed across the sand, impelled alike by the rising
+tide behind it and the force of the wind, hurried them along at a
+rapid pace, breaking in short steep waves. They could only cling to
+the mast and snatch a breath of air from time to time as it rolled
+over and over. Had they not been able to swim they would very
+speedily have been drowned; but, accustomed as they were to diving,
+they kept their presence of mind, holding their breath when under
+water and breathing whenever they were above it with their faces
+to the land. It was only so that they could breathe, for the air
+was thick with spray, which was swept along with such force by the
+wind that it would have drowned the best swimmer who tried to face
+it as speedily as if he had been under water.
+
+After what seemed to them an age the waves became somewhat less
+violent, though still breaking in a mass of foam. Geoffrey loosed
+his hold of the spar and tried to get to his feet. He was knocked
+down several times before he succeeded, but when he did so found
+that the water was little more than two feet deep, although the
+waves rose to his shoulders. The soft mud under his feet rendered
+it extremely difficult to stand, and the rope which attached him
+to the spar, which was driving before him, added to the difficulty.
+He could not overtake the mast, and threw himself down again and
+swam to it.
+
+"Get up, Lionel!" he shouted; "we can stand here." But Lionel was
+too exhausted to be capable of making the effort. With the greatest
+difficulty Geoffrey raised him to his feet and supported him with
+his back to the wind.
+
+"Get your breath again!" he shouted. "We are over the worse now and
+shall soon be in calmer water. Get your feet well out in front of
+you, if you can, and dig your heels into the mud, then you will
+act as a buttress to me and help me to keep my feet."
+
+It was two or three minutes before Lionel was able to speak. Even
+during this short time they had been carried some distance forward,
+for the ground on which they stood seemed to be moving, and the
+force of the waves carried them constantly forward.
+
+"Feel better, old fellow?" Geoffrey asked, as he felt Lionel making
+an effort to resist the pressure of the water.
+
+"Yes, I am better now," Lionel said.
+
+"Well, we will go on as we are as long as we can; let us just try
+to keep our feet and give way to the sea as it rakes us along. The
+quicker we go the sooner we shall be in shallower water; but the
+tide is rising fast, and unless we go on it will speedily be as
+bad here as it was where we started."
+
+As soon as Lionel had sufficiently recovered they again took to
+the spar; but now, instead of clasping it with their arms and legs,
+they lay with their chest upon it, and used their efforts only to
+keep it going before the wind and ride. Once they came to a point
+where the sand was but a few inches under water. Here they stood
+up for some minutes, and then again proceeded on foot until the
+water deepened to their waists.
+
+Their progress was now much more easy, for the high bank had broken
+the run of the surf. The water beyond it was much smoother, and
+they were able to swim, pushing the spar before them.
+
+"We are in deep water," Geoffrey said presently, dropping his feet.
+"It is out of my depth. Chambers said there was a deep channel
+across the sands nor far from the island; so in that case the shore
+cannot be far away."
+
+In another quarter of an hour the water was again waist deep.
+Geoffrey stood up.
+
+"I think I see a dark line ahead, Lionel; we shall soon be there."
+
+Another ten minutes and the water was not above their knees. They
+could see the low shore now at a distance of but a few hundred yards
+ahead, and untying the ropes under their arms they let the spar
+drift on, and waded forward until they reached the land. There was
+a long mud bank yet to cross, and exhausted as they were it took
+them a long time to do this; but at last they came to a sandy bank
+rising sharply some ten feet above the flat. They threw themselves
+down on this and lay for half an hour without a word being spoken.
+
+"Now, Lionel," Geoffrey said at last, raising himself to a sitting
+position, "we must make an effort to get on and find a shelter.
+There are people living in the island. I have heard that they are
+a wild set, making their living by the wrecks on these sands and
+by smuggling goods without paying dues to the queen. Still, they
+will nor refuse us shelter and food, and assuredly there is nothing
+on us to tempt them to plunder us."
+
+He rose to his feet and helped Lionel up. Once on the top of the
+bank a level country stretched before them. The wind aided their
+footsteps, sweeping along with such tremendous force that at times
+they had difficulty in keeping their feet. As they went on they came
+upon patches of cultivated land, with hedgerows and deep ditches.
+Half a mile further they perceived a house. On approaching it
+they saw that it was a low structure of some size with several out
+buildings. They made their way to it and knocked at the door. They
+knocked twice before it was opened, then some bolts were withdrawn.
+The door was opened a few inches. A man looked out, and seeing two
+lads opened it widely.
+
+"Well, who are you, and what do you want?" he asked roughly.
+
+"We have been wrecked in a storm on the sands. We were sailing from
+Bricklesey for Sheerness when the storm caught us."
+
+The man looked at them closely. Their pale faces and evidently
+exhausted condition vouched for the truth of their story.
+
+"The house is full," he said gruffly, "and I cannot take in strangers.
+You will find some dry hay in that out house, and I will bring you
+some food there. When you have eaten and drunk you had best journey
+on."
+
+So saying he shut the door in their faces.
+
+"This is strange treatment," Geoffrey said. "I should not have
+thought a man would have refused shelter to a dog such a day as
+this. What do you say, Lionel, shall we go on?"
+
+"I don't think I can go any further until I have rested, Geoffrey,"
+Lionel replied faintly. "Let us lie down in shelter if it is only
+for half an hour. After that, if the man brings us some food as he
+says, we can go on again."
+
+They went into the shed the man had pointed out. It was half full
+of hay.
+
+"Let us take our things off and wring them, Lionel, and give ourselves
+a roll in the hay to dry ourselves. We shall soon get warm after
+that."
+
+They stripped, wrung the water from their clothes, rolled themselves
+in the hay until they felt a glow of returning warmth, and then
+put on their clothes again. Scarcely had they done so when the man
+came in with a large tankard and two hunks of bread.
+
+"Here," he said, "drink this and then be off. We want no strangers
+hanging round here."
+
+At any other time the boys would have refused hospitality so
+cheerlessly offered, but they were too weak to resist the temptation.
+The tankard contained hot spiced ale, and a sensation of warmth
+and comfort stole over them as soon as they had drunk its contents
+and eaten a few mouthfuls of bread. The man stood by them while
+they ate.
+
+"Are you the only ones saved from the wreck?" he asked.
+
+"I trust that we are not," Geoffrey replied. "The master of the
+boat tied us to a mast as soon as she struck, and he and the two
+men with him were going to try to get to shore in the same way."
+
+As soon as they had finished they stood up and handed the tankard
+to the man.
+
+"I am sorry I must turn you out," he said, as if somewhat ashamed
+of his want of courtesy. "Any other day it would be different, but
+today I cannot take anyone in."
+
+"I thank you for what you have given us," Geoffrey said. "Can you
+tell us which is the way to the ferry?"
+
+"Follow the road and it will take you there. About a couple of
+miles. You cannot mistake the way."
+
+Feeling greatly strengthened and refreshed the lads again started.
+
+"This is a curious affair," Geoffrey said, "and I cannot make out
+why they should not let us in. However, it does not matter much.
+I feel warm all over now, in spite of my wet clothes."
+
+"So do I," Lionel agreed. "Perhaps there were smugglers inside,
+or some fugitives from justice hiding there. Anyhow, I am thankful
+for that warm ale; it seems to have given me new life altogether."
+
+They had walked a quarter of a mile, when they saw four horsemen
+coming on the road. They were closely wrapped up in cloaks, and as
+they passed, with their heads bent down to meet the force of the
+gale and their broad brimmed hats pulled low down over their eyes,
+the boys did nor get even a glimpse of their features.
+
+"I wonder who they can be," Geoffrey said, looking after them. "They
+are very well mounted, and look like persons of some degree. What
+on earth can they be doing in such a wretched place as this? They
+must be going to that house we left, for I noticed the road stopped
+there."
+
+"It is curious, Geoffrey, but it is no business of ours."
+
+"I don't know that, Lionel. You know there are all sorts of rumours
+about of Papist plots, and conspirators could hardly choose a more
+out of the way spot than this to hold their meetings. I should not
+be at all surprised if there is some mischief on foot."
+
+Half a mile further three men on foot met them, and these, like
+the others, were closely wrapped up to the eyes.
+
+"They have ridden here," Geoffrey said after they had passed. "They
+have all high riding boots on; they must have left their horses
+on the other side of the ferry. See, there is a village a short
+distance ahead. We will go in there and dry our clothes, and have
+a substantial meal if we can get it. Then we will talk this business
+over."
+
+The village consisted of a dozen houses only, but among them was a
+small public house. Several men were sitting by the fire with pots
+of ale before them.
+
+"We have been wrecked on the coast, landlord, and have barely escaped
+with our lives. We want to dry our clothes and to have what food
+you can give us."
+
+"I have plenty of eggs," the landlord said, "and my wife will fry
+them for you; but we have no meat in the house. Fish and eggs are
+the chief food here. You are lucky in getting ashore, for it is
+a terrible gale. It is years since we have had one like it. As to
+drying your clothes, that can be managed easy enough. You can go
+up into my room and take them off, and I will lend you a couple of
+blankets to wrap yourselves in, and you can sit by the fire here
+until your things are dry."
+
+A hearty meal of fried eggs and another drink of hot ale completed
+the restoration of the boys. Their clothes were speedily dried, for
+the landlady had just finished baking her week's batch of bread,
+and half an hour in the oven completely dried the clothes. They
+were ready almost as soon as the meal was finished. Many questions
+were asked them as to the wreck, and the point at which they had
+been cast ashore.
+
+"It was but a short distance from a house at the end of this road,"
+Geoffrey said. "We went there for shelter, but they would not take
+us in, though they gave us some bread and hot ale."
+
+Exclamations of indignation were heard among the men sitting round.
+
+"Ralph Hawker has the name of being a surly man," one said, "but
+I should not have thought that he would have turned a shipwrecked
+man from his door on such a day as this. They say he is a Papist,
+though whether he be or not I cannot say; but he has strange ways,
+and there is many a stranger passes the ferry and asks for his
+house. However, that is no affair of mine, though I hold there is
+no good in secret ways."
+
+"That is so," another said; "but it goes beyond all reason for a
+man to refuse shelter to those the sea has cast ashore on such a
+day as this."
+
+As soon as they had finished their meal and again dressed themselves,
+the lads paid their reckoning and went out. Scarcely had they done
+so when two horsemen rode up, and, drawing rein, inquired if they
+were going right for the house of one Ralph Hawker.
+
+"It lies about a mile on," Geoffrey said. "You cannot miss the way;
+the road ends there."
+
+As he spoke a gust of wind of extra fury blew off one of the
+riders' hats. It was stopped by the wall of a house a few yards
+away. Geoffrey caught it and handed it to the horseman. With a word
+of thanks he pressed it firmly on his head, and the two men rode
+on.
+
+"Did you notice that?" Geoffrey asked his brother. "He has a
+shaven spot on the top of his head. The man is a Papist priest in
+disguise. There is something afoot, Lionel. I vote that we try and
+get to the bottom of it."
+
+"I am ready if you think so, Geoffrey. But it is a hazardous
+business, you know; for we are unarmed, and there are, we know,
+seven or eight of them at any rate.
+
+"We must risk that," Geoffrey said; "besides, we can run if we
+cannot fight. Let us have a try whatever comes of it."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII
+
+A POPISH PLOT
+
+
+There was no one about, for the wind was blowing with such fury that
+few cared to venture out of doors, and the boys therefore started
+back along the road by which they had come, without being observed.
+
+"We had better strike off from the road," Geoffrey said, "for some
+more of these men may be coming along. Like enough someone will be
+on the watch at the house, so we had best make a long detour, and
+when we get near it come down on it from the other side. You know
+we saw no windows there."
+
+"That is all well enough," Lionel agreed; "but the question is,
+how are we to hear what they are saying inside? We are obliged to
+shout to catch each others' words now, and there is not the least
+chance of our hearing anything through the closed shutters."
+
+"We must wait till we get there, and then see what is to be done,
+Lionel. We managed to detect a plot at Sluys, and we may have the
+same luck here."
+
+After half an hour's brisk walking they again approached the house
+from the side at which they had before come upon it, and where,
+as Geoffrey observed, there were no windows; they made their way
+cautiously up to it, and then moved quietly round to the side. Here
+there were two windows on the ground floor. The shutters were closed,
+for glass was unknown except in the houses of the comparatively
+wealthy. Its place was taken by oiled paper, and this in bad weather
+was protected by outer shutters. Geoffrey stole out a few paces to
+look at the window above.
+
+"It is evidently a loft," he said as he rejoined Lionel. "You can
+see by the roof that the rooms they live in are entirely upon the
+ground floor. If we can get in there we might possibly hear what
+is going on below. The rooms are not likely to be ceiled, and there
+are sure to be cracks between the planks through which we can see
+what is going on below. The noise of the wind is so great there
+is little chance of their hearing us. Now, let us look about for
+something to help us to climb up."
+
+Lying by an out house close by they found a rough ladder, composed
+of a single pole with bits of wood nailed on to it a foot apart.
+This they placed up against the door of the loft. They could see
+that this was fastened only by a hasp, with a piece of wood put
+through the staple. It had been arranged that Geoffrey only should
+go up, Lionel removing the pole when he entered, and keeping watch
+behind the out house lest anyone should come round the house. Both
+had cut heavy sticks as they came along to give them some means
+of defence. Lionel stood at the pole, while Geoffrey climbed up,
+removed the piece of wood from the staple, and then holding the
+hasp to prevent the wind blowing in the door with a crash, entered
+the loft. A glance showed him that it extended over the whole of
+the house, and that it was entirely empty.
+
+He closed the door behind him, and jammed it with a couple of wedges
+of wood he had cut before mounting; then he lay down on the rough
+planks and began to crawl along. He saw a gleam of light at the
+further end, and felt sure that it proceeded from the room in which
+the party were assembled. Although he had little fear of being heard
+owing to the din kept up by the wind, he moved along with extreme
+care until he reached the spot whence the light proceeded. As he
+had anticipated, it was caused by lights in a room below streaming
+through the cracks between the rough planking.
+
+Rising on to his knees he looked round, and then crawled to a
+crack that appeared much wider than the rest, the boards being more
+than half an inch apart. Lying down over it, he was able to obtain
+a view of a portion of the room below. He could see a part of a
+long table, and looked down upon the heads of five men sitting on
+one side of it. He now applied his ear to the crevice. A man was
+speaking, and in the intervals between the gusts of wind which
+shook the house to its foundation, he could hear what was said.
+
+"It is no use hesitating any longer, the time for action has arrived
+-- Jezebel must be removed -- interests of our holy religion --
+little danger in carrying out the plan that has been proposed. Next
+time -- Windsor -- road passes through wood near Datchet -- a weak
+guard overpowered -- two told off to execute -- free England from
+tyranny -- glory and honour throughout Catholic world. England
+disorganized and without a head could offer no resistance -- as
+soon as day fixed -- meet at Staines at house of -- final details
+and share each man is to -- done, scatter through country, readiness
+for rising -- Philip of Spain --"
+
+This was the last sentence Geoffrey caught, for when the speaker
+ceased a confused and general talk took place, and he could only
+catch a word here and there without meaning or connection. He
+therefore drew quietly back to the door of the loft and opened it.
+He thought first of jumping straight down, but in that case he
+could not have fastened the door behind him. He therefore made a
+sign to Lionel, who was anxiously peering round the corner of the
+out house. The pole was placed into position, and pulling the door
+after him and refastening the latch he made his way down to the
+ground, replaced the pole at the place from which they had taken
+it, and then retired in the direction from which they had come.
+
+"Well, what have you heard, Geoffrey?" Lionel asked. "Was it worth
+the risk you have run?"
+
+"Well worth it, Lionel. I could only hear a little of what was
+said, but that was quite enough to show that a plot is on foot to
+attack and kill the queen the next time she journeys to Windsor.
+The conspirators are to hide in a wood near Datchet."
+
+"You don't say so, Geoffrey. That is important news indeed. What
+are we to do next?"
+
+"I have not thought yet," Geoffrey replied. "I should say, though,
+our best plan would be to make our way back as quickly as we can
+by Burnham and Maldon round to Hedingham. The earl was going up
+to London one day this week, we may catch him before he starts; if
+not, we must, of course, follow him. But at any rate it is best to
+go home, for they will be in a terrible fright, especially if Joe
+Chambers or one of the men take the news to Bricklesey of the loss
+of the Susan, for it would be quickly carried up to Hedingham by
+John Lirriper or one or other of the boatmen. No day seems to be
+fixed, and the queen may not be going to Windsor for some little
+time, so the loss of a day will not make any difference. As we
+have money in our pockets we can hire horse at Burnham to take us
+to Maldon, and get others there to carry us home."
+
+An hour's walking took them to the ferry. It was now getting dusk,
+and they had come to the conclusion as they walked that it would
+be too late to attempt to get on that night beyond Burnham. The
+storm was as wild as ever, and although the passage was a narrow
+one it was as much as the ferryman could do to row the boat across.
+
+"How far is it from here to Burnham?"
+
+"About four miles; but you won't get to Burnham tonight."
+
+"How is that?" Geoffrey asked.
+
+"You may get as far as the ferry, but you won't get taken over.
+There will be a big sea in the Crouch, for the wind is pretty nigh
+straight up it; but you will be able to sleep at the inn this side.
+In the morning, if the wind has gone down, you can cross; if not,
+you will have to go round by the bridge, nigh ten miles higher up."
+
+This was unpleasant news. Not that it made any difference to them
+whether they slept on one side of the river or the other, but if
+the wind was too strong to admit of a passage in the morning, the
+necessity for making a detour would cost them many hours of valuable
+time. There was, however, no help for it, and they walked to Criksey
+Ferry. The little inn was crowded, for the ferry had been stopped
+all day, and many like themselves had been compelled to stop for
+a lull in the wind.
+
+Scarcely had they entered when their names were joyously shouted
+out, "Ah, Masters Vickars, right glad am I to see you. We feared
+that surf had put an end to you. We asked at the ferry, but the man
+declared that no strange lads had crossed that day, and we were
+fearing we should have a sad tale to send to Hedingham by John
+Lirriper."
+
+"We are truly glad to see you, Joe," Geoffrey said, as they warmly
+shook Joe Chambers and the two sailors by the hand. "How did you
+get ashore?"
+
+"On the mainmast, and pretty nigh drowned we were before we got
+there. I suppose the tide must have taken us a bit further up than
+it did you. We got here well nigh two hours ago, though we got a
+good meal and dried our clothes at a farmhouse."
+
+"We got a meal, too, soon after we landed," Geoffrey said; "but
+we did not dry our clothes till we got to a little village. I did
+not ask its name. I am awfully sorry, Joe, about the Susan."
+
+"It is a bad job, but it cannot be helped, Master Geoffrey. I
+owned a third of her, and two traders at Bricklesey own the other
+shares. Still I have no cause to grumble. I have laid by more than
+enough in the last four years to buy a share in another boat as
+good as she was. You see, a trader ain't like a smack. A trader's
+got only hull and sails, while a smack has got her nets beside,
+and they cost well nigh as much as the boat. Thankful enough we
+are that we have all escaped with our lives; and now I find you
+are safe my mind feels at rest over it."
+
+"Do you think it will be calm enough to cross in the morning, Joe?"
+
+"Like enough," the sailor replied; "a gale like this is like to
+blow itself out in twenty-four hours. It has been the worst I ever
+saw. It is not blowing now quite so hard as it did, and by the
+morning I reckon, though there may be a fresh wind, the gale will
+be over."
+
+The number of travellers were far too great for the accommodation
+of the inn; and with the exception of two or three of the first
+arrivals all slept on some hay in one of the barns.
+
+The next morning, although the wind was still strong, the fury
+of the gale had abated. The ferryman, however, said the water was
+so rough he must wait for a time before they crossed. But when
+Geoffrey offered him a reward to put their party on shore at once,
+he consented to do so,  Joe Chambers and the two sailors assisting
+with the oars; and as the ferry boat was large and strongly built,
+they crossed without further inconvenience than the wetting of
+their jackets.
+
+Joe Chambers, who knew the town perfectly, at once took them
+to a place where they were able to hire a couple of horses, and
+on these rode to Maldon, some nine miles away. Here they procured
+other horses, and it was not long after midday when they arrived
+at Hedingham.
+
+Mrs. Vickars held up her hands in astonishment at their shrunken
+garments; but her relief from the anxiety she had felt concerning
+what had befallen them during the gale was so great that she was
+unable to scold.
+
+"We will tell you all about it, mother, afterwards," Geoffrey
+said, as he released himself from her embrace. "We have had a great
+adventure, and the Susan has been wrecked. But this is nor the most
+important matter. Father, has the earl started yet?"
+
+"He was to have gone this morning, Geoffrey, but the floods are
+likely to be out, and the roads will be in such a state that I have
+no doubt he has put off his journey."
+
+"It is important that we should see him at once, father. We
+have overheard some people plotting against the queen's life, and
+measures must be taken at once for her safety. We will run up and
+change our things if you will go with us to see him. If you are
+there he will see you whatever he is doing, while if we go alone
+there might be delay."
+
+Without waiting for an answer the boys ran upstairs and quickly
+returned in fresh clothes. Mr. Vickars was waiting for them with
+his hat on.
+
+"You are quite sure of what you are saying, Geoffrey?" he observed
+as they walked towards the castle. "Remember, that if it should
+turn out an error, you are likely to come to sore disgrace instead
+of receiving commendation for your interference. Every one has been
+talking of plots against the queen for some time, and you may well
+have mistaken the purport of what you have heard."
+
+"There is no mistake, father, it is a real conspiracy, though who
+are those concerned in it I know not. Lionel and I are nor likely
+to raise a false alarm about anything, as you will say yourself
+when you hear the story I have to tell the earl."
+
+They had by this time entered the gates of the castle. "The earl
+has just finished dinner," one of the attendants replied in answer
+to the question of Mr. Vickars.
+
+"Will you tell him that I wish to see him on urgent business?"
+
+In two or three minutes the servant returned and asked the clergyman
+to follow him. The earl received him in his private chamber, for
+the castle was full with guests.
+
+"Well, dominie, what is it?" he asked. "You want some help, I will
+be bound, for somebody ill or in distress. I know pretty well by
+this time the meaning of your urgent business."
+
+"It is nothing of that kind today," the clergyman replied; "it is,
+in fact, my sons who wish to see your lordship. I do not myself
+know the full purport of their story, save that it is something
+which touches the safety of the queen."
+
+The earl's expression at once changed.
+
+"Is that so, young sirs? This is a serious matter, you know; it
+is a grave thing to bring an accusation against anyone in matters
+touching the state."
+
+"I am aware that it is, my lord, and assuredly my brother and I
+would not lightly meddle with such matters; but I think that you
+will say this is a business that should be attended to. It happened
+thus, sir." He then briefly told how, that being out in a ketch
+that traded from Bricklesey, they were caught in the gale; that
+the vessel was driven on the sands, and they were cast ashore on
+a mast.
+
+He then related the inhospitable reception they had met with. "It
+seemed strange to us, sir, and contrary to nature, that anyone
+should refuse to allow two shipwrecked lads to enter the house for
+shelter on such a day; and it seemed well nigh impossible that his
+tale of the place being too full to hold us could be true. However,
+we started to walk. On our way we met four horsemen going towards
+the house, closely muffled up in cloaks."
+
+"There was nothing very strange in that," the earl observed, "in
+such weather as we had yesterday."
+
+"Nothing at all, sir; we should not have given the matter one
+thought had it not been that the four men were very well mounted,
+and, apparently, gentlemen; and it was strange that such should have
+business in an out of the way house in Foulness Island. A little
+further we met three men on foot. They were also wrapped up
+in cloaks; but they wore high riding boots, and had probably left
+their horses on the other side of the ferry so as nor to attract
+attention. A short time afterwards we met two more horsemen, one
+of whom asked us if he was going right for the house we had been
+at. As he was speaking a gust of wind blew off his hat. I fetched
+it and gave it to him, and as he stooped to put it on I saw that a
+tonsure was shaven on the top of his head. The matter had already
+seemed strange to us; but the fact that one of this number of men,
+all going to a lonely house, was a priest in disguise, seemed so
+suspicious that my brother and myself determined to try and get to
+the bottom of it."
+
+Geoffrey then related how they had gone back to the house and
+effected an entrance into the loft extending over it; how he had
+through the cracks in the boards seen a party of men gathered in
+one of the lower rooms, and then repeated word for word the scraps
+of conversation that he had overheard.
+
+The earl had listened with an expression of amused doubt to the
+early portion of the narrative; but when Geoffrey came to the part
+where accident had shown to him that one of these men proceeding
+towards the house was a disguised priest, his face became serious,
+and he listened with deep attention to the rest of the narrative.
+
+"Faith," he said, "this is a serious matter, and you have done
+right well in following up your suspicions -- and in risking your
+lives, for they would assuredly have killed you had they discovered
+you. Mr. Vickars, your sons must ride with me to London at once.
+The matter is too grave for a moment's delay. I must lay it before
+Burleigh at once. A day's delay might be fatal."
+
+He rang a bell standing on the table. As soon as an attendant
+answered it he said, "Order three horses to be saddled at once; I
+must ride to London with these young gentlemen without delay. Order
+Parsons and Nichols to be ready in half an hour to set out with
+us.
+
+"Have you had food, young sirs? for it seems you came hither directly
+you arrived." Finding that the boys had eaten nothing since they
+had left Maldon, he ordered food to be brought them, and begged
+them eat it while he explained to the countess and the guests
+that sudden business that could not be delayed called him away to
+London. Half an hour later he started with the boys, the two servants
+following behind. Late that evening they arrived in London. It was
+too late to call on Lord Burleigh that night; but early the next
+morning the earl took the boys with him to the house of the great
+statesman. Leaving them in the antechamber he went in to the inner
+apartment, where the minister was at breakfast. Ten minutes later
+he came out, and called the boys in.
+
+"The Earl of Oxford has told me your story," Lord Burleigh said.
+"Tell it me again, and omit nothing; for things that seem small
+are often of consequence in a matter like this."
+
+Geoffrey again repeated his story, giving full details of all that
+had taken place from the time of their first reaching the house.
+
+Lord Burleigh then questioned him closely as to whether they had
+seen any of the faces of the men, and would recognize them again.
+
+"I saw none from my spying place above, my lord," Geoffrey said.
+"I could see only the tops of their heads, and most of them still
+kept their hats on; nor did we see them as they passed, with
+the exception only of the man I supposed to be a priest. His face
+I saw plainly. It was smooth shaven; his complexion was dark, his
+eyebrows were thin and straight, his face narrow. I should take
+him for a foreigner -- either a Spaniard or Italian."
+
+Lord Burleigh made a note of this description.
+
+"Thanks, young sirs," he said. "I shall, of course, take measures
+to prevent this plot being carried out, and shall inform her majesty
+how bravely you both risked your lives to discover this conspiracy
+against her person. The Earl of Oxford informs me that you are
+pages of his cousin, Captain Francis Vere, a very brave and valiant
+gentleman; and that you bore your part bravely in the siege of
+Sluys, but are at present at home to rest after your labours there,
+and have permission of Captain Vere to take part in any trouble
+that may arise here owing to the action of the Spaniards. I have
+now no further occasion for your services, and you can return with
+the earl to Hedingham, but your attendance in London will be needed
+when we lay hands upon these conspirators."
+
+The same day they rode back to Hedingham, but ten days later were
+again summoned to London. The queen had the day before journeyed to
+Windsor. Half an hour before she arrived at the wood near Datchet
+a strong party of her guard had suddenly surrounded it, and had
+found twelve armed men lurking there. These had been arrested and
+lodged in the Tower. Three of them were foreigners, the rest members
+of Catholic families known to be favourable to the Spanish cause.
+Their trial was conducted privately, as it was deemed advisable
+that as little should be made as possible of this and other similar
+plots against the queen's life that were discovered about this
+time.
+
+Geoffrey and Lionel gave their evidence before the council. As the
+only man they could have identified was not of the party captured,
+their evidence only went to show the motive of this gathering in the
+wood near Datchet. The prisoners stoutly maintained that Geoffrey
+had misunderstood the conversation he had partly overheard, and
+that their design was simply to make the queen a prisoner and force
+her to abdicate. Three of the prisoners, who had before been banished
+from the country and who had secretly returned, were sentenced to
+death; two of the others to imprisonment for a long term of years,
+the rest to banishment from England.
+
+After the trial was over Lord Burleigh sent for the boys, and gave
+them a very gracious message in the queen's name, together with two
+rings in token of her majesty's gratitude. Highly delighted with
+these honours they returned to Hedingham, and devoted themselves
+even more assiduously than before to exercises in arms, in order
+that they might some day prove themselves valiant soldiers of the
+queen.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII
+
+THE SPANISH ARMADA
+
+
+The struggle that was at hand between Spain and England had long
+been foreseen as inevitable. The one power was the champion of
+Roman Catholicism, the other of Protestantism; and yet, although so
+much hung upon the result of the encounter, and all Europe looked
+on with the most intense interest, both parties entered upon the
+struggle without allies, and this entirely from the personal fault
+of the sovereigns of the two nations.
+
+Queen Elizabeth, by her constant intrigues, her underhand dealings
+with France and Spain, her grasping policy in the Netherlands,
+her meanness and parsimony, and the fact that she was ready at any
+moment to sacrifice the Netherlands to her own policy, had wholly
+alienated the people of the Low Country; for while their own
+efforts for defence were paralysed by the constant interference
+of Elizabeth, no benefit was obtained from the English army, whose
+orders were to stand always on the defensive -- the queen's only
+anxiety appearing to be to keep her grasp upon the towns that had
+been handed over to her as the price of her alliance.
+
+Her own counsellors were driven to their wits' end by her constant
+changes of purpose. Her troops were starving and in rags from her
+parsimony, the fleet lay dismantled and useless from want of funds,
+and except such arming and drilling as took place at the expense of
+the nobles, counties, and cities, no preparation whatever was made
+to meet the coming storm. Upon the other hand, Philip of Spain,
+who might have been at the head of a great Catholic league against
+England, had isolated himself by his personal ambitions. Had he
+declared himself ready, in the event of his conquest of England, to
+place James of Scotland upon the throne, he would have had Scotland
+with him, together with the Catholics of England, still a powerful
+and important body.
+
+France, too, would have joined him, and the combination against
+Elizabeth and the Protestants of England would have been well nigh
+irresistible. But this he could not bring himself to do. His dream
+was the annexation of England to Spain; and smarting as the English
+Catholics were under the execution of Mary of Scotland, their
+English spirit revolted against the idea of the rule of Spain,
+and the great Catholic nobles hastened, when the moment of danger
+arrived, to join in the defence of their country, while Scotland,
+seeing no advantage to be gained in the struggle, stood sullenly
+aloof, and France gave no aid to a project which was to result,
+if successful, in the aggrandizement of her already dangerously
+formidable neighbour.
+
+Thus England and Spain stood alone -- Philip slowly but steadily
+preparing for the great expedition for the conquest of England,
+Elizabeth hesitating, doubtful; at one moment gathering seamen and
+arming her fleet, a month or two later discharging the sailors and
+laying up the ships.
+
+In the spring of 1587 Drake, with six vessels belonging to the crown
+and twenty-four equipped by merchants of London and other places,
+had seized a moment when Elizabeth's fickle mind had inclined to
+warlike measures, and knowing that the mood might last but a day,
+had slipped out of Plymouth and sailed for Spain a few hours before
+a messenger arrived with a peremptory order from Elizabeth against
+entering any Spanish port or offering violence to any Spanish town
+or ships. Although caught in a gale in the Channel, Drake held on,
+and, reaching Gibraltar on the 16th April, ascertained that Cadiz
+was crowded with transports and store ships.
+
+Vice Admiral Burroughs, controller of the navy, who had been specially
+appointed to thwart Drake's plans, opposed any action being taken;
+but Drake insisted upon attack, and on the 19th the fleet stood in
+to Cadiz harbour. Passing through the fire of the batteries, they
+sank the only great ship of war in the roads, drove off the Spanish
+galleys, and seized the vast fleet of store ships loaded with
+wine, corn, and provisions of all sorts for the use of the Armada.
+Everything of value that could be conveniently moved was transferred
+to the English ships, then the Spanish vessels were set on fire,
+their cables cut, and were left to drift in an entangled mass of
+flame. Drake took a number of prisoners, and sent a messenger on
+shore proposing to exchange them for such English seamen as were
+prisoners in Spain.  The reply was there were no English prisoners
+in Spain; and as this notoriously untrue, it was agreed in the
+fleet that all the Spaniards they might take in the future should
+be sold to the Moors, and the money reserved for the redeeming of
+such Englishmen as might be in captivity there or elsewhere.
+
+The English fleet then sailed for Cape St. Vincent, picking up on
+their way large convoys of store ships all bound for the Tagus,
+where the Armada was collecting. These were all burned, and Drake
+brought up at Cape St. Vincent, hoping to meet there a portion
+of the Armada expected from the Mediterranean. As a harbour was
+necessary, he landed, stormed the fort at Faro, and took possession
+of the harbour there. The expected enemy did not appear, and Drake
+sailed up to the mouth of the Tagus, intending to go into Lisbon
+and attack the great Spanish fleet lying there under its admiral,
+Santa Cruz. That the force gathered there was enormous Drake well
+knew, but relying as much on the goodness of his cause as on the
+valour of his sailors, and upon the fact that the enemy would be
+too crowded together to fight with advantage, he would have carried
+out his plan had not a ship arrived from England with orders
+forbidding him to enter the Tagus. However, he lay for some time
+at the mouth of the river, destroying every ship that entered
+its mouth, and sending in a challenge to Santa Cruz to come out
+and fight. The Spanish admiral did not accept it, and Drake then
+sailed to Corunna, and there, as at Cadiz, destroyed all the ships
+collected in the harbour and then returned to England, having in
+the course of a few months inflicted an enormous amount of damage
+upon Spain, and having taken the first step to prove that England
+was the mistress of the sea.
+
+But while the little band of English had been defending Sluys
+against the army of the Duke of Parma, Philip had been continuing
+his preparations, filling up the void made by the destruction
+wrought by Drake, and preparing an Armada which he might well have
+considered to be invincible. Elizabeth was still continuing her
+negotiations. She was quite ready to abandon the Netherlands to
+Spain if she could but keep the towns she held there, but she could
+nor bring herself to hand these over either to the Netherlands or
+to Spain. She urged the States to make peace, to which they replied
+that they did not wish for peace on such terms as Spain would alone
+grant; they could defend themselves for ten years longer if left
+alone, they did not ask for further help, and only wanted their
+towns restored to them.
+
+Had the Armada started as Philip intended in September, it would have
+found England entirely unprepared, for Elizabeth still obstinately
+refused to believe in danger, and the few ships that had been
+held in commission after Drake's return had been so long neglected
+that they could hardly keep the sea without repair; the rest lay
+unrigged in the Medway. But the delay gave England fresh time for
+preparation. Parma's army was lying in readiness for the invasion
+under canvas at Dunkirk, and their commander had received no
+information from Spain that the sailing of the Armada was delayed.
+
+The cold, wet, and exposure told terribly upon them, and of the
+30,000 who were ready to embark in September not 18,000 were fit
+for service at the commencement of the year. The expenses of this
+army and of the Armada were so great that Philip was at last driven
+to give orders to the Armada to start. But fortune again favoured
+England. Had the fleet sailed as ordered on the 30th of January
+they would again have found the Channel undefended, for Elizabeth,
+in one of her fits of economy, had again dismantled half the fleet
+that had been got ready for sea, and sent the sailors to their
+homes.
+
+But the execution of Philip's orders was prevented by the sudden
+death of Santa Cruz. The Duke of Medina Sidonia was appointed his
+successor, but as he knew nothing of the state of the Armada fresh
+delays became necessary, and the time was occupied by Elizabeth,
+not in preparing for the defence of the country, but in fresh
+negotiations for peace. She was ready to make any concessions to
+Spain, but Philip was now only amusing himself by deceiving her.
+Everything was now prepared for the expedition, and just as the fleet
+was ready to start, the negotiations were broken off. But though
+Elizabeth's government had made no preparations for the defence
+of the country, England herself had not been idle. Throughout the
+whole country men had been mustered, officered, and armed, and
+100,000 were ready to move as soon as the danger became imminent.
+
+The musters of the Midland counties, 80,000 strong, were to form a
+separate army, and were to march at once to a spot between Windsor
+and Harrow. The rest were to gather at the point of danger. The
+coast companies were to fall back wherever the enemy landed, burning
+the corn and driving off the cattle, and avoiding a battle until
+the force of the neighbouring counties joined them. Should the
+landing take place as was expected in Suffolk, Kent, or Sussex,
+it was calculated that between 30,000 and 40,000 men would bar the
+way to the invaders before they reached London, while 20,000 men of
+the western counties would remain to encounter the Duke of Guise,
+who had engaged to bring across an army of Frenchmen to aid the
+Spaniards.
+
+Spain, although well aware of the strength of England on the sea,
+believed that she would have no difficulty with the raw English
+levies; but Parma, who had met the English at Sluys, had learnt to
+respect their fighting qualities, and in a letter to Philip gave
+the opinion that even if the Armada brought him a reinforcement of
+6000 men he would still have an insufficient force for the conquest
+of England. He said, "When I shall have landed I must fight battle
+after battle. I shall lose men by wounds and disease, I must leave
+detachments behind me to keep open my communications, and in a
+short time the body of my army will become so weak that not only I
+may be unable to advance in the face of the enemy, and time may be
+given to the heretics and your majesty's other enemies to interfere,
+but there may fall out some notable inconvenience, with the loss
+of everything, and I be unable to remedy it."
+
+Unfortunately, the English fleet was far less prepared than the
+land forces. The militia had been easily and cheaply extemporized,
+but a fleet can only be prepared by long and painful sacrifices.
+The entire English navy contained but thirteen ships of over four
+hundred tons, and including small cutters and pinnaces there were
+but thirty- eight vessels of all sorts and sizes carrying the
+queen's flag. Fortunately, Sir John Hawkins was at the head of the
+naval administration, and in spite of the parsimony of Elizabeth
+had kept the fleet in a good state of repair and equipment. The
+merchant navy, although numerous, was equally deficient in vessels
+of any size.
+
+Philip had encouraged ship building in Spain by grants from the
+crown, allowing four ducats a ton for every ship built of above
+three hundred tons burden, and six ducats a ton for every one above
+five hundred tons. Thus he had a large supply of great ships to
+draw upon in addition to those of the royal navy, while in England
+the largest vessels belonging to private owners did not exceed four
+hundred tons, and there were not more than two or three vessels of
+that size sailing from any port of the country. The total allowance
+by the queen for the repair of the whole of the royal navy, wages
+of shipwrights, clerks, carpenters, watchmen, cost of timber, and,
+all other necessary dockyard expenses, was but 4000 pounds a year.
+
+In December the fleet was ready for sea, together with the contingent
+furnished by the liberality and patriotism of the merchants and
+citizens of the great ports. But as soon as it was got together
+half the crews collected and engaged at so great an expense were
+dismissed, the merchant ships released, and England open to invasion,
+and had Parma started in the vessels he had prepared, Lord Howard,
+who commanded the English navy, could not have fired a shot to have
+prevented his crossing.
+
+Well might Sir John Hawkins in his despair at Elizabeth's caprices
+exclaim: "We are wasting money, wasting strength, dishonouring
+and discrediting ourselves by our uncertain dallying." But though
+daily reports came from Spain of the readiness of the Armada to
+set sail, Elizabeth, even when she again permitted the navy to be
+manned, fettered it by allowing it to be provided with rations for
+only a month at a time, and permitting no reserves to be provided
+in the victualling stores; while the largest vessels were supplied
+with ammunition for only a day and a half's service, and the rest
+of the fleet with but enough for one day's service. The council
+could do nothing, and Lord Howard's letters prove that the queen,
+and she only, was responsible for the miserable state of things
+that prevailed.
+
+At last, in May, Lord Howard sailed with the fleet down Channel,
+leaving Lord Henry Seymour with three men of war and a squadron of
+privateers to watch Dunkirk. At Plymouth the admiral found Drake with
+forty ships, all except one raised and sent to sea at the expense
+of himself and the gentry and merchants of the west counties. The
+weather was wild, as it had been all the winter. Howard with the
+great ships lay at anchor in the Sound, rolling heavily, while the
+smaller craft went for shelter into the mouth of the river. There
+were but eighteen days' provisions on board; fresh supplies promised
+did not arrive, and the crews were put on half rations, and eked
+these out by catching fish. At last, when the supplies were just
+exhausted, the victualling ships arrived, with one month's fresh
+rations, and a message that no more would be sent. So villainous
+was the quality of the stores that fever broke out in the fleet.
+
+It was not until the end of the month that Elizabeth would even
+permit any further preparations to be made, and the supplies took
+some time collecting. The crews would have been starved had not
+the officers so divided the rations as to make them last six weeks.
+The men died in scores from dysentery brought on by the sour and
+poisonous beer issued to them, and Howard and Drake ordered wine
+and arrow root from the town for the use of the sick, and had to
+pay for it from their own pockets.
+
+But at last the Armada was ready for starting. Contingents of
+Spanish, Italians, and Portuguese were gathered together with the
+faithful from all countries -- Jesuits from France; exiled priests,
+Irish and English; and many Catholic Scotch, English, and Irish
+noblemen and gentlemen. The six squadrons into which the fleet
+was divided contained sixty-five large war ships, the smallest of
+which was seven hundred tons. Seven were over one thousand, and
+the largest, an Italian ship, La Regazona, was thirteen hundred.
+All were built high like castles, their upper works musket proof,
+their main timbers four or five feet thick, and of a strength it
+was supposed no English cannon could pierce.
+
+Next to the big ships, or galleons as they were called, were four
+galleasses, each carrying fifty guns and 450 soldiers and sailors,
+and rowed by 300 slaves. Besides these were four galleys, fifty-six
+great armed merchant ships, the finest Spain possessed, and twenty
+caravels or small vessels. Thus the fighting fleet amounted to
+129 vessels, carrying in all 2430 cannon. On board was stored an
+enormous quantity of provisions for the use of the army after it
+landed in England, there being sufficient to feed 40,000 men for
+six months.
+
+There were on board 8000 sailors, 19,000 soldiers, 1000 gentlemen
+volunteers, 600 priests, servants, and miscellaneous officers, and
+2000 galley slaves. This was indeed a tremendous array to meet the
+fleet lying off Plymouth, consisting of 29 queen's ships of all
+sizes, 10 small vessels belonging to Lord Howard and members of
+his family, and 43 privateers between 40 and 400 tons under Drake,
+the united crews amounting to something over 9000 men.
+
+The winter had passed pleasantly to Geoffrey and Lionel Vickars;
+the earl had taken a great fancy to them, and they had stayed for
+some time in London as members of his suite. When the spring came
+they had spoken about rejoining Francis Vere in Holland, but the
+earl had said that there was little doing there. The enmity excited
+by the conduct of Elizabeth prevented any cooperation between the
+Dutch and English; and indeed the English force was reduced to
+such straits by the refusal of the queen to furnish money for their
+pay, or to provide funds for even absolute necessaries, that it
+was wholly incapable of taking the field, and large numbers of the
+men returned to England.
+
+Had this treatment of her soldiers and sailors at the time when such
+peril threatened their country been occasioned by want of funds,
+some excuse would have been possible for the conduct of Elizabeth;
+but at the time there were large sums lying in the treasury, and
+it was parsimony and not incapacity to pay that actuated Elizabeth
+in the course she pursued.
+
+As the boys were still uneasy as to the opinion Francis Vere might
+form of their continued stay in England, they wrote to him, their
+letter being inclosed in one from the earl; but the reply set their
+minds at rest -- "By all means stay in England," Captain Vere wrote,
+"since there is nothing doing here of any note or consequence, nor
+likely to be. We are simply idling our time in Bergen op Zoom, and
+not one of us but is longing to be at home to bear his part in the
+events pending there. It is hard, indeed, to be confined in this
+miserable Dutch town while England is in danger. Unfortunately
+we are soldiers and must obey orders; but as you are as yet only
+volunteers, free to act as you choose, it would be foolish in the
+extreme for you to come over to this dull place while there is so
+much going on in England. I have written to my cousin, asking him
+to introduce you to some of the country gentlemen who have fitted
+out a ship for service against the Spaniards, so that you may have
+a hand in what is going on."
+
+This the earl had done, and early in May they had journeyed down
+to Plymouth on horseback with a party of other gentlemen who were
+going on board the Active, a vessel of two hundred and fifty tons
+belonging to a gentleman of Devonshire, one Master Audrey Drake,
+a relation of Sir Francis Drake. The earl himself was with the
+party. He did not intend to go on board, for he was a bad sailor;
+and though ready, as he said, to do his share of fighting upon
+land, would be only an encumbrance on board a ship.
+
+He went down principally at the request of Cecil and other members
+of the council, who, knowing that he was a favourite of the queen,
+thought that his representations as to the state of the fleet might
+do more than they could do to influence her to send supplies to the
+distressed sailors. The earl visited the ships lying in the mouth
+of the Tamar, and three times started in a boat to go out to those
+in the Sound; but the sea was so rough, and he was so completely
+prostrated by sickness, that he had each time to put back. What he
+saw, however, on board the ships he visited, and heard from Lord
+Howard as to the state of those at sea, was quite sufficient. He
+at once expended a considerable amount of money in buying wine and
+fresh meat for the sick, and then hurried away to London to lay
+before the queen the result of his personal observations, and to
+implore her to order provisions to be immediately despatched to
+the fleet.
+
+But even the description given by one of her favourites of the
+sufferings of the seamen was insufficient to induce the queen to
+open her purse strings, and the earl left her in great dudgeon;
+and although his private finances had been much straitened by his
+extravagance and love of display, he at once chartered a ship,
+filled her with provisions, and despatched her to Plymouth.
+
+Mr. Drake and the gentlemen with him took up their abode in the
+town until there should be need for them to go on board the Active,
+where the accommodation was much cramped, and life by no means
+agreeable; and the Vickars therefore escaped sharing the sufferings
+of those on board ship.
+
+At the end of May came the news that the Armada had sailed on the
+19th, and high hopes were entertained that the period of waiting
+had terminated. A storm, however, scattered the great fleet, and
+it was not until the 12th of July that they sailed from the Bay of
+Ferrol, where they had collected after the storm.
+
+Never was there known a season so boisterous as the summer of
+1588, and when off Ushant, in a southwest gale, four galleys were
+wrecked on the French coast, and the Santa Anna, a galleon of 800
+tons, went down, carrying with her ninety seamen, three hundred
+soldiers, and 50,000 ducats in gold.
+
+After two days the storm abated, and the fleet again proceeded.
+At daybreak on the 20th the Lizard was in sight, and an English
+fishing boat was seen running along their line. Chase was given, but
+she soon out sailed her pursuers, and carried the news to Plymouth.
+The Armada had already been made out from the coast the night before,
+and beacon lights had flashed the news all over England. In every
+village and town men were arming and saddling and marching away to
+the rendezvous of the various corps.
+
+In Plymouth the news was received with the greatest rejoicing.
+Thanks to the care with which the provisions had been husbanded,
+and to the manner in which the officers and volunteers had from
+their private means supplemented the scanty stores, there was
+still a week's provisions on board, and this, it was hoped, would
+suffice for their needs. The scanty supply of ammunition was a
+greater source of anxiety; but they hoped that fresh supplies would
+be forthcoming, now that even the queen could no longer close her
+eyes to the urgent necessity of the case.
+
+As soon as the news arrived all the gentlemen in the town flocked
+on board the ships, and on the night of the 19th the queen's
+ships and some of the privateers went to moorings behind Ram Head,
+so that they could make clear to sea; and on the morning when the
+Spaniards sighted the Lizard, forty sail were lying ready for action
+under the headland.
+
+At three o'clock in the afternoon the lookout men on the hill
+reported a line of sails on the western horizon. Two wings were at
+first visible, which were gradually united as the topsails of those
+in the centre rose above the line of sea. As they arose it could
+be seen that the great fleet was sailing, in the form of a huge
+crescent, before a gentle wind. A hundred and fifty ships, large
+and small, were counted, as a few store ships bound for Flanders
+had joined the Armada for protection.
+
+The Active was one of the privateers that had late the evening before
+gone out to Ram Head, and just as it was growing dusk the anchors
+were got up, and the little fleet sailed out from the shelter of
+the land as the Armada swept along.
+
+The Spanish admiral at once ordered the fleet to lie to for the
+night, and to prepare for a general action at daybreak, as he knew
+from a fisherman he had captured that the English fleet were at
+Plymouth. The wind was on shore, but all through the night Howard's
+and Drake's ships beat out from the Sound until they took their
+places behind the Spanish fleet, whose position they could perfectly
+make out by the light of the half moon that rose at two in the
+morning.
+
+On board the English fleet all was confidence and hilarity. The
+sufferings of the last three months were forgotten. The numbers and
+magnitude of the Spanish ships counted as nothing. The sailors of
+the west country had met the Spaniards on the Indian seas and proved
+their masters, and doubted not for a moment that they should do so
+again.
+
+There was scarce a breath of air when day broke, but at eight
+o'clock a breeze sprang up from the west, and the Armada made sail
+and attempted to close with the English; but the low, sharp English
+ships sailed two feet to the one of the floating castles of Spain,
+and could sail close to the wind, while the Spanish ships, if they
+attempted to close haul their sails, drifted bodily to leeward.
+Howard's flagship, the Ark Raleigh, with three other English ships,
+opened the engagement by running down along their rear line, firing
+into each galleon as they passed, then wearing round and repeating
+the manoeuvre. The great San Mateo luffed out from the rest of the
+fleet and challenged them to board, but they simply poured their
+second broadside into her and passed on.
+
+The excellence of the manoeuvring of the English ships, and the
+rapidity and accuracy of their fire, astonished the Spaniards.
+Throughout the whole forenoon the action continued; the Spaniards
+making efforts to close, but in vain, the English ships keeping
+the weather gage and sailing continually backwards and forwards,
+pouring in their broadsides. The height and size of the Spanish ships
+were against them; and being to leeward they heeled over directly
+they came up to the wind to fire a broadside, and their shots for
+the most part went far over their assailants, while they themselves
+suffered severely from the English fire. Miquel de Oquendo, who
+commanded one of the six Spanish squadrons, distinguished himself
+by his attempts to close with the English, and by maintaining his
+position in the rear of the fleet engaged in constant conflict with
+them.
+
+He was a young nobleman of great promise, distinguished alike for
+his bravery and chivalrous disposition; but he could do little
+while the wind remained in the west and the English held the weather
+gage. So far only the ships that had been anchored out under Ram
+Head had taken part in the fight, those lying higher up in the
+Sound being unable to make their way out. At noon the exertions of
+their crews, who had from the preceding evening worked incessantly,
+prevailed, and they were now seen coming out from behind the headland
+to take part in the struggle. Medina Sidonia signalled to his fleet
+to make sail up Channel, Martinez de Ricaldo covering the rear
+with the squadron of Biscay. He was vice admiral of the fleet, and
+considered to be the best seaman Spain possessed now that Santa
+Cruz was dead.
+
+The wind was now rising. Lord Howard sent off a fast boat with
+letters to Lord Henry Seymour, telling him how things had gone so
+far, and bidding him be prepared for the arrival of the Spanish
+fleet in the Downs. As the afternoon went on the wind rose, and a
+rolling sea came in from the west. Howard still hung upon the Spanish
+rear, firing but seldom in order to save his powder. As evening
+fell, the Spanish vessels, huddled closely together, frequently came
+into collision with one another, and in one of these the Capitana,
+the flagship of the Andalusian division, commanded by Admiral
+Pedro de Valdez, had her bowsprit carried away, the foremast fell
+overboard, and the ship dropped out of her place.
+
+Two of the galleasses came to her assistance and tried to take her
+in tow, but the waves were running so high that the cable broke.
+Pedro de Valdez had been commander of the Spanish fleet on the coast
+of Holland, and knew the English Channel and the northern shores
+of France and Holland well.
+
+The duke therefore despatched boats to bring him off with his
+crew, but he refused to leave his charge. Howard, as with his ships
+he passed her, believed her to be deserted and went on after the
+fleet; but a London vessel kept close to her and exchanged shots
+with her all night, until Drake, who had turned aside to chase what
+he believed to be a portion of the Spanish fleet that had separated
+itself from the rest, but which turned out to be the merchant ships
+that had joined it for protection, came up, and the Capitana struck
+her flag. Drake took her into Torbay, and there left her in the
+care of the Brixham fishermen, and taking with him Valdez and the
+other officers sailed away to join Lord Howard. The fishermen, on
+searching the ship, found some tons of gunpowder on board her.
+
+Knowing the scarcity of ammunition in the fleet they placed this
+on board the Roebuck, the fastest trawler in the harbour, and she
+started at once in pursuit of the fleet.
+
+The misfortune to the Capitana was not the only one that befell
+the Spaniards. While Oquendo was absent from his galleon a quarrel
+arose among the officers, who were furious at the ill result of the
+day's fighting. The captain struck the master gunner with a stick;
+the latter, a German, rushed below in a rage, thrust a burning fuse
+into a powder barrel, and sprang through a porthole into the sea.
+The whole of the deck was blown up, with two hundred sailors and
+soldiers; but the ship was so strongly built that she survived the
+shock, and her mast still stood.
+
+The duke sent boats to learn what had happened. These carried
+off the few who remained unhurt, but there was no means of taking
+off the wounded. These, however, were treated kindly and sent on
+shore when the ship was picked up at daylight by the English, who,
+on rifling her, found to their delight that there were still many
+powder barrels on board that had escaped the explosion.
+
+The morning broke calm, and the wind, when it came, was from the
+east, which gave the Spaniards the advantage of position. The two
+fleets lay idle all day three or four miles apart, and the next
+morning, as the wind was still from the east, the Spaniards bore
+down upon Howard to offer battle.
+
+The English, however, headed out to sea. Encouraged by seeing
+their assailants avoid a pitched battle the Spaniards gave chase.
+The San Marcos, the fastest sailer in the fleet, left the rest
+behind, and when the breeze headed round at noon she was several
+miles to windward of her consorts, and the English at once set upon
+her. She fought with extreme courage, and defended herself single
+handed for an hour and a half, when Oquendo came up to the rescue,
+and as the action off Plymouth had almost exhausted his stock
+of powder, and the Brixham sloop had not yet come up, Howard was
+obliged to draw off.
+
+The action of this day was fought off Portland. During the three
+days the British fleet had been to sea they had received almost
+hourly reinforcements. From every harbour and fishing port along
+the coast from Plymouth to the Isle of Wight vessels of all sizes,
+smacks, and boats put off, crowded with noblemen and gentlemen
+anxious to take part in the action, and their enthusiasm added to
+that of the weary and ill fed sailors. At the end of the third day
+the English fleet had increased to a hundred sail, many of which,
+however, were of very small burden.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX
+
+THE ROUT OF THE ARMADA
+
+
+The fight between the fleets had begun on Sunday morning, and at the
+end of the third day the strength of the Armada remained unbroken.
+The moral effect had no doubt been great, but the loss of two or
+three ships was a trifle to so large a force, and the spirit of
+the Spaniards had been raised by the gallant and successful defence
+the San Marcos had made on the Tuesday afternoon. Wednesday was
+again calm. The magazines of the English ships were empty. Though
+express after express had been sent off praying that ammunition
+might be sent, none had arrived, and the two fleets lay six miles
+apart without action, save that the galleasses came out and skirmished
+for a while with the English ships.
+
+That evening, however, a supply of ammunition sufficient for another
+day's fighting arrived, and soon after daybreak the English fleet
+moved down towards the Armada, and for the first time engaged them
+at close quarters. The Ark Raleigh, the Bear, the Elizabeth Jones,
+the Lion, and the Victory bore on straight into the centre of the
+Spanish galleons, exchanging broadsides with each as they passed.
+Oquendo with his vessel was right in the course of the English
+flagship, and a collision took place, in which the Ark Raleigh's
+rudder was unshipped, and she became unmanageable.
+
+The enemy's vessels closed round her, but she lowered her boats,
+and these, in spite of the fire of the enemy, brought her head round
+before the wind, and she made her way through her antagonists and
+got clear. For several hours the battle continued. The Spanish fire
+was so slow, and their ships so unwieldy, that it was rarely they
+succeeded in firing a shot into their active foes, while the English
+shot tore their way through the massive timbers of the Spanish
+vessels, scattering the splinters thickly among the soldiers, who
+had been sent below to be out of harm's way; but beyond this, and
+inflicting much damage upon masts and spars, the day's fighting
+had no actual results. No captures were made by the English.
+
+The Spaniards suffered, but made no sign; nevertheless their
+confidence in their powers was shaken. Their ammunition was also
+running short, and they had no hope of refilling their magazines
+until they effected a junction with Parma. Their admiral that night
+wrote to him asking that two shiploads of shot and powder might
+be sent to him immediately. "The enemy pursue me," he said; "they
+fire upon me most days from morning till nightfall, but they will
+not close and grapple. I have given them every opportunity. I
+have purposely left ships exposed to tempt them to board, but they
+decline to do it; and there is no remedy, for they are swift and we
+are slow. They have men and ammunition in abundance." The Spanish
+admiral was unaware that the English magazines were even more empty
+than his own.
+
+On Friday morning Howard sailed for Dover to take in the supplies
+that were so sorely needed. The Earl of Sussex, who was in command
+of the castle, gave him all that he had, and the stores taken from
+the prizes came up in light vessels and were divided among the
+fleet, and in the evening the English fleet again sailed out and
+took up its place in the rear of the Armada. On Saturday morning
+the weather changed. After six days of calm and sunshine it began
+to blow hard from the west, with driving showers. The Spaniards,
+having no pilots who knew the coasts, anchored off Calais. The
+English fleet, closely watching their movements, brought up two
+miles astern.
+
+The Spanish admiral sent off another urgent letter to Parma
+at Dunkirk, begging him to send immediately thirty or forty fast
+gunboats to keep the English at bay. Parma had received the admiral's
+letters, and was perfectly ready to embark his troops, but could
+not do this as the admiral expected he would, until the fleet came
+up to protect him. The lighters and barges he had constructed for
+the passage were only fit to keep the sea in calm weather, and
+would have been wholly at the mercy of even a single English ship
+of war. He could not, therefore, embark his troops until the duke
+arrived. As to the gunboats asked for, he had none with him.
+
+But while the Spanish admiral had grave cause for uneasiness in
+the situation in which he found himself, Lord Howard had no greater
+reason for satisfaction. In spite of his efforts the enemy's
+fleet had arrived at their destination with their strength still
+unimpaired, and were in communication with the Duke of Parma's
+army. Lord Seymour had come up with a squadron from the mouth of
+the Thames, but his ships had but one day's provisions on board,
+while Drake and Howard's divisions had all but exhausted their
+supplies. The previous day's fighting had used up the ammunition
+obtained at Dover. Starvation would drive every English ship from
+the sea in another week at the latest. The Channel would then be
+open for the passage of Parma's army.
+
+At five o'clock on Sunday evening a council of war was held in Lord
+Howard's cabin, and it was determined, that as it was impossible
+to attack the Spanish Fleet where they lay at the edge of shallow
+water, an attempt must be made to drive them out into the Channel
+with fireships. Eight of the private vessels were accordingly taken,
+and such combustibles as could be found -- pitch, tar, old sails,
+empty casks, and other materials -- were piled into them. At
+midnight the tide set directly from the English fleet towards the
+Spaniards, and the fireships, manned by their respective crews,
+hoisted sail and drove down towards them.
+
+When near the Armada the crews set fire to the combustibles, and
+taking to their boats rowed back to the fleet. At the sight of the
+flames bursting up from the eight ships bearing down upon them,
+the Spaniards were seized with a panic. The admiral fired a gun as
+a signal, and all cut their cables and hoisted sail, and succeeded
+in getting out to sea before the fireships arrived. They lay to six
+miles from shore, intending to return in the morning and recover
+their anchors; but Drake with his division of the fleet, and Seymour
+with the squadron from the Thames, weighed their anchors and stood
+off after them, while Howard with his division remained off Calais,
+where, in the morning, the largest of the four galleasses was seen
+aground on Calais Bar. Lord Howard wasted many precious hours in
+capturing her before he set off to join Drake and Seymour, who were
+thundering against the Spanish fleet. The wind had got up during
+the night, and the Spaniards had drifted farther than they expected,
+and when morning dawned were scattered over the sea off Gravelines.
+Signals were made for them to collect, but before they could do so
+Drake and Seymour came up and opened fire within pistol shot. The
+English admiral saw at once that, with the wind rising from the
+south, if he could drive the unwieldy galleons north they would
+be cut off from Dunkirk, and would not be able to beat back again
+until there was a change of wind.
+
+All through the morning the English ships poured a continuous
+shower of shot into the Spanish vessels, which, huddled together
+in a confused mass, were unable to make any return whatever. The
+duke and Oquendo, with some of the best sailors among the Fleet,
+tried to beat out from the crowd and get room to manoeuvre, but
+Drake's ships were too weatherly and too well handled to permit
+of this, and they were driven back again into the confused mass,
+which was being slowly forced towards the shoals and banks of the
+coasts.
+
+Howard came up at noon with his division, and until sunset the fire
+was maintained, by which time almost the last cartridge was spent,
+and the crews worn our by their incessant labour. They took no
+prizes, for they never attempted to board. They saw three great
+galleons go down, and three more drift away towards the sands of
+Ostend, where they were captured either by the English garrisoned
+there or by three vessels sent by Lord Willoughby from Flushing,
+under the command of Francis Vere. Had the English ammunition lasted
+but a few more hours the whole of the Armada would have been either
+driven ashore or sunk; but when the last cartridge had been burned
+the assailants drew off to take on board the stores which had,
+while the fighting was going on, been brought up by some provision
+ships from the Thames.
+
+But the Spaniards were in no condition to benefit by the cessation
+of the attack. In spite of the terrible disadvantages under which
+they laboured, they had fought with splendid courage. The sides of
+the galleons had been riddled with shot, and the splinters caused by
+the rending of the massive timbers had done even greater execution
+than the iron hail. Being always to leeward, and heeling over
+with the wind, the ships had been struck again and again below the
+waterline, and many were only kept from sinking by nailing sheets
+of lead over the shot holes.
+
+Their guns were, for the most part, dismounted or knocked to pieces.
+Several had lost masts, the carnage among the crews was frightful,
+and yet not a single ship hauled down her colours. The San Mateo,
+which was one of those that grounded between Ostend and Sluys,
+fought to the last, and kept Francis Vere's three ships at bay for
+two hours, until she was at last carried by boarding.
+
+Left to themselves at the end of the day, the Spaniards gathered
+in what order they could, and made sail for the north. On counting
+the losses they found that four thousand men had been killed or
+drowned, and the number of wounded must have been far greater. The
+crews were utterly worn out and exhausted. They had the day before
+been kept at work cleaning and refitting, and the fireships had
+disturbed them early in the night. During the engagement there had
+been no time to serve out food, and the labours of the long struggle
+had completely exhausted them. Worst of all, they were utterly
+disheartened by the day's fighting. They had been pounded by their
+active foes, who fired five shots to their one, and whose vessels
+sailed round and round them, while they themselves had inflicted
+no damage that they could perceive upon their assailants.
+
+The English admirals had no idea of the extent of the victory they
+had won. Howard, who had only come up in the middle of the fight,
+believed that they "were still wonderful great and strong," while
+even Drake, who saw more clearly how much they had suffered,
+only ventured to hope that some days at least would elapse before
+they could join hands with Parma. In spite of the small store of
+ammunition that had arrived the night before, the English magazines
+were almost empty; but they determined to show a good front, and
+"give chase as though they wanted nothing."
+
+When the morning dawned the English fleet were still to windward
+of the Armada, while to leeward were lines of white foam, where
+the sea was breaking on the shoals of Holland. It seemed that the
+Armada was lost. At this critical moment the wind suddenly shifted
+to the east. This threw the English fleet to leeward, and enabled
+the Spaniards to head out from the coast and make for the North
+Sea. The Spanish admiral held a council. The sea had gone down,
+and they had now a fair wind for Calais; and the question was put
+to the sailing masters and captains whether they should return into
+the Channel or sail north round Scotland and Ireland, and so return
+to Spain. The former was the courageous course, but the spirit of the
+Spaniards was broken, and the vote was in favour of what appeared
+a way of escape. Therefore, the shattered Fleet bore on its way
+north. On board the English fleet a similar council was being held,
+and it was determined that Lord Seymour's squadron should return to
+guard the Channel, lest Parma should take advantage of the absence
+of the fleet to cross from Dunkirk to England, and that Howard and
+Drake with their ninety ships should pursue the Spaniards; for it
+was not for a moment supposed that the latter had entirely abandoned
+their enterprise, and intended to return to Spain without making
+another effort to rejoin Parma.
+
+During the week's fighting Geoffrey and Lionel Vickars had taken
+such part as they could in the contest; but as there had been
+no hand to hand fighting, the position of the volunteers on board
+the fleet had been little more than that of spectators. The crews
+worked the guns and manoeuvred the sails, and the most the lads
+could do was to relieve the ship boys in carrying up powder and
+shot, and to take round drink to men serving the guns. When not
+otherwise engaged they had watched with intense excitement the
+manoeuvres of their own ship and of those near them, as they swept
+down towards the great hulls, delivered their broadsides, and then
+shot off again before the Spaniards had had time to discharge more
+than a gun or two. The sails had been pierced in several places,
+but not a single shot had struck the hull of the vessel. In the
+last day's fighting, however, the Active became entangled among
+several of the Spanish galleons, and being almost becalmed by their
+lofty hulls, one of them ran full at her, and rolling heavily in
+the sea, seemed as if she would overwhelm her puny antagonist.
+
+Geoffrey was standing at the end of the poop when the mizzen rigging
+became entangled in the stern gallery of the Spaniard, and a moment
+later the mast snapped off, and as it fell carried him overboard.
+For a moment he was half stunned, but caught hold of a piece of
+timber shot away from one of the enemy's ships, and clung to it
+mechanically. When he recovered and looked round, the Active had
+drawn out from between the Spaniards, and the great galleon which
+had so nearly sunk her was close beside him.
+
+The sea was in a turmoil; the waves as they set in from the west
+being broken up by the rolling of the great ships, and torn by the
+hail of shot. The noise was prodigious, from the incessant cannonade
+kept up by the English ships and the return of the artillery on
+board the Armada, the rending of timber, the heavy crashes as the
+great galleons rolled against one another, the shouting on board
+the Spanish ships, the creaking of the masts and yards, and the
+flapping of the sails.
+
+On trying to strike out, Geoffrey found that as he had been knocked
+overboard he had struck his right knee severely against the rail
+of the vessel, and was at present unable to use that leg. Fearful
+of being run down by one of the great ships, and still more of being
+caught between two of them as they rolled, he looked round to try
+to get sight of an English ship in the throng. Then, seeing that
+he was entirely surrounded by Spaniards, he left the spar and swam
+as well as he could to the bow of a great ship close beside him,
+and grasping a rope trailing from the bowsprit, managed by its aid
+to climb up until he reached the bobstay, across which he seated
+himself with his back to the stem. The position was a precarious
+one, and after a time he gained the wooden carved work above, and
+obtained a seat there just below the bowsprit, and hidden from the
+sight of those on deck a few feet above him. As he knew the vessels
+were drifting to leeward towards the shoals, he hoped to remain
+hidden until the vessel struck, and then to gain the shore.
+
+Presently the shifting of the positions of the ships brought the
+vessel on which he was into the outside line. The shots now flew
+thickly about, and he could from time to time feel a jar as the
+vessel was struck.
+
+So an hour went on. At the end of that time he heard a great shouting
+on deck, and the sound of men running to and fro. Happening to look
+down he saw that the sea was but a few feet below him, and knew
+that the great galleon was sinking. Another quarter of an hour she
+was so much lower that he was sure she could nor swim many minutes
+longer; and to avoid being drawn down with her he dropped into the
+water and swam off. He was but a short distance away when he heard
+a loud cry, and glancing over his shoulder saw the ship disappearing.
+He swam desperately, but was caught in the suck and carried under;
+but there was no great depth of water, and he soon came to the
+surface again. The sea was dotted with struggling men and pieces
+of wreckage. He swam to one of the latter, and held on until he
+saw some boats, which the next Spanish ship had lowered when she
+saw her consort disappearing, rowing towards them, and was soon
+afterwards hauled into one of them. He had closed his eyes as it
+came up, and assumed the appearance of insensibility, and he lay
+in the bottom of the boat immovable, until after a time he heard
+voices above, and then felt himself being carried up the ladder
+and laid down on the deck.
+
+He remained quiet for some rime, thinking over what he had best do.
+He was certain that were it known he was English he would at once
+be stabbed and thrown overboard, for there was no hope of quarter;
+but he was for some time unable to devise any plan by which, even
+for a short rime, to conceal his nationality. He only knew a few
+words of Spanish, and would be detected the moment he opened his
+lips. He thought of leaping up suddenly and jumping overboard;
+but his chance of reaching the English ships to windward would be
+slight indeed. At last an idea struck him, and sitting up he opened
+his eyes and looked round. Several other Spaniards who had been
+picked up lay exhausted on the deck near him. A party of soldiers
+and sailors close by were working a cannon. The bulwarks were
+shot away in many places, dead and dying men lay scattered about,
+the decks were everywhere stained with blood, and no one paid any
+attention to him until presently the fire began to slacken. Shortly
+afterwards a Spanish officer came up and spoke to him.
+
+Geoffrey rose to his feet, rubbed his eyes, yawned, and burst into
+an idiotic laugh. The officer spoke again but he paid no attention,
+and the Spaniard turned away, believing that the lad had lost his
+senses from fear and the horrors of the day.
+
+As night came on he was several times addressed, but always with
+the same result. When after dark food and wine were served out,
+he seized the portion offered to him, and hurrying away crouched
+under the shelter of a gun, and devoured it as if fearing it would
+be taken from him again.
+
+When he saw that the sailors were beginning to repair some of the
+most necessary ropes and stays that had been shot away, he pushed
+his way through them and took his share of the work, laughing
+idiotically from time to time. He had, when he saw that the galleon
+was sinking, taken off his doublet, the better to be able to swim,
+and in his shirt and trunks there was nothing to distinguish him
+from a Spaniard, and none suspected that he was other than he seemed
+to be -- a ship's boy, who had lost his senses from fear. When the
+work was done, he threw himself on the deck with the weary sailors.
+His hopes were that the battle would be renewed in the morning, and
+that either the ship might be captured, or that an English vessel
+might pass so close alongside that he might leap over and swim to
+her.
+
+Great was his disappointment next day when the sudden change of
+wind gave the Spanish fleet the weather gage, and enabled them to
+steer away for the north. He joined in the work of the crew, paying
+no attention whatever to what was passing around him, or heeding
+in the slightest the remarks made to him. Once or twice when an
+officer spoke to him sternly he gave a little cry, ran to the side,
+and crouched down as if in abject fear. In a very short time no
+attention was paid to him, and he was suffered to go about as he
+chose, being regarded as a harmless imbecile. He was in hopes that
+the next day the Spaniards would change their course and endeavour
+to beat back to the Channel, and was at once disappointed and
+surprised as they sped on before the southwesterly wind, which
+was hourly increasing in force. Some miles behind he could see the
+English squadron in pursuit; but these made no attempt to close
+up, being well contented to see the Armada sailing away, and being
+too straitened in ammunition to wish to bring on an engagement so
+long as the Spaniards were following their present course.
+
+The wind blew with ever increasing force; the lightly ballasted
+ships made bad weather, rolling deep in the seas, straining heavily,
+and leaking badly through the opening seams and the hastily stopped
+shot holes. Water was extremely scarce, and at a signal from the
+admiral all the horses and mules were thrown overboard in order
+to husband the supply. Several of the masts, badly injured by the
+English shot, went by the board, and the vessels dropped behind
+crippled, to be picked up by the pursuing fleet.
+
+Lord Howard followed as far as the mouth of the Forth; and seeing
+that the Spaniards made no effort to enter the estuary, and his
+provisions being now well nigh exhausted, he hove the fleet about
+and made back for the Channel, leaving two small vessels only to
+follow the Armada and watch its course, believing that it would
+make for Denmark, refit there, and then return to rejoin Parma.
+
+It was a grievous disappointment to the English to be thus forced
+by want of provisions to relinquish the pursuit. Had they been
+properly supplied with provisions and ammunition they could have
+made an end of the Armada; whereas, they believed that by allowing
+them now to escape the whole work would have to be done over again.
+They had sore trouble to get back again off the Norfolk coast. The
+wind became so furious that the fleet was scattered. A few of the
+largest ships reached Margate; others were driven into Harwich,
+others with difficulty kept the sea until the storm broke.
+
+It might have been thought that after such service as the fleet
+had rendered even Elizabeth might have been generous; but now that
+the danger was over, she became more niggardly than ever. No fresh
+provisions were supplied for the sick men, and though in the fight
+off the Dutch coast only some fifty or sixty had been killed, in
+the course of a very short time the crews were so weakened by deaths
+and disease that scarce a ship could have put to sea, however urgent
+the necessity. Drake and Howard spent every penny they could raise
+in buying fresh meat and vegetables, and in procuring some sort of
+shelter on shore for the sick. Had the men received the wages due
+to them they could have made a shift to have purchased what they
+so urgently required; but though the Treasury was full of money,
+not a penny was forthcoming until every item of the accounts had
+been investigated and squabbled over. Howard was compelled to pay
+from his private purse for everything that had been purchased at
+Plymouth, Sir John Hawkins was absolutely ruined by the demands
+made on him to pay for necessaries supplied to the fleet, and had
+the admirals and sailors of the fleet that saved England behaved
+like ignominious cowards, their treatment could not have been worse
+than that which they received at the hands of their sovereign.
+
+But while the English seamen were dying like sheep from disease
+and neglect, their conquered foes were faring no better. They had
+breathed freely for the first time when they saw the English fleet
+bear up; an examination was made of the provisions that were left,
+and the crews were placed on rations of eight ounces of bread,
+half a pint of wine, and a pint of water a day. The fleet was still
+a great one, for of the hundred and fifty ships which had sailed
+from Corunna, a hundred and twenty still held together. The weather
+now turned bitterly cold, with fog and mist, squalls and driving
+showers; and the vessels, when they reached the north coast of
+Scotland, lost sight of each other, and each struggled for herself
+in the tempestuous sea.
+
+A week later the weather cleared, and on the 9th of August Geoffrey
+looking round at daybreak saw fifteen other ships in sight. Among
+these were the galleons of Calderon and Ricaldo, the Rita, San
+Marcos, and eleven other vessels. Signals were flying from all of
+them, but the sea was so high that it was scarce possible to lower
+a boat. That night it again blew hard and the fog closed in, and
+in the morning Geoffrey found that the ship he was on, and all
+the others, with the exception of that of Calderon, were steering
+north; the intention of Ricaldo and De Leyva being to make for the
+Orkneys and refit there. Calderon had stood south, and had come
+upon Sidonia with fifty ships; and these, bearing well away to the
+west of Ireland, finally succeeded for the most part in reaching
+Spain, their crews reduced by sickness and want to a mere shadow
+of their original strength.
+
+The cold became bitter as De Leyva's ships made their way towards
+the Orkneys. The storm was furious, and the sailors, unaccustomed
+to the cold and weakened by disease and famine, could no longer
+work their ships, and De Leyva was obliged at last to abandon
+his intention and make south. One galleon was driven on the Faroe
+Islands, a second on the Orkneys, and a third on the Isle of Mull,
+where it was attacked by the natives and burned with almost every
+one on board. The rest managed to make the west coast of Ireland,
+and the hope that they would find shelter in Galway Bay, or the
+mouth of the Shannon, began to spring up in the breasts of the
+exhausted crews.
+
+The Irish were their co-religionists and allies, and had only been
+waiting for news of the success of the Armada to rise in arms against
+the English, who had but few troops there. Rumours of disaster had
+arrived, and a small frigate had been driven into Tralee Bay. The
+fears of the garrison at Tralee Castle overcame their feelings of
+humanity, and all on board were put to death. Two galleons put into
+Dingle, and landing begged for water; but the natives, deciding
+that the Spanish cause was a lost one, refused to give them a drop,
+seized the men who had landed in the boats, and the galleons had
+to put to sea again.
+
+Another ship of a thousand tons, Our Lady of the Rosary, was driven
+into the furious straits between the Blasket Islands and the coast
+of Kerry. Of her crew of seven hundred, five hundred had died.
+Before she got halfway through she struck among the breakers, and
+all the survivors perished save the son of the pilot, who was washed
+ashore lashed to a plank. Six others who had reached the mouth of
+the Shannon sent their boats ashore for water; but although there
+were no English there the Irish feared to supply them, even though
+the Spaniards offered any sum of money for a few casks. One of the
+ships was abandoned and the others put to sea, only to be dashed
+ashore in the same gale that wrecked Our Lady of the Rosary, and
+of all their crews only one hundred and fifty men were cast ashore
+alive. Along the coast of Connemara, Mayo, and Sligo many other
+ships were wrecked. In almost every case the crews who reached the
+shore were at once murdered by the native savages for the sake of
+their clothes and jewellery.
+
+Geoffrey had suffered as much as the rest of the crew on board
+the galleon in which he sailed. All were so absorbed by their own
+suffering and misery that none paid any attention to the idiot boy
+in their midst. He worked at such work as there was to do: assisted
+to haul on the ropes, to throw the dead overboard, and to do what
+could be done for the sick and wounded. Like all on board he was
+reduced almost to a skeleton, and was scarce able to stand.
+
+As the surviving ships passed Galway Bay, one of them, which was
+leaking so badly that she could only have been kept afloat a few
+hours in any case, entered it, and brought up opposite the town. Don
+Lewis of Cordova, who commanded, sent a party on shore, believing
+that in Galway, between which town and Spain there had always been
+close connections, they would be well received. They were, however,
+at once taken prisoners. An attempt was made to get up the anchors
+again, but the crew were too feeble to be able to do so, and the
+natives coming out in their boats, all were taken prisoners and sent
+on shore. Sir Richard Bingham, the governor of Connaught, arrived
+in a few hours, and at once despatched search parties through Clare
+and Connemara to bring all Spaniards cast ashore alive to the town,
+and sent his son to Mayo to fetch down all who landed there. But
+young Bingham's mission proved useless; every Spaniard who had
+landed had been murdered by the natives, well nigh three thousand
+having been slain by the axes and knives of the savages who professed
+to be their co-religionists.
+
+Sir Richard Bingham was regarded as a humane man, but he feared
+the consequences should the eleven hundred prisoners collected at
+Galway be restored to health and strength. He had but a handful of
+troops under him, and had had the greatest difficulty in keeping
+down the Irish alone. With eleven hundred Spanish soldiers to aid
+them the task would be impossible, and accordingly he gave orders
+that all, with the exception of Don Lewis himself, and three or
+four other nobles, should be executed. The order was carried out;
+Don Lewis, with those spared, was sent under an escort to Dublin,
+but the others being too feeble to walk were killed or died on the
+way, and Don Lewis himself was the sole survivor out of the crews
+of a dozen ships.
+
+De Leyva, the most popular officer in the Armada, had with him in
+his ship two hundred and fifty young nobles of the oldest families
+in Spain. He was twice wrecked. The first time all reached the
+shore in safety, and were protected by O'Niel, who was virtually
+the sovereign of the north of Ulster. He treated them kindly for
+a time. They then took to sea again, but were finally wrecked off
+Dunluce, and all on board save five perished miserably. Over eight
+thousand Spaniards died on the Irish coast. Eleven hundred were put
+to death by Bingham, three thousand murdered by the Irish, the rest
+drowned; and of the whole Armada but fifty-four vessels, carrying
+between nine and ten thousand worn out men, reached Spain, and of
+the survivors a large proportion afterwards died from the effects
+of the sufferings they had endured.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X
+
+THE WAR IN HOLLAND
+
+
+In the confusion caused by the collision of the Active with the
+Spanish galleon no one had noticed the accident which had befallen
+Geoffrey Vickars, and his brother's distress was great when, on the
+ship getting free from among the Spaniards, he discovered that
+Geoffrey was missing. He had been by his side on the poop but
+a minute before the mast fell, and had no doubt that he had been
+carried overboard by its wreck. That he had survived he had not
+the least hope, and when a week later the Active on her way back
+towards the Thames was driven into Harwich, he at once landed and
+carried the sad news to his parents. England was wild with joy at
+its deliverance, but the household at Hedingham was plunged into
+deep sorrow.
+
+Weeks passed and then Lionel received a letter from Francis Vere
+saying that Parma's army was advancing into Holland, and that as
+active work was at hand he had best, if his intentions remained
+unchanged, join him without delay.
+
+He started two days later for Harwich, and thence took ship for
+Bergen op Zoom. Anchoring at Flushing, he learned that the Duke of
+Parma had already sat down in front of Bergen op Zoom, and had on
+the 7th attempted to capture Tholen on the opposite side of the
+channel, but had been repulsed by the regiment of Count Solms, with
+a loss of 400 men. He had then thrown up works against the water
+forts, and hot fighting had gone on, the garrison making frequent
+sallies upon the besiegers. The water forts still held out, and
+the captain therefore determined to continue his voyage into the
+town. The ship was fired at by the Spanish batteries, but passed
+safely between the water forts and dropped anchor in the port on
+the last day of September, Lionel having been absent from Holland
+just a year. He landed at once and made his way to the lodgings of
+Francis Vere, by whom he was received with great cordiality.
+
+"I was greatly grieved," he said after the first greetings, "to
+hear of your brother's death. I felt it as if he had been a near
+relative of my own. I had hoped to see you both; and that affair
+concerning which my cousin wrote to me, telling me how cleverly
+you had discovered a plot against the queen's life, showed me that
+you would both be sure to make your way. Your father and mother
+must have felt the blow terribly?"
+
+"They have indeed," Lionel said. "I do not think, however, that
+they altogether give up hope. They cling to the idea that he may
+have been picked up by some Spanish ship and may now be a prisoner
+in Spain."
+
+Francis Vere shook his head.
+
+"Of course, I know," Lionel went on, "their hope is altogether
+without foundation; for even had Geoffrey gained one of their
+ships, he would at once have been thrown overboard. Still I rather
+encouraged the idea, for it is better that hope should die out
+gradually than be extinguished at a blow; and slight though it
+was it enabled my father and mother to bear up better than they
+otherwise would have done. Had it not been for that I believe that
+my mother would have well nigh sunk beneath it. I was very glad
+when I got your letter, for active service will be a distraction to
+my sorrow. We have ever been together, Geoffrey and I, and I feel
+like one lost without him. You have not had much fighting here, I
+think, since I have been away?"
+
+"No, indeed; you have been far more lucky than I have," Francis Vere
+said. "With the exception of the fight with the San Mateo I have
+been idle ever since I saw you, for not a shot has been fired here,
+while you have been taking part in the great fight for the very
+existence of our country. It is well that Parma has been wasting
+nine months at Dunkirk, for it would have gone hard with us had
+he marched hither instead of waiting there for the arrival of the
+Armada. Our force here has fallen away to well nigh nothing. The
+soldiers could get no pay, and were almost starved; their clothes
+were so ragged that it was pitiful to see them. Great numbers have
+died, and more gone back to England. As to the Dutch, they are more
+occupied in quarrelling with us than in preparing for defence, and
+they would right willingly see us go so that we did but deliver
+Flushing and Brill and this town back again to them. I was truly
+glad when I heard that Parma had broken up his camp at Dunkirk
+when the Armada sailed away, and was marching hither. Now that he
+has come, it may be that these wretched disputes will come to an
+end, and that something like peace and harmony will prevail in our
+councils. He could not have done better, as far as we are concerned,
+than in coming to knock his head against these walls; for Bergen
+is far too strong for him to take, and he will assuredly meet with
+no success here such as would counterbalance in any way the blow
+that Spanish pride has suffered in the defeat of the Armada. I
+think, Lionel, that you have outgrown your pageship, and since you
+have been fighting as a gentleman volunteer in Drake's fleet you
+had best take the same rank here."
+
+The siege went on but slowly. Vigorous sorties were made, and the
+cavalry sometimes sallied out from the gates and made excursions as
+far as Wouw, a village three miles away, and took many prisoners.
+Among these were two commissaries of ordnance, who were intrusted
+to the safe keeping of the Deputy Provost Redhead. They were not
+strictly kept, and were allowed to converse with the provost's
+friends. One of these, William Grimeston, suspected that one of
+the commissaries, who pretended to be an Italian, was really an
+English deserter who had gone over with the traitor Stanley; and
+in order to see if his suspicions were correct, pretended that he
+was dissatisfied with his position and would far rather be fighting
+on the other side. The man at once fell into the trap, acknowledged
+that he was an Englishman, and said that if Grimeston and Redhead
+would but follow his advice they would soon become rich men, for
+that if they could arrange to give up one of the forts to Parma
+they would be magnificently rewarded.
+
+Redhead and Grimeston pretended to agree, but at once informed Lord
+Willoughby, who was in command, of the offer that had been made to
+them. They were ordered to continue their negotiations with the
+traitor. The latter furnished them with letters to Stanley and
+Parma, and with these they made their way out of the town at night
+to the Spanish camp. They had an interview with the duke, and
+promised to deliver the north water fort over to him, for which
+service Redhead was to receive 1200 crowns and Grimeston 700 crowns,
+and a commission in Stanley's regiment of traitors.
+
+Stanley himself entertained them in his tent, and Parma presented
+them with two gold chains. They then returned to Bergen and related
+all that had taken place to Lord Willoughby. The matter was kept
+a profound secret in the town, Francis Vere, who was in command of
+the north fort, and a few others only being made acquainted with
+what was going on.
+
+On the appointed night, 22d of October, Grimeston went out alone,
+Redhead's supposed share of the business being to open the gates
+of the fort. When Grimeston arrived at Parma's camp he found that
+the Spaniards had become suspicious. He was bound and placed in
+charge of a Spanish captain, who was ordered to stab him at once
+if there was any sign of treachery. It was a dark night; the tide
+was out, for the land over which the Spaniards had to advance was
+flooded at other times. The attacking column consisted of three
+thousand men, including Stanley's regiment; and a number of knights
+and nobles accompanied it as volunteers.
+
+As they approached the forts -- Grimeston in front closely guarded
+by the Spanish captain -- it was seen by the assailants that Redhead
+had kept his word: the drawbridge across the moat was down and the
+portcullis was up. Within the fort Lord Willoughby, Vere, and two
+thousand men were waiting for them. When about fifty had crossed the
+drawbridge the portcullis was suddenly let fall and the drawbridge
+hauled up. As the portcullis thundered down Grimeston tripped up
+the surprised Spaniard, and, leaping into the water, managed to
+make his way to the foot of the walls. A discharge of musketry and
+artillery from the fort killed a hundred and fifty of the attacking
+party, while those who had crossed the drawbridge were all either
+killed or taken prisoners. But the water in the moat was low. The
+Spaniards gallantly waded across and attacked the palisades, but
+were repulsed in their endeavour to climb them. While the fight was
+going on the water in the moat was rising, and scores were washed
+away and drowned as they attempted to return.
+
+Parma continued the siege for some little time, but made no real
+attempt to take the place after having been repulsed at the north
+fort; and on the 12th of November broke up his camp and returned
+to Brussels.
+
+After the siege was over Lord Willoughby knighted twelve of
+his principal officers, foremost among whom was Francis Vere, who
+was now sent home with despatches by his general, and remained in
+England until the end of January, when he was appointed sergeant
+major general of the forces, a post of great responsibility and much
+honour, by Lord Willoughby, with the full approval of the queen's
+government. He was accompanied on his return by his brother Robert.
+
+A month after Sir Francis Vere's return Lord Willoughby left
+for England, and the whole burden of operations in the field fell
+upon Vere. His first trouble arose from the mutinous conduct of
+the garrison of Gertruydenberg. This was an important town on the
+banks of the old Maas, and was strongly fortified, one side being
+protected by the Maas while the river Douge swept round two other
+sides of its walls. Its governor, Count Hohenlohe, had been unpopular,
+the troops had received no pay, and there had been a partial mutiny
+before the siege of Bergen op Zoom began. This was appeased, by
+the appointment of Sir John Wingfield, Lord Willoughby's brother
+in law, as its governor.
+
+In the winter the discontent broke out again. The soldiers had been
+most unjustly treated by the States, and there were long arrears
+of pay, and at first Sir John Wingfield espoused the cause of the
+men. Sir Francis Vere tried in vain to arrange matters. The Dutch
+authorities would not pay up the arrears, the men would not return
+to their duty until they did so, and at last became so exasperated
+that they ceased to obey their governor and opened communications
+with the enemy. Prince Maurice, who was now three and twenty years
+old, and devoted to martial pursuits and the cause of his countrymen,
+after consultation with Sir Francis Vere, laid siege to the town
+and made a furious assault upon it on the water aide. But the Dutch
+troops, although led by Count Solms and Count Philip of Nassau,
+were repulsed with great loss. The prince then promised nor only
+a pardon, but that the demands of the garrison should be complied
+with; but it was too late, and four days later Gertruydenberg was
+delivered up by the mutineers to the Duke of Parma, the soldiers
+being received into the Spanish service, while Wingfield and the
+officers were permitted to retire.
+
+The States were furious, as this was the third city commanded by
+Englishmen that had been handed over to the enemy. The bad feeling
+excited by the treachery of Sir William Stanley and Roland Yorke
+at Deventer and Zutphen had died out after the gallant defence of
+the English at Sluys, but now broke out again afresh, and charges
+of treachery were brought not only against Wingfield but against
+many other English officers, including Sir Francis Vere. The
+queen, however, wrote so indignantly to the States that they had
+to withdraw their charges against most of the English officers.
+
+In May Lord Willoughby, who was still in London, resigned his command.
+A number of old officers of distinction who might have laid claims
+to succeed him, among them Sir John Norris, Sir Roger Williams,
+Sir Thomas Wilford, Sir William Drury, Sir Thomas Baskerville, and
+Sir John Burrough, were withdrawn from the Netherlands to serve in
+France or Ireland, and no general in chief or lieutenant general was
+appointed, Sir Francis Vere as sergeant major receiving authority
+to command all soldiers already in the field or to be sent out during
+the absence of the general and lieutenant general. His official
+title was Her Majesty's Sergeant Major in the Field. The garrisons
+in the towns were under the command of their own governors, and
+those could supply troops for service in the field according to
+their discretion.
+
+The appointment of so young a man as Sir Francis Vere to a post
+demanding not only military ability but great tact and diplomatic
+power, was abundant proof of the high estimate formed of him
+by the queen and her counsellors. The position was one of extreme
+difficulty. He had to keep on good terms with the queen and her
+government, with the government of the States, the English agent at
+the Hague, Prince Maurice in command of the army of the Netherlands,
+the English governors of the towns, and the officers or men of the
+force under his own command. Fortunately Barneveldt, who at that
+time was the most prominent man in the States, had a high opinion
+of Vere. Sir Thomas Bodley, the queen's agent, had much confidence
+in him, and acted with him most cordially, and Prince Maurice
+entertained a great respect for him, consulted him habitually in
+all military matters, and placed him in the position of marshal
+of the camp of the army of the Netherlands, in addition to his own
+command of the English portion of that army.
+
+Vere's first undertaking was to lead a force of 12,000 men, of
+whom half were English, to prevent Count Mansfelt from crossing
+the Maas with an army of equal strength. Prince Maurice was present
+in person as general in chief. Intrenchments were thrown up and
+artillery planted; but just as Mansfelt was preparing to cross his
+troops mutinied, and he was obliged to fall back.
+
+In October, with 900 of his own troops and twelve companies of Dutch
+horse, Sir Francis Vere succeeded in throwing a convoy of provisions
+into the town of Rheinberg, which was besieged by a large force
+of the enemy. As soon as he returned the States requested him to
+endeavour to throw in another convoy, as Count Mansfelt was marching
+to swell the force of the besiegers, and, after his arrival it
+would be well nigh impossible to send further aid into the town.
+Vere took with him 900 English and 900 Dutch infantry, and 800
+Dutch cavalry. The enemy had possession of a fortified country
+house called Loo, close to which lay a thick wood traversed only by
+a narrow path, with close undergrowth and swampy ground on either
+side. The enemy were in great force around Loo, and came out to
+attack the expedition as it passed through the wood. Sending the
+Dutch troops on first, Vere attacked the enemy vigorously with his
+infantry and drove them back to the inclosure of Loo. As soon as
+his whole force had crossed the wood, he halted them and ordered
+them to form in line of battle facing the wood through which they
+had just passed, and from which the enemy were now pouring out in
+great force.
+
+In order to give time to his troops to prepare for the action Vere
+took half his English infantry and advanced against them. They
+moved forward, and a stubborn fight took place between the pikemen.
+Vere's horse was killed, and fell on him so that he could not
+rise; but the English closed round him, and he was rescued with
+no other harm than a bruised leg and several pike thrusts through
+his clothes. While the conflict between the pikemen was going on
+the English arquebusiers opened fire on the flank of the enemy,
+and they began to fall back. Four times they rallied and charged
+the English, but were at last broken and scattered through the wood.
+The cavalry stationed there left their horses and fled through the
+undergrowth. Pressing forward the little English force next fell
+upon twenty-four companies of Neapolitan infantry, who were defeated
+without difficulty. The four hundred and fifty Englishmen then
+joined the main force, which marched triumphantly with their convoy
+of provisions into Rheinberg, and the next morning fortunately turning
+thick and foggy the force made its way back without interruption
+by the enemy.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI
+
+IN SPAIN
+
+
+Alone among the survivors of the great Spanish Armada, Geoffrey
+Vickars saw the coast of Ireland fade away from sight without a
+feeling of satisfaction or relief. His hope had been that the ship
+would be wrecked on her progress down the coast. He knew not that
+the wild Irish were slaying all whom the sea spared, and that
+ignorant as they were of the English tongue, he would undoubtedly
+have shared the fate of his Spanish companions. He thought only
+of the risk of being drowned, and would have preferred taking this
+to the certainty of a captivity perhaps for life in the Spanish
+prisons. The part that he had played since he had been picked up
+off Gravelines could not be sustained indefinitely. He might as
+well spend his life in prison, where at least there would be some
+faint hope of being exchanged, as wander about Spain all his life
+as an imbecile beggar.
+
+As soon, therefore, as he saw that the perils of the coast of
+Ireland were passed, and that the vessel was likely to reach Spain
+in safety, he determined that he would on reaching a port disclose
+his real identity. There were on board several Scotch and Irish
+volunteers, and he decided to throw himself upon the pity of one of
+these rather than on that of the Spaniards. He did not think that
+in any case his life was in danger. Had he been detected when
+first picked up, or during the early part of the voyage, he would
+doubtless have been thrown overboard without mercy; but now that
+the passions of the combatants had subsided, and that he had been
+so long among them, and had, as he believed, won the goodwill of
+many by the assistance he had rendered to the sick and wounded, he
+thought that there was little fear of his life being taken in cold
+blood.
+
+One of the Irish volunteers, Gerald Burke by name, had for a long
+time been seriously ill, and Geoffrey had in many small ways shown
+him kindness as he lay helpless on the deck, and he determined
+finally to confide in him. Although still very weak, Burke was now
+convalescent, and was sitting alone by the poop rail gazing upon
+the coast of Spain with eager eyes, when Geoffrey, under the pretext
+of coiling down a rope, approached him. The young man nodded kindly
+to him.
+
+"Our voyage is nearly over, my poor lad," he said in Spanish, "and
+your troubles now will be worse than mine. You have given me many
+a drink of water from your scanty supply, and I wish that I could
+do something for you in return; but I know that you do not even
+understand what I say to you."
+
+"Would you give me an opportunity of speaking to you after nightfall,
+Mr. Burke," Geoffrey said in English, "when no one will notice us
+speaking?"
+
+The Irishman gave a start of astonishment at hearing himself
+addressed in English.
+
+"My life is in your hands, sir; pray, do not betray me," Geoffrey
+said rapidly as he went on coiling down the rope.
+
+"I will be at this place an hour after nightfall," the young Irishman
+replied when he recovered from his surprise. "Your secret will be
+safe with me."
+
+At the appointed time Geoffrey returned to the spot. The decks
+were now deserted, for a drizzling rain was falling, and all save
+those on duty had retired below, happy in the thought that on the
+following morning they would be in port.
+
+"Now, tell me who you are," the young Irishman began. "I thought you
+were a Spanish sailor, one of those we picked up when the Spanish
+galleon next to us foundered."
+
+Geoffrey then told him how he had been knocked off an English ship
+by the fall of a mast, had swum to the galleon and taken refuge
+beneath her bowsprit until she sank, and how, when picked up and
+carried on to the Spanish ship, he feigned to have lost his senses
+in order to conceal his ignorance of Spanish.
+
+"I knew," he said, "that were I recognized as English at the time
+I should at once be killed, but I thought that if I could conceal
+who I was for a time I should simply be sent to the galleys, where
+I have heard that there are many English prisoners working."
+
+"I think death would have been preferable to that lot," Mr. Burke
+said.
+
+"Yes, sir; but there is always the hope of escape or of exchange.
+When you spoke kindly to me this afternoon I partly understood what
+you said, for in this long time I have been on board I have come
+to understand a little Spanish, and I thought that maybe you would
+assist me in some way."
+
+"I would gladly do so, though I regard Englishmen as the enemies
+of my country; but in what way can I help you? I could furnish you
+with a disguise, but your ignorance of Spanish would lead to your
+detection immediately."
+
+"I have been thinking it over, sir, and it seemed to me that
+as there will be no objection to my landing tomorrow, thinking as
+they do that I have lost my senses, I might join you after you once
+got out of the town. I have some money in my waistbelt, and if you
+would purchase some clothes for me I might then join you as your
+servant as you ride along. At the next town you come to none would
+know but that I had been in your service during the voyage, and
+there would be nothing strange in you, an Irish gentleman, being
+accompanied by an Irish servant who spoke but little Spanish.
+I would serve you faithfully, sir, until perhaps some opportunity
+might occur for my making my escape to England."
+
+"Yes, I think that might be managed," the young Irishman said. "When
+I land tomorrow I will buy some clothes suitable for a serving man.
+I do nor know the names of the hotels on shore, so you must watch
+me when I land and see where I put up. Come there in the evening at
+nine o'clock. I will issue out and give you the bundle of clothes,
+and tell you at what hour in the morning I have arranged to start.
+I will hire two horses; when they come round to the door, join me
+in front of the hotel and busy yourself in packing my trunks on
+the baggage mules. When you have done that, mount the second horse
+and ride after me; the people who will go with us with the horses
+will naturally suppose that you have landed with me. Should any of
+our shipmates here see us start, it is not likely that they will
+recognize you. If they do so, I need simply say that as you had shown
+me such kindness on board ship I had resolved to take you with me
+to Madrid in order to see if anything could be done to restore you
+to reason. However, it is better that you should keep in the background
+as much as possible. I will arrange to start at so early an hour
+in the morning that none of those who may land with me from the
+ship, and may put up at the same inn, are likely to be about."
+
+The next morning the vessel entered port. They were soon surrounded
+by boats full of people inquiring anxiously for news of other ships,
+and for friends and acquaintances on board. Presently large boats
+were sent off by the authorities, and the disembarkation of the sick
+and the helpless began. This indeed included the greater portion
+of the survivors, for there were but two or three score on board
+who were capable of dragging themselves about, the rest being
+completely prostrate by disease, exhaustion, hunger, and thirst.
+Geoffrey was about to descend into one of the boats, when the officer
+in command said roughly: "Remain on board and do your work, there
+is no need for your going into the hospital." One of the ship's
+officers, however, explained that the lad had altogether lost his
+senses, and was unable either to understand when spoken to or to
+reply to questions. Consequently he was permitted to take his place
+in the boat.
+
+As soon as he stepped ashore he wandered away among the crowd of
+spectators. A woman, observing his wan face and feeble walk, called
+him into her house, and set food and wine before him. He made a
+hearty meal, but only shook his head when she addressed him, and
+laughed childishly and muttered his thanks in Spanish when she
+bestowed a dollar upon him as he left. He watched at the port while
+boat load after boat load of sick came ashore, until at last one
+containing the surviving officers and gentlemen with their baggage
+reached the land. Then he kept Gerald Burke in sight until he
+entered an inn, followed by two men carrying his baggage. Several
+times during the day food and money were offered him, the inhabitants
+being full of horror and pity at the sight of the famishing survivors
+of the crew of the galleon.
+
+At nine o'clock in the evening Geoffrey took up his station near
+the door of the inn. A few minutes later Gerald Burke came out with
+a bundle. "Here are the clothes," he said. "I have hired horses for
+our journey to Madrid. They will be at the door at six o'clock in
+the morning. I have arranged to travel by very short stages, for at
+first neither you nor I could sit very long upon a horse; however,
+I hope we shall soon gain strength as we go."
+
+Taking the bundle, Geoffrey walked a short distance from the town
+and lay down upon the ground under some trees. The night was a warm
+one, and after the bitter cold they had suffered during the greater
+part of the voyage, it felt almost sultry to him. At daybreak in
+the morning he rose, put on the suit of clothes Gerald Burke had
+provided, washed his face in a little stream, and proceeded to the
+inn. He arrived there just as the clocks were striking six. A few
+minutes later two men with two horses and four mules came up to
+the door, and shortly afterwards Gerald Burke came our. Geoffrey at
+once joined him; the servants of the inn brought out the baggage,
+which was fastened by the muleteers on to two of the animals.
+Gerald Burke mounted one of the horses and Geoffrey the other, and
+at once rode on, the muleteers mounting the other two mules and
+following with those carrying the baggage.
+
+"That was well managed," Gerald Burke said as they rode out of the
+town. "The muleteers can have no idea that you have but just joined
+me, and there is little chance of any of my comrades on board ship
+overtaking us, as all intend to stop for a few days to recruit
+themselves before going on. If they did they would not be likely to
+recognize you in your present attire, or to suspect that my Irish
+servant is the crazy boy of the ship."
+
+After riding at an easy pace for two hours, they halted under the
+shade of some trees. Fruit, bread, and wine were produced from
+a wallet on one of the mules, and they sat down and breakfasted.
+After a halt of an hour they rode on until noon, when they again
+halted until four in the afternoon, for the sun was extremely hot,
+and both Gerald Burke and Geoffrey were so weak they scarce could
+sit their horses. Two hours further riding took them to a large
+village, where they put up at the inn. Geoffrey now fell into his
+place as Mr. Burke's servant -- saw to the baggage being taken
+inside, and began for the first time to try his tongue at Spanish.
+He got on better than he had expected; and as Mr. Burke spoke with
+a good deal of foreign accent, it did not seem in any way singular
+to the people of the inn that his servant should speak but little
+of the language.
+
+Quietly they journeyed on, doing but short distances for the first
+three or four days, but as they gained strength pushing on faster,
+and by the time they reached Madrid both were completely recovered
+from the effects of their voyage. Madrid was in mourning, for there
+was scarce a family but had lost relations in the Armada. Mr. Burke
+at once took lodgings and installed Geoffrey as his servant. He
+had many friends and acquaintances in the city, where he had been
+residing for upwards of a year previous to the sailing of the
+Armada.
+
+For some weeks Geoffrey went out but little, spending his time in
+reading Spanish books and mastering the language as much as possible.
+He always conversed in that language with Mr. Burke, and at the
+end of six weeks was able to talk Spanish with some fluency. He
+now generally accompanied Mr. Burke if he went out, following him
+in the streets and standing behind his chair when he dined abroad.
+He was much amused at all he saw, making many acquaintances among
+the lackeys of Mr. Burke's friends, dining with them downstairs after
+the banquets were over, and often meeting them of an evening when
+he had nothing to do, and going with them to places of entertainment.
+
+In this way his knowledge of Spanish improved rapidly, and although
+he still spoke with an accent he could pass well as one who had
+been for some years in the country. He was now perfectly at ease
+with the Spanish gentlemen of Mr. Burke's acquaintance. It was
+only when Irish and Scotch friends called upon his master that he
+feared awkward questions, and upon these occasions he showed himself
+as little as possible. When alone with Gerald Burke the latter
+always addressed Geoffrey as a friend rather than as a servant, and
+made no secret with him as to his position and means. He had been
+concerned in a rising in Ireland, and had fled the country, bringing
+with him a fair amount of resources. Believing that the Armada was
+certain to be crowned with success, and that he should ere long be
+restored to his estates in Ireland, he had, upon his first coming
+to Spain, spent his money freely. His outfit for the expedition
+had made a large inroad upon his store, and his resources were now
+nearly at an end.
+
+"What is one to do, Geoffrey? I don't want to take a commission in
+Philip's army, though my friends could obtain one for me at once;
+but I have no desire to spend the rest of my life in the Netherlands
+storming the towns of the Dutch burghers."
+
+"Or rather trying to storm them," Geoffrey said, smiling; "there
+have not been many towns taken of late years."
+
+"Nor should I greatly prefer to be campaigning in France," Gerald
+went on, paying no attention to the interruption. "I have no love
+either for Dutch Calvinists or French Huguenots; but I have no
+desire either to be cutting their throats or for them to be cutting
+mine. I should like a snug berth under the crown here or at Cadiz,
+or at Seville; but I see no chance whatever of my obtaining one.
+I cannot take up the trade of a footpad, though disbanded soldiers
+turned robbers are common enough in Spain. What is to be done?"
+
+"If I am not mistaken," Geoffrey said with a smile, "your mind is
+already made up. It is not quite by accident that you are in the
+gardens of the Retiro every evening, and that a few words are always
+exchanged with a certain young lady as she passes with her duenna."
+
+"Oh! you have observed that," Gerald Burke replied with a laugh.
+"Your eyes are sharper than I gave you credit for, Master Geoffrey.
+Yes, that would set me on my legs without doubt, for Donna Inez
+is the only daughter and heiress of the Marquis of Ribaldo; but
+you see there is a father in the case, and if that father had the
+slightest idea that plain Gerald Burke was lifting his eyes to his
+daughter it would not be many hours before Gerald Burke had several
+inches of steel in his body."
+
+"That I can imagine," Geoffrey said, "since it is, as I learn from
+my acquaintances among the lackeys, a matter of common talk that
+the marquis intends to marry her to the son of the Duke of Sottomayor."
+
+"Inez hates him," Gerald Burke said. "It is just like my ill luck,
+that instead of being drowned as most of the others were, he has
+had the luck to get safely back again. However, he is still ill,
+and likely to be so for some time. He was not so accustomed to
+starving as some of us, and he suffered accordingly. He is down at
+his estates near Seville."
+
+"But what do you think of doing?" Geoffrey asked.
+
+"That is just what I am asking you."
+
+"It seems to me, certainly," Geoffrey went on, "that unless you
+really mean to run off with the young lady -- for I suppose there
+is no chance in the world of your marrying her in any other way --
+it will be better both for you and her that you should avoid for
+the future these meetings in the gardens or elsewhere, and cast your
+thoughts in some other direction for the bettering of your fortunes."
+
+"That is most sage advice, Geoffrey," the young Irishman laughed,
+"and worthy of my father confessor; but it is not so easy to follow.
+In the first place, I must tell you that I do not regard Inez as in
+any way a step to fortune, but rather as a step towards a dungeon.
+It would be vastly better for us both if she were the daughter of
+some poor hidalgo like myself. I could settle down then with her,
+and plant vines and make wine, and sell what I don't drink myself.
+As it is, I have the chance of being put out of the way if it is
+discovered that Inez and I are fond of each other; and in the next
+place, if we do marry I shall have to get her safely out of the
+kingdom, or else she will have to pass the rest of her life in a
+convent, and I the rest of mine in a prison or in the galleys; that
+is if I am not killed as soon as caught, which is by far the most
+likely result. Obnoxious sons in law do not live long in Spain. So
+you see, Geoffrey, the prospect is a bad one altogether; and if it
+were not that I dearly love Inez, and that I am sure she will be
+unhappy with Philip of Sottomayor, I would give the whole thing
+up, and make love to the daughter of some comfortable citizen who
+would give me a corner of his house and a seat at his table for
+the rest of my days."
+
+"But, seriously --" Geoffrey began.
+
+"Well, seriously, Geoffrey, my intention is to run away with Inez
+if it can be managed; but how it is to be managed at present I have
+not the faintest idea. To begin with, the daughter of a Spanish
+grandee is always kept in a very strong cage closely guarded, and
+it needs a very large golden key to open it. Now, as you are aware,
+gold is a very scarce commodity with me. Then, after getting her
+out, a lavish expenditure would be needed for our flight. We should
+have to make our way to the sea coast, to do all sorts of things
+to throw dust into the eyes of our pursuers, and to get a passage
+to some place beyond the domains of Philip, which means either to
+France, England, or the Netherlands. Beyond all this will be the
+question of future subsistence until, if ever, the marquis makes up
+his mind to forgive his daughter and take her to his heart again,
+a contingency, in my opinion, likely to be extremely remote."
+
+"And what does the Lady Inez say to it all?" Geoffrey asked.
+
+"The Lady Inez has had small opportunity of saying anything on the
+subject, Geoffrey. Here in Spain there are mighty few opportunities
+for courtship. With us at home these matters are easy enough, and
+there is no lack of opportunity for pleading your suit and winning
+a girl's heart if it is to be won; but here in Spain matters are
+altogether different, and an unmarried girl is looked after as
+sharply as if she was certain to get into some mischief or other
+the instant she had an opportunity. She is never suffered to be
+for a moment alone with a man; out of doors or in she has always a
+duenna by her side; and as to a private chat, the thing is simply
+impossible."
+
+"Then how do you manage to make love?" Geoffrey asked.
+
+"Well, a very little goes a long way in Spain. The manner of a bow,
+the wave of a fan, the dropping of a glove or flower, the touch
+of a hand in a crowded room -- each of these things go as far as
+a month's open love making in Ireland."
+
+"Then how did you manage with the duenna so as to be able to speak
+to her in the gardens?"
+
+"Well, in the first place, I made myself very attentive to the
+duenna; in the second place, the old lady is devout, and you know
+Ireland is the land of saints, and I presented her with an amulet
+containing a paring of the nail of St. Patrick."
+
+Geoffrey burst into a laugh, in which the Irishman joined.
+
+"Well, if it was not really St. Patrick's," the latter went on,
+"it came from Ireland anyhow, which is the next best thing. Then
+in the third place, the old lady is very fond of Inez; and although
+she is as strict as a dragon, Inez coaxed her into the belief that
+there could not be any harm in our exchanging a few words when she
+was close by all the time to hear what was said. Now, I think you
+know as much as I do about the matter, Geoffrey. You will understand
+that a few notes have been exchanged, and that Inez loves me.
+Beyond that everything is vague and uncertain, and I have not the
+slightest idea what will come of it."
+
+Some weeks passed and nothing was done. The meetings between Gerald
+Burke and Inez in the Gardens of the Retiro had ceased a day or two
+afterwards, the duenna having positively refused to allow them to
+continue, threatening Inez to inform her father of them unless she
+gave them up.
+
+Gerald Burke's funds dwindled rapidly, although he and Geoffrey
+lived in the very closest way.
+
+"What in the world is to be done, Geoffrey? I have only got twenty
+dollars left, which at the outside will pay for our lodgings and
+food for another month. For the life of me I cannot see what is to
+be done when that is gone, unless we take to the road."
+
+Geoffrey shook his head. "As far as I am concerned," he said, "as
+we are at war with Spain, it would be fair if I met a Spanish ship
+at sea to capture and plunder it, but I am afraid the laws of war
+do not justify private plunder. I should be perfectly ready to go
+out and take service in a vineyard, or to earn my living in any
+way if it could be managed."
+
+"I would rob a cardinal if I had the chance," Gerald Burke said,
+"and if I ever got rich would restore his money four fold and
+so obtain absolution; only, unfortunately, I do not see my way to
+robbing a cardinal. As to digging in the fields, Geoffrey, I would
+rather hang myself at once. I am constitutionally averse to labour,
+and if one once took to that sort of thing there would be an end
+to everything."
+
+"It is still open to you," Geoffrey said, "to get your friends to
+obtain a commission for you."
+
+"I could do that," Gerald said moodily, "but of all things that is
+what I should most hate."
+
+"You might make your peace with the English government and get some
+of your estates back again."
+
+"That I will not do to feed myself," Gerald Burke said firmly. "I
+have thought that if I ever carry off Inez I might for her sake do
+so, for I own that now all hope of help from Spain is at an end,
+our cause in Ireland is lost, and it is no use going on struggling
+against the inevitable; but I am not going to sue the English
+government as a beggar for myself. No doubt I could borrow small
+sums from Irishmen and Scotchmen here, and hold on for a few months;
+but most of them are well nigh as poor as I am myself, and I would
+not ask them. Besides, there would be no chance of my repaying them;
+and, if I am to rob anyone, I would rather plunder these rich dons
+than my own countrymen."
+
+"Of one thing I am resolved," Geoffrey said, "I will not live at
+your expense any longer, Gerald. I can speak Spanish very fairly
+now, and can either take service in some Spanish family or, as I
+said, get work in the field."
+
+Gerald laughed. "My dear Geoffrey, the extra expenses caused by
+you last week were, as far as I can calculate, one penny for bread
+and as much for fruit; the rest of your living was obtained at the
+expense of my friends."
+
+"At any rate," Geoffrey said smiling, "I insist that my money be
+now thrown into the common fund. I have offered it several times
+before, but you always said we had best keep it for emergency. I
+think the emergency has come now, and these ten English pounds in
+my belt will enable us to take some step or other. The question is,
+what step? They might last us, living as we do, for some three or
+four months, but at the end of that time we should be absolutely
+penniless; therefore now is the time, while we have still a small
+stock in hand, to decide upon something."
+
+"But what are we to decide upon?" Gerald Burke asked helplessly.
+
+"I have been thinking it over a great deal," Geoffrey said, "and
+my idea is that we had best go to Cadiz or some other large port.
+Although Spain is at war both with England and the Netherlands,
+trade still goes on in private ships, and both Dutch and English
+vessels carry on commerce with Spain; therefore it seems to me
+that there must be merchants in Cadiz who would be ready to give
+employment to men capable of speaking and writing both in Spanish
+and English, and in my case to a certain extent in Dutch. From
+there, too, there might be a chance of getting a passage to England
+or Holland. If we found that impossible owing to the vessels being
+too carefully searched before sailing, we might at the worst take
+passage as sailors on board a Spanish ship bound for the Indies,
+and take our chance of escape or capture there or on the voyage.
+That, at least, is what I planned for myself."
+
+"I think your idea is a good one, Geoffrey. At any rate to Cadiz we
+will go. I don't know about the mercantile business or going as a
+sailor, but I could get a commission from the governor there as well
+as here in Madrid; but at any rate I will go. Donna Inez was taken
+last week by her father to some estates he has somewhere between
+Seville and Cadiz, in order, I suppose, that he may be nearer Don
+Philip, who is, I hear, at last recovering from his long illness.
+I do not know that there is the slightest use in seeing her again,
+but I will do so if it be possible; and if by a miracle I could
+succeed in carrying her off, Cadiz would be a more likely place to
+escape from than anywhere.
+
+"Yes, I know. You think the idea is a mad one, but you have never
+been in love yet. When you are you will know that lovers do not
+believe in the word `impossible.' At any rate, I mean to give Inez
+the chance of determining her own fate. If she is ready to risk
+everything rather than marry Don Philip, I am ready to share the
+risk whatever it may be."
+
+Accordingly on the following day Gerald Burke disposed of the
+greater part of his wardrobe and belongings, purchased two ponies
+for a few crowns, and he and Geoffrey, with a solitary suit of
+clothes in a wallet fastened behind the saddle, started for their
+journey to Cadiz. They mounted outside the city, for Gerald shrank
+from meeting any acquaintances upon such a sorry steed as he had
+purchased; but once on their way his spirits rose. He laughed and
+chatted gaily, and spoke of the future as if all difficulties were
+cleared away. The ponies, although rough animals, were strong and
+sturdy, and carried their riders at a good pace. Sometimes they
+travelled alone, sometimes jogged along with parties whom they
+overtook by the way, or who had slept in the same posadas or inns
+at which they had put up for the night.
+
+Most of these inns were very rough, and, to Geoffrey, astonishingly
+dirty. The food consisted generally of bread and a miscellaneous
+olio or stew from a great pot constantly simmering over the fire,
+the flavour, whatever it might be, being entirely overpowered
+by that of the oil and garlic that were the most marked of its
+constituents. Beds were wholly unknown at these places, the guests
+simply wrapping themselves in their cloaks and lying down on the
+floor, although in a few exceptional cases bundles of rushes were
+strewn about to form a common bed.
+
+But the travelling was delightful. It was now late in the autumn,
+and when they were once past the dreary district of La Mancha, and
+had descended to the rich plains of Cordova, the vintage was in
+full progress and the harvest everywhere being garnered in. Their
+midday meal consisted of bread and fruit, costing but the smallest
+coin, and eaten by the wayside in the shade of a clump of trees.
+They heard many tales on their way down of the bands of robbers
+who infested the road, but having taken the precaution of having
+the doubloons for which they had exchanged Geoffrey's English gold
+sewn up in their boots, they had no fear of encountering these gentry,
+having nothing to lose save their wallets and the few dollars they
+had kept out for the expenses of their journey. The few jewels that
+Gerald Burke retained were sewn up in the stuffing of his saddle.
+
+After ten days' travel they reached Seville, where they stayed a
+couple of days, and where the wealth and splendour of the buildings
+surprised Geoffrey, who had not visited Antwerp or any of the great
+commercial centres of the Netherlands.
+
+"It is a strange taste of the Spanish kings," he observed to Gerald
+Burke, "to plant their capital at Madrid in the centre of a barren
+country, when they might make such a splendid city as this their
+capital. I could see no charms whatever in Madrid. The climate
+was detestable, with its hot sun and bitter cold winds. Here the
+temperature is delightful; the air is soft and balmy, the country
+round is a garden, and there is a cathedral worthy of a capital."
+
+"It seems a strange taste," Gerald agreed; "but I believe that
+when Madrid was first planted it stood in the midst of extensive
+forests, and that it was merely a hunting residence for the king."
+
+"Then, when the forests went I would have gone too," Geoffrey said.
+"Madrid has not even a river worthy of the name, and has no single
+point to recommend it, as far as I can see, for the capital of a
+great empire. If I were a Spaniard I should certainly take up my
+residence in Seville."
+
+Upon the following morning they again started, joining, before they
+had ridden many miles, a party of three merchants travelling with
+their servants to Cadiz. The merchants looked a little suspiciously
+at first at the two young men upon their tough steeds; but as soon
+as they discovered from their first salutations that they were
+foreigners, they became more cordial, and welcomed this accession
+of strength to their party, for the carrying of weapons was universal,
+and the portion of the road between Seville and Cadiz particularly
+unsafe, as it was traversed by so many merchants and wealthy
+people. The conversation speedily turned to the disturbed state of
+the roads.
+
+"I do not think," one of the merchants said, "that any ordinary
+band of robbers would dare attack us," and he looked round with
+satisfaction at the six armed servants who rode behind them.
+
+"It all depends," Gerald Burke said, with a sly wink at Geoffrey,
+"upon what value the robbers may place upon the valour of your
+servants. As a rule serving men are very chary of their skins, and I
+should imagine that the robbers must be pretty well aware of that
+fact. Most of them are disbanded soldiers or deserters, and I should
+say that four of them are more than a match for your six servants.
+I would wager that your men would make but a very poor show of it
+if it came to fighting."
+
+"But there are our three selves and you two gentlemen," the merchant
+said in a tone of disquiet.
+
+"Well," Gerald rejoined, "I own that from your appearance I should
+not think, worshipful sir, that fighting was altogether in your line.
+Now, my servant, young as he is, has taken part in much fighting
+in the Netherlands, and I myself have had some experience with
+my sword; but if we were attacked by robbers we should naturally
+stand neutral. Having nothing to defend, and having no inclination
+whatever to get our throats cut in protecting the property of others,
+I think that you will see for yourselves that that is reasonable.
+We are soldiers of fortune, ready to venture our lives in a good
+service, and for good pay, but mightily disinclined to throw them
+away for the mere love of fighting."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII
+
+RECRUITING THEIR FUNDS
+
+
+As soon as Gerald Burke began conversing with the merchants,
+Geoffrey fell back and took his place among their servants, with
+whom he at once entered into conversation. To amuse himself he
+continued in the same strain that he had heard Gerald adopt towards
+the merchants, and spoke in terms of apprehension of the dangers
+of the journey, and of the rough treatment that had befallen those
+who had ventured to offer opposition to the robbers. He was not
+long in discovering, by the anxious glances they cast round them,
+and by the manner of their questions, that some at least of the
+party were not to be relied upon in case of an encounter.
+
+He was rather surprised at Gerald remaining so long in company with
+the merchants, for their pace was a slow one, as they were followed
+by eight heavily laden mules, driven by two muleteers, and it would
+have been much pleasanter, he thought, to have trotted on at their
+usual pace. About midday, as they were passing along the edge of
+a thick wood, a party of men suddenly sprang out and ordered them
+to halt. Geoffrey shouted to the men with him to come on, and
+drawing his sword dashed forward.
+
+Two of the men only followed him. The others hesitated, until
+a shot from a musket knocked off one of their hats, whereupon the
+man and his comrades turned their horses' heads and rode off at
+full speed. The merchants had drawn their swords, and stood on the
+defensive, and Geoffrey on reaching them was surprised to find that
+Gerald Burke was sitting quietly on his horse without any apparent
+intention of taking part in the fight.
+
+"Put up your sword, Geoffrey," he said calmly; "this affair is no
+business of ours. We have nothing to lose, and it is no business
+of ours to defend the money bags of these gentlemen."
+
+The robbers, eight in number, now rushed up. One of the merchants,
+glancing round, saw that two of their men only had come up to
+their assistance. The muleteers, who were probably in league with
+the robbers, had fled, leaving their animals standing in the road.
+The prospect seemed desperate. One of the merchants was an elderly
+man, the others were well on middle age. The mules were laden with
+valuable goods, and they had with them a considerable sum of money
+for making purchases at Cadiz. It was no time for hesitation.
+
+"We will give you five hundred crowns if you will both aid us to
+beat off these robbers."
+
+"It is a bargain," Gerald replied. "Now, Geoffrey, have at these
+fellows!"
+
+Leaping from their ponies they ranged themselves by the merchants
+just as the robbers attacked them. Had it not been for their aid
+the combat would have been a short one; for although determined to
+defend their property to the last, the traders had neither strength
+nor skill at arms. One was unhorsed at the first blow, and another
+wounded; but the two servants, who had also dismounted, fought
+sturdily, and Gerald and Geoffrey each disposed of a man before
+the robbers, who had not reckoned upon their interference, were
+prepared to resist their attack.
+
+The fight did not last many minutes. The traders did their best,
+and although by no means formidable opponents, distracted the
+attention of the robbers, who were startled by the fall of two of
+their party. Geoffrey received a sharp cut on the head, but at the
+same moment ran his opponent through the body, while Gerald Burke
+cut down the man opposed to him. The other four robbers, seeing
+they were now outnumbered, at once took to their heels.
+
+"By St. Jago!" one of the traders said, "you are stout fighters,
+young men, and have won your fee well. Methought we should have
+lost our lives as well as our goods, and I doubt not we should have
+done so had you not ranged yourselves with us. Now, let us bandage
+up our wounds, for we have all received more or less hurt."
+
+When the wounds, some of which were serious, were attended to, the
+fallen robbers were examined. Three of them were dead; but the man
+last cut down by Gerald Burke seemed likely to recover.
+
+"Shall we hang him upon a tree as a warning to these knaves, or
+shall we take him with us to the next town and give him in charge
+of the authorities there?" one of the traders asked.
+
+"If I were you I would do neither," Gerald said, "but would let him
+go free if he will tell you the truth about this attack. It will
+be just as well for you to get to the bottom of this affair, and
+find out whether it is a chance meeting, or whether any of your
+own people have been in league with him."
+
+"That is a good idea," the trader agreed, "and I will carry it
+out," and going up to the man, who had now recovered his senses,
+he said to him sternly: "We have made up our minds to hang you;
+but you may save your life if you will tell us how you came to set
+upon us. Speak the truth and you shall go free, otherwise we will
+finish with you without delay."
+
+The robber, seeing an unexpected chance of escape from punishment, at
+once said that the captain of their band, who was the man Geoffrey
+had last run through, came out from Seville the evening before, and
+told him that one Juan Campos, with whom he had long had intimate
+relations, and who was clerk to a rich trader, had, upon promise that
+he should receive one fifth of the booty taken, informed him that
+his master with two other merchants was starting on the following
+morning for Cadiz with a very valuable lot of goods, and twenty-five
+thousand crowns, which they intended to lay out in the purchase of
+goods brought by some galleons that had just arrived from the Indies.
+He had arranged to bribe his master's two servants to ride away
+when they attacked the gang, and also to settle with the muleteers
+so that they should take no part in the affair. They had reckoned
+that the flight of two of the servants would probably affect the
+others, and had therefore expected the rich booty to fall into
+their hands without the trouble of striking a blow for it.
+
+"It is well we followed your suggestion," one of the traders said
+to Gerald. "I had no suspicion of the honesty of my clerk, and
+had we not made this discovery he would doubtless have played me a
+similar trick upon some other occasion. I will ride back at once,
+friends, for if he hears of the failure of the attack he may take
+the alarm and make off with all he can lay his hands upon. Our
+venture was to be in common. I will leave it to you to carry it
+out, and return and dismiss Campos and the two rascally servants."
+The three traders went apart and consulted together. Presently the
+eldest of the party returned to the young men.
+
+"We have another five days' journey before us," he said, "and but
+two servants upon whom we can place any reliance. We have evidence
+of the unsafety of the roads, and, as you have heard, we have a
+large sum of money with us. You have already more than earned the
+reward I offered you, and my friends have agreed with me that if
+you will continue to journey with us as far as Cadiz, and to give
+us the aid of your valour should we be again attacked, we will make
+the five hundred crowns a thousand. It is a large sum, but we have
+well nigh all our fortunes at stake, and we feel that we owe you
+our lives as well as the saving of our money."
+
+"We could desire nothing better," Gerald replied, "and will answer
+with our lives that your goods and money shall arrive safely at
+Cadiz."
+
+The traders then called up their two serving men, and told them
+that on their arrival at Cadiz they would present them each with a
+hundred crowns for having so stoutly done their duty. The employer
+of the treacherous clerk then turned his horse's head and rode back
+towards Seville, while the others prepared to proceed on their way.
+The two muleteers had now come out from among the bushes, and were
+busy refastening the bales on the mules, the ropes having become
+loosened in the struggles of the animals while the fight was going
+on. The merchants had decided to say nothing to the men as to the
+discovery that they were in league with the robbers.
+
+"Half these fellows are in alliance with these bands, which are a
+scourge to the country," one of the traders said. "If we were to
+inform the authorities at the next town, we should, in the first
+place, be blamed for letting the wounded man escape, and secondly
+we might be detained for days while investigations are going on.
+In this country the next worse thing to being a prisoner is to be
+a complainant. Law is a luxury in which the wealthy and idle can
+alone afford to indulge."
+
+As soon, therefore, as the baggage was readjusted the party proceeded
+on their way.
+
+"What do you think of that, Geoffrey?" Gerald Burke asked as he
+rode for a short distance by the side of his supposed servant.
+
+"It is magnificent," Geoffrey replied; "and it seems to me that the
+real road to wealth in Spain is to hire yourself out as a guard to
+travellers."
+
+"Ah, you would not get much if you made your bargain beforehand.
+It is only at a moment of urgent danger that fear will open purse
+strings widely. Had we bargained beforehand with these traders we
+might have thought ourselves lucky if we had got ten crowns apiece
+as the price of our escort to Cadiz, and indeed we should have been
+only too glad if last night such an offer had been made to us; but
+when a man sees that his property and life are really in danger he
+does not stop to haggle, but is content to give a handsome percentage
+of what is risked for aid to save the rest."
+
+"Well, thank goodness, our money trouble is at an end," Geoffrey
+said; "and it will be a long time before we need have any anxiety
+on that score."
+
+"Things certainly look better," Gerald said laughing; "and if Inez
+consents to make a runaway match of it with me I sha'n't have to
+ask her to pay the expenses."
+
+Cadiz was reached without further adventure. The merchants kept
+their agreement honourably, and handed over a heavy bag containing
+a thousand crowns to Gerald on their arrival at that city. They
+had upon the road inquired of him the nature of his business there.
+He had told them that he was at present undecided whether to enter
+the army, in which some friends of his had offered to obtain him
+a commission, or to join in an adventure to the Indies. They had
+told him they were acquainted with several merchants at Cadiz who
+traded both with the east and west, and that they would introduce
+him to them as a gentleman of spirit and courage, whom they might
+employ with advantage upon such ventures; and this promise after
+their arrival there they carried out.
+
+"Now, Geoffrey," Gerald said as they sat together that evening at
+a comfortable inn, "we must talk over matters here. We have five
+hundred crowns apiece, and need not trouble any longer as to how
+we are to support life. Your great object, of course, is to get out
+of this country somehow, and to make your way back to England. My
+first is to see Inez and find out whether she will follow my fortunes
+or remain to become some day Marchesa of Sottomayor. If she adopts
+the former alternative I have to arrange some plan to carry her off
+and to get out of the country, an operation in which I foresee no
+little difficulty. Of course if we are caught my life is forfeited,
+there is no question about that. The question for us to consider
+is how we are to set about to carry out our respective plans."
+
+"We need only consider your plan as far as I can see," Geoffrey
+said. "Of course I shall do what I can to assist you, and if you
+manage to get off safely with the young lady I shall escape at the
+same time."
+
+"Not at all," Burke said; "you have only to wait here quietly
+until you see an opportunity. I will go with you tomorrow to the
+merchants I was introduced to today, and say that I am going away
+for a time and shall be obliged if they will make you useful in any
+way until I return. In that way you will have a sort of established
+position here, and can wait until you see a chance of smuggling
+yourself on board some English or Dutch vessel. Mine is a very
+different affair. I may talk lightly of it, but I am perfectly
+aware that I run a tremendous risk, and that the chances are very
+strongly against me."
+
+"Whatever the chances are," Geoffrey said quietly, "I shall share
+them with you. Your kindness has saved me from what at best might
+have been imprisonment for life, and not improbably would have been
+torture and death at the hands of the Inquisition, and I am certainly
+not going to withdraw myself from you now when you are entering
+upon what is undoubtedly a very dangerous adventure. If we escape
+from Spain we escape together; if not, whatever fate befalls you
+I am ready to risk."
+
+"Very well; so be it, Geoffrey," Gerald Burke said, holding out his
+hand to him. "If your mind is made up I will not argue the question
+with you, and indeed I value your companionship and aid too highly
+to try to shake your determination. Let us then at once talk over
+what is now our joint enterprise. Ribaldo estate lies about halfway
+between this and Seville, and we passed within a few miles of it
+as we came hither. The first thing, of course, will be to procure
+some sort of disguise in which I can see Inez and have a talk with
+her. Now, it seems to me, for I have been thinking the matter over
+in every way as we rode, that the only disguise in which this would
+be possible would be that of a priest or monk."
+
+Geoffrey laughed aloud. "You would in the first place have to shave
+off your moustachios, Gerald, and I fear that even after you had
+done so there would be nothing venerable in your appearance; and
+whatever the mission with which you might pretend to charge yourself,
+your chances of obtaining a private interview with the lady would
+be slight."
+
+"I am afraid that I should lack the odour of sanctity, Geoffrey;
+but what else can one do? Think it over, man. The way in which you
+played the idiot when you were picked out of the water shows that
+you are quick at contriving a plan."
+
+"That was a simple business in comparison to this," Geoffrey
+replied. "However, you are not pressed for time, and I will think
+it over tonight and may light upon some possible scheme, for I own
+that at present I have not the least idea how the matter is to be
+managed."
+
+As in the morning there were several other travellers taking
+breakfast in the same room, the conversation was not renewed until
+Gerald Burke strolled out, followed at a respectful distance by
+Geoffrey, who still passed as his servant, and reached a quiet spot
+on the ramparts. Here Geoffrey joined him, and they stood for some
+minutes looking over the sea.
+
+"What a magnificent position for a city!" Geoffrey said at last.
+"Standing on this rocky tongue of land jutting out at the entrance
+to this splendid bay it ought to be impregnable, since it can only
+be attacked on the side facing that sandy isthmus. What a number
+of ships are lying up the bay, and what a busy scene it is with the
+boats passing and repassing! Though they must be two miles away I
+fancy I can hear the shouts of the sailors."
+
+"Yes, it is all very fine," Gerald said; "but I have seen it
+several times before. Still, I can make allowances for you. Do you
+see that group of small ships a mile beyond the others? Those are
+the English and Dutchmen. They are allowed to trade, but as you see
+they are kept apart, and there are three war galleys lying close
+to them. No one is allowed to land, and every boat going off
+is strictly examined, and all those who go on board have to show
+their permits from the governor to trade; so, you see, the chance
+of getting on board one of them is slight indeed. Higher up the
+bay lies Puerto de Santa Maria, where a great trade is carried on,
+and much wine shipped; though more comes from Jeres, which lies up
+the river. You know we passed through it on our way here.
+
+"Yes, this is a splendid position for trade, and I suppose the
+commerce carried on here is larger than in any port in Europe;
+though Antwerp ranked as first until the troubles began in the
+Netherlands. But this ought to be first. It has all the trade of the
+Atlantic seaboard, and standing at the mouth of the Mediterranean
+commands that also; while all the wealth of the New World pours in
+here. That is great already; there is no saying what it will be in
+the future, while some day the trade from the far East should flow
+in here also by vessels trading round the south of Africa.
+
+"Cadiz has but one fault: the space on which it stands is too small
+for a great city. You see how close the houses stand together,
+and how narrow are the streets. It cannot spread without extending
+beyond the rock over the sands, and then its strength would be gone,
+and it would be open to capture by an enterprising enemy having
+command of the sea. There now, having indulged your humour, let
+us return to more important matters. Have you thought over what we
+were talking about last night?"
+
+"I have certainly thought it over," Geoffrey said; "but I do not
+know that thinking has resulted in much. The only plan that occurs
+to me as being at all possible is this. You were talking in joke
+at Madrid of turning robber. Would it be possible, think you, to
+get together a small band of men to aid you in carrying off the
+young lady, either from the grounds of her father's house or while
+journeying on the road? You could then have your talk with her.
+If you find her willing to fly with you, you could leave the men
+you have engaged and journey across the country in some sort of
+disguise to a port. If she objected, you could conduct her back to
+the neighbourhood of the house and allow her to return. There is
+one difficulty: you must, of course, be prepared with a priest, so
+that you can be married at once if she consents to accompany you."
+
+Gerald Burke was silent for some time. "The scheme seems a possible
+one," he said at last; "it is the question of the priest that bothers
+me. You know, both in Seville and Cadiz there are Irish colleges,
+and at both places there are several priests whom I knew before they
+entered the Church, and who would, I am sure, perform the service
+for me on any ordinary occasion; but it is a different thing asking
+them to take a share in such a business as this, for they would
+render themselves liable to all sorts of penalties and punishments
+from their superiors. However, the difficulty must be got over
+somehow, and at any rate the plan seems to promise better than
+anything I had thought of. The first difficulty is how to get the
+ruffians for such a business. I cannot go up to the first beetle
+browed knave I meet in the street and say to him, 'Are you disposed
+to aid me in the abduction of a lady?'"
+
+"No," Geoffrey laughed; "but fortunately you have an intermediary
+ready at hand."
+
+"How so?" Gerald exclaimed in surprise. "Why, how on earth can you
+have an acquaintance with any ruffians in Cadiz?"
+
+"Not a very intimate acquaintance, Gerald; but if you take the
+trouble to go into the courtyard of the inn when we get back you
+will see one of those rascally muleteers who went in league with
+the robbers who attacked us on the way. He was in conversation when
+we came out with a man who breakfasted with us, and was probably
+bargaining for a load for his mules back to Seville. I have no
+doubt that through him you might put yourself into communication
+with half the cutthroats of the town."
+
+"That is a capital idea, Geoffrey, and I will have a talk with the
+man as soon as we get back; for if he is not still there, I am sure
+to be able to learn from some of the men about the stables where
+to find him."
+
+"You must go very carefully to work, Gerald," Geoffrey said. "It
+would never do to let any of the fellows know the exact object for
+which you engaged them, for they might be sure of getting a far
+larger sum from the marquis for divulging your plans to carry off
+his daughter than you could afford to pay them for their services."
+
+"I quite see that, and will be careful."
+
+On their return to the inn Gerald Burke at once made inquiries as
+to the muleteer, and learned that he would probably return in an
+hour to see if a bargain could be made with a trader for the hire
+of his mules back to Seville. Gerald waited about until the man
+came. "I want to have a talk with you, my friend," he said.
+
+The muleteer looked at him with a suspicious eye. "I am busy," he
+said in a surly tone; "I have no time to waste."
+
+"But it would not be wasting it if it were to lead to your putting
+a dozen crowns in your pocket."
+
+"Oh, if it is to lead to that, senor, I can spare an hour, for I
+don't think that anything is likely to come out of the job I came
+here to try to arrange."
+
+"We will walk away to a quieter place," Gerald said. "There are
+too many people about here for us to talk comfortably. The ramparts
+are but two or three minutes' walk; we can talk there without
+interruption."
+
+When they arrived upon the ramparts Gerald commenced the conversation.
+
+"I think you were foolish, my friend, not to have taken us into
+your confidence the other day before that little affair. You could
+have made an opportunity well enough. We stopped to luncheon; if
+you had drawn me aside, and told me frankly that some friends of
+yours were about to make an attack upon the traders, and that you
+would guarantee that they would make it worth my while --"
+
+"What do you mean by saying my friends, or that I had any knowledge
+of the affair beforehand?" the man asked furiously.
+
+"I say so," Gerald replied, "because I had it on excellent authority.
+The wounded robber made a clean breast of the whole affair, and of
+your share in it, as well as that of the rascally clerk of one of
+the traders. If it had not been for me the merchants would have
+handed you over to the magistrates at the place where we stopped
+that night; but I dissuaded them, upon the ground that they would
+have to attend as witnesses against you, and that it was not
+worth their while to lose valuable time merely for the pleasure of
+seeing you hung. However, all this is beside the question. What I
+was saying was, it is a pity you did not say to me frankly: 'Your
+presence here is inopportune; but if you will stand apart if any
+unexpected affair takes place, you will get say two thousand crowns
+out of the twenty-five thousand my friends are going to capture.'
+Had you done that, you see, things might have turned out differently."
+
+"I did not know," the muleteer stammered.
+
+"No, you did not know for certain, of course, that I was a soldier
+of fortune; but if you had been sharp you might have guessed it.
+However, it is too late for that now. Now, what I wanted to ask
+you was if you could get me half a dozen of your friends to take
+service under me in a little adventure I have to carry out. They
+will be well paid, and I do not suppose they will have much trouble
+over it."
+
+"And what would you pay me, caballero?" the muleteer asked humbly;
+for he had been greatly impressed with the valour displayed by the
+young Irishman and his servant in the fray, and thought that he
+intended to get together a company for adventures on the road, in
+which case he might be able to have some profitable dealings with
+him in the future.
+
+"I will give you twenty crowns," Gerald replied; "and considering
+that you owe your life to my interposition, I think that you ought
+not to haggle about terms."
+
+"The party who attacked us," the muleteer said, "lost their captain
+and several of their comrades in that fray, and would I doubt not
+gladly enter into your service, seeing that they have received such
+proof of your worship's valour."
+
+"Where could I see them?" Gerald asked.
+
+"I think that they will be now in Jeres, if that would suit you,
+senor; but if not I could doubtless find a party of men in this
+town equally ready for your business."
+
+"Jeres will do very well for me," Gerald said; "I shall be travelling
+that way and will put up at the Fonda where we stopped as we came
+through. When are you starting?"
+
+"It depends whether I make my bargain with a man at your hotel,"
+the muleteer replied; "and this I doubt not I shall do, for with
+the twenty crowns your honour is going to give me I shall not stand
+out for terms. He is travelling with clothes from Flanders, and if
+your worship thought --"
+
+"No," Gerald said. "I do not wish to undertake any adventures of
+that sort until I have a band properly organized, and have arranged
+hiding places and methods of getting rid of the booty. I will go
+back with you to the inn, and if you strike your bargain you can
+tell me as you pass out of the gate what evening you will meet me
+at Jeres."
+
+On arriving at the inn Gerald lounged at the gate of the courtyard
+until the muleteer came out.
+
+"I will meet your worship on the fifth night from this at Jeres."
+
+"Very well; here are five crowns as an earnest on our bargain. If
+you carry it out well I shall very likely forget to deduct them
+from the twenty I promised you. Do not be surprised if you find me
+somewhat changed in appearance when you meet me there."
+
+At the appointed time the muleteer with his train of animals
+entered the courtyards of the Fonda at Jeres. Gerald was standing
+on the steps of the inn. He had altered the fashion of his hair,
+had fastened on large bushy eyebrows which he had obtained from a
+skilful perruquier in Cadiz, and a moustache of imposing size turned
+up at the tips; he wore high buff leather boots, and there was an
+air of military swagger about him, and he was altogether so changed
+that at the first glance the muleteer failed to recognize him. As
+soon as the mules were unburdened, Gerald found an opportunity of
+speaking with him.
+
+"I will go round at once," the man said, "to the place where I shall
+certainly obtain news of my friends if they are here. I told your
+honour that they might be here, but they may have gone away on
+some affair of business, and may be on the road or at Seville. They
+always work between this town and Seville."
+
+"I understand that you may not meet them tonight; if not, I will
+meet you again in Seville. How long will you be finding out about
+them?"
+
+"I shall know in half an hour, senor; if they are not here I shall
+be back here in less than an hour, but if I find them I shall
+be detained longer in order to talk over with them the offer your
+worship makes."
+
+"Very well; in an hour you will find me in the street opposite the
+inn. I shall wait there until you come. If all is well make a sign
+and I will follow you. Do not mention to them that I have in any
+way disguised myself. Our acquaintance was so short that I don't
+fancy they had time to examine me closely; and I have my own reasons
+of wishing that they should not be acquainted with my ordinary
+appearance, and have therefore to some extent disguised myself."
+
+"I will say nothing about it," the muleteer replied. "Your worship
+can depend upon my discretion."
+
+"That is right," Gerald said. "We may have future dealings together,
+and I can reward handsomely those I find trustworthy and punish
+those who in the slightest degree disobey my orders."
+
+In an hour and a half the muleteer returned, made a signal to Gerald
+and passed on. The latter joined him at a short distance from the
+hotel.
+
+"It is all settled, senor. I found the men much dispirited at the
+loss of their captain and comrades; and when I proposed to them
+to take service under the caballero who wrought them such mischief
+the other day, they jumped at the idea, saying that under such a
+valiant leader there was no fear of the failure of any enterprise
+they might undertake."
+
+A quarter of an hour's walking took them to a small inn of
+villainous appearance in one of the smallest lanes of the town.
+Gerald was wrapped from head to foot in his cloak, and only his face
+was visible. He had a brace of pistols in his belt, and was followed
+at a short distance, unnoticed by the muleteer, by Geoffrey, who
+had arranged to keep close to the door of any house he entered, and
+was to be in readiness to rush in and take part in the fray if he
+heard the sound of firearms within.
+
+Gerald himself had not at first entertained any idea of treachery;
+but Geoffrey had pointed out that it was quite possible that
+the robbers and the muleteer had but feigned acquiescence in his
+proposals in order to get him into their power, and take revenge
+for the loss of their captain and comrades, and of the valuable
+booty which had so unexpectedly slipped through their fingers owing
+to his intervention.
+
+The appearance of the six ruffians gathered in the low room, lighted
+by a wretched lamp, was not very assuring, and Gerald kept his hand
+on the butt of one of his pistols.
+
+The four robbers who had been engaged in the fray, however, saluted
+him respectfully, and the other two members of the band, who had
+been absent on other business, followed their example. They had
+heard from those present of the extraordinary valour with which
+the two travelling companions of the trader had thrown themselves
+into the fray, and had alone disposed of their four comrades,
+and being without a leader, and greatly disheartened by their ill
+luck, they were quite ready to forgive the misfortunes Gerald had
+brought upon them, and to accept such a redoubtable swordsman as
+their leader.
+
+Gerald began the conversation. "You have heard," he said, "from
+our friend here of the offer I make you. I desire a band of six men
+on whom I can rely for an adventure which promises large profit.
+Don't suppose that I am going to lead you to petty robberies on
+the road, in which, as you learned to your cost the other day, one
+sometimes gets more hard knocks than profit. Such adventures may
+do for petty knaves, but they are not suited to me. The way to
+get wealthy is to strike at the rich. My idea is to establish some
+place in an out of the way quarter where there is no fear of prying
+neighbours, and to carry off and hide there the sons and daughters
+of wealthy men and put them to ransom. In the first instance I
+am going to undertake a private affair of my own; and as you will
+really run no risk in the matter, for I shall separate myself from
+you after making my capture, I shall pay you only a earnest money
+of twenty crowns each. In future affairs we shall act upon the
+principle of shares. I shall take three shares, a friend who works
+with me will take two shares, and you shall take one share apiece.
+The risk will really be entirely mine, for I shall take charge of
+the captives we make at our rendezvous. You, after lending a hand
+in the capture, will return here and hold yourself in readiness to
+join me, and carry out another capture as soon as I have made all
+the necessary arrangements. Thus, if by any chance we are tracked,
+I alone and my friend will run the risk of capture and punishment.
+In that way we may, in the course of a few months, amass a much
+larger booty than we should in a lifetime spent in these wretched
+adventures upon travellers.
+
+"Now, it is for you to say whether these terms will suit you, and
+whether you are ready to follow my orders and obey me implicitly.
+The whole task of making the necessary arrangements, or finding out
+the habits of the families one of whose members we intend carrying
+off, of bribing nurses or duennas, will be all my business. You
+will simply have to meet when you are summoned to aid in the actual
+enterprise, and then, when our captive is safely housed, to return
+here or scatter where you will and live at ease until again summoned.
+The utmost fidelity will be necessary. Large rewards will in many
+cases be offered for the discovery of the missing persons, and
+one traitor would bring ruin upon us all; therefore it will be
+absolutely necessary that you take an oath of fidelity to me, and
+swear one and all to punish the traitor with death. Do you agree
+to my proposal?"
+
+There was a unanimous exclamation of assent. The plan seemed to
+offer probabilities of large booty with a minimum of trouble and
+risk. One or two suggested that they should like to join in the
+first capture on the same terms as the others, but Gerald at once
+pronounced this to be impossible.
+
+"This is my own affair," he said, "and money is not now my object.
+As you will only be required to meet at a given hour some evening,
+and to carry off a captive who will not be altogether unwilling
+to come, there will be little or no risk in the matter, and twenty
+crowns will not be bad pay for an evening's work. After that you
+will, as I have said, share in the profits of all future captures
+we may undertake."
+
+The band all agreed, and at once took solemn oaths of fidelity to
+their new leader, and swore to punish by death any one of their
+number who should betray the secrets of the body.
+
+"That is well," Gerald said when the oaths had been taken. "It
+may be a week before you receive your first summons. Here are five
+crowns apiece for your expenses up to that time. Let one of you
+be in front of the great church as the clock strikes eight morning
+and evening. Do not wait above five minutes; if I am coming I
+shall be punctual. In the meantime take counsel among yourselves
+as to the best hiding place that can be selected. Between you you
+no doubt know every corner and hole in the country. I want a place
+which will be at once lonely and far removed from other habitations,
+but it must be at the same time moderately comfortable, as the
+captives we take must have no reason to complain of their treatment
+while in my hands. Think this matter over before I again see you."
+
+Gerald then joined Geoffrey outside, and found that the latter
+was beginning to be anxious at his long absence. After a few words
+saying that everything had been successfully arranged, the two
+friends returned together to their inn.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII
+
+THE FESTA AT SEVILLE
+
+
+"And now, Gerald, that you have made your arrangements for the
+second half of the plan, how are you going to set about the first?
+because you said that you intended to give Donna Inez the option
+of flying with you or remaining with her father."
+
+"So I do still. Before I make any attempt to carry her off I shall
+first learn whether she is willing to run the risks."
+
+"But how are you going to set about it? You may be quite sure that
+she never goes outside the garden without having her duenna with
+her. If there is a chapel close by, doubtless she will go there
+once a day; and it seems to me that this would be the best chance
+of speaking to her, for I do not see how you can possibly introduce
+yourself into the grounds."
+
+"That would be quite out of the question, in daylight at any rate,
+Geoffrey. I do not suppose she ever goes beyond the terrace by the
+house. But if I could communicate with her she might slip out for
+a few minutes after dark, when the old lady happened to be taking
+a nap. The question is how to get a letter into her hands."
+
+"I think I might manage that, Gerald. It is not likely that the
+duenna ever happened to notice me. I might therefore put on any
+sort of disguise as a beggar and take my place on the road as she
+goes to chapel, and somehow or other get your note into her hand. I
+have heard Spanish girls are very quick at acting upon the smallest
+sign, and if I can manage to catch her eye for a moment she may
+probably be ingenious enough to afford me an opportunity of passing
+the note to her."
+
+"That might be done," Gerald agreed. "We will at once get disguises.
+I will dress myself as an old soldier, with one arm in a sling and
+a patch over my eye; you dress up in somewhat the same fashion as
+a sailor boy. It is about twelve miles from here to Ribaldo's place.
+We can walk that easily enough, dress ourselves up within a mile
+or two of the place, and then go on and reconnoitre the ground."
+
+"I should advise you to write your note before you start; it may be
+that some unexpected opportunity for handing it to her may present
+itself."
+
+"I will do that; but let us sally out first and pick up two suits
+at some dealer in old clothes. There will be sure to be two or
+three of these in the poorer quarter."
+
+The disguises were procured without difficulty, and putting them
+in a small wallet they started before noon on their walk. In four
+hours they reached the boundary of the Marquis of Ribaldo's estate.
+Going into a wood they assumed the disguises, packed their own
+clothes in a wallet, and hid this away in a clump of bushes. Then
+they again started -- Gerald Burke with his arm in a sling and
+Geoffrey limping along with the aid of a thick stick he had cut in
+the wood.
+
+On arriving at the village, a quarter of a mile from the gates of
+the mansion, they went into a small wine shop and called for two
+measures of the cheapest wine and a loaf of bread. Here they sat
+for some time, listening to the conversation of the peasants who
+frequented the wine shop. Sometimes a question was asked of the
+wayfarers. Gerald replied, for his companion's Spanish although
+fluent was not good enough to pass as that of a native. He replied
+to the question as to where they had received their hurts that they
+were survivors of the Armada, and grumbled that it was hard indeed
+that men who had fought in the Netherlands and had done their duty
+to their country should be turned adrift to starve.
+
+"We have enough to pay for our supper and a night's lodging," he
+said, "but where we are going to take our meal tomorrow is more
+than I can say, unless we can meet with some charitable people."
+
+"If you take your place by the roadside tomorrow morning," one
+of the peasants said, "you may obtain charity from Donna Inez de
+Ribaldo. She comes every morning to mass here; and they say she has
+a kind heart, which is more than men give her father the marquis
+the credit of possessing. We have not many poor round here, for at
+this time of year all hands are employed in the vineyards, therefore
+there is the more chance of your obtaining a little help."
+
+"Thank you; I will take your advice," Gerald said. "I suppose she
+is sure to come?"
+
+"She is sure enough; she never misses when she is staying here."
+
+That night the friends slept on a bundle of straw in an outhouse
+behind the wine shop, and arranged everything; and upon the following
+morning took their seats by the roadside near the village. The
+bell of the chapel was already sounding, and in a few minutes they
+saw two ladies approaching, followed at a very short distance by
+a serving man. They had agreed that the great patch over Gerald's
+eye aided by the false moustachios, so completely disguised his
+appearance that they need have no fear of his being recognized; and
+it was therefore decided he should do the talking. As Donna Inez
+came up he commenced calling out: "Have pity, gracious ladies, upon
+two broken down soldiers. We have gone through all the dangers and
+hardships of the terrible voyage of the great Armada. We served in
+the ship San Josef and are now broken down, and have no means of
+earning our living."
+
+Gerald had somewhat altered his natural voice while speaking, but
+Geoffrey was watching Donna Inez closely, and saw her start when
+he began to speak; and when he said they had been on board the San
+Josef a flush of colour came across her face.
+
+"We must relieve these poor men," she said to the duenna; "it is
+pitiful to see them in such a state."
+
+"We know not that their tale is true," the duenna replied sharply.
+"Every beggar in our days pretends to be a broken down soldier."
+
+At this moment Donna Inez happened to glance at Geoffrey, who
+raised his hand to his face and permitted a corner of a letter to
+be momentarily seen.
+
+"An impostor!" Gerald cried in a loud voice. "To think that I,
+suffering from my terrible wounds, should be taken as an impostor,"
+and with a hideous yell he tumbled down as if in a fit, and rolled
+over and over on the ground towards the duenna.
+
+Seized with alarm at his approach, she turned and ran a few paces
+backward. As she did so Geoffrey stepped up to Inez and held out
+the note, which she took and concealed instantly in her dress.
+
+"There is nothing to be alarmed at," she cried to the duenna. "The
+poor man is doubtless in a fit. Here, my poor fellow, get aid for
+your comrade," and taking out her purse she handed a dollar to
+Geoffrey, and then joining the duenna proceeded on her way.
+
+Geoffrey knelt beside his prostrate companion and appeared to be
+endeavouring to restore him, until the ladies and their servant
+were out of sight.
+
+"That was well managed," Gerald Burke said, sitting up as soon as
+a turn of the road hid them from view. "Now we shall have our answer
+tomorrow. Thank goodness there is no occasion for us to remain any
+longer in these garments!"
+
+They went to the wood and resumed their usual attire, and then
+walked to a large village some four miles away, and putting up at
+the principal inn remained there until early the next morning; then
+they walked back to the village they had left on the previous day
+and posted themselves in a thicket by the roadside, so that they
+could see passersby without being themselves observed.
+
+"My fate will soon be decided now," Gerald said. "Will she wear a
+white flower or not?"
+
+"I am pretty sure that she will," Geoffrey said. "She would not
+have started and coloured when she recognized your voice if she did
+not love you. I do not think you need be under much uneasiness on
+that score."
+
+In half an hour the ladies again came along, followed as before
+by their servants. Donna Inez wore a bunch of white flowers in her
+dress.
+
+"There is my answer," Gerald said. "Thank heaven! she loves me, and
+is ready to fly with me, and will steal out some time after dark
+to meet me in the garden."
+
+As there was no occasion for him to stay longer, Geoffrey returned
+to the village where they slept the night before, and accounted
+for his companion's absence by saying that he had been detained
+on business and would probably not return until late at night, as
+he would not be able to see the person with whom he had affairs
+to transact until late. It was past ten o'clock when Gerald Burke
+returned.
+
+"It is all arranged, Geoffrey. I hid in the garden close by the
+terrace as soon as it became dark. An hour later she came out and
+sauntered along the terrace until I softly called her name; then
+she came to me. She loves me with all her heart, and is ready to
+share my fate whatever it may be. Her father only two days ago had
+ordered her to prepare for her marriage with Don Philip, and she
+was in despair until she recognized my voice yesterday morning. She
+is going with her father to a grand festa at Seville next Wednesday.
+They will stop there two nights -- the one before the festa and the
+one after. I told her that I could not say yet whether I should make
+the attempt to carry her off on her journey or after her return
+here, as that must depend upon circumstances. At any rate, that
+gives us plenty of time to prepare our plans. Tomorrow we will hire
+horses and ride to Seville, and I will there arrange with one of
+my friends at the Irish College to perform the ceremony. However,
+we will talk it all over tomorrow as we ride. I feel as sleepy as
+a dog now after the day's excitement."
+
+Upon the road next day they agreed that if possible they would manage
+to get Inez away in Seville itself Owing to the large number of
+people who would be attracted there to witness the grand procession
+and high mass at the cathedral, the streets would be crowded, and
+it might be possible for Inez to slip away from those with her.
+If this could be managed it would be greatly preferable to the
+employment of the men to carry her off by force. Therefore they
+agreed that the band should be posted so that the party could be
+intercepted on its way back; but that this should be a last resource,
+and that if possible Inez should be carried off in Seville itself.
+
+On reaching Seville they put up at an inn. Gerald at once proceeded
+to the Irish College. Here he inquired for a young priest, who had
+been a near neighbour of his in Ireland and a great friend of his
+boyhood. He was, he knew, about to return home. He found that he
+was at the moment away from Seville, having gone to supply the place
+of a village cure who had been taken suddenly ill. This village
+was situated, he was told, some six miles southeast of the town.
+It was already late in the afternoon, but time was precious; and
+Gerald, hiring a fresh horse, rode out at once to the village. His
+friend was delighted to see him, for they had not met since Gerald
+passed through Seville on his way to join the Armada at Cadiz, and
+the young priest had not heard whether he had escaped the perils
+of the voyage.
+
+"It is lucky you have come, Gerald," he said when the first greetings
+were over, "for I am going to return to Ireland in a fortnight's
+time. I am already appointed to a charge near Cork, and am to sail
+in a Bristol ship which is expected in Cadiz about that time. Is
+there any chance of my meeting you there?"
+
+"An excellent chance, Denis, though my route is not as clearly
+marked out as yours is. I wish to heaven that I could go by the
+same ship. And that leads to what I have come to see you about,"
+and he then told his friend the service he wished him to render.
+
+"It is rather a serious business, Gerald; and a nice scrape I should
+get in if it were found out that I had solemnized the marriage of
+a young lady under age without the consent of her father, and that
+father a powerful nobleman. However, I am not the man to fail you
+at a pinch, and if matters are well managed there is not much risk
+of its being found out that I had a hand in it until I am well
+away, and once in Ireland no one is likely to make any great fuss
+over my having united a runaway pair in Spain. Besides, if you and
+the young lady have made up your minds to run away, it is evidently
+necessary that you should be married at once; so my conscience is
+perfectly clear in the business. And now, what is your plan?"
+
+"The only part of my plan that is settled is to bring her here and
+marry her. After that I shall have horses ready, and we will ride
+by unfrequented roads to Malaga or some other port and take a
+passage in a ship sailing say to Italy, for there is no chance of
+getting a vessel hence to England. Once in Italy there will be no
+difficulty in getting a passage to England. I have with me a young
+Englishman, as staunch a friend as one can need. I need not tell
+you all about how I became acquainted with him; but he is as anxious
+to get out of Spain as I am, and that is saying no little."
+
+"It seems rather a vague plan, Gerald. There is sure to be a great
+hue and cry as soon as the young lady is found to be missing. The
+marquis is a man of great influence, and the authorities will use
+every effort to enable him to discover her."
+
+"You see, Denis, they will have no reason for supposing that I have
+had any hand in the matter, and therefore no special watch will
+be set at the ports. The duenna for her own sake is not likely to
+say a word about any passages she may have observed between us at
+Madrid, and she is unaware that there have been any communications
+with her since."
+
+"I suppose you will at once put on disguises, Gerald."
+
+"Yes, that will of course be the first thing."
+
+"If you dress her as a young peasant woman of the better class and
+yourself as a small cultivator, I will mention to my servant that
+I am expecting my newly married niece and her husband to stay
+with me for a few days. The old woman will have no idea that I,
+an Irishman, would not have a Spanish niece, and indeed I do not
+suppose that she has any idea that I am not a Spaniard. I will open
+the church myself and perform the service late in the evening, so
+that no one will be aware of what is going on. Of course I can put
+up your friend too. Then you can stay quietly here as long as you
+like."
+
+"That will do admirably, Denis; but I think we had best go on the
+next morning," Gerald said, "although it will be a day or two before
+there is anything like an organized pursuit. It will be supposed
+that she is in Seville, and inquiries will at first be confined to
+that town. If she leaves a note behind saying that she is determined
+even to take the veil rather than marry the man her father has
+chosen for her, that will cause additional delay. It will be supposed
+that she is concealed in the house of some friend, or that she has
+sought a refuge in a nunnery, and at any rate there is not likely
+to be any search over the country for some days, especially as her
+father will naturally be anxious that what he will consider an act
+of rebellion on the part of his daughter shall not become publicly
+known."
+
+"All this, of course, is if we succeed in getting her clear away
+during the fete. If we have to fall back on the other plan I was
+talking of and carry her off by force on the way home, the search
+will be immediate and general. In that case nothing could be better
+than your plan that we should stop here quietly for a few days
+with you. They will be searching for a band of robbers and will
+not dream of making inquiry for the missing girl in a quiet village
+like this."
+
+"Well, we will leave that open, Gerald. I shall let it be known
+that you are expected, and whenever you arrive you will be welcome."
+
+As soon as the point was arranged Gerald again mounted his horse
+and returned to Seville. There upon the following morning he engaged
+a lodging for the three days of the festa in a quiet house in the
+outskirts of the town, and they then proceeded to purchase the
+various articles necessary for their disguise and that of Inez.
+The next morning they started on their return to Jeres. Here Gerald
+made arrangements with the band to meet him in a wood on the road
+to Cadiz at eight in the morning on the day following the termination
+of the festa at Seville. One of the party was to proceed on that day
+to the house among the hills they had fixed upon as their hiding
+place, and to get provisions and everything requisite for the
+reception of their captive. They received another five crowns each,
+the remaining fifteen was to be paid them as soon as they arrived
+with their captive at the house.
+
+The party remained in ignorance as to the age and sex of the person
+they were to carry off, and had little curiosity as to the point,
+as they regarded this but a small adventure in comparison to the
+lucrative schemes in which they were afterwards to be sharers.
+
+These arrangements made, Gerald and Geoffrey returned to Seville,
+and reached that city on the eve of the commencement of the festa,
+and took up their abode at the lodging they had hired. On the
+following morning they posted themselves in the street by which
+the party they expected would arrive. Both were attired in quiet
+citizen dress, and Gerald retained his formidable moustachios and
+bushy eyebrows.
+
+In two or three hours a coach accompanied by four lackeys on horseback
+came up the street, and they saw that it contained the Marquis of
+Ribaldo, his daughter, and her duenna. They followed a short distance
+behind it until it entered the courtyard of a stately mansion,
+which they learnt on inquiry from a passerby belonged to the Duke
+of Sottomayor. The streets were already crowded with people in holiday
+attire, the church bells were ringing, and flags and decorations
+of all kinds waved along the route that was to be followed by the
+great procession. The house did not stand on this line, and it
+was necessary therefore for its inmates to pass through the crowd
+either to the cathedral or to the balcony of the house from which
+they might intend to view the procession pass.
+
+Half an hour after the arrival of the coach, the marquis and his
+daughter, accompanied by Don Philip de Sottomayor, sallied out,
+escorted by six armed lackeys, and took their way towards the
+cathedral. They had, however, arrived very late, and the crowd had
+already gathered so densely that even the efforts of the lackeys and
+the angry commands of the marquis and Don Philip failed to enable
+them to make a passage. Very slowly indeed they advanced some
+distance into the crowd, but each moment their progress became
+slower. Gerald and Geoffrey had fallen in behind them and advanced
+with them as they worked themselves in the crowd.
+
+Angry at what they considered the impertinence of the people
+for refusing to make way for them, the nobles pressed forward and
+engaged in an angry controversy with those in front, who urged,
+and truly, that it was simply impossible for them to make way, so
+wedged in were they by the people on all sides. The crowd, neither
+knowing nor caring who were those who thus wished to take precedence
+of the first comers, began to jeer and laugh at the angry nobles,
+and when these threatened to use force threatened in return.
+
+As soon as her father had left her side, Gerald, who was immediately
+behind Inez, whispered in her ear, "Now is the time, Inez. Go with
+my friend; I will occupy the old woman."
+
+"Keep close to me, senora, and pretend that you are ill," Geoffrey
+said, to her, and without hesitation Inez turned and followed him,
+drawing her mantilla more closely over her face.
+
+"Let us pass, friends," Geoffrey said as he elbowed his way through
+those standing behind them, "the lady needs air," and by vigorous
+efforts he presently arrived at the outskirts of the crowd,
+and struck off with his charge in the direction of their lodging.
+"Gerald Burke will follow us as soon as he can get out," he said.
+"Everything is prepared for you, senora, and all arrangements made."
+
+"Who are you, sir?" the girl asked. "I do not recall your face,
+and yet I seem to have seen it before."
+
+"I am English, senora, and am a friend of Gerald Burke's. When in
+Madrid I was disguised as his servant; for as an Englishman and a
+heretic it would have gone hard with me had I been detected."
+
+There were but few people in the streets through which they passed,
+the whole population having flocked either to the streets through
+which the procession was to pass, or to the cathedral or churches
+it was to visit on its way. Gerald had told Inez at their interview
+that, although he had made arrangements for carrying her off by
+force on the journey to or from Seville, he should, if possible, take
+advantage of the crowd at the function to draw her away from her
+companions. She had, therefore, put on her thickest lace mantilla,
+and this now completely covered her face from the view of passersby.
+Several times she glanced back.
+
+"Do nor be uneasy about him, senora," Geoffrey said. "He will not
+try to extricate himself from the crowd until you are discovered
+to be missing, as to do so would be to attract attention. As soon
+as your loss is discovered he will make his way out, and will then
+come on at the top of his speed to the place whither I am conducting
+you, and I expect that we shall find him at the door awaiting us."
+
+A quarter of an hour's walk took them to the lodging, and Inez gave
+a little cry of joy as the door was opened to them by Gerald himself.
+
+"The people of the house are all out," he said, after their first
+greeting. "In that room you will find a peasant girl's dress. Dress
+yourself as quickly as you can; we shall be ready for you in attire
+to match. You had best do up your own things into a bundle, which
+I will carry. If they were left here they might, when the news of
+your being missing gets abroad, afford a clue to the manner of your
+escape. I will tell you all about the arrangements we have made as
+we go along."
+
+"Have you arranged --" and she hesitated.
+
+"Yes, an Irish priest, who is an old friend of mine, will perform
+the ceremony this evening."
+
+A few minutes later two seeming peasants and a peasant girl issued
+out from the lodging. The two men carried stout sticks with bundles
+slung over them.
+
+"Be careful of that bundle," Inez said, "for there are all my jewels
+in it. After what you had said I concealed them all about me. They
+are my fortune, you know. Now, tell me how you got on in the crowd."
+
+"I first pushed rather roughly against the duenna, and then made the
+most profuse apologies, saying that it was shameful people should
+crowd so, and that they ought at once to make way for a lady who
+was evidently of high rank. This mollified her, and we talked for
+three or four minutes; and in the meantime the row in front, caused
+by your father and the lackeys quarrelling with the people, grew
+louder and louder. The old lady became much alarmed, and indeed
+the crowd swayed about so that she clung to my arm. Suddenly she
+thought of you, and turning round gave a scream when she found you
+were missing. 'What is the matter?' I asked anxiously. 'The young
+lady with me! She was here but an instant ago!' (She had forgotten
+you for fully five minutes.) 'What can have become of her?'
+
+"I suggested that no doubt you were close by, but had got separated
+from her by the pressure of the crowd. However, she began to
+squall so loudly that the marquis looked round. He was already in
+a towering rage, and he asked angrily, 'What are you making all this
+noise about?' and then looking round exclaimed, 'Where is Inez?'
+'She was here a moment since!' the old lady exclaimed, 'and now
+she has got separated from me.' Your father looked in vain among
+the crowd, and demanded whether anyone had seen you. Someone said
+that a lady who was fainting had made her way out five minutes
+before. The marquis used some strong language to the old lady, and
+then informed Don Philip what had happened, and made his way back
+out of the crowd with the aid of the lackeys, and is no doubt
+inquiring for you in all the houses near; but, as you may imagine,
+I did not wait. I followed close behind them until they were out
+of the crowd, and then slipped away, and once round the corner took
+to my heels and made my way back, and got in two or three minutes
+before you arrived."
+
+The two young men talked almost continuously during their walk to
+the village in order to keep up the spirits of Donna Inez, and to
+prevent her from thinking of the strangeness of her position and
+the perils that lay before them before safety could be obtained.
+Only once she spoke of the future.
+
+"Is it true, Gerald, that there are always storms and rain in your
+country, and that you never see the sun, for so some of those who
+were in the Armada have told me?"
+
+"It rains there sometimes, Inez, I am bound to admit; but it
+is often fine, and the sun never burns one up as it does here. I
+promise you you will like it, dear, when you once become accustomed
+to it."
+
+"I do not think I shall," she said, shaking her head; "I am accustomed
+to the sun, you know. But I would rather be with you even in such
+an island as they told me of than in Spain with Don Philip."
+
+The village seemed absolutely deserted when they arrived there,
+the whole population having gone over to Seville to take part in
+the great fete. Father Denis received his fair visitor with the
+greatest kindness. "Here, Catherine," he cried to his old servant,
+"here are the visitors I told you I expected. It is well that
+we have the chambers prepared, and that we killed that capon this
+morning."
+
+That evening Gerald Burke and Inez de Ribaldo were married in the
+little church, Geoffrey Vickars being the only witness. The next
+morning there was a long consultation over their plans. "I could
+buy you a cart in the village and a pair of oxen, and you could
+drive to Malaga," the priest said, "but there would be a difficulty
+about changing your disguises after you had entered the town. I
+think that the boldest plan will be the safest one. I should propose
+that you should ride as a well to do trader to Malaga, with your
+wife behind you on a pillion, and your friend here as your servant.
+Lost as your wife was in the crowd at the fete, it will be a long
+time before the fact that she has fled will be realized. For a day
+or two the search will be conducted secretly, and only when the
+house of every friend whom she might have visited has been searched
+will the aid of the authorities be called in, and the poorer quarters,
+where she might have been carried by two or three ruffians who may
+have met her as she emerged in a fainting condition, as is supposed,
+from the crowd, be ransacked. I do not imagine that any search will
+be made throughout the country round for a week at least, by which
+time you will have reached Malaga, and, if you have good fortune,
+be on board a ship."
+
+This plan was finally agreed to. Gerald and his friend at once went
+over to Seville and purchased the necessary dresses, together with
+two strong horses and equipments. It was evening before their return
+to the village. Instead of entering it at once they rode on a mile
+further, and fastened the horses up in a wood. Gerald would have
+left them there alone, but Geoffrey insisted on staying with them
+for the night.
+
+"I care nothing about sleeping in the open air, Gerald, and it would
+be folly to risk the success of our enterprise upon the chance of
+no one happening to come through the wood, and finding the animals
+before you return in the morning. We had a hearty meal at Seville,
+and I shall do very well until morning."
+
+Gerald and his wife took leave of the friendly priest at daybreak
+the next morning, with the hope that they would very shortly meet
+in Ireland. They left the village before anyone was stirring.
+
+The peasant clothes had been left behind them. Gerald carried two
+valises, the one containing the garments in which Inez had fled,
+the other his own attire -- Geoffrey having resumed the dress he
+had formerly worn as his servant.
+
+On arriving at the wood the party mounted, and at once proceeded on
+their journey. Four days' travel took them to Malaga, where they
+arrived without any adventure whatever. Once or twice they met
+parties of rough looking men; but travelling as they did without
+baggage animals, they did not appear promising subjects for robbery,
+and the determined appearance of master and man, each armed with
+sword and pistols, deterred the fellows from an attempt which
+promised more hard knocks than plunder.
+
+After putting up at an inn in Malaga, Gerald went down at once to
+the port to inquire for a vessel bound for Italy. There were three
+or four such vessels in the harbour, and he had no difficulty in
+arranging for a passage to Naples for himself, his wife, and servant.
+The vessel was to sail on the following morning, and it was with
+a deep feeling of satisfaction and relief that they went on board
+her, and an hour later were outside the port.
+
+"It seems marvellous to me," Gerald said, as he looked back upon
+the slowly receding town, "that I have managed to carry off my
+prize with so little difficulty. I had expected to meet with all
+sorts of dangers, and had I been the peaceful trader I looked, our
+journey could not be more uneventful."
+
+"Perhaps you are beginning to think that the prize is not so very
+valuable after all," Inez said, "since you have won it so easily."
+
+"I have not begun to think so yet," Gerald laughed happily. "At any
+rate I shall wait until I get you home before such ideas begin to
+occur to me."
+
+"Directly I get to Ireland," Inez said, "I shall write to my father
+and tell him that I am married to you, and that I should never
+have run away had he not insisted on my marrying a man I hated. I
+shall, of course, beg him to forgive me; but I fear he never will."
+
+"We must hope that he will, Inez, and that he will ask you to come
+back to Spain sometimes. I do not care for myself, you know, for
+as I have told you my estate in Ireland is amply large enough for
+my wants; but I shall be glad, for your sake, that you should be
+reconciled to him."
+
+Inez shook her head.
+
+"You do not know my father, Gerald. I would never go back to Spain
+again -- not if he promised to give me his whole fortune. My father
+never forgives; and were he to entice me back to Spain, it would be
+only to shut me up and to obtain a dispensation from Rome annulling
+the marriage, which he would have no difficulty in doing. No, you
+have got me, and will have to keep me for good. I shall never return
+to Spain, never. Possibly when my father hears from me he may send
+me over money to make me think he has forgiven me, and to induce
+me some day or other to come back to visit him, and so get me into
+his power again; but that, Gerald, he shall never do."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV
+
+THE SURPRISE OF BREDA
+
+
+Lionel Vickars had, by the beginning of 1590, come to speak the
+Dutch language well and fluently. Including his first stay in Holland
+he had now been there eighteen months, and as he was in constant
+communications with the Dutch officers and with the population,
+he had constant occasion for speaking Dutch, a language much more
+akin to English than any other continental tongue, and indeed so
+closely allied to the dialect of the eastern counties of England,
+that the fishermen of our eastern ports had in those days little
+difficulty in conversing with the Hollanders.
+
+He was one day supping with Sir Francis Vere when Prince Maurice
+and several of his officers were also there. The conversation turned
+upon the prospects of the campaign of the ensuing spring. Lionel,
+of course, took no part in it, but listened attentively to what
+was being said and was very pleased to find that the period of
+inactivity was drawing to an end, and that their commanders considered
+that they had now gathered a force of sufficient strength to assume
+the offensive.
+
+"I would," Prince Maurice said, "that we could gain Breda. The
+city stands like a great sentinel against every movement towards
+Flanders, and enables the Spaniards to penetrate at all times towards
+the heart of our country; but I fear that it is altogether beyond
+our means. It is one of the strongest cities in the Netherlands,
+and my ancestors, who were its lords, little thought that they were
+fortifying and strengthening it in order that it might be a thorn
+in the side of their country. I would give much, indeed, to be
+able to wrest it from the enemy; but I fear it will be long before
+we can even hope for that. It could withstand a regular siege by
+a well provided army for months; and as to surprise, it is out of
+the question, for I hear that the utmost vigilance is unceasingly
+maintained."
+
+A few days after this Lionel was talking with Captain de Heraugiere,
+who had also been at the supper. He had taken part in the defence
+of Sluys and was one of the officers with whom Lionel was most
+intimate.
+
+"It would be a rare enterprise to surprise Breda," Captain
+de Heraugiere said; "but I fear it is hopeless to think of such a
+thing."
+
+"I do not see why it should be," Lionel said. "I was reading when
+I was last at home about our wars with the Scotch, and there were
+several cases in which very strong places that could not have been
+carried by assault were captured suddenly by small parties of men
+who disguised themselves as waggoners, and hiding a score or two
+of their comrades in a wagon covered with firewood, or sacks of
+grain, boldly went up to the gates. When there they cut the traces
+of their horses so that the gates could not be closed, or the
+portcullis lowered, and then falling upon the guards, kept them at
+bay until a force, hidden near the gates, ran up and entered the
+town. I see not why a similar enterprise should not be attempted
+at Breda."
+
+"Nor do I," Captain Heraugiere said; "the question is how to set
+about such a scheme."
+
+"That one could not say without seeing the place," Lionel remarked.
+"I should say that a plan of this sort could only be successful
+after those who attempted it had made themselves masters of all
+particulars of the place and its ways. Everything would depend upon
+all going smoothly and without hitches of any kind. If you really
+think of undertaking such an adventure, Captain Heraugiere, I
+should be very glad to act under you if Sir Francis Vere will give
+me leave to do so; but I would suggest that the first step should
+be for us to go into Breda in disguise. We might take in a wagon
+load of grain for sale, or merely carry on our backs baskets with
+country produce, or we could row up in a boat with fish."
+
+"The plan is certainly worth thinking of," Captain Heraugiere said.
+"I will turn it over in my mind for a day, and will then talk to
+you again. It would be a grand stroke, and there would be great
+honour to be obtained; but it will not do for me to go to Prince
+Maurice and lay it before him until we have a plan completely worked
+out, otherwise we are more likely to meet with ridicule than praise."
+
+The following day Captain Heraugiere called at Lionel's lodgings.
+"I have lain awake all night thinking of our scheme," he said,
+"and have resolved to carry out at least the first part of it --
+to enter Breda and see what are the prospects of success, and the
+manner in which the matter had best be set about. I propose that
+we two disguise ourselves as fishermen, and going down to the river
+between Breda and Willemstad bargain with some fishermen going up
+to Breda with their catch for the use of their boat. While they are
+selling the fish we can survey the town and see what is the best
+method of introducing a force into it. When our plan is completed
+we will go to Voorne, whither Prince Maurice starts tomorrow, and
+lay the matter before him."
+
+"I will gladly go with you to Breda," Lionel said, "and, as far
+as I can, aid you there; but I think that it would be best that
+you only should appear in the matter afterwards. I am but a young
+volunteer, and it would be well that I did not appear at all in
+the matter, which you had best make entirely your own. But I hope,
+Captain Heraugiere, that should the prince decide to adopt any plan
+you may form, and intrust the matter to you, that you will take me
+with you in your following."
+
+"That I will assuredly," Captain Heraugiere said, "and will take care
+that if it should turn out successful your share in the enterprise
+shall be known."
+
+"When do you think of setting about it?" Lionel asked.
+
+"Instantly. My company is at Voorne, and I should return thither
+with the prince today. I will at once go to him and ask for leave
+to be absent on urgent affairs for a week. Do you go to Sir Francis
+Vere and ask for a similar time. Do not tell him, if you can help
+it, the exact nature of your enterprise. But if you cannot obtain
+leave otherwise, of course you must do so. I will be back here in
+two hours' time. We can then at once get our disguises, and hire
+a craft to take us to Willemstad."
+
+Lionel at once went across to the quarters of Sir Francis Vere.
+
+"I have come, Sir Francis, to ask for a week's leave of absence."
+
+"That you can have, Lionel. Where are you going --shooting ducks
+on the frozen meres?"
+
+"No, Sir Francis. I am going on a little expedition with Captain
+Heraugiere, who has invited me to accompany him. We have an idea in
+our heads that may perhaps be altogether useless, but may possibly
+bear fruit. In the first case we would say nothing about it, in
+the second we will lay it before you on our return."
+
+"Very well," Sir Francis said with a smile. "You showed that you
+could think at Sluys, and I hope something may come of this idea
+of yours, whatever it may be."
+
+At the appointed time Captain Heraugiere returned, having obtained
+leave of absence from the prince. They at once went out into the
+town and bought the clothes necessary for their disguise. They
+returned with these to their lodgings, and having put them on went
+down to the wharf, where they had no difficulty in bargaining with
+the master of a small craft to take them to Willemstad, as the
+Spaniards had no ships whatever on the water between Rotterdam and
+Bergen op Zoom. The boat was to wait three days for them at that
+town, and to bring them back to Rotterdam. As there was no reason
+for delay they at once went on board and cast off. The distance
+was but thirty miles, and just at nightfall they stepped ashore at
+the town of Willemstad.
+
+The next morning they had no difficulty in arranging with a fisherman
+who was going up to Breda with a cargo of fish to take the place
+of two of his boatmen at the oars.
+
+"We want to spend a few hours there," Captain Heraugiere said, "and
+will give you five crowns if you will leave two of your men here
+and let us take their places."
+
+"That is a bargain," the man said at once; "that is, if you can
+row, for we shall scarce take the tide up to the town, and must
+keep on rowing to get there before the ebb begins."
+
+"We can row, though perhaps not so well as your own men. You are,
+I suppose, in the habit of going there, and are known to the guards
+at the port? They are not likely, I should think, to notice that
+you haven't got the same crew as usual?"
+
+"There is no fear of that, and if they did I could easily say that
+two of my men were unable to accompany me today, and that I have
+hired fresh hands in their places."
+
+Two of the men got out. Captain Heraugiere and Lionel Vickars took
+their places, and the boat proceeded up the river. The oars were
+heavy and clumsy, and the newcomers were by no means sorry when,
+after a row of twelve miles, they neared Breda.
+
+"What are the regulations for entering Breda?" Captain Heraugiere
+asked as they approached the town.
+
+"There are no particular regulations," the master of the boat said,
+"save that on entering the port the boat is searched to see that
+it contains nothing but fish. None are allowed to enter the gates
+of the town without giving their names, and satisfying the officer
+on guard that they have business in the place."
+
+An officer came on board as the boat ran up alongside the quay and
+asked a few questions. After assisting in getting the basket of
+fish on shore Captain Heraugiere and Lionel sauntered away along
+the quay, leaving the fishermen to dispose of their catch to the
+townspeople, who had already begun to bargain for them.
+
+The river Mark flowed through the town, supplying its moats with
+water. Where it left the town on the western side was the old
+castle, with a moat of its own and strong fortified lines. Within
+was the quay, with an open place called the fish market leading
+to the gates of the new castle. There were 600 Spanish infantry in
+the town and 100 in the castle, and 100 cavalry. The governor of
+Breda, Edward Lanzavecchia, was absent superintending the erection
+of new fortifications at Gertruydenberg, and in his absence the
+town was under the command of his son Paolo.
+
+Great vigilance was exercised. All vessels entering port were
+strictly examined, and there was a guard house on the quay. Lying
+by one of the wharves was a large boat laden with peat, which was
+being rapidly unloaded, the peat being sold as soon as landed, as
+fuel was very short in the city.
+
+"It seems to me," Lionel said as they stood for a minute looking
+on, "that this would be just the thing for us. If we could make an
+arrangement with the captain of one of these peat boats we might
+hide a number of men in the hold and cover them with peat. A place
+might be built large enough, I should think, to hold seventy or
+eighty men, and yet be room for a quantity of peat to be stowed
+over them."
+
+"A capital idea," Captain Heraugiere said. "The peat comes from
+above the town. We must find out where the barges are loaded, and
+try to get at one of the captains."
+
+After a short walk through the town they returned to the boat. The
+fisherman had already sold out his stock, and was glad at seeing
+his passengers return earlier than he expected; but as the guard
+was standing by he rated them severely for keeping him waiting so
+long, and with a muttered excuse they took their places in the boat
+and rowed down the river.
+
+"I want you to put us ashore on the left bank as soon as we are
+our of sight of the town," Captain Heraugiere said. "As it will
+be heavy work getting your boat back with only two of you, I will
+give you a couple of crowns beyond the amount I bargained with you
+for."
+
+"That will do well enough," the man said. "We have got the tide
+with us, and can drop down at our leisure."
+
+As soon as they were landed they made a wide detour to avoid the
+town, and coming down again upon the river above it, followed its
+banks for three miles, when they put up at a little inn in the small
+village of Leur on its bank. They had scarcely sat down to a meal
+when a man came in and called for supper. The landlord placed
+another plate at the table near them, and the man at once got into
+conversation with them, and they learnt that he was master of a
+peat boat that had that morning left Breda empty.
+
+"We were in Breda ourselves this morning," Captain Heraugiere said,
+"and saw a peat boat unloading there. There seemed to be a brisk
+demand for the fuel."
+
+"Yes; it is a good trade at present," the man said. "There are only
+six of us who have permits to enter the port, and it is as much as
+we can do to keep the town supplied with fuel; for, you see, at any
+moment the river may be frozen up, so the citizens need to keep
+a good stock in hand. I ought not to grumble, since I reap the
+benefit of the Spanish regulations; but all these restrictions on
+trade come mighty hard upon the people of Breda. It was not so in
+the old time."
+
+After supper was over Captain Heraugiere ordered a couple of flasks
+of spirits, and presently learned from the boatman that his name
+was Adrian Van de Berg, and that he had been at one time a servant
+in the household of William of Orange. Little by little Captain
+Heraugiere felt his way, and soon found that the boatman was an
+enthusiastic patriot. He then confided to him that he himself was
+an officer in the State's service, and had come to Breda to ascertain
+whether there was any possibility of capturing the town by surprise.
+
+"We hit on a plan today," he said, "which promises a chance of
+success; but it needs the assistance of one ready to risk his life."
+
+"I am ready to risk my life in any enterprise that has a fair
+chance of success," the boatman said, "but I do not see how I can
+be of much assistance."
+
+"You can be of the greatest assistance if you will, and will render
+the greatest service to your country if you will join in our plan.
+What we propose is, that we should construct a shelter of boards
+four feet high in the bottom of your boat, leading from your little
+cabin aft right up to the bow. In this I calculate we could stow
+seventy men; then the peat could be piled over it, and if you
+entered the port somewhat late in the afternoon you could manage
+that it was not unladen so as to uncover the roof of our shelter
+before work ceased for the night. Then we could sally out, overpower
+the guard on the quay, make for one of the gates, master the guard
+there, and open it to our friends without."
+
+"It is a bold plan and a good one," Van de Berg said, "and I am
+ready to run my share of the risk with you. I am so well known in
+Breda that they do not search the cargo very closely when I arrive,
+and I see no reason why the party hidden below should not escape
+observation. I will undertake my share of the business if you
+decide to carry it out. I served the prince for fifteen years, and
+am ready to serve his son. There are plenty of planks to be obtained
+at a place three miles above here, and it would not take many hours
+to construct the false deck. If you send a messenger here giving
+me two days' notice, it shall be built and the peat stowed on it
+by the time you arrive."
+
+It was late at night before the conversation was concluded, and
+the next morning Captain Heraugiere and Lionel started on their
+return, struck the river some miles below Breda, obtained a passage
+over the river in a passing boat late in the afternoon, and, sleeping
+at Willemstad, went on board their boat next morning and returned
+to Rotterdam. It was arranged that Lionel should say nothing about
+their journey until Captain Heraugiere had opened the subject to
+Prince Maurice.
+
+"You are back before your time," Sir Francis Vere said when Lionel
+reported himself for duty. "Has anything come of this project of
+yours, whatever it may be?"
+
+"We hope so, sir, Captain Heraugiere will make his report to Prince
+Maurice. He is the leader of the party, and therefore he thought
+it best that he should report to Prince Maurice, who, if he thinks
+well of it, will of course communicate with you."
+
+The next day a message arrived from Voorne requesting Sir Francis
+Vere to proceed thither to discuss with the prince a matter of
+importance. He returned after two days' absence, and presently sent
+for Lionel.
+
+"This is a rare enterprise that Captain Heraugiere has proposed to
+the prince," he said, "and promises well for success. It is to be
+kept a profound secret, and a few only will know aught of it until
+it is executed. Heraugiere is of course to have command of the party
+which is to be hidden in the barge, and is to pick out eighty men
+from the garrisons of Gorcum and Lowesteyn. He has begged that you
+shall be of the party, as he says that the whole matter was in the
+first case suggested to him by you. The rest of the men and officers
+will be Dutch."
+
+A fortnight later, on the 22nd of February, Sir Francis Vere on his
+return from the Hague, where Prince Maurice now was, told Lionel
+that all was arranged. The message had come down from Van de Berg
+that the hiding place was constructed. They were to join Heraugiere
+the next day.
+
+On the 24th of February the little party starred. Heraugiere had
+chosen young, active, and daring men. With him were Captains Logier
+and Fervet, and Lieutenant Held. They embarked on board a vessel,
+and were landed near the mouth of the Mark, as De Berg was this
+time going to carry the peat up the river instead of down, fearing
+that the passage of seventy men through the country would attract
+attention. The same night Prince Maurice, Sir Francis Vere, Count
+Hohenlohe, and other officers sailed to Willemstad, their destination
+having been kept a strict secret from all but those engaged in the
+enterprise. Six hundred English troops, eight hundred Dutch, and
+three hundred cavalry had been drawn from different garrisons, and
+were also to land at Willemstad.
+
+When Heraugiere's party arrived at the point agreed on at eleven
+o'clock at night, Van de Berg was not there, nor was the barge;
+and angry and alarmed at his absence they searched about for him
+for hours, and at last found him in the village of Terheyde. He made
+the excuse that he had overslept himself, and that he was afraid
+the plot had been discovered. As everything depended upon his
+cooperation, Heraugiere abstained from the angry reproaches which
+the strange conduct of the man had excited; and as it was now
+too late to do anything that night, a meeting was arranged for
+the following evening, and a message was despatched to the prince
+telling him that the expedition was postponed for a day. On their
+return, the men all gave free vent to their indignation.
+
+"I have no doubt," Heraugiere said, "that the fellow has turned
+coward now that the time has come to face the danger. It is one
+thing to talk about a matter as long as it is far distant, but
+another to look it in the face when it is close at hand. I do not
+believe that he will come tomorrow.
+
+"If he does not he will deserve hanging," Captain Logier said;
+"after all the trouble he has given in getting the troops together,
+and after bringing the prince himself over."
+
+"It will go very near hanging if not quite," Heraugiere muttered.
+"If he thinks that he is going to fool us with impunity, he is
+mightily mistaken. If he is a wise man he will start at daybreak,
+and get as far away as he can before nightfall if he does not mean
+to come."
+
+The next day the party remained in hiding in a barn, and in the
+evening again went down to the river. There was a barge lying there
+laden high with turf. A general exclamation of satisfaction broke
+from all when they saw it. There were two men on it. One landed
+and came to meet them.
+
+"Where is Van de Berg?" Captain Heraugiere asked as he came up.
+
+"He is ill and unable to come, but has sent you this letter. My
+brother and myself have undertaken the business."
+
+The letter merely said that the writer was too ill to come, but
+had sent in his place his two nephews, one or other of whom always
+accompanied him, and who could be trusted thoroughly to carry out
+the plan. The party at once went on board the vessel, descended
+into the little cabin aft, and then passed through a hole made by
+the removal of two planks into the hold that had been prepared for
+them. Heraugiere remained on deck, and from time to time descended
+to inform those below of the progress being made. It was slow
+indeed, for a strong wind laden with sleet blew directly down the
+river. Huge blocks of ice floated down, and the two boatmen with
+their poles had the greatest difficulty in keeping the boat's head
+up the stream.
+
+At last the wind so increased that navigation became impossible,
+and the barge was made fast against the bank. From Monday night
+until Thursday morning the gale continued. Progress was impossible,
+and the party cramped up in the hold suffered greatly from hunger
+and thirst. On Thursday evening they could sustain it no longer and
+landed. They were for a time scarce able to walk, so cramped were
+their limbs by their long confinement, and made their way up painfully
+to a fortified building called Nordand, standing far from any other
+habitations. Here they obtained food and drink, and remained until
+eleven at night. One of the boatmen came to them with news that the
+wind had changed, and was now blowing in from the sea. They again
+took their places on board, but the water was low in the river, and
+it was difficult work passing the shallows, and it was not until
+Saturday afternoon that they passed the boom below the town and
+entered the inner harbour.
+
+An officer of the guard came off in a boat and boarded the barge.
+The weather was so bitterly cold that he at once went into the
+little cabin and there chatted with the two boatmen. Those in the
+hold could hear every word that was said, and they almost held their
+breath, for the slightest noise would betray them. After a while
+the officer got into his boat again, saying he would send some
+men off to warp the vessel into the castle dock, as the fuel was
+required by the garrison there. As the barge was making its way
+towards the watergate, it struck upon a hidden obstruction in the
+river and began to leak rapidly. The situation of those in the hold
+was now terrible, for in a few minutes the water rose to their
+knees, and the choice seemed to be presented to them of being
+drowned like rats there, or leaping overboard, in which case they
+would be captured and hung without mercy. The boatmen plied the
+pumps vigorously, and in a short time a party of Italian soldiers
+arrived from the shore and towed the vessel into the inner harbour,
+and made her fast close to the guard house of the castle. A party
+of labourers at once came on board and began to unload the turf;
+the need of fuel both in the town and castle being great, for the
+weather had been for some time bitterly cold.
+
+A fresh danger now arose. The sudden immersion in the icy water
+in the close cabin brought on a sudden inclination to sneeze and
+cough. Lieutenant Held, finding himself unable to repress his cough,
+handed his dagger to Lionel Vickars, who happened to be sitting
+next to him, and implored him to stab him to the heart lest his
+cough might betray the whole party; but one of the boatmen who was
+standing close to the cabin heard the sounds, and bade his companion
+go on pumping with as much noise and clatter as possible, while he
+himself did the same, telling those standing on the wharf alongside
+that the boat was almost full of water. The boatmen behaved with
+admirable calmness and coolness, exchanging jokes with acquaintances
+on the quay, keeping up a lively talk, asking high prices for their
+peat, and engaging in long and animated bargains so as to prevent
+the turf from being taken too rapidly ashore.
+
+At last, when but a few layers of turf remained over the roof
+of the hold, the elder brother told the men unloading that it was
+getting too dark, and he himself was too tired and worn out to
+attend to things any longer. He therefore gave the man some money
+and told them to go to the nearest public house to drink his health,
+and to return the first thing in the morning to finish unloading.
+The younger of the two brothers had already left the boat. He made
+his way through the town, and started at full speed to carry the
+news to Prince Maurice that the barge had arrived safely in the
+town, and the attempt would be made at midnight; also of the fact
+they had learned from those on the wharf, that the governor had
+heard a rumour that a force had landed somewhere on the coast, and
+had gone off again to Gertruydenberg in all haste, believing that
+some design was on foot against that town. His son Paolo was again
+in command of the garrison.
+
+A little before midnight Captain Heraugiere told his comrades that
+the hour had arrived, and that only by the most desperate bravery
+could they hope to succeed, while death was the certain consequence
+of failure. The band were divided into two companies. He himself
+with one was to attack the main guard house; the other, under
+Fervet, was to seize the arsenal of the fortress. Noiselessly they
+stole out from their hiding place, and formed upon the wharf within
+the inclosure of the castle. Heraugiere moved straight upon the
+guard house. The sentry was secured instantly; but the slight noise
+was heard, and the captain of the watch ran out, but was instantly
+cut down.
+
+Others came our with torches, but after a brief fight were driven
+into the guard house; when all were shot down through the doors
+and windows. Captain Ferver and his band had done equally well. The
+magazine of the castle was seized, and its defenders slain. Paolo
+Lanzavecchia made a sally from the palace with a few of his adherents,
+but was wounded and driven back; and the rest of the garrison of
+the castle, ignorant of the strength of the force that had thus
+risen as it were from the earth upon them, fled panic stricken,
+not even pausing to destroy the bridge between the castle and the
+town.
+
+Young Paolo Lanzavecchia now began a parley with the assailants;
+but while the negotiations were going on Hohenlohe with his cavalry
+came up -- having been apprised by the boatman that the attempt was
+about to be made -- battered down the palisade near the watergate,
+and entered the castle. A short time afterwards Prince Maurice,
+Sir Francis Vere, and other officers arrived with the main body of
+the troops. But the fight was over before even Hohenlohe arrived;
+forty of the garrison being killed, and not a single man of the
+seventy assailants. The burgomaster, finding that the castle had
+fallen, and that a strong force had arrived, then sent a trumpeter
+to the castle to arrange for the capitulation of the town, which
+was settled on the following terms:-- All plundering was commuted
+for the payment of two months' pay to every soldier engaged in the
+affair. All who chose might leave the city, with full protection
+to life and property. Those who were willing to remain were not
+to be molested in their consciences or households with regard to
+religion.
+
+The news of the capture of Breda was received with immense enthusiasm
+throughout Holland. It was the first offensive operation that had
+been successfully undertaken, and gave new hope to the patriots.
+
+Parma was furious at the cowardice with which five companies of
+foot and one of horse -- all picked troops -- had fled before the
+attack of seventy Hollanders. Three captains were publicly beheaded
+in Brussels and a fourth degraded to the ranks, while Lanzavecchia
+was deprived of the command of Gertruydenberg.
+
+For some months before the assault upon Breda the army of Holland
+had been gaining vastly in strength and organization. Prince Maurice,
+aided by his cousin Lewis William, stadholder of Friesland, had been
+hard at work getting it into a state of efficiency. Lewis William,
+a man of great energy and military talent, saw that the use of
+solid masses of men in the field was no longer fitted to a state of
+things when the improvements in firearms of all sorts had entirely
+changed the condition of war. He therefore reverted to the old
+Roman methods, and drilled his soldiers in small bodies; teaching
+them to turn and wheel, advance or retreat, and perform all sorts
+of manoeuvres with regularity and order. Prince Maurice adopted
+the same plan in Holland, and the tactics so introduced proved so
+efficient that they were sooner or later adopted by all civilized
+nations.
+
+At the time when William of Orange tried to relieve the hard pressed
+city of Haarlem, he could with the greatest difficulty muster three
+or four thousand men for the purpose. The army of the Netherlands
+was now 22,000 strong, of whom 2000 were cavalry. It was well
+disciplined, well equipped, and regularly paid, and was soon to
+prove that the pains bestowed upon it had not been thrown away.
+In the course of eighteen years that had followed the capture of
+Brill and the commencement of the struggle with Spain, the wealth
+and prosperity of Holland had enormously increased. The Dutch were
+masters of the sea coast, the ships of the Zeelanders closed every
+avenue to the interior, and while the commerce of Antwerp, Ghent,
+Bruges, and the other cities of the provinces that remained in
+the hands of the Spaniards was for the time destroyed, and their
+population fell off by a half, Holland benefited in proportion.
+
+From all the Spanish provinces men of energy and wealth passed
+over in immense numbers to Holland, where they could pursue their
+commerce and industries -- free from the exactions and cruelty under
+which they had for so many years groaned. The result was that the
+cities of Holland increased vastly in wealth and population, and
+the resources at the disposal of Prince Maurice enormously exceeded
+those with which his father had for so many years sustained the
+struggle.
+
+For a while after the capture of Breda there was breathing time
+in Holland, and Maurice was busy in increasing and improving his
+army. Parma was fettered by the imperious commands of Philip, who
+had completely crippled him by withdrawing a considerable number of
+his troops for service in the war which he was waging with France.
+But above all, the destruction of the Armada, and with it of the
+naval supremacy of Spain, had changed the situation.
+
+Holland was free to carry on her enterprises by sea, and had free
+communication and commerce with her English ally; while communication
+between Spain and the Netherlands was difficult. Reinforcements
+could no longer be sent by sea, and had to be sent across Europe
+from Italy. Parma was worn out by exertions, disappointment, and
+annoyance, and his health was seriously failing; while opposed
+to him were three young commanders -- Maurice, Lewis William, and
+Francis Vere -- all men of military genius and full of confidence
+and energy.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV
+
+A SLAVE IN BARBARY
+
+
+The Terifa had left port but a few hours when a strong wind rose
+from the north, and rapidly increased in violence until it was
+blowing a gale. "Inez is terribly ill," Gerald said when he met
+Geoffrey on deck the following morning.
+
+"I believe at the present moment she would face her father and risk
+everything if she could but be put on shore."
+
+"I can well imagine that. However, she will think otherwise tomorrow
+or next day. I believe these Mediterranean storms do not last long.
+There is no fear of six weeks of bad weather such as we had when
+we were last afloat together."
+
+"No. I have just been speaking to the captain. He says they generally
+blow themselves out in two or three days; but still, even that is
+not a pleasant lookout. These vessels are not like your English
+craft, which seem to be able to sail almost in the eye of the wind.
+They are lubberly craft, and badly handled; and if this gale lasts
+for three days we shall be down on the Barbary coast, and I would
+rather risk another journey through Spain than get down so near
+the country of the Moors."
+
+"I can understand that," Geoffrey agreed. "However, I see there
+are some thirty soldiers forward on their way to join one of the
+regiments in Naples, so we ought to be able to beat off any corsair
+that might come near us."
+
+"Yes; but if we got down on their coast we might be attacked by
+half a dozen of them," Gerald said. "However, one need not begin to
+worry one's self at present; the gale may abate within a few hours."
+
+At the end of the second day the wind went down suddenly; and
+through the night the vessel rolled heavily, for the sea was still
+high, and there was not a breath of wind to fill her sails and steady
+her. By the morning the sea had gone down, but there was still an
+absence of wind.
+
+"We have had a horrible night," Gerald remarked, "but we may think
+ourselves fortunate indeed," and he pointed to the south, where
+the land was plainly visible at a distance of nine or ten miles.
+"If the gale had continued to blow until now we should have been
+on shore long before this."
+
+"We are too near to be pleasant," Geoffrey said, "for they can
+see us as plainly as we can see the land. It is to be hoped that
+a breeze may spring up from the south before long and enable us
+to creep off the land. Unless I am greatly mistaken I can see the
+masts of some craft or other in a line with those white houses over
+there."
+
+"I don't see them," Gerald replied, gazing intently in the direction
+in which Geoffrey pointed.
+
+"Let us go up to the top, Gerald; we shall see her hull from there
+plainly enough."
+
+On reaching the top Gerald saw at once that his friend's eyes had
+not deceived him.
+
+"Yes, there is a vessel there sure enough, Geoffrey. I cannot see
+whether she has one or two masts, for her head is in this direction."
+
+"That is not the worst of it," Geoffrey said, shading his eyes and
+gazing intently on the distant object. "She is rowing; I can see
+the light flash on her oars every stroke. That is a Moorish galley,
+and she is coming out towards us."
+
+"I believe you are right," Gerald replied after gazing earnestly
+for some time. "Yes, I saw the flash of the oars then distinctly."
+
+They at once descended to the deck and informed the captain of what
+they had seen. He hastily mounted to the top.
+
+"There is no mistake about it," he said after looking intently for
+a short time; "it is one of the Barbary corsairs, and she is making
+out towards us. The holy saints preserve us from these bloodthirsty
+infidels."
+
+"The saints will do their work if we do ours," Gerald remarked; "and
+we had best do as large a share as possible. What is the number of
+your crew, captain?"
+
+"Nineteen men altogether."
+
+"And there are thirty soldiers, and six male passengers in the
+cabin," Gerald said; "so we muster fifty-four. That ought to be
+enough to beat off the corsair."
+
+On returning to the deck the captain informed the officer in charge of
+the troops on board that a Moorish pirate was putting off towards
+them, and that unless the wind came to their aid there was no chance
+of escaping a conflict with her.
+
+"Then we must fight her, captain," the officer, who was still a
+youth, said cheerfully. "I have thirty men, of whom at least half
+are veterans. You have four cannon on board, and there are the crew
+and passengers.
+
+"Fifty-four in all," Gerald said. "We ought to be able to make a
+good fight of it."
+
+Orders were at once given, soldiers and crew were mustered and
+informed of the approaching danger.
+
+"We have got to fight, men, and to fight hard," the young officer
+said; "for if we are beaten you know the result -- either our throats
+will be cut or we shall have to row in their galleys for the rest
+of our lives. So there is not much choice."
+
+In an hour the corsair was halfway between the coast and the vessel.
+By this time every preparation had been made for her reception. Arms
+had been distributed among the crew and such of the passengers as
+were not already provided, the guns had been cast loose and ammunition
+brought up, cauldrons of pitch were ranged along the bulwarks and
+fires lighted on slabs of stone placed beneath them. The coppers
+in the galley were already boiling.
+
+"Now, captain," the young officer said, "do you and your sailors
+work the guns and ladle out the pitch and boiling water, and be in
+readiness to catch up their pikes and axes and aid in the defence
+if the villains gain a footing on the deck. I and my men and the
+passengers will do our best to keep them from climbing up."
+
+The vessel was provided with sweeps, and the captain had in
+the first place proposed to man them; but Gerald pointed out that
+the corsair would row three feet to their one, and that it was
+important that all should be fresh and vigorous when the pirates
+came alongside. The idea had consequently been abandoned, and the
+vessel lay motionless in the water while the corsair was approaching.
+Inez, who felt better now that the motion had subsided, came on
+deck as the preparations were being made. Gerald told her of the
+danger that was approaching. She turned pale.
+
+"This is dreadful, Gerald, I would rather face death a thousand
+times than be captured by the Moors."
+
+"We shall beat them off, dear, never fear. They will not reckon
+upon the soldiers we have on board, and will expect an easy prize.
+I do not suppose that, apart from the galley slaves, they have more
+men on board than we have, and fighting as we do for liberty, each
+of us ought to be equal to a couple of these Moorish dogs. When
+the conflict begins you must go below."
+
+"I shall not do that," Inez said firmly. "We will share the same
+fate whatever it may be, Gerald; and remember that whatever happens
+I will not live to be carried captive among them, I will stab myself
+to the heart if I see that all is lost."
+
+"You shall come on deck if you will, Inez, when they get close
+alongside. I do not suppose there will be many shots fired -- they
+will be in too great a hurry to board; but as long as they are
+shooting you must keep below. After that come up if you will. It
+would make a coward of me did I know that a chance shot might strike
+you."
+
+"Very well, then, Gerald, to please you I will go down until they
+come alongside, then come what will I shall be on deck."
+
+As the general opinion on board was that the corsairs would not
+greatly outnumber them, while they would be at a great disadvantage
+from the lowness of their vessel in the water, there was a general
+feeling of confidence, and the approach of the enemy was watched
+with calmness. When half a mile distant two puffs of smoke burst
+out from the corsair's bows. A moment later a shot struck the ship,
+and another threw up the water close to her stern. The four guns
+of the Tarifa had been brought over to the side on which the enemy
+was approaching, and these were now discharged. One of the shots
+carried away some oars on the starboard side of the galley, another
+struck her in the bow. There was a slight confusion on board; two
+or three oars were shifted over from the port to the starboard
+side, and, she continued her way.
+
+The guns were loaded again, bags of bullets being this time inserted
+instead of balls. The corsairs fired once more, but their shots
+were unanswered; and with wild yells and shouts they approached
+the motionless Spanish vessel.
+
+"She is crowded with men," Gerald remarked to Geoffrey. "She has
+far more on board than we reckoned on."
+
+"We have not given them a close volley yet," Geoffrey replied. "If
+the guns are well aimed they will make matters equal."
+
+The corsair was little more than her own length away when the captain
+gave the order, and the four guns poured their contents upon her
+crowded decks. The effect was terrible. The mass of men gathered
+in her bow in readiness to board as soon as she touched the Tarifa
+were literally swept away. Another half minute she was alongside
+the Spaniard, and the Moors with wild shouts of vengeance tried to
+clamber on board.
+
+But they had not reckoned upon meeting with more than the ordinary
+crew of a merchant ship. The soldiers discharged their arquebuses,
+and then with pike and sword opposed an impenetrable barrier to the
+assailants, while the sailors from behind ladled over the boiling
+pitch and water through intervals purposely left in the line of the
+defenders. The conflict lasted but a few minutes. Well nigh half
+the Moors had been swept away by the discharge of the cannon, and
+the rest, but little superior in numbers to the Spaniards, were
+not long before they lost heart, their efforts relaxed, and shouts
+arose to the galley slaves to row astern.
+
+"Now, it is our turn!" the young officer cried. "Follow me, my
+men; we will teach the dogs a lesson." As he spoke he sprang from
+the bulwark down upon the deck of the corsair. Geoffrey, who was
+standing next to him, followed his example, as did five or six
+soldiers. They were instantly engaged in a hand to hand fight with
+the Moors. In the din and confusion they heard not the shouts of
+their comrades. After a minute's fierce fighting, Geoffrey, finding
+that he and his companions were being pressed back, glanced round
+to see why support did not arrive, and saw that there were already
+thirty feet of water between the two vessels. He was about to
+spring overboard, when the Moors made a desperate rush, his guard
+was beaten down, a blow from a Moorish scimitar fell on his head,
+and he lost consciousness.
+
+It was a long time before he recovered. The first sound he was
+aware of was the creaking of the oars. He lay dreamily listening to
+this, and wondering what it meant until the truth suddenly flashed
+across him. He opened his eyes and looked round. A heavy weight lay
+across his legs, and he saw the young Spanish officer lying dead
+there. Several other Spaniards lay close by, while the deck was
+strewn with the corpses of the Moors. He understood at once what had
+happened. The vessels had drifted apart just as he sprang on board,
+cutting off those who had boarded the corsair from all assistance
+from their friends, and as soon as they had been overpowered the
+galley had started on her return to the port from which she had
+come out.
+
+"At any rate," he said to himself, "Gerald and Inez are safe; that
+is a comfort, whatever comes of it."
+
+It was not until the corsair dropped anchor near the shore that
+the dispirited Moors paid any attention to those by whom their deck
+was cumbered. Then the Spaniards were first examined. Four, who
+were dead, were at once tossed overboard. Geoffrey and two others
+who showed signs of life were left for the present, a bucket of
+water being thrown over each to revive them. The Moorish wounded
+and the dead were then lowered into boats and taken on shore for
+care or burial. Then Geoffrey and the two Spaniards were ordered
+to rise.
+
+All three were able to do so with some difficulty, and were rowed
+ashore. They were received when they landed by the curses and
+execrations of the people of the little town, who would have torn
+them to pieces had not their captors marched them to the prison
+occupied by the galley slaves when on shore, and left them there.
+Most of the galley slaves were far too exhausted by their long row,
+and too indifferent to aught but their own sufferings, to pay any
+attention to the newcomers. Two or three, however, came up to them
+and offered to assist in bandaging their wounds. Their doublets
+had already been taken by their captors; but they now tore strips
+off their shirts, and with these staunched the bleeding of their
+wounds.
+
+"It was lucky for you that five or six of our number were killed by
+that discharge of grape you gave us," one of them said, "or they
+would have thrown you overboard at once. Although, after all, death
+is almost preferable to such a life as ours."
+
+"How long have you been here?" Geoffrey asked.
+
+"I hardly know," the other replied; "one almost loses count of time
+here. But it is somewhere about ten years. I am sturdy, you see.
+Three years at most is the average of our life in the galleys, though
+there are plenty die before as many months have passed. I come of
+a hardy race. I am not a Spaniard. I was captured in an attack on
+a town in the West Indies, and had three years on board one of your
+galleys at Cadiz. Then she was captured by the Moors, and here I
+have been ever since."
+
+"Then you must be an Englishman!" Geoffrey exclaimed in that
+language.
+
+The man stared at him stupidly for a minute, and then burst into
+tears. "I have never thought to hear my own tongue again, lad,"
+he said, holding out his hand. "Aye, I am English, and was one
+of Hawkins' men. But how come you to be in a Spanish ship? I have
+heard our masters say, when talking together, that there is war
+now between the English and Spaniards; that is, war at home. There
+has always been war out on the Spanish Main, but they know nothing
+of that."
+
+"I was made prisoner in a fight we had with the great Spanish Armada
+off Gravelines," Geoffrey said.
+
+"We heard a year ago from some Spaniards they captured that a great
+fleet was being prepared to conquer England; but no news has come
+to us since. We are the only galley here, and as our benches were
+full, the prisoners they have taken since were sent off at once to
+Algiers or other ports, so we have heard nothing. But I told the
+Spaniards that if Drake and Hawkins were in England when their
+great fleet got there, they were not likely to have it all their
+own way. Tell me all about it, lad. You do nor know how hungry I
+am for news from home."
+
+Geoffrey related to the sailor the tale of the overthrow and destruction
+of the Armada, which threw him into an ecstasy of satisfaction.
+
+"These fellows," he said, pointing to the other galley slaves,
+"have for the last year been telling me that I need not call myself
+an Englishman any more, for that England was only a part of Spain
+now. I will open their eyes a bit in the morning. But I won't ask
+you any more questions now; it is a shame to have made you talk so
+much after such a clip as you have had on the head."
+
+Geoffrey turned round on the sand that formed their only bed, and
+was soon asleep, the last sound he heard being the chuckling of
+his companion over the discomfiture of the Armada.
+
+In the morning the guard came in with a great dish filled with a
+sort of porridge of coarsely ground grain, boiled with water. In
+a corner of the yard were a number of calabashes, each composed of
+half a gourd. The slaves each dipped one of these into the vessel,
+and so ate their breakfast. Before beginning Geoffrey went to
+a trough, into which a jet of water was constantly falling from a
+small pipe, bathed his head and face, and took a long drink.
+
+"We may be thankful," the sailor, who had already told him that
+his name was Stephen Boldero, said, "that someone in the old times
+laid on that water. If it had not been for that I do not know what
+we should have done, and a drink of muddy stuff once or twice a
+day is all we should have got. That there pure water is just the
+saving of us."
+
+"What are we going to do now?" Geoffrey asked. "Does the galley go
+out every day?"
+
+"Bless you, no; sometimes not once a month; only when a sail is made
+out in sight, and the wind is light enough to give us the chance
+of capturing her. Sometimes we go out on a cruise for a month at a
+time; but that is not often. At other times we do the work of the
+town, mend the roads, sweep up the filth, repair the quays; do
+anything, in fact, that wants doing. The work, except in the galleys,
+is not above a man's strength. Some men die under it, because the
+Spaniards lose heart and turn sullen, and then down comes the whip
+on their backs, and they break their hearts over it; but a man as
+does his best, and is cheerful and willing, gets on well enough
+except in the galleys.
+
+"That is work that is. There is a chap walks up and down with a
+whip, and when they are chasing he lets it fall promiscuous, and
+even if you are rowing fit to kill yourself you do not escape it;
+but on shore here if you keep up your spirits things ain't altogether
+so bad. Now I have got you here to talk to in my own lingo I feel
+quite a different man. For although I have been here ten years, and
+can jabber in Spanish, I have never got on with these fellows; as
+is only natural, seeing that I am an Englishman and know all about
+their doings in the Spanish Main, and hate them worse than poison.
+Well, our time is up, so I am off. I do nor expect they will make
+you work till your wounds are healed a bit."
+
+This supposition turned out correct, and for the next week Geoffrey
+was allowed to remain quietly in the yard when the gang went out
+to their work. At the end of that time his wound had closed, and
+being heartily sick of the monotony of his life, he voluntarily
+fell in by the side of Boldero when the gang was called to work.
+The overseer was apparently pleased at this evidence of willingness
+on the part of the young captive, and said something to him in his
+own tongue. This his companion translated as being an order that
+he was not to work too hard for the present.
+
+"I am bound to say, mate, that these Moors are, as a rule, much
+better masters than the Spaniards. I have tried them both, and I
+would rather be in a Moorish galley than a Spanish one by a long
+way; except just when they are chasing a ship, and are half wild
+with excitement. These Moors are not half bad fellows, while it don't
+seem to me that a Spaniard has got a heart in him. Then again, I
+do not think they are quite so hard on Englishmen as they are on
+Spaniards; for they hate the Spaniards because they drove them out
+of their country. Once or twice I have had a talk with the overseer
+when he has been in a special good humour, and he knows we hate
+the Spaniards as much as they do, and that though they call us
+all Christian dogs, our Christianity ain't a bit like that of the
+Spaniards. I shall let him know the first chance I have that you
+are English too, and I shall ask him to let you always work by the
+side of me."
+
+As Stephen Boldero had foretold, Geoffrey did not find his work
+on shore oppressively hard. He did his best, and, as he and his
+companion always performed a far larger share of work than that
+done by any two of the Spaniards, they gained the goodwill of their
+overlooker, who, when a fortnight later the principal bey of the
+place sent down a request for two slaves to do some rough work in
+his garden, selected them for the work.
+
+"Now we will just buckle to, lad," Stephen Boldero said. "This bey
+is the captain of the corsair, and he can make things a deal easier
+for us if he chooses; so we will not spare ourselves. He had one
+of the men up there two years ago, and kept him for some months,
+and the fellow found it so hard when he came back here again that
+he pined and died off in no time."
+
+A guard took them to the bey's house, which stood on high ground
+behind the town. The bey came out to examine the men chosen for
+his work.
+
+"I hear," he said, "that you are both English, and hate the Spaniards
+as much as we do. Well, if I find you work well, you will be well
+treated; if not, you will be sent back at once. Now, come with me,
+and I shall show you what you have to do."
+
+The high wall at the back of the garden had been pulled down, and
+the bey intended to enlarge the inclosure considerably.
+
+"You are first," he said, "to dig a foundation for the new wall
+along that line marked out by stakes. When that is done you will
+supply the masons with stone and mortar. When the wall is finished
+the new ground will all have to be dug deeply and planted with
+shrubs, under the superintendence of my gardener. While you are
+working here you will not return to the prison, but will sleep in
+that out house in the garden."
+
+"You shall have no reason to complain of our work," Boldero said.
+"We Englishmen are no sluggards, and we do not want a man always
+looking after us as those lazy Spaniards do."
+
+As soon as they were supplied with tools Geoffrey and his companion
+set to work. The trench for the foundations had to be dug three
+feet deep; and though the sun blazed fiercely down upon them, they
+worked unflinchingly. From time to time the bey's head servant came
+down to examine their progress, and occasionally watched them from
+among the trees. At noon he bade them lay aside their tools and
+come into the shed, and a slave boy brought them out a large dish
+of vegetables, with small pieces of meat in it.
+
+"This is something like food," Stephen said as he sat down to it.
+"It is ten years since such a mess as this has passed my lips. I
+do not wonder that chap fell ill when he got back to prison if this
+is the sort of way they fed him here."
+
+That evening the Moorish overseer reported to the bey that the two
+slaves had done in the course of the day as much work as six of
+the best native labourers could have performed, and that without
+his standing over them or paying them any attention whatever. Moved
+by the report, the bey himself went down to the end of the garden.
+
+"It is wonderful," he said, stroking his beard. "Truly these
+Englishmen are men of sinews. Never have I seen so much work done
+by two men in a day. Take care of them, Mahmoud, and see that they
+are well fed; the willing servant should be well cared for."
+
+The work went steadily on until the wall was raised, the ground
+dug, and the shrubs planted. It was some months before all this
+was done, and the two slaves continued to attract the observation
+and goodwill of the bey by their steady and cheerful labour. Their
+work began soon after sunrise, and continued until noon. Then they
+had three hours to themselves to eat their midday meal and doze in
+the shed, and then worked again until sunset. The bey often strolled
+down to the edge of the trees to watch them, and sometimes even took
+guests to admire the way in which these two Englishmen, although
+ignorant that any eyes were upon them, performed their work.
+
+His satisfaction was evinced by the abundance of food supplied
+them, their meal being frequently supplemented by fruit and other
+little luxuries. Severely as they laboured, Geoffrey and his
+companion were comparatively happy. Short as was the time that the
+former had worked with the gang, he appreciated the liberty he now
+enjoyed, and especially congratulated himself upon being spared the
+painful life of a galley slave at sea. As to Boldero, the change
+from the prison with the companions he hated, its degrading work,
+and coarse and scanty food, made a new man of him.
+
+He had been but two-and-twenty when captured by the Spaniards,
+and was now in the prime of life and strength. The work, which had
+seemed very hard to Geoffrey at first, was to him but as play, while
+the companionship of his countryman, his freedom from constant
+surveillance, the absence of all care, and the abundance and
+excellence of his food, filled him with new life; and the ladies
+of the bey's household often sat and listened to the strange songs
+that rose from the slaves toiling in the garden.
+
+As the work approached its conclusion Geoffrey and his companion
+had many a talk over what would next befall them. There was one
+reason only that weighed in favour of the life with the slave gang.
+In their present position there was no possibility whatever, so
+far as they could discern, of effecting their escape; whereas, as
+slaves, should the galley in which they rowed be overpowered by
+any ship it attacked, they would obtain their freedom. The chance
+of this, however, was remote, as the fast-rowing galleys could
+almost always make their escape should the vessel they attacked
+prove too strong to be captured.
+
+When the last bed had been levelled and the last shrub planted the
+superintendent told them to follow him into the house, as the bey
+was desirous of speaking with them. They found him seated on a
+divan.
+
+"Christians," he said, "I have watched you while you have been at
+work, and truly you have not spared yourselves in my service, but
+have laboured for me with all your strength, well and willingly. I
+see now that it is true that the people of your nation differ much
+from the Spaniards, who are dogs.
+
+"I see that trust is to be placed in you, and were you but true
+believers I would appoint you to a position where you could win
+credit and honour. As it is, I cannot place you over believers in
+the prophet; but neither am I willing that you should return to
+the gang from which I took you. I will, therefore, leave you free
+to work for yourselves. There are many of my friends who have seen
+you labouring, and will give you employment. It will be known in
+the place that you are under my protection, and that any who insult
+or ill treat you will be severely punished. Should you have any
+complaint to make, come freely to me and I will see that justice
+is done you.
+
+"This evening a crier will go through the place proclaiming that
+the two English galley slaves have been given their freedom by
+me, and will henceforth live in the town without molestation from
+anyone, carrying on their work and selling their labour like true
+believers. The crier will inform the people that the nation to which
+you belong is at war with our enemies the Spaniards, and that, save
+as to the matter of your religion, you are worthy of being regarded
+as friends by all good Moslems. My superintendent will go down with
+you in the morning. I have ordered him to hire a little house for
+you and furnish it with what is needful, to recommend you to your
+neighbours, and to give you a purse of piastres with which to
+maintain yourselves until work comes to you."
+
+Stephen Boldero expressed the warmest gratitude, on the part of
+his companion and himself, to the bey for his kindness.
+
+"I have done but simple justice," the bey said, "and no thanks are
+necessary. Faithful work should have its reward, and as you have
+done to me so I do to you."
+
+The next morning as they were leaving, a female slave presented them
+with a purse of silver, the gift of the bey's wife and daughters,
+who had often derived much pleasure from the songs of the two
+captives. The superintendent conducted them to a small hut facing
+the sea. It was furnished with the few articles that were, according
+to native ideas, necessary for comfort. There were cushions on
+the divan of baked clay raised about a foot above the floor, which
+served as a sofa during the day and as a bed at night. There was a
+small piece of carpet on the floor and a few cooking utensils on a
+shelf, and some dishes of burnt clay; and nothing more was required.
+There was, however, a small chest, in which, after the superintendent
+had left, they found two sets of garments as worn by the natives.
+
+"This is a comfort indeed," Geoffrey said. "My clothes are all in
+rags, and as for yours the less we say about them the better. I
+shall feel like a new man in these things."
+
+"I shall be glad myself," Stephen agreed, "for the clothes they
+give the galley slaves are scarce decent for a Christian man to
+wear. My consolation has been that if they had been shocked by our
+appearance they would have given us more clothes; but as they did
+not mind it there was no reason why I should. Still it would be a
+comfort to be clean and decent again."
+
+For the first few days the natives of the place looked askance
+at these Christians in their midst, but the bey's orders had been
+peremptory that no insults should be offered to them. Two days after
+their liberation one of the principal men of the place sent for them
+and employed them in digging the foundations for a fountain, and a
+deep trench of some hundred yards in length for the pipe bringing
+water to it. After that they had many similar jobs, receiving always
+the wages paid to regular workmen, and giving great satisfaction by
+their steady toil. Sometimes when not otherwise engaged they went
+out in boats with fishermen, receiving a portion of the catch in
+payment for their labours.
+
+So some months passed away. Very frequently they talked over methods
+of escape. The only plan that seemed at all possible was to take a
+boat and make out to sea; but they knew that they would be pursued,
+and if overtaken would revert to their former life at the galleys,
+a change which would be a terrible one indeed after the present
+life of freedom and independence. They knew, too, that they might
+be days before meeting with a ship, for all traders in the Mediterranean
+hugged the northern shores as much as possible in order to avoid the
+dreaded corsairs, and there would be a far greater chance of their
+being recaptured by one of the Moorish cruisers than of lighting
+upon a Christian trader.
+
+"It is a question of chance," Stephen said, "and when the chance
+comes we will seize it; but it is no use our giving up a life against
+which there is not much to be said, unless some fair prospect of
+escape offers itself to us."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI
+
+THE ESCAPE
+
+
+"In one respect," Geoffrey said, as they were talking over their
+chance of escape, "I am sorry that the bey has behaved so kindly
+to us."
+
+"What is that?" Stephen Boldero asked in surprise.
+
+"Well, I was thinking that were it not for that we might manage
+to contrive some plan of escape in concert with the galley slaves,
+get them down to the shore here, row off to the galley, overpower
+the three or four men who live on board her, and make off with her.
+Of course we should have had to accumulate beforehand a quantity
+of food and some barrels of water, for I have noticed that when
+they go out they always take their stores on board with them, and
+bring on shore on their return what has nor been consumed. Still,
+I suppose that could be managed. However, it seems to me that our
+hands are tied in that direction by the kindness of the bey. After
+his conduct to us it would be ungrateful in the extreme for us to
+carry off his galley."
+
+"So it would, Geoffrey. Besides I doubt whether the plan would
+succeed. You may be sure the Spaniards are as jealous as can be
+of the good fortune that we have met with, and were we to propose
+such a scheme to them the chances are strongly in favour of one of
+them trying to better his own position by denouncing us. I would
+only trust them as far as I can see them. No, if we ever do anything
+it must be done by ourselves. There is no doubt that if some night
+when there is a strong wind blowing from the southeast we were
+to get on board one of these fishing boats, hoist a sail, and run
+before it, we should not be far off from the coast of Spain before
+they started to look for us. But what better should we be there?
+We can both talk Spanish well enough, but we could not pass as
+Spaniards. Besides, they would find out soon enough that we were
+not Catholics, and where should we be then? Either sent to row
+in their galleys or clapped into the dungeons of the Inquisition,
+and like enough burnt alive at the stake. That would be out of the
+frying pan into the fire with vengeance."
+
+"I think we might pass as Spaniards," Geoffrey said; "for there is
+a great deal of difference between the dialects of the different
+provinces, and confined as you have been for the last ten years with
+Spanish sailors you must have caught their way of talking. Still,
+I agree with you it will be better to wait for a bit longer for
+any chance that may occur rather than risk landing in Spain again,
+where even if we passed as natives we should have as hard work to
+get our living as we have here, and with no greater chance of making
+our way home again."
+
+During the time that they had been captives some three or four
+vessels had been brought in by the corsair. The men composing
+the crews had been either sold as slaves to Moors or Arabs in the
+interior or sent to Algiers, which town lay over a hundred miles
+to the east. They were of various nationalities, Spanish, French,
+and Italian, as the two friends learned from the talk of the
+natives, for they always abstained from going near the point where
+the prisoners were landed, as they were powerless to assist the
+unfortunate captives in any way, and the sight of their distress
+was very painful to them.
+
+One day, however, they learned from the people who were running
+down to the shore to see the captives landed from a ship that had
+been brought in by the corsair during the night, that there were
+two or three women among the captives. This was the first time that
+any females had been captured since their arrival at the place, for
+women seldom travelled far from their homes in those days, except
+the wives of high officials journeying in great ships that were
+safe from the attack of the Moorish corsairs.
+
+"Let us go down and see them," Boldero said. "I have not seen the
+face of a white woman for nine years."
+
+"I will go if you like," Geoffrey said. "They will not guess that
+we are Europeans, for we are burnt as dark as the Moors."
+
+They went down to the landing place. Eight men and two women were
+landed from the boat. These were the sole survivors of the crew.
+
+"They are Spaniards," Boldero said. "I pity that poor girl. I
+suppose the other woman is her servant."
+
+The girl, who was about sixteen years of age, was very pale, and
+had evidently been crying terribly. She did not seem to heed the
+cries and threats with which the townspeople as usual assailed the
+newly arrived captives, but kept her eyes fixed upon one of the
+captives who walked before her.
+
+"That is her father, no doubt," Geoffrey said. "It is probably her
+last look at him. Come away, Stephen; I am awfully sorry we came
+here. I shall not be able to get that girl's face out of my mind
+for I don't know how long."
+
+Without a word they went back to their hut. They had no particular
+work that day. Geoffrey went restlessly in and out, sometimes pacing
+along the strand, sometimes coming in and throwing himself on the
+divan. Stephen Boldero went on quietly mending a net that had been
+damaged the night before, saying nothing, but glancing occasionally
+with an amused look at his companion's restless movements. Late in
+the afternoon Geoffrey burst our suddenly: "Stephen, we must try
+and rescue that girl somehow from her fate."
+
+"I supposed that was what it was coming to," Boldero said quietly.
+"Well, let me hear all about it. I know you have been thinking it
+over ever since morning. What are your ideas?"
+
+"I do not know that I have any ideas beyond getting her and her
+father down to a boat and making off."
+
+"Well, you certainly have not done much if you haven't got farther
+than that," Stephen said drily. "Now, if you had spent the day
+talking it over with me instead of wandering about like one out
+of his mind, we should have got a great deal further than that by
+this time. However, I have been thinking for you. I know what you
+young fellows are. As soon as I saw that girl's face and looked
+at you I was dead certain there was an end of peace and quietness,
+and that you would be bent upon some plan of getting her off.
+It did not need five minutes to show that I was right; and I have
+been spending my time thinking, while you have thrown yours away
+in fidgeting.
+
+"Well, I think it is worth trying. Of course it will be a vastly
+more difficult job getting the girl and her father away than just
+taking a boat and sailing off as we have often talked of doing.
+Then, on the other hand, it would altogether alter our position
+afterwards. By his appearance and hers I have no doubt he is a
+well to do trader, perhaps a wealthy one. He walked with his head
+upright when the crowd were yelling and cursing, and is evidently
+a man of courage and determination. Now, if we had reached the
+Spanish coast by ourselves we should have been questioned right
+and left, and, as I have said all along, they would soon have found
+that we were not Spaniards, for we could not have said where we
+came from, or given our past history, or said where our families
+lived. But it would be altogether different if we landed with
+them. Every one would be interested about them. We should only be
+two poor devils of sailors who had escaped with them, and he would
+help to pass it off and get us employment; so that the difficulty
+that has hitherto prevented us from trying to escape is very greatly
+diminished. Now, as to getting them away. Of course she has been
+taken up to the bey's, and no doubt he will send her as a present
+to the bey of Algiers. I know that is what has been done several
+times before when young women have been captured.
+
+"I have been thinking it over, and I do not see a possibility of
+getting to speak to her as long as she is at the bey's. I do not
+see that it can be done anyhow. She will be indoors most of the
+time, and if she should go into the garden there would be other women
+with her. Our only plan, as far as I can see at present, would be
+to carry her off from her escort on the journey. I do not suppose
+she will have more than two, or at most three, mounted men with
+her, and we ought to be able to dispose of them. As to her father,
+the matter is comparatively easy. We know the ways of the prison,
+and I have no doubt we can get him out somehow; only there is the
+trouble of the question of time. She has got to be rescued and
+brought back and hidden somewhere till nightfall, he has got to be
+set free the same evening, and we have to embark early enough to
+be well out of sight before daylight; and maybe there will not be
+a breath of wind stirring. It is a tough job, Geoffrey, look at it
+which way you will."
+
+"It is a tough job," Geoffrey agreed. "I am afraid the escort
+would be stronger than you think. A present of this kind to the bey
+is regarded as important, and I should say half a dozen horsemen
+at least will be sent with her. In that case an attempt at rescue
+would be hopeless. We have no arms, and if we had we could not kill
+six mounted men; and if even one escaped, our plans would be all
+defeated. The question is, would they send her by land? It seems
+to me quite as likely that they might send her by water."
+
+"Yes, that is likely enough, Geoffrey. In that case everything would
+depend upon the vessel he sent her in. If it is the great galley
+there is an end of it; if it is one of their little coasters it
+might be managed. We are sure to learn that before long. The bey
+might keep her for a fortnight or so, perhaps longer, for her to
+recover somewhat from the trouble and get up her good looks again,
+so as to add to the value of the present. If she were well and
+bright she would be pretty enough for anything. In the meantime we
+can arrange our plans for getting her father away. Of course if she
+goes with a big escort on horseback, or if she goes in the galley,
+there is an end of our plans. I am ready to help you, Geoffrey, if
+there is a chance of success; but I am not going to throw away my
+life if there is not, and unless she goes down in a coaster there
+is an end of the scheme."
+
+"I quite agree to that," Geoffrey replied; "we cannot accomplish
+impossibilities."
+
+They learned upon the following day that three of the newly arrived
+captives were to take the places of the galley slaves who had
+been killed in the capture of the Spanish ship, which had defended
+itself stoutly, and that the others were to be sold for work in
+the interior.
+
+"It is pretty certain," Boldero said, "that the trader will not be
+one of the three chosen for the galley. The work would break him
+down in a month. That makes that part of the business easier, for
+we can get him away on the journey inland, and hide him up here
+until his daughter is sent off."
+
+Geoffrey looked round the bare room.
+
+"Well, I do not say as how we could hide him here," Boldero said
+in answer to the look, "but we might hide him somewhere among the
+sand hills outside the place, and take him food at night."
+
+"Yes, we might do that," Geoffrey agreed. "That could be managed
+easily enough, I should think, for there are clumps of bushes
+scattered all over the sand hills half a mile back from the sea.
+The trouble will be if we get him here, and find after all that we
+cannot rescue his daughter."
+
+"That will make no difference," Boldero said. "In that case we
+will make off with him alone. Everything else will go on just the
+same. Of course, I should be very sorry not to save the girl; but,
+as far as we are concerned, if we save the father it will answer
+our purpose."
+
+Geoffrey made no reply. Just at that moment his own future was a
+very secondary matter, in comparison, to the rescue of this unhappy
+Spanish girl.
+
+Geoffrey and his companion had been in the habit of going up
+occasionally to the prison. They had won over the guard by small
+presents, and were permitted to go in and out with fruit and other
+little luxuries for the galley slaves. They now abstained from
+going near the place, in order that no suspicion might fall upon
+them after his escape of having had any communication with the
+Spanish trader.
+
+Shortly after the arrival of the captives two merchants from the
+interior came down, and Geoffrey learned that they had visited the
+prison, and had made a bargain with the bey for all the captives
+except those transferred to the galley. The two companions had
+talked the matter over frequently, and had concluded it was best
+that only one of them should be engaged in the adventure, for the
+absence of both might be noticed. After some discussion it was
+agreed that Geoffrey should undertake the task, and that Boldero
+should go alone to the house where they were now at work, and should
+mention that his friend was unwell, and was obliged to remain at
+home for the day.
+
+As they knew the direction in which the captives would be taken
+Geoffrey started before daybreak, and kept steadily along until he
+reached a spot where it was probable they would halt for the night.
+It was twenty miles away, and there was here a well of water and a
+grove of trees. Late in the afternoon he saw the party approaching.
+It consisted of the merchants, two armed Arabs, and the five
+captives, all of whom were carrying burdens. They were crawling
+painfully along, overpowered by the heat of the sun, by the length
+of the journey, and by the weight they carried. Several times the
+Arabs struck them heavily with their sticks to force them to keep
+up.
+
+Geoffrey retired from the other side of the clump of trees, and
+lay down in a depression of the sand hills until darkness came on,
+when he again entered the grove, and crawling cautiously forward
+made his way close up to the party. A fire was blazing, and a meal
+had been already cooked and eaten. The traders and the two Arabs
+were sitting by the fire; the captives were lying extended on the
+ground. Presently, at the command of one of the Arabs, they rose
+to their feet and proceeded to collect some more pieces of wood
+for the fire. As they returned the light fell on the gray hair of
+the man upon whom Geoffrey had noticed that the girl's eyes were
+fixed.
+
+He noted the place where he lay down, and had nothing to do now
+but to wait until the party were asleep. He felt sure that no guard
+would be set, for any attempt on the part of the captives to escape
+would be nothing short of madness. There was nowhere for them to
+go, and they would simply wander about until they died of hunger
+and exhaustion, or until they were recaptured, in which case they
+would be almost beaten to death. In an hour's time the traders and
+their men lay down by the fire, and all was quiet. Geoffrey crawled
+round until he was close to the Spaniard. He waited until he felt
+sure that the Arabs were asleep, and then crawled up to him. The
+man started as he touched him.
+
+"Silence, senor," Geoffrey whispered in Spanish; "I am a friend,
+and have come to rescue you."
+
+"I care not for life; a few days of this work will kill me, and
+the sooner the better. I have nothing to live for. They killed my
+wife the other day, and my daughter is a captive in their hands.
+I thank you, whoever you are, but I will not go."
+
+"We are going to try to save your daughter too," Geoffrey whispered;
+"we have a plan for carrying you both off."
+
+The words gave new life to the Spaniard. "In that case, sir, I am
+ready. Whoever you are whom God has sent to my aid I will follow
+you blindly, whatever comes of it."
+
+Geoffrey crawled away a short distance, followed by the Spaniard.
+As soon as they were well beyond the faint light now given out by
+the expiring fire they rose to their feet, and gaining the track
+took their way on the backward road. As soon as they were fairly
+away, Geoffrey explained to the Spaniard who he was, and how he
+had undertaken to endeavour to rescue him. The joy and gratitude
+of the Spaniard were too deep for words, and he uttered his thanks
+in broken tones. When they had walked about a mile Geoffrey halted.
+
+"Sit down here," he said. "I have some meat and fruit here and a
+small skin of water. We have a long journey before us, for we must
+get near the town you left this morning before daybreak, and you
+must eat to keep up your strength."
+
+"I did not think," the Spaniard said, "when we arrived at the well,
+that I could have walked another mile had my life depended upon
+it. Now I feel a new man, after the fresh hope you have given me.
+I no longer feel the pain of my bare feet or the blisters the sun
+has raised on my naked back. I am struggling now for more than life
+-- for my daughter. You shall not find me to fail, sir."
+
+All night they toiled on. The Spaniard kept his promise, and utterly
+exhausted as he was, and great as was the pain in his limbs, held
+on bravely. With the first dawn of morning they saw the line of
+the sea before them. They now turned off from the track, and in
+another half hour the Spaniard took shelter in a clump of bushes
+in a hollow, while Geoffrey, having left with him the remainder
+of the supply of provisions and water, pursued his way and reached
+the hut just as the sun was shining in the east, and without having
+encountered a single person.
+
+"Well, have you succeeded?" Boldero asked eagerly, as he entered.
+
+"Yes; I have got him away. He is in hiding within a mile of this
+place. He kept on like a hero. I was utterly tired myself, and how
+he managed to walk the distance after what he had gone through in
+the day is more than I can tell. His name is Mendez. He is a trader
+in Cadiz, and owns many vessels. He was on his way to Italy, with
+his wife and daughter, in one of his own ships, in order to gratify
+the desire of his wife to visit the holy places at Rome. She was
+killed by a cannon shot during the fight, and his whole heart is
+now wrapped up in his daughter. And now, Stephen, I must lie down
+and sleep. You will have to go to work alone today again, and can
+truly say that I am still unfit for labour."
+
+Four days later it became known in the little town that a messenger
+had arrived from the merchant who bought the slaves from the bey,
+saying that one of them had made his escape from their first halting
+place.
+
+"The dog will doubtless die in the desert," the merchant wrote;
+"but if he should find his way down, or you should hear of him as
+arriving at any of the villages, I pray you to send him up to me
+with a guard. I will so treat him that it will be a lesson to my
+other slaves not to follow his example."
+
+Every evening after dark Geoffrey went out with a supply of food
+and water to the fugitive. For a week he had no news to give him
+as to his daughter; but on the eighth night he said that he and
+his companion had that morning been sent by the bey on board the
+largest of the coasting vessels in the port, with orders to paint
+the cabins and put them in a fit state for the reception of a
+personage of importance.
+
+"This is fortunate, indeed," Geoffrey went on. "No doubt she is
+intended for the transport of your daughter. Her crew consists of
+a captain and five men, but at present they are living ashore; and
+as we shall be going backwards and forwards to her, we ought to
+have little difficulty in getting on board and hiding away in the
+hold before she starts. I think everything promises well for the
+success of our scheme."
+
+The bey's superintendent came down the next day to see how matters
+were going on on board the vessel. The painting was finished that
+evening, and the next day two slaves brought down a quantity of
+hangings and cushions, which Geoffrey and his companion assisted
+the superintendent to hang up and place in order. Provisions and
+water had already been taken on board, and they learnt that the
+party who were to sail in her would come off early the next morning.
+
+At midnight Geoffrey, Boldero, and the Spaniard came down to the
+little port, embarked in a fisherman's boat moored at the stairs,
+and noiselessly rowed off to the vessel. They mounted on to her
+deck barefooted. Boldero was the last to leave the boat, giving her
+a vigorous push with his foot in the direction of the shore, from
+which the vessel was but some forty yards away. They descended
+into the hold, where they remained perfectly quiet until the first
+light of dawn enabled them to see what they were doing, and then
+moved some baskets full of vegetables, and concealed themselves
+behind them.
+
+A quarter of an hour later they heard a boat come alongside, and
+the voices of the sailors. Then they heard the creaking of cordage
+as the sails were let fall in readiness for a start. Half an hour
+later another boat came alongside. There was a trampling of feet
+on the deck above them, and the bey's voice giving orders. A few
+minutes later the anchor was raised, there was more talking on
+deck, and then they heard a boat push off, and knew by the rustle
+of water against the planks beside them that the vessel was under
+way.
+
+The wind was light and the sea perfectly calm, and beyond the
+slight murmur of the water, those below would not have known that
+the ship was in motion. It was very hot down in the hold, but
+fortunately the crew had nor taken the trouble to put on the hatches,
+and at times a faint breath of air could be felt below. Geoffrey
+and his companion talked occasionally in low tones; but the Spaniard
+was so absorbed by his anxiety as to the approaching struggle, and
+the thought that he might soon clasp his daughter to his arms, that
+he seldom spoke.
+
+No plans could be formed as to the course they were to take, for
+they could not tell whether those of the crew off duty would retire
+to sleep in the little forecastle or would lie down on deck. Then,
+too, they were ignorant as to the number of men who had come on
+board with the captive. The overseer had mentioned the day before
+that he was going, and it was probable that three or four others
+would accompany him. Therefore they had to reckon upon ten opponents.
+Their only weapons were three heavy iron bolts, some two feet
+long. These Boldero had purchased in exchange for a few fish, when
+a prize brought in was broken up as being useless for the purposes
+of the Moors.
+
+"What I reckon is," he said, "that you and I ought to be able to
+settle two apiece of these fellows before they fairly know what is
+happening. The Don ought very well to account for another. So that
+only leaves five of them; and five against three are no odds worth
+speaking of, especially when the five are woke up by a sudden
+attack, and ain't sure how many there are against them. I don't
+expect much trouble over the affair."
+
+"I don't want to kill more of the poor fellows than I can help,"
+Geoffrey said.
+
+"No more do I; but you see it's got to be either killing or being
+killed, and I am perfectly certain which I prefer. Still, as you
+say, if the beggars are at all reasonable I ain't for hurting them,
+but the first few we have got to hit hard. When we get matters a
+little even, we can speak them fair."
+
+The day passed slowly, and in spite of their bent and cramped position
+Geoffrey and Stephen Boldero dozed frequently. The Spaniard never
+closed an eye. He was quite prepared to take his part in the
+struggle; and as he was not yet fifty years of age, his assistance
+was not to be despised. But the light hearted carelessness of
+his companions, who joked under their breath, and laughed and ate
+unconcernedly with a life and death struggle against heavy odds
+before them, surprised him much.
+
+As darkness came on the party below became wakeful. Their time was
+coming now, and they had no doubt whatever as to the result. Their
+most formidable opponents would be the men who had come on board
+with the bey's superintendent, as these, no doubt, would be fully
+armed. As for the sailors, they might have arms on board, but these
+would nor be ready to hand, and it was really only with the guards
+they would have to deal.
+
+"I tell you what I think would be a good plan, Stephen," Geoffrey
+said suddenly. "You see, there is plenty of spare line down here;
+if we wait until they are all asleep we can go round and tie their
+legs together, or put ropes round their ankles and fasten them to
+ring bolts. If we could manage that without waking them, we might
+capture the craft without shedding any blood, and might get them
+down into the hold one after the other."
+
+"I think that is a very good plan," Stephen agreed. "I do not like
+the thought of knocking sleeping men on the head any more than you
+do; and if we are careful, we might get them all tied up before
+an alarm is given. There, the anchor has gone down. I thought very
+likely they would not sail at night. That is capital. You may be
+sure that they will be pretty close inshore, and they probably will
+have only one man on watch; and as likely as not even one, for they
+will nor dream of any possible danger."
+
+For another two hours the sound of talk on deck went on, but at
+last all became perfectly quiet. The party below waited for another
+half hour, and then noiselessly ascended the ladder to the deck,
+holding in one hand a cudgel, in the other a number of lengths of
+line cut about six feet long. Each as he reached the deck lay down
+flat. The Spaniard had been told to remain perfectly quiet while
+the other two went about their task.
+
+First they crawled aft, for the bey's guards would, they knew,
+be sleeping at that end, and working together they tied the legs
+of these men without rousing them. The ropes could not be tightly
+pulled, as this would at once have disturbed them. They were therefore
+fastened somewhat in the fashion of manacles, so that although the
+men might rise to their feet they would fall headlong the moment
+they tried to walk. In addition other ropes were fastened to these
+and taken from one man to another. Then their swords were drawn
+from the sheaths and their knives from their sashes.
+
+The operation was a long one, as it had to be conducted with the
+greatest care and caution. They then crept back to the hatchway and
+told the Spaniard that the most formidable enemies had been made
+safe.
+
+"Here are a sword and a knife for you, senor; and now as we are
+all armed I consider the ship as good as won, for the sailors are
+not likely to make much resistance by themselves. However, we will
+secure some of them. The moon will be up in half an hour, and that
+will be an advantage to us.
+
+The captain and three of the sailors were soon tied up like the
+others. Two men were standing in the bow of the vessel leaning
+against the bulwarks, and when the moon rose it could be seen by
+their attitude that both were asleep.
+
+"Now, we may as well begin," Geoffrey said. "Let us take those two
+fellows in the bow by surprise. Hold a knife to their throats, and
+tell them if they utter the least sound we will kill them. Then we
+will make them go down into the forecastle and fasten them there."
+
+"I am ready," Stephen said, and they stole forward to the two
+sleeping men. They grasped them suddenly by the throat and held a
+knife before their eyes, Boldero telling them in a stern whisper
+that if they uttered a cry they would be stabbed to the heart.
+Paralysed by the sudden attack they did not make the slightest
+struggle, but accompanied their unknown assailants to the forecastle
+and were there fastened in. Joined now by the Spaniard, Geoffrey
+and his companion went aft and roused one of the sleepers there
+with a threat similar to that which had silenced the sailors.
+
+He was, however, a man of different stuff He gave a loud shout and
+grappled with Boldero, who struck him a heavy blow with his fist in
+the face, and this for a moment silenced him; but the alarm being
+given, the superintendent and the two men struggled to their feet,
+only however to fall prostrate as soon as they tried to walk.
+
+"Lie quiet and keep silence!" Boldero shouted in a threatening
+voice.
+
+"You are unarmed and at our mercy. Your feet are bound and you are
+perfectly helpless. We do not wish to take your lives, but unless
+you are quiet we shall be compelled to do so."
+
+The men had discovered by this time that their arms had gone, and
+were utterly disconcerted by the heavy and unexpected fall they
+had just had. Feeling that they were indeed at the mercy of their
+captors, they lay quiet.
+
+"Now then," Boldero went on, "one at a time. Keep quiet, you rascals
+there!" he broke off shouting to the sailors who were rolling and
+tumbling on the deck forward, "or I will cut all your throats for
+you. Now then, Geoffrey, do you and the senor cut the rope that
+fastens that man on the port side to his comrades. March him to
+the hatchway and make him go down into the hold. Keep your knives
+ready and kill him at once if he offers the slightest resistance."
+
+One by one the superintendent, the three guards, the captain and
+sailors were all made to descend into the hold, and the hatches
+were put over it and fastened down.
+
+"Now, senor," Geoffrey said, "we can spare you."
+
+The Spaniard hurried to the cabin, opened the door, and called
+out his daughter's name. There was a scream of delight within as
+Dolores Mendez, who had been awakened by the tumult, recognized her
+father's voice, and leaping up from her couch threw herself into
+his arms. Geoffrey and his companion now opened the door of the
+forecastle and called the two sailors out.
+
+"Now," Boldero said, "if you want to save your lives you have got to
+obey our orders. First of all fall to work and get up the anchor,
+and then shake out the sails again. I will take the helm, Geoffrey,
+and do you keep your eye on these two fellows. There is no fear of
+their playing any tricks now that they see they are alone on deck,
+but they might, if your back were turned, unfasten the hatches.
+However, I do not think we need fear trouble that way, as for aught
+they know we may have cut the throats of all the others."
+
+A few minutes later the vessel was moving slowly through the water
+with her head to the northwest.
+
+"We must be out of sight of land if we can by the morning," Stephen
+said, when Geoffrey two hours later came to take his place at the
+helm; "at any rate until we have passed the place we started from.
+Once beyond that it does not matter much; but it will be best either
+to keep out of sight of land altogether, or else to sail pretty
+close to it, so that they can see the boat is one of their own
+craft. We can choose which we will do when we see which way the
+breeze sets in in the morning."
+
+It came strongly from the south, and they therefore determined to
+sail direct for Carthagena.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII
+
+A SPANISH MERCHANT
+
+
+As soon as the sails had been set, and the vessel was under way,
+the Spaniard came out from the cabin.
+
+"My daughter is attiring herself, senor," he said to Stephen Boldero,
+for Geoffrey was at the time at the helm. "She is longing to see
+you, and to thank you for the inestimable services you have rendered
+to us both. But for you I should now be dying or dead, my daughter
+a slave for life in the palace of the bey. What astonishes us both
+is that such noble service should have been rendered to us by two
+absolute strangers, and not strangers only, but by Englishmen --
+a people with whom Spain is at war -- and who assuredly can have
+no reason to love us. How came you first to think of interesting
+yourself on our behalf?"
+
+"To tell you the truth, senor," Stephen Boldero said bluntly, "it
+was the sight of your daughter and not of yourself that made us
+resolve to save you if possible, or rather, I should say, made my
+friend Geoffrey do so. After ten years in the galleys one's heart
+gets pretty rough, and although even I felt a deep pity for your
+daughter, I own it would never have entered my mind to risk my
+neck in order to save her. But Geoffrey is younger and more easily
+touched, and when he saw her as she landed pale and white and grief
+stricken, and yet looking as if her own fate touched her less than
+the parting from you, my good friend Geoffrey Vickars was well nigh
+mad, and declared that in some way or other, and at whatever risk
+to ourselves, you must both be saved. In this matter I have been
+but a passive instrument in his hands; as indeed it was only right
+that I should be, seeing that he is of gentle blood and an esquire
+serving under Captain Vere in the army of the queen, while I am
+but a rough sailor. What I have done I have done partly because his
+heart was in the matter, partly because the adventure promised, if
+successful, to restore me to freedom, and partly also, senor, for
+the sake of your brave young daughter."
+
+"You are modest, sir," the Spaniard said. "You are one of those
+who belittle your own good deeds. I feel indeed more grateful than
+I can express to you as well as to your friend."
+
+The merchant's daughter now appeared at the door of the cabin. Her
+father took her hand and led her up to Boldero. "This, Dolores,
+is one of the two Englishmen who have at the risk of their lives
+saved me from death and you from worse than death. Thank him, my
+child, and to the end of your life never cease to remember him in
+your prayers."
+
+"I am glad to have been of assistance, senora," Boldero said as the
+girl began to speak; "but as I have just been telling your father,
+I have played but a small part in the business, it is my friend
+Don Geoffrey Vickars who has been the leader in the matter. He saw
+you as you landed at the boat, and then and there swore to save
+you, and all that has been done has been under his direction. It
+was he who followed and rescued your father, and I have really had
+nothing to do with the affair beyond hiding myself in the hole and
+helping to tie up your Moors."
+
+"Ah, sir," the girl said, laying her hands earnestly upon the sailor's
+shoulder, "it is useless for you to try to lessen the services you
+have rendered us. Think of what I was but an hour since -- a captive
+with the most horrible of all fates before me, and with the belief
+that my father was dying by inches in the hands of some cruel
+taskmaster, and now he is beside me and I am free. This has been
+done by two strangers, men of a nation which I have been taught to
+regard as an enemy. It seems to me that no words that I can speak
+could tell you even faintly what I feel, and it is God alone who
+can reward you for what you have done."
+
+Leaving Boldero the Spaniard and his daughter went to the stern,
+where Geoffrey was standing at the helm.
+
+"My daughter and I have come to thank you, senor, for having saved
+us from the worst of fates and restored us to each other. Your
+friend tells me that it is to you it is chiefly due that this has
+come about, for that you were so moved to pity at the sight of my
+daughter when we first landed, that you declared at once that you
+would save her from her fate at whatever risk to yourself, and that
+since then he has been but following your directions."
+
+"Then if he says that, senor, he belies himself. I was, it is true,
+the first to declare that we must save your daughter at any cost
+if it were possible to do so; but had I not said so, I doubt not
+he would have announced the same resolution. Since then we have
+planned everything together; and as he is older and more experienced
+than I am, it was upon his opinion that we principally acted. We
+had long made up our minds to escape when the opportunity came.
+Had it nor been that we were stirred into action by seeing your
+daughter in the hands of the Moors, it might have been years before
+we decided to run the risks. Therefore if you owe your freedom to
+us, to some extent we owe ours to you; and if we have been your
+protectors so far, we hope that when we arrive in Spain you will
+be our protectors there, for to us Spain is as much an enemy's
+country as Barbary."
+
+"That you can assuredly rely upon," the trader replied. "All that
+I have is at your disposal."
+
+For an hour they stood talking. Dolores said but little. She had
+felt no shyness with the stalwart sailor, but to this youth who had
+done her such signal service she felt unable so frankly to express
+her feelings of thankfulness.
+
+By morning the coast of Africa was but a faint line on the horizon,
+and the ship was headed west. Except when any alteration of the
+sails was required, the two Moors who acted as the crew were made
+to retire into the forecastle, and were there fastened in, Geoffrey
+and Boldero sleeping by turns.
+
+After breakfast the little party gathered round the helm, and at
+the request of Juan Mendez, Geoffrey and Stephen both related how
+it befell that they had become slaves to the Moors.
+
+"Your adventures are both singular," the trader said when they had
+finished. "Yours, Don Geoffrey, are extraordinary. It is marvellous
+that you should have been picked up in that terrible fight, and
+should have shared in all the perils of that awful voyage back
+to Spain without its being ever suspected that you were English.
+Once landed in the service as you say of Senor Burke, it is not
+so surprising that you should have gone freely about Spain. But
+your other adventures are wonderful, and you and your friend were
+fortunate indeed in succeeding as you did in carrying off the lady
+he loved; and deeply they must have mourned your supposed death
+on the deck of the Moorish galley. And now tell me what are your
+plans when you arrive in Spain?"
+
+"We have no fixed plans, save that we hope some day to be able to
+return home," Geoffrey said. "Stephen here could pass well enough
+as a Spaniard when once ashore without being questioned, and his
+idea is, if there is no possibility of getting on board an English
+or Dutch ship at Cadiz, to ship on board a Spaniard, and to take
+his chance of leaving her at some port at which she may touch. As
+for myself, although I speak Spanish fluently, my accent would at
+once betray me to be a foreigner. But if you will take me into your
+house for a time until I can see a chance of escaping, my past need
+not be inquired into. You could of course mention, were it asked,
+that I was English by birth, but had sailed in the Armada with my
+patron, Mr. Burke, and it would be naturally supposed that I was
+an exile from England."
+
+"That can certainly be managed," the trader said. "I fear that it
+will be difficult to get you on board a ship either of your countrymen
+or of the Hollanders; these are most closely watched lest fugitives
+from the law or from the Inquisition should escape on board them.
+Still, some opportunity may sooner or later occur; and the later
+the better pleased shall I be, for it will indeed be a pleasure to
+me to have you with me."
+
+In the afternoon Geoffrey said to Stephen, "I have been thinking,
+Stephen, about the men in the hold, and I should be glad for them
+to return to their homes. If they go with us to Spain they will be
+made galley slaves, and this I should not like, especially in the
+case of the bey's superintendent. The bey was most kind to us, and
+this man himself always spoke in our favour to him, and behaved
+well to us. I think, therefore, that out of gratitude to the bey
+we should let them go. The wind is fair, and there are, so far as
+I can see, no signs of any change of weather. By tomorrow night
+the coast of Spain will be in sight. I see no reason, therefore,
+why we should not be able to navigate her until we get near the
+land, when Mendez can engage the crew of some fishing boat to take
+us into a port. If we put them into the boat with plenty of water
+and provisions, they will make the coast by morning; and as I
+should guess that we must at present be somewhere abreast of the
+port from which we started, they will nor be very far from home
+when they land."
+
+"I have no objection whatever, Geoffrey. As you say we were not
+treated badly, at any rate from the day when the bey had us up to
+his house; and after ten years in the galleys, I do not wish my
+worst enemies such a fate. We must, of course, be careful how we
+get them into the boat."
+
+"There will be three of us with swords and pistols, and they will
+be unarmed," Geoffrey said. "We will put the two men now in the
+forecastle into the boat first, and let the others come up one by
+one and take their places. We will have a talk with the superintendent
+first, and give him a message to the bey, saying that we are not
+ungrateful for his kindness to us, but that of course we seized
+the opportunity that presented itself of making our escape, as he
+would himself have done in similar circumstances; nevertheless that
+as a proof of our gratitude to him, we for his sake release the
+whole party on board, and give them the means of safely returning."
+
+An hour later the boat, pulled by four oars, left the side of the
+ship with the crew, the superintendent and guards, and the two
+women who had come on board to attend upon Dolores upon the voyage.
+
+The next morning the vessel was within a few miles of the Spanish
+coast. An hour later a fishing-boat was hailed, and an arrangement
+made with the crew to take the vessel down to Carthagena, which
+was, they learned, some fifty miles distant. The wind was now very
+light, and it was not until the following day that they entered
+the port. As it was at once perceived that the little vessel was
+Moorish in rigging and appearance, a boat immediately came alongside
+to inquire whence she came.
+
+Juan Mendez had no difficulty in satisfying the officer as to his
+identity, he being well known to several traders in the town. His
+story of the attack upon his ship by Barbary pirates, its capture,
+and his own escape and that of his daughter by the aid of two
+Christian captives, excited great interest as soon as it became
+known in the town; for it was rare, indeed, that a captive ever
+succeeded in making his escape from the hands of the Moors. It
+had already been arranged that, in telling his story, the trader
+should make as little as possible of his companions' share in the
+business, so that public attention should not be attracted towards
+them. He himself with Dolores at once disembarked, but his companions
+did not come ashore until after nightfall.
+
+Stephen Boldero took a Spanish name, but Geoffrey retained his
+own, as the story that he was travelling as servant with Mr. Burke,
+a well known Irish gentleman who had accompanied the Armada, was
+sufficient to account for his nationality. Under the plea that he
+was anxious to return to Cadiz as soon as possible, Senor Mendez
+arranged for horses and mules to start the next morning. He had
+sent out two trunks of clothes to the ship an hour after he landed,
+and the two Englishmen therefore escaped all observation, as they
+wandered about for an hour or two after landing, and did not go
+to the inn where Mendez was staying until it was time to retire to
+bed.
+
+The next morning the party started. The clothes that Geoffrey was
+wearing were those suited to an employee in a house of business,
+while those of Boldero were such as would be worn by the captain or
+mate of a merchant vessel on shore. Both were supplied with arms,
+for although the party had nothing to attract the cupidity of
+robbers beyond the trunks containing the clothes purchased on the
+preceding day, and the small amount of money necessary for their
+travel on the road, the country was so infested by bands of robbers
+that no one travelled unarmed. The journey to Cadiz was, however,
+accomplished without adventure.
+
+The house of Senor Mendez was a large and comfortable one. Upon
+the ground floor were his offices and store rooms. He himself and
+his family occupied the two next floors, while in those above his
+clerks and employees lived. His unexpected return caused great
+surprise, and in a few hours a number of acquaintances called to
+hear the story of the adventures through which he had passed, and
+to condole with him on the loss of his wife. At his own request
+Stephen Boldero had been given in charge of the principal clerk,
+and a room assigned to him in the upper story.
+
+"I shall be much more comfortable," he said, "among your people,
+Don Mendez. I am a rough sailor, and ten years in the galleys don't
+improve any manners a man may have had. If I were among your friends
+I would be out of place and uncomfortable, and should always have
+to be bowing and scraping and exchanging compliments, and besides
+they would soon find out that my Spanish was doubtful. I talk a
+sailor's slang, but I doubt if I should understand pure Spanish.
+Altogether, I should be very uncomfortable, and should make you
+uncomfortable, and I would very much rather take my place among
+the men that work for you until I can get on board a ship again."
+
+Geoffrey was installed in the portion of the house occupied by the
+merchant, and was introduced by him to his friends simply as the
+English gentleman who had rescued him and his daughter from the
+hands of the Moors, it being incidentally mentioned that he had
+sailed in the Armada, and that he had fallen into the hands of the
+corsairs in the course of a voyage made with his friend Mr. Burke
+to Italy. He at once took his place as a friend and assistant of
+the merchant; and as the latter had many dealings with Dutch and
+English merchants, Geoffrey was able to be of considerable use to
+him in his written communications to the captains of the various
+vessels of those nationalities in the port.
+
+"I think," the merchant said to him a fortnight after his arrival
+in Cadiz, "that, if it would not go against your conscience, it
+would be most advisable that you should accompany me sometimes to
+church. Unless you do this, sooner or later suspicion is sure to
+be roused, and you know that if you were once suspected of being
+a heretic, the Inquisition would lay its hands upon you in no time."
+
+"I have no objection whatever," Geoffrey said. "Were I questioned
+I should at once acknowledge that I was a Protestant; but I see
+no harm in going to a house of God to say my prayers there, while
+others are saying theirs in a different manner. There is no church
+of my own religion here, and I can see no harm whatever in doing
+as you suggest."
+
+"I am glad to hear that that is your opinion," Senor Mendez said,
+"for it is the one point concerning which I was uneasy. I have
+ordered a special mass at the church of St. Dominic tomorrow, in
+thanksgiving for our safe escape from the hands of the Moors, and
+it would be well that you should accompany us there."
+
+"I will do so most willingly," Geoffrey said. "I have returned thanks
+many times, but shall be glad to do so again in a house dedicated
+to God's service."
+
+Accordingly the next day Geoffrey accompanied Don Mendez and his
+daughter to the church of St. Dominic, and as he knelt by them
+wondered why men should hate each other because they differed as
+to the ways and methods in which they should worship God. From that
+time on he occasionally accompanied Senor Mendez to the church,
+saying his prayers earnestly in his own fashion, and praying that
+he might some day be restored to his home and friends.
+
+He and the merchant had frequently talked over all possible plans
+for his escape, but the extreme vigilance of the Spanish authorities
+with reference to the English and Dutch trading ships seemed to
+preclude any possibility of his being smuggled on board. Every bale
+and package was closely examined on the quay before being sent off.
+Spanish officials were on board from the arrival to the departure
+of each ship, and no communication whatever was allowed between
+the shore and these vessels, except in boats belonging to the
+authorities, every paper and document passing first through their
+hands for examination before being sent on board. The trade carried
+on between England, Holland, and Spain at the time when these nations
+were engaged in war was a singular one; but it was permitted by
+all three countries, because the products of each were urgently
+required by the others. It was kept within narrow limits, and
+there were frequent angry complaints exchanged between the English
+government and that of Holland, when either considered the other
+to be going beyond that limit.
+
+Geoffrey admitted to himself that he might again make the attempt
+to return to England, by taking passage as before in a ship bound
+for Italy, but he knew that Elizabeth was negotiating with Philip
+for peace, and thought that he might as well await the result. He
+was, indeed, very happy at Cadiz, and shrank from the thought of
+leaving it.
+
+Stephen Boldero soon became restless, and at his urgent request Juan
+Mendez appointed him second mate on board one of his ships sailing
+for the West Indies, his intention being to make his escape if an
+opportunity offered; but if not, he preferred a life of activity
+to wandering aimlessly about the streets of Cadiz. He was greatly
+grieved to part from Geoffrey, and promised that, should he ever
+reach England, he would at once journey down to Hedingham, and
+report his safety to his father and mother.
+
+"You will do very well here, Master Geoffrey," he said. "You are
+quite at home with all the Spaniards, and it will not be very long
+before you speak the language so well that, except for your name,
+none would take you for a foreigner. You have found work to do, and
+are really better off here than you would be starving and fighting
+in Holland. Besides," he said with a sly wink, "there are other
+attractions for you. Juan Mendez treats you as a son, and the
+senorita knows that she owes everything to you. You might do worse
+than settle here for life. Like enough you will see me back again
+in six months' time, for if I see no chance of slipping off and
+reaching one of the islands held by the buccaneers, I shall perforce
+return in the ship I go out in."
+
+At parting Senor Mendez bestowed a bag containing five hundred
+gold pieces upon Stephen Boldero as a reward for the service he
+had rendered him.
+
+Geoffrey missed him greatly. For eighteen months they had been
+constantly together, and it was the sailor's companionship and
+cheerfulness that had lightened the first days of his captivity;
+and had it not been for his advice and support he might now have
+been tugging at an oar in the bey's corsair galley. Ever since they
+had been at Cadiz he had daily spent an hour or two in his society;
+for when work was done they generally went for a walk together on
+the fortifications, and talked of England and discussed the possibility
+of escape. After his departure he was thrown more than before into
+the society of the merchant and his daughter. The feeling that
+Dolores had, when he first saw her, excited within him had changed
+its character. She was very pretty now that she had recovered her
+life and spirits, and she made no secret of the deep feeling of
+gratitude she entertained towards him. One day, three months after
+Stephen's departure, Senor Mendez, when they were alone together,
+broached the subject on which his thoughts had been turned so much
+of late.
+
+"Friend Geoffrey," he said, "I think that I am not mistaken in
+supposing that you have an affection for Dolores. I have marked
+its growth, and although I would naturally have rather bestowed
+her upon a countryman, yet I feel that you have a right to her as
+having saved her from the horrible fate that would have undoubtedly
+befallen her, and that it is not for me, to whom you have restored
+her, besides saving my own life, to offer any objection. As to her
+feelings, I have no doubt whatever. Were you of my religion and
+race, such a match would afford me the greatest happiness. As it
+is I regret it only because I feel that some day or other it will
+lead to a separation from me. It is natural that you should wish
+to return to your own country, and as this war cannot go on for
+ever, doubtless in time some opportunity for doing so will arrive.
+This I foresee and must submit to, but if there is peace I shall be
+able occasionally to visit her in her home in England. I naturally
+hope that it will be long before I shall thus lose her. She is my
+only child, and I shall give as her dower the half of my business,
+and you will join me as an equal partner. When the war is over you
+can, if you wish, establish yourself in London, and thence carry
+on and enlarge the English and Dutch trade of our house. I may even
+myself settle there. I have not thought this over at present, nor
+is there any occasion to do so. I am a wealthy man and there is
+no need for me to continue in business, and I am not sure when the
+time comes I shall not prefer to abandon my country rather than
+be separated from my daughter. At any rate for the present I offer
+you her hand and a share in my business."
+
+Geoffrey expressed in suitable terms the gratitude and delight he
+felt at the offer. It was contrary to Spanish notions that he should
+receive from Dolores in private any assurance that the proposal in
+which she was so largely concerned was one to which she assented
+willingly, but her father at once fetched her in and formally
+presented her to Geoffrey as his promised wife, and a month later
+the marriage was solemnized at the church of St. Dominic.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII
+
+IVRY
+
+
+The day after the capture of Breda Sir Francis Vere sent for
+Lionel Vickars to his quarters. Prince Maurice and several of his
+principal officers were there, and the prince thanked him warmly
+for the share he had taken in the capture of the town.
+
+"Captain Heraugiere has told me," he said, "that the invention of
+the scheme that has ended so well is due as much to you as to him,
+that you accompanied him on the reconnoitring expedition and shared
+in the dangers of the party in the barge. I trust Sir Francis Vere
+will appoint you to the first ensigncy vacant in his companies, but
+should there be likely to be any delay in this I will gladly give
+you a commission in one of my own regiments."
+
+"I have forestalled your wish, prince," Sir Francis said, "and
+have this morning given orders that his appointment shall be made
+out as ensign in one of my companies, but at present I do not
+intend him to join. I have been ordered by the queen to send further
+aid to help the King of France against the League. I have already
+despatched several companies to Brittany, and will now send two
+others. I would that my duties permitted me personally to take part
+in the enterprise, for the battle of the Netherlands is at present
+being fought on the soil of France; but this is impossible. Several
+of my friends, however, volunteers and others, will journey with
+the two companies, being desirous of fighting under the banner of
+Henry of Navarre. Sir Ralph Pimpernel, who is married to a French
+Huguenot lady and has connections at the French court, will lead
+them. I have spoken to him this morning, and he will gladly allow
+my young friend here to accompany him. I think that it is the
+highest reward I can give him, to afford him thus an opportunity
+of seeing stirring service; for I doubt not that in a very short
+time a great battle will be fought. We know that Alva has sent
+eighteen hundred of the best cavalry of Flanders to aid the League,
+and he is sure to have given orders that they are to be back again
+as soon as possible. How do you like the prospect, Lionel?"
+
+Lionel warmly expressed his thanks to Sir Francis Vere for his
+kindness, and said that nothing could delight him more than to take
+part in such an enterprise.
+
+"I must do something at any rate to prove my gratitude for your
+share in the capture of this city," Prince Maurice said; "and will
+send you presently two of the best horses of those we have found
+in the governor's stables, together with arms and armour suitable
+to your rank as an officer of Sir Francis Vere."
+
+Upon the following morning a party of ten knights and gentlemen
+including Lionel Vickars, rode to Bergen op Zoom. The two companies,
+which were drawn from the garrison of that town, had embarked the
+evening before in ships that had come from England to transport
+them to France. Sir Ralph Pimpernel and his party at once went on
+board, and as soon as their horses were embarked the sails were
+hoisted. Four days' voyage took them to the mouth of the Seine,
+and they landed at Honfleur on the south bank of the river. There
+was a large number of ships in port, for the Protestant princes of
+Germany were, as well as England, sending aid to Henry of Navarre,
+and numbers of gentlemen and volunteers were flocking to his banners.
+
+For the moment Henry IV represented in the eyes of Europe
+the Protestant cause. He was supported by the Huguenots of France
+and by some of the Catholic noblemen and gentry. Against him were
+arrayed the greater portion of the Catholic nobles, the whole
+faction of the Guises and the Holy League, supported by Philip of
+Spain.
+
+The party from Holland disembarked at midday on the 9th of March.
+Hearing rumours that a battle was expected very shortly to take
+place, Sir Ralph Pimpernel started at once with his mounted party
+for Dreux, which town was being besieged by Henry, leaving the two
+companies of foot to press on at their best speed behind him. The
+distance to be ridden was about sixty miles, and late at night
+on the 10th they rode into a village eight miles from Dreux. Here
+they heard that the Duke of Mayenne, who commanded the force of
+the League, was approaching the Seine at Mantes with an army of
+ten thousand foot and four thousand horse.
+
+"We must mount at daybreak, gentlemen," Sir Ralph Pimpernel said,
+"or the forces of the League will get between us and the king. It
+is evident that we have but just arrived in time, and it is well
+we did not wait for our footmen."
+
+The next morning they mounted early and rode on to the royal camp
+near Dreux. Here Sir Ralph Pimpernel found Marshal Biron, a relation
+of his wife, who at once took him to the king.
+
+"You have just arrived in time, Sir Ralph," the king said when
+Marshal Biron introduced him, "for tomorrow, or at latest the day
+after, we are likely to try our strength with Mayenne. You will find
+many of your compatriots here. I can offer you but poor hospitality
+at present, but hope to entertain you rarely some day when the good
+city of Paris opens its gates to us."
+
+"Thanks, sire," Sir Ralph replied; "but we have come to fight and
+not to feast."
+
+"I think I can promise you plenty of that at any rate," the king
+said. "You have ten gentlemen with you, I hear, and also that there
+are two companies of foot from Holland now on their way up from
+Honfleur."
+
+"They landed at noon the day before yesterday, sire, and will
+probably be up tomorrow."
+
+"They will be heartily welcome, Sir Ralph. Since Parma has sent so
+large a force to help Mayenne it is but right that Holland, which
+is relieved of the presence of these troops, should lend me a
+helping hand."
+
+Quarters were found for the party in a village near the camp; for
+the force was badly provided with tents, the king's resources being
+at a very low ebb; he maintained the war, indeed, chiefly by the
+loans he received from England and Germany. The next day several
+bodies of troops were seen approaching the camp. A quarter of an
+hour later the trumpets blew; officers rode about, ordering the
+tents to be levelled and the troops to prepare to march. A messenger
+from Marshal Biron rode at full speed into the village, where many
+of the volunteers from England and Germany, besides the party of
+Sir Ralph Pimpernel, were lodged.
+
+"The marshal bids me tell you, gentlemen, that the army moves at once.
+Marshal D'Aumont has fallen back from Ivry; Mayenne is advancing.
+The siege will be abandoned at present, and we march towards Nonancourt,
+where we shall give battle tomorrow if Mayenne is disposed for it."
+
+The camps were struck and the wagons loaded, and the army marched
+to St. Andre, a village situated on an elevated plain commanding a
+view of all the approaches from the country between the Seine and
+Eure.
+
+"This is a fine field for a battle," Sir Ralph said, as the troops
+halted on the ground indicated by the camp marshals. "It is splendid
+ground for cavalry to act, and it is upon them the brunt of the
+fighting will fall. We are a little stronger in foot; for several
+companies from Honfleur, our own among them, have come up this
+morning, and I hear we muster twelve thousand, which is a thousand
+more than they say Mayenne has with him. But then he has four
+thousand cavalry to our three thousand; and Parma's regiments of
+Spaniards, Walloons, and Italian veterans are far superior troops
+to Henry's bands of riders, who are mostly Huguenot noblemen and
+gentlemen with their armed retainers, tough and hardy men to fight,
+as they have shown themselves on many a field, but without any of
+the discipline of Parma's troopers.
+
+"If Parma himself commanded yonder army I should not feel confident
+of the result; but Mayenne, though a skilful general, is slow and
+cautious, while Henry of Navarre is full of fire and energy, and
+brave almost to rashness. We are in muster under the command of
+the king himself. He will have eight hundred horse, formed into
+six squadrons, behind him, and upon these will, I fancy, come the
+chief shock of the battle. He will be covered on each side by the
+English and Swiss infantry; in all four thousand strong.
+
+"Marshal Biron will be on the right with five troops of horse and
+four regiments of French infantry; while on the left will be the
+troops of D'Aumont, Montpensier, Biron the younger, D'Angouleme,
+and De Givry, supported in all by two regiments of French infantry,
+one of Swiss, and one of German. The marshal showed us the plan of
+battle last night in his tent. It is well balanced and devised."
+
+It was late in the evening before the whole of the force had
+reached the position and the tents were erected. One of these had
+been placed at the disposal of Sir Ralph's party. Sir Ralph and
+four of his companions had been followed by their mounted squires,
+and these collected firewood, and supplied the horses with forage
+from the sacks they carried slung from their saddles, while the
+knights and gentlemen themselves polished their arms and armour, so
+as to make as brave a show as possible in the ranks of the king's
+cavalry.
+
+When they had eaten their supper Lionel Vickars strolled through
+the camp, and was amused at the contrast presented by the various
+groups. The troops of cavalry of the French nobles were gaily
+attired; the tents of the officers large and commodious, with rich
+hangings and appointments. The sound of light hearted laughter
+came from the groups round the campfires, squires and pages moved
+about thickly, and it was evident that comfort, and indeed luxury,
+were considered by the commanders as essential even upon a campaign.
+The encampments of the German, Swiss, and English infantry were of
+far humbler design. The tents of the officers were few in number,
+and of the simplest form and make. A considerable portion of the
+English infantry had been drawn from Holland, for the little army
+there was still the only body of trained troops at Elizabeth's
+disposal.
+
+The Swiss and Germans were for the most part mercenaries. Some had
+been raised at the expense of the Protestant princes, others were
+paid from the sums supplied from England. The great proportion of
+the men were hardy veterans who had fought under many banners, and
+cared but little for the cause in which they were fighting, provided
+they obtained their pay regularly and that the rations were abundant
+and of good quality.
+
+The French infantry regiments contained men influenced by a variety
+of motives. Some were professional soldiers who had fought in many
+a field during the long wars that had for so many years agitated
+France, others were the retainers of the nobles who had thrown in
+their cause with Henry, while others again were Huguenot peasants
+who were fighting, not for pay, but in the cause of their religion.
+
+The cavalry were for the most part composed of men of good family,
+relations, connections, or the superior vassals of the nobles who
+commanded or officered them. The king's own squadrons were chiefly
+composed of Huguenot gentlemen and their mounted retainers; but
+with these rode many foreign volunteers like Sir Ralph Pimpernel's
+party, attracted to Henry's banner either from a desire to aid the
+Protestant cause or to gain military knowledge and fame under so
+brave and able a monarch, or simply from the love of excitement
+and military ardour.
+
+The camp of this main body of cavalry or "battalia" as the body
+on whom the commander of our army chiefly relied for victory was
+called, was comparatively still and silent. The Huguenot gentlemen,
+after the long years of persecution to which those of their religion
+had been exposed, were for the most part poor. Their appointments
+were simple, and they fought for conscience' sake, and went into
+battle with the stern enthusiasm that afterwards animated Cromwell's
+Ironsides.
+
+It was not long before the camp quieted down; for the march had
+been a long one, and they would be on their feet by daybreak. The
+king himself, attended by Marshals D'Aumont and Biron, had gone
+through the whole extent of the camp, seen that all was in order,
+that the troops had everywhere received their rations, and that the
+officers were acquainted with the orders for the morrow. He stayed
+a short time in the camp of each regiment and troop, saying a few
+words of encouragement to the soldiers, and laughing and joking
+with the officers. He paused a short time and chatted with Sir Ralph
+Pimpernel, who, at his request, introduced each of his companions
+to him.
+
+Lionel looked with interest and admiration at the man who was
+regarded as the champion of Protestantism against Popery, and who
+combined in himself a remarkable mixture of qualities seldom found
+existing in one person. He was brave to excess and apparently
+reckless in action, and yet astute, prudent, and calculating in
+council. With a manner frank, open, and winning, he was yet able to
+match the craftiest of opponents at their own weapons of scheming
+and duplicity. The idol of the Huguenots of France, he was ready to
+purchase the crown of France at the price of accepting the Catholic
+doctrines, for he saw that it was hopeless for him in the long run
+to maintain himself against the hostility of almost all the great
+nobles of France, backed by the great proportion of the people and
+aided by the pope and the Catholic powers, so long as he remained
+a Protestant. But this change of creed was scarcely even foreseen
+by those who followed him, and it was the apparent hopelessness
+of his cause, and the gallantry with which he maintained it, that
+attracted the admiration of Europe.
+
+Henry's capital was at the time garrisoned by the troops of the
+pope and Spain. The great nobles of France, who had long maintained
+a sort of semi independence of the crown, were all against him,
+and were calculating on founding independent kingdoms. He himself
+was excommunicated. The League were masters of almost the whole
+of France, and were well supplied with funds by the pope and the
+Catholic powers while Henry was entirely dependent for money upon
+what he could borrow from Queen Elizabeth and the States of Holland.
+But no one who listened to the merry laugh of the king as he chatted
+with the little group of English gentlemen would have thought that
+he was engaged in a desperate and well nigh hopeless struggle, and
+that the following day was to be a decisive one as to his future
+fortunes.
+
+"Well, gentlemen," he said as he turned his horse to ride away,
+"I must ask you to lie down as soon as possible. As long as the
+officers are awake and talking the men cannot sleep; and I want
+all to have a good night's rest. The enemy's camp is close at hand
+and the battle is sure to take place at early dawn."
+
+As the same orders were given everywhere, the camp was quiet early,
+and before daylight the troops were called under arms and ranged
+in the order appointed for them to fight in.
+
+The army of the League was astir in equally good time. In its
+centre was the battalia composed of six hundred splendid cavalry,
+all noblemen of France, supported by a column of three hundred Swiss
+and two thousand French infantry. On the left were six hundred French
+cuirassiers and the eighteen hundred troops of Parma, commanded by
+Count Egmont. They were supported by six regiments of French and
+Lorrainers, and two thousand Germans. The right wing was composed
+of three regiments of Spanish lancers, two troops of Germans, four
+hundred cuirassiers, and four regiments of infantry.
+
+When the sun rose and lighted up the contending armies, the difference
+between their appearance was very marked. That of the League was
+gay with the gilded armour, waving plumes, and silken scarfs of the
+French nobles, whose banners fluttered brightly in the air, while
+the Walloons and Flemish rivalled their French comrades in the
+splendour of their appointments. In the opposite ranks there was
+neither gaiety nor show. The Huguenot nobles and gentlemen, who had
+for so many years been fighting for life and religion, were clad
+in armour dinted in a hundred battlefields; and while the nobles
+of the League were confident of victory and loud in demanding
+to be led against the foe, Henry of Navarre and his soldiers were
+kneeling, praying to the God of battles to enable them to bear
+themselves well in the coming fight. Henry of Navarre wore in his
+helmet a snow white plume, which he ordered his troops to keep in
+view, and to follow wherever they should see it waving, in case
+his banner went down.
+
+Artillery still played but a small part in battles on the field
+and there were but twelve pieces on the ground, equally divided
+between the two armies. These opened the battle, and Count Egmont,
+whose cavalry had suffered from the fire of the Huguenot cannon,
+ordered a charge, and the splendid cavalry of Parma swept down
+upon the right wing of Henry. The cavalry under Marshal Biron were
+unable to withstand the shock and were swept before them, and Egmont
+rode on right up to the guns and sabred the artillerymen. Almost
+at the same moment the German riders under Eric of Brunswick, the
+Spanish and French lancers, charged down upon the centre of the
+Royal Army. The rout of the right wing shook the cavalry in the
+centre. They wavered, and the infantry on their flanks fell back but
+the king and his officers rode among them, shouting and entreating
+them to stand firm. The ground in their front was soft and checked
+the impetuosity of the charge of the Leaguers, and by the time they
+reached the ranks of the Huguenots they were broken and disordered,
+and could make no impression whatever upon them.
+
+As soon as the charge was repulsed, Henry set his troops in motion,
+and the battalia charged down upon the disordered cavalry of the
+League. The lancers and cuirassiers were borne down by the impetuosity
+of the charge, and Marshal Biron, rallying his troops, followed
+the king's white plume into the heart of the battle. Egmont brought
+up the cavalry of Flanders to the scene, and was charging at their
+head when he fell dead with a musketball through the heart.
+
+Brunswick went down in the fight, and the shattered German and
+Walloon horse were completely overthrown and cut to pieces by the
+furious charges of the Huguenot cavalry.
+
+At one time the victorious onset was checked by the disappearance
+of the king's snow white plumes, and a report ran through the army
+that the king was killed. They wavered irresolutely. The enemy,
+regaining courage from the cessation of their attacks, were again
+advancing, when the king reappeared bareheaded and covered with
+dust and blood, but entirely unhurt. He addressed a few cheerful
+words to his soldiers, and again led the charge. It was irresistible;
+the enemy broke and fled in the wildest confusion hotly pursued by
+the royalist cavalry, while the infantry of the League, who had so
+far taken no part whatever in the battle, were seized with a panic,
+threw away their arms, and sought refuge in the woods in their
+rear.
+
+Thus the battle was decided only by the cavalry, the infantry taking
+no part in the fight on either side. Eight hundred of the Leaguers
+either fell on the battlefield or were drowned in crossing the
+river in their rear. The loss of the royalists was but one fourth
+in number. Had the king pushed forward upon Paris immediately
+after the battle, the city would probably have surrendered without
+a blow; and the Huguenot leaders urged this course upon him. Biron
+and the other Catholics, however, argued that it was better to
+undertake a regular siege, and the king yielded to this advice,
+although the bolder course would have been far more in accordance
+with his own disposition.
+
+He was probably influenced by a variety of motives. In the first
+place his Swiss mercenaries were in a mutinous condition, and
+refused to advance a single foot unless they received their arrears
+of pay, and this Henry, whose chests were entirely empty, had no
+means of providing. In the second place he was at the time secretly
+in negotiation with the pope for his conversion, and may have feared
+to give so heavy a blow to the Catholic cause as would have been
+effected by the capture of Paris following closely after the victory
+of Ivry. At any rate he determined upon a regular siege. Moving
+forward he seized the towns of Lagny on the Maine, and Corbeil on
+the Seine, thus entirely cutting off the food supply of Paris.
+
+Lionel Vickars had borne his part in the charges of the Huguenot
+cavalry, but as the company to which he belonged was in the rear
+of the battalia, he had no personal encounters with the enemy.
+
+After the advance towards Paris the duties of the cavalry consisted
+entirely in scouting the country, sweeping in provisions for their
+own army, and preventing supplies from entering Paris. No siege
+operations were undertaken, the king relying upon famine alone to
+reduce the city. Its population at the time the siege commenced was
+estimated at 400,000, and the supply of provisions to be sufficient
+for a month. It was calculated therefore that before the League
+could bring up another army to its relief, it must fall by famine.
+
+But no allowance had been made for the religious enthusiasm and
+devotion to the cause of the League that animated the population
+of Paris. Its governor, the Duke of Nemours, brother of Mayenne,
+aided by the three Spanish delegates, the Cardinal Gaetano,
+and by an army of priests and monks, sustained the spirits of the
+population; and though the people starved by thousands, the city
+resisted until towards the end of August. In that month the army
+of the League, united with twelve thousand foot and three thousand
+horse from the Netherlands under Parma himself, advanced to its
+assistance; while Maurice of Holland, with a small body of Dutch
+troops and reinforcements from England, had strengthened the army
+of the king.
+
+The numbers of the two armies were not unequal. Many of the French
+nobles had rallied round Henry after his victory, and of his cavalry
+four thousand were nobles and their retainers who served at their
+own expense, and were eager for a battle. Parma himself had doubts
+as to the result of the conflict. He could rely upon the troops he
+himself had brought, but had no confidence in those of the League;
+and when Henry sent him a formal challenge to a general engagement,
+Parma replied that it was his custom to refuse combat when a refusal
+seemed advantageous for himself, and to offer battle whenever it
+suited his purpose to fight.
+
+For seven days the two armies, each some twenty-five thousand
+strong, lay within a mile or two of each other. Then the splendid
+cavalry of Parma moved out in order of battle, with banners flying,
+and the pennons of the lances fluttering in the wind. The king
+was delighted when he saw that the enemy were at last advancing to
+the fight. He put his troops at once under arms, but waited until
+the plan of the enemy's battle developed itself before making his
+dispositions. But while the imposing array of cavalry was attracting
+the king's attention, Parma moved off with the main body of his
+army, threw a division across the river on a pontoon bridge, and
+attacked Lagny on both sides.
+
+When Lagny was first occupied some of Sir Ralph Pimpernel's party
+were appointed to take up their quarters there, half a company of
+the English, who had come with them from Holland, were also stationed
+in the town, the garrison being altogether 1200 strong. Lionel's
+horse had received a bullet wound at Ivry and although it carried
+him for the next day or two, it was evident that it needed rest
+and attention and would be unfit to carry his rider for some time.
+Lionel had no liking for the work of driving off the cattle of the
+unfortunate land owners and peasants, however necessary it might
+be to keep the army supplied with food, and was glad of the excuse
+that his wounded horse afforded him for remaining quietly in the
+town when his comrades rode our with the troop of cavalry stationed
+there. It happened that the officer in command of the little body
+of English infantry was taken ill with fever, and Sir Ralph Pimpernel
+requested Lionel to take his place. This he was glad to do, as he
+was more at home at infantry work than with cavalry. The time went
+slowly, but Lionel, who had comfortable quarters in the house of
+a citizen, did not find it long. The burgher's family consisted
+of his wife and two daughters, and these congratulated themselves
+greatly upon having an officer quartered upon them who not only
+acted as a protection to them against the insolence of the rough
+soldiery, but was courteous and pleasant in his manner, and tried
+in every way to show that he regarded himself as a guest and not
+a master.
+
+After the first week's stay he requested that instead of having
+his meals served to him in a room apart he might take them with
+the family. The girls were about Lionel's age, and after the first
+constraint wore off he became great friends with them; and although
+at first he had difficulty in making himself understood, he readily
+picked up a little French, the girls acting as his teachers.
+
+"What do you English do here?" the eldest of them asked him when
+six weeks after his arrival they were able to converse fairly in
+a mixture of French and Spanish. "Why do you not leave us French
+people to fight out our quarrels by ourselves?"
+
+"I should put it the other way," Lionel laughed. "Why don't you
+French people fight out your quarrels among yourselves instead of
+calling in foreigners to help you? It is because the Guises and the
+League have called in the Spaniards to fight on the Catholic side
+that the English and Dutch have come to help the Huguenots. We are
+fighting the battle of our own religion here, not the battle of
+Henry of Navarre."
+
+"I hate these wars of religion," the girl said. "Why can we not
+all worship in our own way?"
+
+"Ah, that is what we Protestants want to know, Mademoiselle Claire;
+that is just what your people won't allow. Did you not massacre
+the Protestants in France on the eve of St. Bartholomew? and have
+not the Spaniards been for the last twenty years trying to stamp
+out with fire and sword the new religion in the Low Countries? We
+only want to be left alone."
+
+"But your queen of England kills the Catholics."
+
+"Not at all," Lionel said warmly; "that is only one of the stories
+they spread to excuse their own doings. It is true that Catholics
+in England have been put to death, and so have people of the sect
+that call themselves Anabaptists; but this has been because they
+had been engaged in plots against the queen, and not because of
+their religion. The Catholics of England for the most part joined
+as heartily as the Protestants in the preparations for the defence of
+England in the time of the Armada. For my part, I cannot understand
+why people should quarrel with each other because they worship God
+in different ways."
+
+"It is all very bad, I am sure," the girl said; "France has been
+torn to pieces by these religious wars for years and years. It is
+dreadful to think what they must be suffering in Paris now."
+
+"Then why don't they open their gates to King Henry instead of
+starving themselves at the orders of the legate of the pope and the
+agent of Philip of Spain? I could understand if there was another
+French prince whom they wanted as king instead of Henry of Navarre.
+We fought for years in England as to whether we would have a king
+from the house of York or the house of Lancaster, but when it comes
+to choosing between a king of your own race and a king named for
+you by Philip of Spain, I can't understand it."
+
+"Never mind, Master Vickars. You know what you are fighting for,
+don't you?"
+
+"I do; I am fighting here to aid Holland. Parma is bringing all his
+troops to aid the Guise here, and while they are away the Dutch will
+take town after town, and will make themselves so strong that when
+Parma goes back he will find the nut harder than ever to crack."
+
+"How long will Paris hold out, think you, Master Vickars? They say
+that provisions are well nigh spent."
+
+"Judging from the way in which the Dutch towns held on for weeks
+and weeks after, as it seemed, all supplies were exhausted, I should
+say that if the people of Paris are as ready to suffer rather than
+yield as were the Dutch burghers, they may hold on for a long time
+yet. It is certain that no provisions can come to them as long as
+we hold possession of this town, and so block the river."
+
+"But if the armies of Parma and the League come they may drive you
+away, Master Vickars."
+
+"It is quite possible, mademoiselle; we do not pretend to be
+invincible, but I think there will be some tough fighting first."
+
+As the weeks went on Lionel Vickars came to be on very intimate
+terms with the family. The two maidservants shared in the general
+liking for the young officer. He gave no more trouble than if he
+were one of the family, and on one or two occasions when disturbances
+were caused by the ill conduct of the miscellaneous bands which
+constituted the garrison, he brought his half company of English
+soldiers at once into the house, and by his resolute attitude
+prevented the marauders from entering.
+
+When Parma's army approached Sir Ralph Pimpernel with the cavalry
+joined the king, but Lionel shared in the disappointment felt by
+all the infantry of the garrison of Lagny that they could take no
+share in the great battle that was expected. Their excitement rose
+high while the armies lay watching each other. From the position
+of the town down by the river neither army was visible from its
+walls, and they only learned when occasional messengers rode in
+how matters were going on. One morning Lionel was awoke by a loud
+knocking at his door. "What is it?" he shouted, as he sat up in
+bed.
+
+"It is I -- Timothy Short, Master Vickars. The sergeant has sent me
+to wake you in all haste. The Spaniards have stolen a march upon
+us. They have thrown a bridge across the river somewhere in the
+night, and most all their army stands between us and the king while
+a division are preparing to besiege the town on the other side."
+Lionel was hastily throwing on his clothes and arming himself while
+the man was speaking.
+
+"Tell the sergeant," he said, "to get the men under arms. I will
+be with him in a few minutes."
+
+When Lionel went out he found that the household was already astir.
+
+"Go not out fasting," his host said. "Take a cup of wine and some
+food before you start. You may be some time before you get an
+opportunity of eating again if what they say is true."
+
+"Thank you heartily," Lionel replied as he sat down to the table,
+on which some food had already been placed; "it is always better
+to fight full than fasting."
+
+"Hark you!" the bourgeois said in his ear; "if things go badly with
+you make your way here. I have a snug hiding place, and I shall take
+refuge there with my family if the Spaniards capture the town. I
+have heard of their doings in Holland, and that when they capture
+a town they spare neither age nor sex, and slay Catholics as well
+as Protestants; therefore I shall take refuge till matters have
+quieted down and order is restored. I shall set to work at once
+to carry my valuables there, and a goodly store of provisions. My
+warehouse man will remain in charge above. He is faithful and can
+be trusted, and he will tell the Spaniards that I am a good Catholic,
+and lead them to believe that I fled with my family before the
+Huguenots entered the town."
+
+"Thank you greatly," Lionel replied; "should the need arise I will
+take advantage of your kind offer. But it should not do so. We have
+twelve hundred men here, and half that number of citizens have kept
+the Spaniards at bay for months before towns no stronger than this
+in Holland. We ought to be able to defend ourselves here for weeks,
+and the king will assuredly come to our relief in two or three days
+at the outside."
+
+Upon Lionel sallying out he found the utmost confusion and disorder
+reigning. The commandant was hurriedly assigning to the various
+companies composing the garrison their places upon the walls.
+Many of the soldiers were exclaiming that they had been betrayed,
+and that it were best to make terms with the Spaniards at once.
+The difference between the air of a quiet resolution that marked
+the conduct of the people and troops at Sluys and the excitement
+manifested here struck Lionel unpleasantly. The citizens all
+remained in their houses, afraid lest the exultation they felt at
+the prospect of deliverance would be so marked as to enrage the
+soldiery. Lionel's own company was standing quietly and in good
+order in the marketplace, and as soon as he received orders as to
+the point that he should occupy on the walls Lionel marched them
+away.
+
+In half an hour the Spanish batteries, which had been erected during
+the night, opened fire upon several points of the walls. The town
+was ill provided with artillery, and the answer was feeble, and
+before evening several breaches had been effected, two of the gates
+blown in, and the Spaniards, advanced to the assault. Lionel and
+his company, with one composed of Huguenot gentlemen and their
+retainers and another of Germans defended the gate at which they were
+posted with great bravery, and succeeded in repulsing the attacks
+of the Spaniards time after time. The latter pressed forward in heavy
+column, only to recoil broken and shattered from the archway, which
+was filled high with their dead. The defenders had just succeeded
+in repulsing the last of these attacks, when some soldiers ran by
+shouting "All is lost, the Spaniards have entered the town at three
+points!"
+
+The German company at once disbanded and scattered. The Huguenot
+noble said to Lionel: "I fear that the news is true; listen to the
+shouts and cries in the town behind us. I will march with my men
+and see if there is any chance of beating back the Spaniards; if
+not it were best to lay down our arms and ask for quarter. Will
+you try to hold this gate until I return?"
+
+"I will do so," Lionel said; "but I have only about thirty men left,
+and if the Spaniards come on again we cannot hope to repulse them."
+
+"If I am not back in ten minutes it will be because all is lost,"
+the Huguenot said; "and you had then best save yourself as you
+can."
+
+But long before the ten minutes passed crowds of fugitives ran past,
+and Lionel learned that great numbers of the enemy had entered,
+and that they were refusing quarter and slaying all they met.
+
+"It is useless to stay here longer to be massacred," he said to his
+men. "I should advise you to take refuge in the churches, leaving
+your arms behind you as you enter. It is evident that further
+resistance is useless, and would only cost us our lives. The Spaniards
+are twenty to one, and it is evident that all hope of resistance
+is at an end." The men were only too glad to accept the advice, and
+throwing down their arms, hurried away. Lionel sheathed his sword,
+and with the greatest difficulty made his way through the scene of
+wild confusion to the house where he had lodged. The doors of most
+of the houses were fast closed and the inhabitants were hurling
+down missiles of all kinds from the upper windows upon their
+late masters. The triumphant shouts of the Spaniards rose loud in
+the air, mingled with despairing cries and the crack of firearms.
+Lionel had several narrow escapes from the missiles thrown from the
+windows and roofs, but reached the house of the merchant safely.
+The door was half opened.
+
+"Thanks be to heaven that you have come. I had well nigh given you
+up, and in another minute should have closed the door. The women
+are all below, but I waited until the last minute for you."
+
+Barring the door Lionel's host led the way downstairs into a great
+cellar, which served as a warehouse, and extended under the whole
+house. He made his way through the boxes and bales to the darkest
+corner of the great cellar. Here he pulled up a flag and showed
+another narrow stair, at the bottom of which a torch was burning.
+Bidding Lionel descend he followed him, lowered the flag behind him,
+and then led the way along a narrow passage, at the end of which
+was a door. Opening it Lionel found himself in an arched chamber.
+Two torches were burning, and the merchant's wife and daughters
+and the two female domestics were assembled. There was a general
+exclamation of gladness as Lionel entered.
+
+"We have been greatly alarmed," the mercer's wife said, "lest you
+should not be able to gain the house, Master Vickars; for we heard
+that the Spaniards are broken in at several points."
+
+"It was fortunately at the other end of the town to that which I
+was stationed," Lionel said; "and I was just in time. You have a
+grand hiding place here. It looks like the crypt of a church."
+
+"That is just what it is," the mercer said. "It was the church of
+a monastery that stood here a hundred years ago. The monks then
+moved into a grander place in Paris, and the monastery and church
+which adjoined our house were pulled down and houses erected upon
+the site. My grandfather, knowing of the existence of the crypt,
+thought that it might afford a rare hiding place in case of danger,
+and had the passage driven from his cellar into it. Its existence
+could never be suspected; for as our cellar extends over the whole
+of our house, as can easily be seen, none would suspect that there
+was a hiding place without our walls. There are three or four chambers
+as large as this. One of them is stored with all my choicest silks
+and velvets, another will serve as a chamber for you and me. I have
+enough provisions for a couple of months, and even should they burn
+the house down we are safe enough here."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX
+
+STEENWYK
+
+
+Three days passed, and then a slight noise was heard as of the trap
+door being raised. Lionel drew his sword.
+
+"It is my servant, no doubt," the merchant said; "he promised to come
+and tell me how things went as soon as he could get an opportunity
+to come down unobserved. We should hear more noise if it were the
+Spaniards." Taking a light he went along the passage, and returned
+immediately afterwards followed by his man; the latter had his head
+bound up, and carried his arm in a sling. An exclamation of pity
+broke from the ladies.
+
+"You are badly hurt, Jacques. What has happened?"
+
+"It is well it is no worse, mistress," he replied. "The Spaniards
+are fiends, and behaved as if they were sacking a city of Dutch
+Huguenots instead of entering a town inhabited by friends. For an
+hour or two they cut and slashed, pillaged and robbed. They came
+rushing into the shop, and before I could say a word one ran me
+through the shoulder and another laid my head open. It was an hour
+or two before I came to my senses. I found the house turned topsy
+turvy; everything worth taking had gone, and what was not taken was
+damaged. I tied up my head and arm as best I could, and then sat
+quiet in a corner till the din outside began to subside. The officers
+did their best, I hear, and at last got the men into order. Numbers
+of the townsfolk have been killed, and every one of the garrison was
+butchered. I tell you, mistress, it is better to have ten Huguenot
+armies in possession one after another than one Spanish force, though
+the latter come as friends and co-religionists. Well, as soon as
+things quieted down the soldiers were divided among the houses of
+the townsfolk, and we have a sergeant and ten men quartered above;
+but half an hour ago they were called away on some duty, and I took
+the opportunity to steal down here."
+
+"Have you told them that we were away, Jacques?"
+
+"No, monsieur; no one has asked me about it. They saw by the
+pictures and shrines that you were good Catholics, and after the
+first outburst they have left things alone. But if it is not too
+dreary for the ladies here, I should advise you to wait for a time
+and see how things go before you show yourselves."
+
+"That is my opinion too, Jacques. We can wait here for another two
+months if need be. Doubtless, unless the Huguenots show signs of
+an intention to attack the town, only a small garrison will be left
+here, and it may be that those in our house will be withdrawn."
+
+"Do you think it will be possible for me to make my escape, Jacques?"
+Lionel asked.
+
+"I should think so, sir. Ever since the Spaniards entered the town
+boats with provisions for Paris have been coming along in great
+numbers. From what I hear the soldiers say there is no chance
+of a battle at present, for the Huguenot army have drawn off to a
+distance, seeing that Paris is revictualled and that there is no
+chance of taking it. They say that numbers of the French lords with
+the Huguenot army have drawn off and are making for their homes.
+At any rate there is no fear of an attack here, and the gates stand
+open all day. Numbers of the townsfolk have been to Paris to see
+friends there, and I should say that if you had a disguise you
+could pass out easily enough."
+
+The question was discussed for some time. Lionel was very anxious
+to rejoin the army, and it was finally settled that Jacques should
+the next night bring him down a suit of his own clothes, and the
+first time the soldiers were all away should fetch him out, accompany
+him through the gates of the town, and act as his guide as far as
+he could.
+
+The next night Lionel received the clothes. Two days later Jacques
+came down early in the morning to say that the soldiers above had
+just gone out on duty. Lionel at once assumed his disguise, and
+with the heartiest thanks for the great service they had rendered
+him took his leave of the kind merchant and his family. Jacques was
+charged to accompany him as far as possible, and to set him well
+on his way towards the Huguenot army, for Lionel's small knowledge
+of French would be detected by the first person who accosted him.
+On going out into the street Lionel found that there were many
+peasants who had come in to sell fowls, eggs, and vegetables in
+the town, and he and Jacques passed without a question through the
+gates.
+
+Jacques had, the evening before, ascertained from the soldiers the
+position of Parma's army. A long detour had to be made, and it was
+two days before they came in sight of the tents of Henry's camp.
+They had observed the greatest precautions on their way, and had
+only once fallen in with a troop of Parma's cavalry. These had
+asked no questions, supposing that Jacques and his companion were
+making their way from Paris to visit their friends after the siege,
+there being nothing in their attire to attract attention, still
+less suspicion. The peasants they met on their way eagerly demanded
+news from Paris, but Jacques easily satisfied them by saying that
+they had had a terrible time, and that many had died of hunger,
+but that now that the river was open again better times had come.
+When within a couple of miles of the army Jacques said good-bye to
+Lionel, who would have rewarded him handsomely for his guidance,
+but Jacques would not accept money.
+
+"You are the master's guest," he said, "and you saved his house
+from plunder when your people were in possession. He and my mistress
+would never forgive me if I took money from you. I am well content
+in having been able to assist so kind a young gentleman."
+
+When Lionel arrived at the camp he soon found his way to Sir Ralph
+Pimpernel's tent, where he was received as one from the dead. There
+was no difficulty in providing himself again with armour and arms,
+for of these there were abundance -- the spoils of Ivry -- in the
+camp. When he was reclothed and rearmed Sir Ralph took him to the
+king's tent, and from him Henry learned for the first time the
+circumstances that had attended the capture of Lagny.
+
+"And so they put the whole garrison to the sword," the king said
+with indignation. "I will make any Spaniards that fall in my hands
+pay dearly for it!"
+
+Henry had indeed been completely out generalled by his opponent.
+While he had been waiting with his army for a pitched battle Parma
+had invested Lagny, and there were no means of relieving it except
+by crossing the river in the face of the whole army of the enemy,
+an enterprise impossible of execution. As soon as Lagny had fallen
+provisions and ammunition were at once poured into Paris, two
+thousand boat loads arriving in a single day.
+
+King Henry's army immediately fell to pieces. The cavalry having
+neither food nor forage rode off by hundreds every day, and in a
+week but two thousand out of his six thousand horse remained with
+him. The infantry also, seeing now no hope of receiving their
+arrears of pay, disbanded in large numbers, and after an unsuccessful
+attempt to carry Paris by a night attack, the king fell back with
+the remnant of his force. Corbeil was assaulted and captured by
+Parma, and the two great rivers of Paris were now open.
+
+If Parma could have remained with his army in France, the cause
+of Henry of Navarre would have been lost. But sickness was making
+ravages among his troops. Dissensions broke our between the Spaniards,
+Italians, and Netherlanders of his army and their French allies,
+who hated the foreigners, though they had come to their assistance.
+Lastly, his presence was urgently required in the Netherlands,
+where his work was as far from being done as ever. Therefore to the
+dismay of the Leaguers he started early in November on his march
+back.
+
+No sooner did he retire than the king took the field again,
+recaptured Lagny and Corbeil, and recommenced the siege of Paris,
+while his cavalry hung upon the rear and flanks of Parma's army and
+harassed them continually, until they crossed the frontier, where
+the duke found that affairs had not improved during his absence.
+
+Lionel had obtained permission to accompany the force which captured
+Lagny, and as soon as they entered the town hurried to the mercer's
+house. He found Jacques in possession, and learned that the family
+had weeks before left the crypt and reoccupied the house, but had
+again taken refuge there when the Huguenots attacked the town. Lionel
+at once went below, and was received with delight. He was now able
+to repay to some extent the obligations he had received from them,
+by protecting them from all interference by the new captors of
+the town, from whom the majority of the citizens received harsh
+treatment for the part they had taken in attacking the garrison
+when the Spaniards first entered.
+
+Prince Maurice's visit to the camp of Henry had been but a short
+one; and as soon as Parma had effected the relief of Paris, and
+there was no longer a chance of a great battle being fought, he
+returned to Holland, followed after the recapture of Lagny by Sir
+Ralph Pimpernel and the few survivors of his party, who were all
+heartily weary of the long period of inaction that had followed
+the victory at Ivry.
+
+They found that during their absence there had been little doing in
+the Netherlands, save that Sir Francis Vere, with a small body of
+English infantry and cavalry, had stormed some formidable works
+the Spaniards had thrown up to prevent relief being given to
+Recklinghausen, which they were besieging. He effected the relief
+of the town and drove off the besiegers. He then attacked and captured
+a fort on the bank of the Rhine, opposite the town of Wesel.
+
+At the end of the year 1590 there were, including the garrisons,
+some eight thousand English infantry and cavalry in Holland, and
+the year that followed was to see a great change in the nature of
+the war. The efforts of Prince Maurice to improve his army were to
+bear effect, and with the assistance of his English allies he was
+to commence an active offensive war, to astonish his foes by the
+rapidity with which he manoeuvred the new fighting machine he had
+created, and to commence a new departure in the tactics of war.
+
+In May he took the field, requesting Vere to cooperate with him
+in the siege of Zutphen. But Sir Francis determined in the first
+place to capture on his own account the Zutphen forts on the opposite
+side of the river, since these had been lost by the treachery of
+Roland Yorke. He dressed up a score of soldiers, some as peasants,
+others as countrywomen, and provided them with baskets of eggs and
+other provisions. At daybreak these went down by twos and threes
+to the Zutphen ferry, as if waiting to be taken across to the town;
+and while waiting for the boat to come across for them, they sat
+down near the gate of the fort.
+
+A few minutes later a party of English cavalry were seen riding
+rapidly towards the fort. The pretended country people sprang to
+their feet, and with cries of alarm ran towards it for shelter.
+The gates were thrown open to allow them to enter. As they ran in
+they drew out the arms concealed under their clothes and overpowered
+the guard. The cavalry dashed up and entered the gate before the
+garrison could assemble, and the fort was captured.
+
+Vere at once began to throw up his batteries for the attack upon
+the town across the river, and the prince invested the city on
+the other side. So diligently did the besiegers work that before a
+week had passed after the surprise of the fort the batteries were
+completed, thirty-two guns placed in position, and the garrison,
+seeing there was no hope of relief, surrendered.
+
+On the very day of taking possession of the town, the allies, leaving
+a garrison there, marched against Deventer, seven miles down the
+river, and within five days had invested the place, and opened
+their batteries upon the weakest part of the town. A breach was
+effected, and a storm was ordered. A dispute arose between the
+English, Scotch, and Dutch troops as to who should have the honour
+of leading the assault. Prince Maurice decided in favour of the
+English, in order that they might have an opportunity of wiping
+out the stigma on the national honour caused by the betrayal of
+Deventer by the traitor Sir William Stanley.
+
+To reach the breach it was necessary to cross a piece of water called
+the Haven. Sir Francis Vere led the English across the bridge of
+boats which had been thrown over the water; but the bridge was too
+short. Some of the troops sprang over and pushed boldly for the
+breach, others were pushed over and drowned. Many of those behind
+stripped off their armour and swam across the Haven, supported by
+some Dutch troops who had been told off to follow the assaulting
+party. But at the breach they were met by Van der Berg, the governor,
+with seven companies of soldiers, and these fought so courageously
+that the assailants were unable to win their way up the breach,
+and fell back at last with a loss of two hundred and twenty-five
+men killed and wounded.
+
+While the assault was going on, the artillery of the besiegers
+continued to play upon other parts of the town, and effected great
+damage. On the following night the garrison endeavoured to capture
+the bridge across the Haven, but were repulsed with loss, and in
+the morning the place surrendered. The success of the patriots was
+due in no slight degree to the fact that Parma with the greatest
+part of his army was again absent in France, and the besieged towns
+had therefore no hope of assistance from without. The States now
+determined to seize the opportunity of capturing the towns held by
+the Spaniards in Friesland.
+
+The three principal towns in the possession of the Spaniards were
+Groningen, Steenwyk, and Coevorden. After capturing several less
+important places and forts Prince Maurice advanced against Steenwyk.
+But just as he was about to commence the siege he received pressing
+letters from the States to hurry south, as Parma was marching with
+his whole army to capture the fort of Knodsenburg, which had been
+raised in the previous autumn as a preparation for the siege of
+the important city of Nymegen.
+
+The Duke of Parma considered that he had ample time to reduce
+Knodsenburg before Prince Maurice could return to its assistance.
+Two great rivers barred the prince's return, and he would have to
+traverse the dangerous district called the Foul Meadow, and the
+great quagmire known as the Rouvenian Morass. But Prince Maurice
+had now an opportunity of showing the excellence of the army he
+had raised and trained. He received the news of Parma's advance on
+the 15th of July; two days later he was on the march south, and in
+five days had thrown bridges of boats across the two rivers, had
+crossed morass and swamp, and appeared in front of the Spanish
+army.
+
+One assault had already been delivered by the Spaniards against
+Knodsenburg, but this had been repulsed with heavy loss. As soon
+as the patriot army approached the neighbourhood, Parma's cavalry
+went out to drive in its skirmishers. Vere at once proposed to
+Prince Maurice to inflict a sharp blow upon the enemy, and with the
+approval of the prince marched with 1200 foot and 500 horse along
+the dyke which ran across the low country. Marching to a spot
+where a bridge crossed a narrow river he placed half his infantry
+in ambush there; the other half a quarter of a mile further back.
+
+Two hundred light cavalry were sent forward to beat up the enemy's
+outposts, and then retreat; the rest of the cavalry were posted
+in the rear of the infantry. Another dyke ran nearly parallel with
+the first, falling into it at some distance in the rear of Vere's
+position, and here Prince Maurice stationed himself with a body
+of horse and foot to cover Vere's retreat should he be obliged to
+fall back. About noon the light cavalry skirmished with the enemy
+and fell back, but were not followed. About half an hour later the
+scouts brought word that the Spaniards were at hand.
+
+Suddenly and without orders 800 of Maurice's cavalry galloped off
+to meet the enemy; but they soon came back again at full speed,
+with a strong force of Spanish cavalry in pursuit. Vere's infantry
+at once sallied out from their ambush among the trees, poured
+their fire into the enemy, and charged them with their pikes. The
+Spaniards turned to fly, when Vere's cavalry charged them furiously
+and drove them back in headlong rout to their own camp, taking
+a great number of prisoners, among them many officers of rank, and
+500 horses. Parma finding himself thus suddenly in face of a superior
+army, with a rapid river in his rear, fell back across the Waal,
+and then proceeded to Spa to recruit his shattered health, leaving
+Verdugo, an experienced officer, in command.
+
+Instead of proceeding to besiege Nymegen, Maurice marched away as
+suddenly and quickly as before, and captured Hulst, on the borders
+of Zeeland and Brabant, a dozen miles only from Antwerp, and then
+turning again was, in three days, back at Nymegen, and had placed
+sixty-eight pieces of artillery in position. He opened fire on the
+20th of October, and the next day the important city of Nymegen
+surrendered. This series of brilliant successes greatly raised the
+spirits of the Netherlanders, and proportionately depressed those
+of the Spaniards and their adherents.
+
+Parma himself was ill from annoyance and disappointment. The army
+with which he might have completed the conquest of the Netherlands
+had, in opposition to his entreaties and prayers, been frittered
+away by Philip's orders in useless expeditions in France, while
+the young and active generals of the Dutch and English armies were
+snatching town after town from his grasp, and consolidating the
+Netherlands, so recently broken up by Spanish strongholds, into a
+compact body, whose increasing wealth and importance rendered it
+every day a more formidable opponent. It is true that Parma had
+saved first Paris and afterwards Rouen for the League, but it was
+at the cost of loosening Philip's hold over the most important
+outpost of the Spanish dominions.
+
+In the following spring Parma was again forced to march into France
+with 20,000 men, and Maurice, as soon as the force started, prepared
+to take advantage of its absence. With 6000 foot and 2000 horse
+he again appeared at the end of May before Steenwyk. This town was
+the key to the province of Drenthe, and one of the safeguards of
+Friesland; it was considered one of the strongest fortresses of
+the time. Its garrison consisted of sixteen companies of foot and
+some cavalry, and 1200 Walloon infantry, commanded by Lewis, the
+youngest of the Counts de Berg, a brave lad of eighteen years of
+age.
+
+In this siege, for the first time, the spade was used by soldiers
+in the field. Hitherto the work had been considered derogatory to
+troops, and peasants and miners had been engaged for the work; but
+Prince Maurice had taught his soldiers that their duty was to work
+as well as fight, and they now proved the value of his teaching.
+
+The besieged made several successful sorties, and Sir Francis Vere
+had been severely wounded in the leg. The cannonade effected but
+little damage on the strong walls; but the soldiers, working night
+and day, drove mines under two of the principal bastions, and
+constructed two great chambers there; these were charged, one with
+five thousand pounds of powder, the other with half that quantity.
+On the 3d of July the mines were sprung. The bastion of the east
+gate was blown to pieces and the other bastion greatly injured, but
+many of the Dutch troops standing ready for the assault were also
+killed by the explosion.
+
+The storming parties, however, rushed forward, and the two bastions
+were captured. This left the town at the mercy of the besiegers.
+The next day the garrison surrendered, and were permitted to march
+away. Three hundred and fifty had been killed, among them young
+Count Lewis Van der Berg, and two hundred had been left behind,
+severely wounded, in the town. Between five and six hundred of
+the besiegers were killed during the course of the siege. The very
+day after the surrender of Steenwyk Maurice marched away and laid
+siege to Coevorden. This city, which was most strongly fortified,
+lay between two great swamps, between which there was a passage of
+about half a mile in width.
+
+Another of the Van der Bergs, Count Frederick, commanded the garrison
+of a thousand veterans. Verdugo sent to Parma and Mondragon for
+aid, but none could be sent to him, and the prince worked at his
+fortifications undisturbed. His force was weakened by the withdrawal
+of Sir Francis Vere with three of the English regiments, Elizabeth
+having sent peremptory orders that this force should follow
+those already withdrawn to aid Henry of Navarre in Brittany. Very
+unwillingly Vere obeyed, and marched to Doesburg on the Yssel. But
+a fortnight after he arrived there, while he was waiting for ships
+to transport him to Brittany the news came to him that Verdugo,
+having gathered a large force together, was about to attack Prince
+Maurice in his camp, and Vere at once started to the prince's aid.
+
+On the night of the 6th of September, Verdugo, with 4000 foot and
+1800 cavalry, wearing their shirts outside their armour to enable
+them to distinguish each other in the dark, fell upon Maurice's camp.
+Fortunately the prince was prepared, having intercepted a letter
+from Verdugo to the governor of the town. A desperate battle took
+place, but at break of day, while its issue was still uncertain,
+Vere, who had marched all night, came up and threw himself into the
+battle. His arrival was decisive. Verdugo drew off with a loss of
+300 killed, and five days later Coevorden surrendered, and Prince
+Maurice's army went into winter quarters.
+
+A few weeks later Parma died, killed by the burden Philip threw
+upon him, broken down by the constant disappointment of his hopes
+of carrying his work to a successful end, by the incessant interference
+of Philip with his plans, and by the anxiety caused by the mutinies
+arising from his inability to pay his troops, although he had
+borrowed to the utmost on his own possessions, and pawned even his
+jewels to keep them from starvation. He was undoubtedly the greatest
+commander of his age, and had he been left to carry out his own
+plans would have crushed out the last ember of resistance in the
+Netherlands and consolidated the power of Spain there.
+
+He was succeeded in his post by the Archduke Albert, but for a time
+Ernest Mansfeldt continued to command the army, and to manage the
+affairs in the Netherlands. In March, 1593, Prince Maurice appeared
+with his army in front of Gertruydenberg. The city itself was
+an important one, and its position on the Maas rendered it of the
+greatest use to the Spaniards, as through it they were at any moment
+enabled to penetrate into the heart of Holland. Gertruydenberg and
+Groningen, the capital of Friesland, were now, indeed, the only
+important places in the republic that remained in possession of
+the Spaniards. Hohenlohe with a portion of the army established
+himself to the east of the city, Maurice with its main body to the
+west.
+
+Two bridges constructed across the river Douge afforded a means of
+communication between two armies, and plank roads were laid across
+the swamps for the passage of baggage wagons. Three thousand soldiers
+laboured incessantly at the works, which were intended not only to
+isolate the city, but to defend the besiegers from any attack that
+might be made upon them by a relieving army. The better to protect
+themselves, miles of country were laid under water, and palisade
+work erected to render the country impregnable by cavalry.
+
+Ernest Mansfeldt did his best to relieve the town. His son, Count
+Charles, with five thousand troops, had been sent into France, but
+by sweeping up all the garrisons, he moved with a considerable army
+towards Gertruydenberg and challenged Maurice to issue out from
+his lines to fight him. But the prince had no idea of risking a
+certain success upon the issue of a battle.
+
+A hundred pieces of artillery on the batteries played incessantly
+on the town, while a blockading squadron of Zeeland ships assisted
+in the bombardment, and so terrible was the fire, that when the
+town was finally taken only four houses were found to have escaped
+injury.
+
+Two commandants of the place were killed one after the other, and
+the garrison of a thousand veterans, besides the burgher militia,
+was greatly reduced in strength. At last, after ninety days' siege,
+the town suddenly fell. Upon the 24th of June three Dutch captains
+were relieving guard in the trenches near the great north bastion
+of the town, when it occurred to them to scale the wall of the fort
+and see what was going on inside. They threw some planks across the
+ditch, and taking half a company of soldiers, climbed cautiously
+up. They obtained a foothold before the alarm was given. There was
+a fierce hand to hand struggle, and sixteen of the party fell, and
+nine of the garrison. The rest fled into the city. The Governor
+Gysant, rushing to the rescue without staying to put on his armour,
+was killed.
+
+Count Solms came from the besieging camp to investigate the sudden
+uproar, and to his profound astonishment was met by a deputation
+from the city asking for terms of surrender. Prince Maurice soon
+afterwards came up, and the terms of capitulation were agreed upon.
+The garrison were allowed to retire with side arms and baggage,
+and fifty wagons were lent to them to carry off their wounded.
+
+In the following spring Coevorden, which had been invested by
+Verdugo, was relieved, and Groningen, the last great city of the
+Netherlands in the hands of the Spaniards, was besieged. Mines were
+driven under its principal bastion, and when these were sprung,
+after sixty-five days' siege, the city was forced to surrender.
+Thus for the first time, after years of warfare, Holland, Zeeland,
+and Friesland became truly united, and free from the grasp of the
+hated invader.
+
+Throughout the last three years of warfare Sir Francis Vere had
+proved an able assistant to the prince, and the English troops had
+fought bravely side by side with the Dutch; but their contingent
+had been but a small one, for the majority of Vere's force had,
+like that of the Spaniards, been withdrawn for service in France.
+The struggle in that country was nearly at an end. The conversion
+of Henry of Navarre for the second time to the Catholic religion
+had ranged many Catholics, who had hitherto been opposed to him,
+under his banner, while many had fallen away from the ranks of the
+League in disgust, when Philip of Spain at last threw off the mask
+of disinterestedness, and proposed his nephew the Archduke Ernest
+as king of France.
+
+In July, 1595, a serious misfortune befell the allied army. They
+had laid siege to Crolle, and had made considerable progress with
+the siege, when the Spanish army, under command of Mondragon, the
+aged governor of Antwerp, marched to its relief. As the army of
+Maurice was inferior in numbers, the States would nor consent to
+a general action. The siege was consequently raised; and Mondragon
+having attained his object, fell back to a position on the Rhine
+at Orsoy, above Rheinberg, whence he could watch the movements of
+the allied army encamped on the opposite bank at Bislich, a few
+miles below Wesel.
+
+The Spanish army occupied both sides of the river, the wing on the
+right bank being protected from attack by the river Lippe, which
+falls into the Rhine at Wesel, and by a range of moorland hills
+called the Testerburg. The Dutch cavalry saw that the slopes of
+this hill were occupied by the Spaniards, but believed that their
+force consisted only of a few troops of horse. Young Count Philip
+of Nassau proposed that a body of cavalry should swim the Lippe,
+and attack and cut them off. Prince Maurice and Sir Francis Vere
+gave a very reluctant consent to the enterprise, but finally allowed
+him to take a force of five hundred men.
+
+With him were his brothers Ernest and Louis, his nephew Ernest de
+Solms, and many other nobles of Holland. Sir Marcellus Bacx was
+in command of them. The English contingent was commanded by Sir
+Nicholas Parker and Robert Vere. On August 22d they swam the Lippe
+and galloped in the direction where they expected to find two
+or three troops of Spanish horse; but Mondragon had received news
+of their intentions, and they suddenly saw before them half the
+Spanish army. Without hesitation the five hundred English and Dutch
+horsemen charged desperately into the enemy's ranks, and fought
+with extraordinary valour, until, altogether overpowered by numbers,
+Philip of Nassau and his nephew Ernest were both mortally wounded
+and taken prisoners.
+
+Robert Vere was slain by a lance thrust in the face, and many
+other nobles and gentlemen fell. Thus died one of the three brave
+brothers, for the youngest, Horace, had also joined the army in 1590.
+The survivors of the band under Sir Nicholas Parker and Marcellus
+Bacx managed to effect their retreat, covered by a reserve Prince
+Maurice had posted on the opposite side of the river.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX
+
+CADIZ
+
+
+In March, 1596, Sir Francis Vere returned to Holland. He had during
+his absence in England been largely taken into the counsels of Queen
+Elizabeth, and it had been decided that the war should be carried
+into the enemy's country, and a heavy blow struck at the power
+of Spain. Vere had been appointed to an important command in the
+proposed expedition, and had now come out charged with the mission
+of persuading the States General to cooperate heartily with England,
+and to contribute both money and men. There was much discussion
+in the States; but they finally agreed to comply with the queen's
+wishes, considering that there was no surer way of bringing the
+war to a termination than to transport it nearer to the heart of
+the enemy.
+
+As soon as the matter was arranged, Sir Francis Vere left the
+Hague and went to Middleburg, where the preparations for the Dutch
+portion of the expedition were carried out. It consisted of twenty-
+two Dutch ships, under Count William of Nassau, and a thousand of
+the English troops in the pay of the States. The company commanded
+by Lionel Vickars was one of those chosen to accompany the expedition;
+and on the 22d of April it started from Flushing and joined the
+British fleet assembled at Dover. This was under the command of Lord
+Howard as lord admiral, the Earl of Essex as general, Lord Thomas
+Howard as vice admiral, and Sir Walter Raleigh as rear admiral.
+
+Sir Francis Vere was lieutenant general and lord marshal. He
+was to be the chief adviser of the Earl of Essex, and to have the
+command of operations on shore. The ships of war consisted of the
+Ark Royal, the Repulse, Mere Honour, War Sprite, Rainbow, Mary Rose,
+Dreadnought, Vanguard, Nonpareil, Lion, Swiftsure, Quittance, and
+Tremontaine. There were also twelve ships belonging to London, and
+the twenty-two Dutch vessels. The fleet, which was largely fitted
+out at the private expense of Lord Howard and the Earl of Essex,
+sailed from Dover to Plymouth. Sir Francis Vere went by land, and
+set to work at the organization of the army.
+
+A month was thus spent, and on the 1st of June the fleet set sail.
+It carried 6860 soldiers and 1000 volunteers, and was manned by
+nearly 7000 sailors. There had been some dispute as to the relative
+ranks of Sir Francis Vere and Sir Walter Raleigh, and it was settled
+that Sir Francis should have precedence on shore, and Sir Walter
+Raleigh at sea.
+
+All on board the fleet were full of enthusiasm at the enterprise
+upon which they were embarked. It was eight years since the
+Spanish Armada had sailed to invade England; now an English fleet
+was sailing to attack Spain on her own ground. Things had changed
+indeed in that time. Spain, which had been deemed invincible, had
+suffered many reverses; while England had made great strides in
+power, and was now mistress of the seas, on which Spain had formerly
+considered herself to be supreme.
+
+A favourable wind from the northeast carried the fleet rapidly
+across the Bay of Biscay, and it proceeded on its way, keeping well
+out of sight of the coast of Portugal. The three fastest sailers
+of the fleet were sent on ahead as soon as they rounded Cape St.
+Vincent, with orders to capture all small vessels which might carry
+to Cadiz the tidings of the approach of the fleet.
+
+Early on the morning of the 20th June the fleet anchored off the
+spit of San Sebastian on the southern side of the city.
+
+Cadiz was defended by the fort of San Sebastian on one side and
+that of San Felipe on the other; while the fort of Puntales, on the
+long spit of sand connecting the city with the mainland, defended
+the channel leading up to Puerto Real, and covered by its guns
+the Spanish galleys and ships of war anchored there. Lying off the
+town when the English fleet came in sight were forty richly laden
+merchant ships about to sail for Mexico, under the convoy of four
+great men of war, two Lisbon galleons, two argosies, and three
+frigates.
+
+As soon as the English were seen, the merchant ships were ordered
+up the channel to Puerto Real, and the men of war and the fleet of
+seventeen war galleys were ranged under the guns of Fort Puntales
+to prevent the English passing up. It had first been decided to
+attempt a landing in the harbour of Galeta, on the south side of
+the city; but a heavy sea was setting in, and although the troops
+had been got into the boats they were re-embarked, and the fleet
+sailed round and anchored at the mouth of the channel leading up
+the bay. A council of war was held that night, and it was decided
+that the fleet should move up the bay with the tide next morning,
+and attack the Spanish fleet.
+
+The next morning at daybreak the ships got up their anchors and
+sailed up the channel, each commander vying with the rest in his
+eagerness to be first in the fray. They were soon hotly engaged
+with the enemy; the fort, men of war, and galleys opening a heavy
+fire upon them, to which, anchoring as close as they could get to
+the foe, the English ships hotly responded. The galleys were driven
+closer in under the shelter of the fire of the fort, and the fire
+was kept up without intermission from six o'clock in the morning
+until four in the afternoon.
+
+By that time the Spaniards had had enough of it. The galleys slipped
+their cables and made sail for a narrow channel across the spit,
+covered by the guns of the fort. Three of them were captured by
+Sir John Wingfield in the vanguard, but the rest got through the
+channel and escaped. The men of war endeavoured to run ashore, but
+boarding parties in boats from the Ark Royal and Repulse captured
+two of them. The Spaniards set fire to the other two. The argosies
+and galleons were also captured. Sir Francis Vere at once took the
+command of the land operations. The boats were all lowered, and the
+regiments of Essex, Vere, Blount, Gerard, and Clifford told off as
+a landing party. They were formed in line. The Earl of Essex and
+Sir Francis Vere took their place in a boat in advance of the line,
+and were followed by smaller boats crowded with gentlemen volunteers.
+
+They landed between the fort of Puntales and the town. The regiments
+of Blount, Gerard, and Clifford were sent to the narrowest part
+of the spit to prevent reinforcements being thrown into the place;
+while those of Essex and Vere and the gentlemen volunteers turned
+towards Cadiz. Each of these parties consisted of about a thousand
+men.
+
+The walls of Cadiz were so strong that it had been intended to
+land guns from the fleet, raise batteries, and make a breach in the
+walls. Vere, however, perceiving some Spanish cavalry and infantry
+drawn up outside the walls, suggested to Essex that an attempt should
+be made to take the place by surprise. The earl at once agreed to
+the plan.
+
+Vere marched the force across to the west side of the spit, his
+movements being concealed by the sand hills from the Spanish. Sir
+John Wingfield with two hundred men was ordered to march rapidly on
+against the enemy, driving in their skirmishers, and then to retreat
+hastily when the main body advanced against him. Three hundred men
+under Sir Matthew Morgan were posted as supports to Wingfield, and
+as soon as the latter's flying force joined them the whole were to
+fall upon the Spaniards and in turn chase them back to the walls,
+against which the main body under Essex and Vere were to advance.
+
+The orders were ably carried out. The Spaniards in hot chase of
+Wingfield found themselves suddenly confronted by Morgan's force,
+who fell upon them so furiously that they fled back to the town
+closely followed by the English. Some of the fugitives made their
+way in at the gates, which were hurriedly closed, while others
+climbed up at the bastions, which sloped sufficiently to afford
+foothold. Vere's troops from the Netherlands, led by Essex, also
+scaled the bastions and then an inner wall behind it. As soon as
+they had captured this they rushed through the streets, shooting
+and cutting down any who opposed them.
+
+Sir Francis Vere, who had also scaled the ramparts, knew that cities
+captured by assaults had often been lost again by the soldiers
+scattering. He therefore directed the rest of the troops to burst
+open the gate. This was with some difficulty effected, and he then
+marched them in good order to the marketplace, where the Spaniards
+had rallied and were hotly engaged with Essex. The opposition was
+soon beaten down, and those defending the town hall were forced to
+surrender. The troops were then marched through the town, and the
+garrison driven either into the convent of San Francisco or into
+the castle of Felipe. The convent surrendered on the same evening
+and the castle on the following day. The loss upon the part of
+the assailants was very small, but Sir John Wingfield was mortally
+wounded.
+
+The English behaved with the greatest courtesy to their captives,
+their conduct presenting an extraordinary contrast to that of
+the Spaniards under similar circumstance in the Netherlands. The
+women were treated with the greatest courtesy, and five thousand
+inhabitants, including women and priests, were allowed to leave
+the town with their clothes. The terms were that the city should
+pay a ransom of 520,000 ducats, and that some of the chief citizens
+should remain as hostages for payment. As soon as the fighting
+ceased, Lionel Vickars accompanied Sir Francis Vere through the
+streets to set guards, and see that no insult was offered to any
+of the inhabitants. As they passed along, the door of one of the
+mansions was thrown open. A gentleman hurried out; he paused for a
+moment, exclaiming, "Sir Francis Vere!" and then looking at Lionel
+rushed forward towards him with a cry of delight. Sir Francis Vere
+and Lionel stared in astonishment as the former's name was called;
+but at the sound of his own name Lionel fell back a step as if
+stupefied, and then with a cry of "Geoffrey!" fell into his brother's
+arms.
+
+"It is indeed Geoffrey Vickars!" Sir Francis Vere exclaimed. "Why,
+Geoffrey, what miracle is this? We have thought you dead these six
+years, and now we find you transmuted into a Spanish don."
+
+"I may look like one, Sir Francis," Geoffrey said as he shook his
+old commander's hand, "but I am English to the backbone still. But
+my story is too long to tell now. You will be doubtless too busy
+tonight to spare time to listen to it, but I pray you to breakfast
+with me in the morning, when I will briefly relate to you the outline
+of my adventures. Can you spare my brother for tonight, Sir Francis?"
+
+"I would do so were there ten times the work to be got through," Sir
+Francis replied. "Assuredly I would not keep asunder for a minute
+two brothers who have so long been separated. I will breakfast
+with you in the morning and hear this strange story of yours; for
+strange it must assuredly be, since it has changed my young page
+of the Netherlands into a Spanish hidalgo."
+
+"I am no hidalgo, Sir Francis, but a trader of Cadiz, and I own
+that although I have been in some way a prisoner, seeing that I
+could not effect my escape, I have not fared badly. Now, Lionel,
+come in. I have another surprise for you." Lionel, still confused
+and wonder stricken at this apparent resurrection of his brother
+from the dead, followed him upstairs. Geoffrey led the way into a
+handsomely furnished apartment, where a young lady was sitting with
+a boy two years old in her lap.
+
+"Dolores, this is my brother Lionel, of whom you have so often
+heard me speak. Lionel, this is my wife and my eldest boy, who is
+named after you."
+
+It was some time before Lionel could completely realize the position,
+and it was not until Dolores in somewhat broken English bade him
+welcome that he found his tongue.
+
+"But I cannot understand it all!" he exclaimed, after responding
+to the words of Dolores. "I saw my brother in the middle of the
+battle with the Armada. We came into collision with a great galleon,
+we lost one of our masts, and I never saw Geoffrey afterwards; and
+we all thought that he had either been shot by the musketeers on
+the galleon, or had been knocked overboard and killed by the falling
+mast."
+
+"I had hoped that long before this you would have heard of my
+safety, Lionel, for a sailor friend of mine promised if he reached
+England to go down at once to Hedingham to tell them there. He left
+the ship he was in out in the West Indies, and I hoped had reached
+home safely."
+
+"We have heard nothing, Geoffrey. The man has never come with your
+message. But now tell me how you were saved."
+
+"I was knocked over by the mast, Lionel, but as you see I was not
+killed. I climbed up into a passing Spanish ship, and concealed
+myself in the chains until she was sunk, when I was, with many of
+the crew, picked up by the boats of other ships. I pretended to
+have lost my senses and my speech, and none suspected that I was
+English. The ship I was on board was one of those which succeeded
+after terrible hardships in returning to Spain. An Irish gentleman
+on board her, to whom I confided my secret, took me as a servant.
+After many adventures I sailed with him for Italy, where we hoped
+to get a ship for England. On the way we were attacked by Barbary
+pirates. We beat them off, but I was taken prisoner. I remained
+a captive among them for nearly two years, and then with a fellow
+prisoner escaped, together with Dolores and her father, who had
+also been captured by the pirates. We reached Spain in safety,
+and I have since passed as one of the many exiles from England and
+Ireland who have taken refuge here; and Senor Mendez, my wife's
+father, was good enough to bestow her hand upon me, partly in
+gratitude for the services I had rendered him in his escape, partly
+because he saw she would break her heart if he refused."
+
+"You know that is not true, Geoffrey," Dolores interrupted.
+
+"Never mind, Dolores, it is near enough. And with his daughter,"
+he continued, "he gave me a share in his business. I have been a
+fortunate man indeed, Lionel; but I have always longed for a chance
+to return home; until now none has ever offered itself, and I have
+grieved continually at the thought that my father and mother and
+you were mourning for me as dead. Now you have the outline of my
+story; tell me about all at home."
+
+"Our father and mother are both well, Geoffrey, though your
+supposed loss was a great blow for them. But is it still home for
+you, Geoffrey? Do you really mean to return with us?"
+
+"Of course I do, Lionel. At the time I married I arranged with
+Senor Mendez that whenever an opportunity occurred I was to return
+home, taking, of course, Dolores with me. She has been learning
+English ever since, and although naturally she would rather that
+we remained here she is quite prepared to make her home in England.
+We have two boys, this youngster, and a baby three months old, so,
+you see, you have all at once acquired nephews as well as a brother
+and sister. Here is Senor Mendez. This is my brother, senor, the
+Lionel after whom I named my boy, though I never dreamed that our
+next meeting would take place within the walls of Cadiz."
+
+"You have astounded us, senor," the merchant said courteously.
+"We thought that Cadiz was safe from an attack; and though we were
+aware you had defeated our fleet we were astonished indeed when
+two hours since we heard by the din and firing in the streets that
+you had captured the city. Truly you English do not suffer the grass
+to grow under your feet. When we woke this morning no one dreamed
+of danger, and now in the course of one day you have destroyed our
+fleet, captured our town, and have our lives and properties at your
+disposal."
+
+"Your lives are in no danger, senor, and all who choose are free
+to depart without harm or hindrance. But as to your property -- I
+don't mean yours, of course, because as Geoffrey's father in law
+I am sure that Sir Francis Vere will inflict no fine upon you --
+but the city generally will have to pay, I hear, some half million
+ducats as ransom.
+
+"That is as nothing," the Spaniard said, "to the loss the city
+will suffer in the loss of the forty merchant ships which you will
+doubtless capture or burn. Right glad am I that no cargo of mine
+is on board any of them, for I do not trade with Mexico; but I am
+sure the value of the ships with their cargoes cannot be less than
+twenty millions of ducats. This will fall upon the traders of
+this town and of Seville. Still, I own that the ransom of half a
+million for a city like Cadiz seems to me to be very moderate, and
+the tranquillity that already prevails in the town is beyond all
+praise. Would that such had been the behaviour of my countrymen in
+the Netherlands!"
+
+Don Mendez spoke in a tone of deep depression. Geoffrey made a sign
+to his brother to come out on to the balcony, while the merchant
+took a seat beside his daughter.
+
+"'Tis best to leave them alone," he said as they looked down into
+the street, where the English and their Dutch allies, many of whom
+had now landed, were wandering about examining the public buildings
+and churches, while the inhabitants looked with timid curiosity
+from their windows and balconies at the men who had, as if by magic,
+suddenly become their masters. "I can see that the old gentleman is
+terribly cut up. Of course, nothing has been said between us yet,
+for it was not until we heard the sound of firing in the streets
+that anyone thought there was the smallest risk of your capturing
+the city. Nevertheless, he must be sure that I shall take this
+opportunity of returning home.
+
+"It has always been understood between us that I should do so as
+soon as any safe method of making a passage could be discovered;
+but after being here with him more than three years he had doubtless
+come to believe that such a chance would never come during his
+lifetime, and the thought of an early separation from his daughter,
+and the break up of our household here, must be painful to him in
+the extreme. It has been settled that I should still remain partner
+in the firm, and should manage our affairs in England and Holland;
+but this will, of course, be a comparatively small business until
+peace is restored, and ships are free to come and go on both sides
+as they please. But I think it is likely he will himself come to
+live with us in England, and that we shall make that the headquarters
+of the firm, employing our ships in traffic with Holland, France,
+and the Mediterranean until peace is restored with Spain, and having
+only an agent here to conduct such business as we may be able to
+carry on under the present stringent regulations.
+
+"In point of fact, even if we wound up our affairs and disposed of
+our ships, it would matter little to us, for Mendez is a very rich
+man, and as Dolores is his only child he has no great motive beyond
+the occupation it gives him for continuing in business.
+
+"So you are a captain now, Lionel! Have you had a great deal of
+fighting?"
+
+"Not a great deal. The Spaniards have been too much occupied with
+their affairs in France to give us much work to do. In Holland I
+took part in the adventure that led to the capture of Breda, did
+some fighting in France with the army of Henry of Navarre, and have
+been concerned in a good many sieges and skirmishes. I do not know
+whether you heard of the death of Robert Vere. He came out just
+after the business of the Armada, and fell in the fight the other
+day near Wesel -- a mad business of Count Philip of Nassau. Horace
+is serving with his troop. We have recovered all the cities in the
+three provinces, and Holland is now virtually rid of the Spaniards.
+
+"Things have greatly changed since the days of Sluys and Bergen op
+Zoom. Holland has increased marvellously in strength and wealth. We
+have now a splendidly organized army, and should not fear meeting
+the Spaniards in the open field if they would but give the chance
+to do so in anything like equal numbers. Sir Francis is marshal
+of our army here, and is now considered the ablest of our generals;
+and he and Prince Maurice have never yet met with a serious disaster.
+But how have you escaped the Inquisition here, Geoffrey? I thought
+they laid hands on every heretic?"
+
+"So they do," Geoffrey replied; "but you see they have never dreamed
+that I was a heretic. The English, Irish, and Scotchmen here, either
+serving in the army or living quietly as exiles, are, of course,
+all Catholics, and as they suppose me to be one of them, it does not
+seem to have entered their minds that I was a Protestant. Since I
+have been here I have gone with my wife and father in law to church,
+and have said my prayers in my own way while they have said theirs.
+I cannot say I have liked it, but as there was no church of my own
+it did not go against my conscience to kneel in theirs. I can tell
+you that, after being for nearly a couple of years a slave among the
+Moors, one thinks less of these distinctions than one used to do.
+Had the Inquisition laid hands on me and questioned me, I should
+at once have declared myself a Protestant; but as long as I was not
+questioned I thought it no harm to go quietly and pay my devotions
+in a church, even though there were many things in that church with
+which I wholly disagreed.
+
+"Dolores and I have talked the matter over often, and have arrived
+at the conclusion long since that there is no such great difference
+between us as would lead us to hate each other."
+
+Lionel laughed.
+
+"I suppose we generally see matters as we want to, Geoffrey; but
+it will be rather a shock to our good father and mother when you
+bring them home a Catholic daughter."
+
+"I daresay when she has once settled in England among us, Lionel,
+she will turn round to our views on the subject; not that I should
+ever try to convert her, but it will likely enough come of itself.
+Of course, she has been brought up with the belief that heretics are
+very terrible people. She has naturally grown out of that belief
+now, and is ready to admit that there may be good heretics as well
+as good Catholics, which is a long step for a Spanish woman to take.
+I have no fear but that the rest will come in time. At present I
+have most carefully abstained from talking with her on the subject.
+When she is once in England I shall be able to talk to her freely
+without endangering her life by doing so."
+
+Upon the following morning Sir Francis Vere breakfasted with Geoffrey,
+and then he and Lionel heard the full account of his adventures,
+and the manner in which it came about that he was found established
+as a merchant in Cadiz.
+
+They then talked over the situation. Sir Francis was much vexed
+that the lord admiral had not complied with the earnest request the
+Earl of Essex had sent him, as soon as he landed, to take prompt
+measures for the pursuit and capture of the merchant ships. Instead
+of doing this, the admiral, considering the force that had landed
+to be dangerously weak, had sent large reinforcements on shore as
+soon as the boats came off, and the consequence was that at dawn
+that morning masses of smoke rising from the Puerto Real showed
+that the Duke of Medina Sidonia had set the merchant ships on fire
+rather than that they should fall into the hands of the English.
+
+For a fortnight the captors of Cadiz remained in possession. Senor
+Mendez had, upon the day after their entry, discussed the future
+with Geoffrey. To the latter's great satisfaction he took it for
+granted that his son in law would sail with Dolores and the children
+in the English fleet, and he at once entered into arrangements with
+him for his undertaking the management of the business of the firm
+in England and Holland.
+
+"Had I wound up my affairs I should accompany you at once, for
+Dolores is everything to me, and you, Geoffrey, have also a large
+share of my affection; but this is impossible. We have at present
+all our fifteen ships at sea, and these on their return to port
+would be confiscated at once were I to leave. Besides, there are
+large transactions open with the merchants at Seville and elsewhere.
+Therefore I must, for the present at any rate, remain here. I shall
+incur no odium by your departure. It will be supposed that you have
+reconciled yourself with your government, and your going home will
+therefore seem only natural; and it will be seen that I could not,
+however much I were inclined, interfere to prevent the departure
+of Dolores and the children with you.
+
+"I propose to send on board your ships the greater portion of my
+goods here suitable for your market. This, again, will not excite
+bad feelings, as I shall say that you as my partner insisted upon
+your right to take your share of our merchandise back to England
+with you, leaving me as my portion our fleet of vessels. Therefore
+all will go on here as before. I shall gradually reduce my business
+and dispose of the ships, transmitting my fortune to a banker in
+Brussels, who will be able to send it to England through merchants
+in Antwerp, and you can purchase vessels to replace those I sell.
+
+"I calculate that it will take me a year to complete all my
+arrangements. After that I shall again sail for Italy, and shall
+come to England either by sea or by travelling through Germany,
+as circumstances may dictate. On arriving in London I shall know
+where to find you, for by that time you will be well known there;
+and at any rate the bankers to whom my money is sent will be able
+to inform me of your address."
+
+These arrangements were carried out, and at the departure of
+the fleet, Geoffrey, with Dolores and the children, sailed in Sir
+Francis Vere's ship the Rainbow, Sir Francis having insisted on
+giving up his own cabin for the use of Dolores. On leaving Cadiz
+the town was fired, and the cathedral, the church of the Jesuits,
+the nunneries of Santa Maria and Candelaria, two hundred and ninety
+houses, and, greatest loss of all, the library of the Jesuits,
+containing invaluable manuscripts respecting the Incas of Peru,
+were destroyed.
+
+The destruction of the Spanish fleet, and the enormous loss caused
+by the burning of Cadiz and the loss of the rich merchant fleet,
+struck a terrible blow at the power and resources of Spain. Her
+trade never recovered from its effects, and her prestige suffered
+very greatly in the eyes of Europe. Philip never rallied from the
+blow to his pride inflicted by this humiliation.
+
+Lionel had at first been almost shocked to find that Geoffrey had
+married a Spanish woman and a Catholic; but the charming manner of
+Dolores, her evident desire to please, and the deep affection with
+which she regarded her husband, soon won his heart. He, Sir Francis
+Vere, and the other officers and volunteers on board, vied with
+each other in attention to her during the voyage; and Dolores, who
+had hitherto been convinced that Geoffrey was a strange exception
+to the rule that all Englishmen were rough and savage animals, and
+who looked forward with much secret dread to taking up her residence
+among them, was quite delighted, and assured Geoffrey she was at
+last convinced that all she had heard to the disadvantage of his
+countrymen was wholly untrue.
+
+The fleet touched at Plymouth, where the news of the immense
+success they had gained was received with great rejoicing; and
+after taking in fresh water and stores, they proceeded along the
+coast and anchored in the mouth of the Thames. Here the greater part
+of the fleet was disbanded, the Rainbow and a few other vessels
+sailing up to Greenwich, where the captains and officers were
+received with great honour by the queen, and were feasted and made
+much of by the city.
+
+The brothers, the day after the ship cast anchor, proceeded to town,
+and there hired horses for their journey down into Essex. This was
+accomplished in two days, Geoffrey riding with Dolores on a pillion
+behind him with her baby in her lap, while young Lionel was on the
+saddle before his uncle.
+
+When they approached Hedingham Lionel said, "I had best ride forward
+Geoffrey to break the news to them of your coming. Although our
+mother has always declared that she would not give up hope that
+you would some day be restored to us, they have now really mourned
+you as dead."
+
+"Very well, Lionel. It is but a mile or so; I will dismount and
+put the boy up in the saddle and walk beside him, and we shall be
+in a quarter of an hour after you."
+
+The delight of Mr. and Mrs. Vickars on hearing Geoffrey was alive
+and close at hand was so great that the fact he brought home
+a Spanish wife, which would under other circumstances have been a
+great shock to them, was now scarcely felt, and when the rapturous
+greeting with which he was received on his arrival was over, they
+welcomed his pretty young wife with a degree of warmth which fully
+satisfied him. Her welcome was, of course, in the first place as
+Geoffrey's wife, but in a very short time his father and mother
+both came to love her for herself, and Dolores very quickly found
+herself far happier at Hedingham Rectory than she had thought she
+could be away from her native Spain.
+
+The announcement Geoffrey made shortly after his arrival, that he
+had altogether abandoned the trade of soldiering, and should in
+future make his home in London, trading in conjunction with his
+father in law, assisted to reconcile them to his marriage. After
+a fortnight's stay at Hedingham Geoffrey went up to London, and
+there took a house in the city, purchased several vessels, and
+entered upon business, being enabled to take at once a good position
+among the merchants of London, thanks to the ample funds with which
+he was provided.
+
+Two months later he went down to Essex and brought up Dolores and
+the children, and established them in his new abode.
+
+The apprenticeship he had served in trade at Cadiz enabled Geoffrey
+to start with confidence in his business. He at once notified all
+the correspondents of the firm in the different ports of Europe, that
+in future the business carried on by Signor Juan Mendez at Cadiz
+would have its headquarters in London, and that the firm would trade
+with all ports with the exception of those of Spain. The result
+was that before many months had elapsed there were few houses in
+London doing a larger trade with the Continent than that of Mendez
+and Vickars, under which title they had traded from the time of
+Geoffrey's marriage with Dolores.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI
+
+THE BATTLE OF NIEUPORT
+
+
+The year after the capture of Cadiz, Lionel Vickars sailed under
+Sir Francis Vere with the expedition designed to attack the fleet
+which Philip of Spain had gathered in Ferrol, with the intention,
+it was believed, of invading Ireland in retaliation for the disaster
+at Cadiz. The expedition met with terrible weather in the Bay of
+Biscay, and put back scattered and disabled to Plymouth and Falmouth.
+In August they again sailed, but were so battered by another storm
+that the expedition against Ferrol was abandoned, and they sailed
+to the Azores. There, after a skirmish with the Spaniards, they
+scattered among the islands, but missed the great Spanish fleet
+laden with silver from the west, and finally returned to England
+without having accomplished anything, while they suffered from another
+tempest on their way home, and reached Plymouth with difficulty.
+
+Fortunately the same storm scattered and destroyed the great
+Spanish fleet at Ferrol, and the weather thus for the second time
+saved England from invasion. Late in the autumn, after his return
+from the expedition, Sir Francis Vere went over to Holland, and by
+his advice Prince Maurice prepared in December to attack a force
+of 4000 Spanish infantry and 600 cavalry, which, under the command
+of the Count of Varras, had gathered at the village of Turnhout,
+twenty miles from Breda.
+
+A force of 5000 foot and 800 horse were secretly assembled at
+Gertruydenberg. Sir Francis Vere brought an English regiment, and
+personally commanded one of the two troops into which the English
+cavalry was divided. Sir Robert Sidney came with 300 of the English
+garrison at Flushing, and Sir Alexander Murray with a Scotch
+regiment. The expedition started on the 23d of January, 1598, and
+after marching twenty-four miles reached the village of Rivels,
+three miles from Turnhout, two hours after dark.
+
+The night was bitter cold, and after cooking supper the men wrapt
+themselves up in their cloaks, and lay down on the frozen ground
+until daybreak. The delay, although necessary, enabled the enemy
+to make their escape. The news that the allies had arrived close at
+hand reached Count Varras at midnight, and a retreat was at once
+ordered. Baggage wagons were packed and despatched, escorted by
+the cavalry, and before dawn the whole force was well on its road.
+Prince Maurice had set off an hour before daybreak, and on reaching
+Turnhout found that the rear guard of the enemy had just left the
+village. They had broken down the wooden bridge across the River
+Aa, only one plank being left standing, and had stationed a party
+to defend it.
+
+Maurice held a hasty council of war. All, with the exception
+of Sir Francis Vere and Sir Marcellus Bacx, were against pursuit,
+but Maurice took the advice of the minority. Vere with two hundred
+Dutch musketeers advanced against the bridge; his musketry fire
+drove off the guard, and with a few mounted officers and the two
+hundred musketeers he set out in pursuit. He saw that the enemy's
+infantry were marching but slowly, and guessed that they were
+delayed by the baggage wagons in front.
+
+The country was wooded, and he threw the musketeers among the
+trees with orders to keep up a dropping fire, while he himself with
+sixteen horsemen followed closely upon the enemy along the road.
+Their rear guard kept up a skirmishing fire, slightly wounding
+Vere in the leg; but all this caused delay, and it was three hours
+before they emerged on an open heath, three miles from the bridge.
+Vere placed his musketeers among some woods and inclosed fields
+on the left of the heath, and ordered them to keep up a brisk fire
+and to show themselves as if advancing to the attack. He himself,
+reinforced by some more horsemen who had come up, continued to
+follow in the open.
+
+The heath was three miles across, and Vere, constantly skirmishing
+with the Spanish infantry, who were formed in four solid squares,
+kept watching for the appearance of Maurice and the cavalry. At
+length these came in sight. Vere galloped up to the prince, and
+urged that a charge should be made at once. The prince assented.
+Vere, with the English cavalry, charged down upon the rear of the
+squares, while Hohenlohe swept down with the Dutch cavalry upon
+their flanks. The Spanish musketeers fired and at once fled, and
+the cavalry dashed in among the squares of pikemen and broke them.
+
+Several of the companies of horse galloped on in pursuit of the
+enemy's horse and baggage. Vere saw that these would be repulsed,
+and formed up the English cavalry to cover their retreat. In a
+short time the disordered horse came back at full gallop, pursued
+by the Spanish cavalry, but these, seeing Vere's troops ready to
+receive them, retreated at once. Count Varras was slain, together
+with three hundred of the Spanish infantry. Six hundred prisoners
+were taken, and thirty- eight colours fell into the victor's hands.
+
+The success was gained entirely by the eight hundred allied horse,
+the infantry never arriving upon the field. The brilliant little
+victory, which was one of the first gained by the allies in
+the open field, was the cause of great rejoicings. Not only were
+the Spaniards no longer invincible, but they had been routed by
+a force but one- sixth of their own number, and the battle showed
+how greatly the individual prowess of the two peoples had changed
+during the progress of the war.
+
+The Archduke Ernest had died in 1595, and had been succeeded by the
+Archduke Albert in the government of the Netherlands. He had with
+him no generals comparable with Parma, or even with Alva. His troops
+had lost their faith in themselves and their contempt for their
+foes. Holland was grown rich and prosperous, while the enormous
+expenses of carrying on the war both in the Netherlands and in
+France, together with the loss of the Armada, the destruction of
+the great fleet at Ferrol, and the capture of Cadiz and the ships
+there, had exhausted the resources of Spain, and Philip was driven
+to make advances for peace to France and England. Henry IV, knowing
+that peace with Spain meant an end of the civil war that had so long
+exhausted France, at once accepted the terms of Philip, and made
+a separate peace, in spite of the remonstrances of the ambassadors
+of England and Holland, to both of which countries he owed it in
+no small degree that he had been enabled to support himself against
+the faction of the Guises backed by the power of Spain.
+
+A fresh treaty was made between England and the Netherlands, Sir
+Francis Vere being sent out as special ambassador to negotiate.
+England was anxious for peace, but would not desert the Netherlands
+if they on their part would relieve her to some extent of the heavy
+expenses caused by the war. This the States consented to do, and
+the treaty was duly signed on both sides. A few days before its
+conclusion Lord Burleigh, who had been Queen Elizabeth's chief
+adviser for forty years, died, and within a month of its signature
+Philip of Spain, whose schemes he had so long opposed, followed
+him to the grave.
+
+On the 6th of the previous May Philip had formally ceded the
+Netherlands to his daughter Isabella, between whom and the Archduke
+Albert a marriage had been arranged. This took place on the 18th
+of April following, shortly after his death. It was celebrated at
+Valencia, and at the same time King Philip III was united to Margaret
+of Austria.
+
+In the course of 1599 there was severe fighting on the swampy island
+between the rivers Waal and Maas, known as the Bommel Waat, and a
+fresh attempt at invasion by the Spaniards was repulsed with heavy
+loss, Sir Francis Vere and the English troops taking a leading part
+in the operations.
+
+The success thus gained decided the States General to undertake
+an offensive campaign in the following year. The plan they decided
+upon was opposed both by Prince Maurice and Sir Francis Vere as being
+altogether too hazardous; but the States, who upon most occasions
+were averse to anything like bold action, upon the present occasion
+stood firm to their decision. Their plan was to land an army near
+Ostend, which was held by the English, and to besiege the town
+of Nieuport, west of Ostend, and after that to attack Dunkirk. In
+the opinion of the two generals an offensive operation direct from
+Holland would have been far preferable, as in case of disaster the
+army could fall back upon one of their fortified towns, whereas,
+if beaten upon the coast, they might be cut off from Ostend and
+entirely destroyed. However, their opinions were overruled, and the
+expedition prepared. It consisted of 12,000 infantry, 1600 cavalry,
+and 10 guns. It was formed into three divisions. The van, 4500
+strong, including 1600 English veterans, was commanded by Sir
+Francis Vere; the second division by Count Everard Solms; the rear
+division by Count Ernest of Nassau; while Count Louis Gunther of
+Nassau was in command of the cavalry. The army embarked at Flushing,
+and landed at Philippine, a town at the head of the Braakeman inlet.
+
+There was at the time only a small body of Spaniards in the
+neighbourhood, but as soon as the news reached the Archduke Albert
+at Brussels he concentrated his army round Ghent. The troops had
+for some time been in a mutinous state, but, as was always the case
+with them, they returned to their habits of military obedience the
+moment danger threatened.
+
+The Dutch army advanced by rapid marches to the neighbourhood of
+Ostend, and captured the fort and redoubts which the Spaniards had
+raised to prevent its garrison from undertaking offensive operations.
+
+Two thousand men were left to garrison these important positions,
+which lay on the line of march which the Spaniards must take coming
+from Bruges to Nieuport. The rest of the army then made their way
+across the country, intersected with ditches, and upon the following
+day arrived before Nieuport and prepared to besiege it. The Dutch
+fleet had arrived off the town, and co-operated with the army in
+building a bridge across the little river, and preparing for the
+siege.
+
+Towards the evening, however, the news arrived from Ostend, nine
+miles away, that a large force of the enemy had appeared before one
+of the forts just captured. Most of the officers were of opinion
+that the Spanish force was not a large one, and that it was a mere
+feint to induce the Dutch to abandon the siege of Nieuport and
+return to Ostend. Sir Francis Vere maintained that it was the main
+body of the archduke's army, and advised Maurice to march back at
+once with his whole force to attack the enemy before they had time
+to take the forts.
+
+Later on in the evening, however, two of the messengers arrived
+with the news that the forts had surrendered. Prince Maurice then,
+in opposition to Vere's advice, sent off 2500 infantry, 500 horse,
+and 2 guns, under the command of Ernest of Nassau, to prevent the
+enemy from crossing the low ground between Ostend and the sand
+hills, Vere insisting that the whole army ought to move. It fell
+out exactly as he predicted; the detachment met the whole Spanish
+army, and broke and fled at the first fire, and thus 2500 men were
+lost in addition to the 2000 who had been left to garrison the
+forts.
+
+At break of day the army marched down to the creek, and as soon
+as the water had ebbed sufficiently waded across and took up their
+position among the sand hills on the seashore. The enemy's army
+was already in sight, marching along on the narrow strip of land
+between the foot of the dunes and the sea. A few hundred yards
+towards Ostend the sand hills narrowed, and here Sir Francis Vere
+took up his position with his division. He placed a thousand picked
+men, consisting of 250 English, 250 of Prince Maurice's guard,
+and 500 musketeers, partly upon two sand hills called the East and
+West Hill, and partly in the bottom between them, where they were
+covered by a low ridge connecting the two hills.
+
+The five hundred musketeers were placed so that their fire swept
+the ground on the south, by which alone the enemy's cavalry could
+pass on that side. On the other ridge, facing the sea, were seven
+hundred English pikemen and musketeers; two hundred and fifty
+English and fifty of the guard held the position of East Hill,
+which was most exposed to the attack. The rest of the division,
+which consisted of six hundred and fifty English and two thousand
+Dutch, were placed in readiness to reinforce the advanced party.
+Half the cavalry, under Count Louis, were on the right of the dunes,
+and the other half, under Marcellus Bacx, on the left by the sea.
+
+The divisions of Count Solms and Count Ernest of Nassau were also
+on the seashore in the rear of West Hill. A council of war was held
+to decide whether the army should advance to the attack or await
+it. Vere advised the latter course, and his advice was adopted.
+
+The archduke's army consisted of ten thousand infantry, sixteen
+hundred horse, and six guns. Marshal Zapena was in command, while
+the cavalry were led by the Admiral of Arragon. They rested for
+two hours before advancing -- waiting until the rise of the tide
+should render the sands unserviceable for cavalry, their main
+reliance being upon their infantry. Their cavalry led the advance,
+but the two guns Vere had placed on West Hill plied them so hotly
+with shot that they fell back in confusion.
+
+It was now high tide, and there were but thirty yards between
+the sea and the sand hills. The Spaniards therefore marched their
+infantry into the dunes, while the cavalry prepared to advance between
+the sand hills and the cultivated fields inland. The second and
+third divisions of Maurice's army also moved away from the shore
+inland. They now numbered but three thousand men, as the four
+thousand five hundred who had been lost belonged entirely to these
+divisions, Sir Francis Vere's division having been left intact.
+It was upon the first division that the whole brunt of the battle
+fell, they receiving some assistance from the thousand men remaining
+under Count Solms that were posted next to them; while the rear
+division was never engaged at all.
+
+At half past two o'clock on the afternoon of the 2d of June, 1600,
+the battle began. Vere's plan was to hold his advanced position as
+long as possible, bring the reserves up as required until he had
+worn out the Spaniards, then to send for the other two divisions
+and to fall upon them. The company of Lionel Vickars formed part of
+the three hundred men stationed on the East Hill, where Vere also
+had taken up his position. After an exchange of fire for some
+time five hundred picked Spanish infantry rushed across the hollow
+between the two armies, and charged the hill. For half an hour a
+desperate struggle took place; the Spaniards were then obliged to
+fall back behind some low ridges at its foot.
+
+In the meantime the enemy's cavalry had advanced along the grass
+grown tract, a hundred and fifty yards wide, between the foot of
+the dunes and the cultivated country inland. They were received,
+however, by so hot a fire by the five hundred musketeers posted
+by Vere in the sand hills on their flank, and by the two cannon
+on West Hill, that they fell back upon their infantry just as the
+Dutch horse, under Count Louis, advanced to charge them.
+
+Vere sent orders to a hundred Englishmen to move round from the
+ridge and to attack the Spaniards who had fallen back from the
+attack of East Hill, on their flank, while sixty men charged down
+the hill and engaged them in front. The Spaniards broke and fled back
+to their main body. Then, being largely reinforced, they advanced
+and seized a sandy knoll near West Hill. Here they were attacked
+by the English, and after a long and obstinate fight forced to
+retire. The whole of the Spanish force now advanced, and tried to
+drive the English back from their position on the low ridge across
+the bottom connecting the two hills. The seven hundred men were
+drawn from the north ridge, and as the fight grew hotter the whole
+of the sixteen hundred English were brought up.
+
+Vere sent for reinforcements, but none came up, and for hours the
+sixteen hundred Englishmen alone checked the advance of the whole
+of the Spanish army. Sir Francis Vere was fighting like a private
+soldier in the midst of his troops. He received two balls in the
+leg, but still kept his seat and encouraged his men. At last the
+little band, receiving no aid or reinforcements from the Dutch,
+were forced to fall back. As they did so, Vere's horse fell dead
+under him and partly upon him, and it was with great difficulty
+that those around him extricated him. On reaching the battery on the
+sands Vere found the thousand Dutch of his division, who asserted
+that they had received no orders to advance. There were also three
+hundred foot under Sir Horace Vere and some cavalry under Captain
+Ball. These and Horace's infantry at once charged the Spaniards,
+who were pouting out from the sand hills near to the beach, and
+drove them back.
+
+The Spaniards had now captured East Hill, and two thousand of
+their infantry advanced into the valley beyond, and drove back the
+musketeers from the south ridge, and a large force advanced along
+the green way; but their movements were slow, for they were worn out
+by their long struggle, and the English officers had time to rally
+their men again. Horace Vere returned from his charge on the beach,
+and other companies rallied and joined him, and charged furiously
+down upon the two thousand Spaniards. The whole of the Dutch and
+English cavalry also advanced. Solms' thousand men came up and
+took part in the action, and the batteries plied the Spaniards with
+their shot. The latter had done all they could, and were confounded
+by this fresh attack when they had considered the victory as won.
+In spite of the efforts of their officers they broke and fled in
+all directions. The archduke headed their flight, and never drew
+rein until he reached Brussels.
+
+Zapena and the Admiral of Arragon were both taken prisoners, and
+about a third of the Spanish army killed and wounded. Of the sixteen
+hundred English half were killed or wounded; while the rest of the
+Dutch army suffered scarcely any loss -- a fact that shows clearly
+to whom the honour of the victory belongs. Prince Maurice, in his
+letter to the queen, attributed his success entirely to the good
+order and directions of Sir Francis Vere. Thus, in a pitched battle
+the English troops met and defeated an army of six times their
+strength of the veterans of Spain, and showed conclusively that the
+English fighting man had in no way deteriorated since the days of
+Agincourt, the last great battle they had fought upon the Continent.
+
+The battle at Nieuport may be considered to have set the final
+seal upon the independence of Holland. The lesson first taught at
+Turnhout had now been impressed with crushing force. The Spaniards
+were no longer invincible; they had been twice signally defeated
+in an open field by greatly inferior forces. Their prestige was
+annihilated; and although a war continued, there was no longer the
+slightest chance that the result of the long and bloody struggle
+would be reversed, or that Spain would ever again recover her grip
+of the lost provinces.
+
+Sir Francis Vere was laid up for some months with his wounds. Among
+the officers who fought under him at Nieuport were several whose
+names were to become famous for the part they afterwards bore in
+the civil struggle in England. Among others were Fairfax, Ogle,
+Lambart, and Parker. Among those who received the honour of knighthood
+for their behaviour at the battle was Lionel Vickars. He had been
+severely wounded in the fight at East Hill, and was sent home to
+be cured there. It was some months before he again took the field,
+which he did upon the receipt of a letter from Sir Francis Vere,
+telling him that the Spaniards were closing in in great force round
+Ostend, and that his company was one of those that had been sent
+off to aid in the defence of that town.
+
+During his stay in England he had spent some time with Geoffrey in
+London. Juan Mendez had now arrived there, and the business carried
+on by him and Geoffrey was flourishing greatly. Dolores had much
+missed the outdoor life to which she was accustomed, and her father
+had bought a large house with a fine garden in Chelsea; and she
+and Geoffrey were now installed there with him, Geoffrey going to
+and fro from the city by boat. They had now replaced the Spanish
+trading vessels by an equal number of English craft; and at the
+suggestion of Juan Mendez himself his name now stood second to that
+of Geoffrey, for the prejudice against foreigners was still strong
+in England.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII
+
+OLD FRIENDS
+
+
+The succession of blows that had been given to the power and commerce
+of Spain had immensely benefited the trade of England and Holland.
+France, devastated by civil war, had been in no position to take
+advantage of the falling off in Spanish commerce, and had indeed
+herself suffered enormously by the emigration of tens of thousands
+of the most intelligent of her population owing to her persecution
+of the Protestants. Her traders and manufacturers largely belonged
+to the new religion, and these had carried their industry and knowledge
+to England and Holland. Thus the religious bigotry of the kings of
+Spain and France had resulted in enormous loss to the trade and
+commerce of those countries, and in corresponding advantage to
+their Protestant rivals.
+
+Geoffrey Vickars and his partner reaped the full benefit of the
+change, and the extensive acquaintance of the Spanish trader with
+merchants in all the Mediterranean ports enabled him to turn a
+large share of the new current of trade into the hands of Geoffrey
+and himself. The capital which he transferred from Spain to England
+was very much larger than that employed by the majority of English
+merchants, whose wealth had been small indeed in comparison to
+that of the merchant princes of the great centres of trade such
+as Antwerp, Amsterdam, Genoa, and Cadiz, and Geoffrey Vickars soon
+came to be looked upon as one of the leading merchants in the city
+of London.
+
+"There can be no doubt, Geoffrey," his brother said as he lay on
+a couch in the garden in the early days of his convalescence, and
+looked at the river dotted with boats that flowed past it, "the
+falling of that mast was a fortunate thing for you. One never can
+tell how things will turn our. It would have seemed as if, were
+you not drowned at once, your lot would have been either a life's
+work in the Spanish galleys, or death in the dungeons of the
+Inquisition. Instead of this, here you are a wealthy merchant in
+the city, with a charming wife, and a father in law who is, although
+a Spaniard, one of the kindest and best men I ever met. All this
+time I, who was not knocked over by that mast, have been drilling
+recruits, making long marches, and occasionally fighting battles,
+and am no richer now than the day when we started together as Francis
+Vere's pages. It is true I have received the honour of knighthood,
+and that of course I prize much; but I have only my captain's pay
+to support my dignity, and as I hardly think Spain will continue
+this useless struggle much longer, in which case our army in
+Holland will be speedily disbanded, the prospect before me is not
+altogether an advantageous one."
+
+"You must marry an heiress, Lionel," Geoffrey laughed. "Surely Sir
+Lionel Vickars, one of the heroes of Nieuport, and many another
+field, should be able to win the heart of some fair English damsel,
+with broad acres as her dower. But seriously, Lionel," he went on,
+changing his tone, "if peace come, and with it lack of employment,
+the best thing for you will be to join me. Mendez is getting on in
+years; and although he is working hard at present, in order, as he
+says, to set everything going smoothly and well here, he is looking
+forward to taking matters more easily, and to spending his time
+in tranquil pleasure with Dolores and her children. Therefore,
+whensoever it pleases you, there is a place for you here. We always
+contemplated our lines running in the same groove, and I should
+be glad that they should do so still. When the time comes we can
+discuss what share you shall have of the business; but at any rate
+I can promise you that it shall be sufficient to make you a rich
+man."
+
+"Thank you, with all my heart, Geoffrey. It may be that some day I
+will accept your offer, though I fear you will find me but a sorry
+assistant. It seems to me that after twelve years of campaigning
+I am little fitted for life as a city merchant."
+
+"I went through plenty of adventure for six years, Lionel, but
+my father in law has from the first been well satisfied with my
+capacity for business. You are not seven-and-twenty yet. You have
+had enough rough campaigning to satisfy anyone, and should be glad
+now of an easier and more sober method of life. Well, there is no
+occasion to settle anything at present, and I can well understand
+that you should prefer remaining in the army until the war comes
+to an end. When it does so, we can talk the matter over again; only
+be well assured that the offer will be always open to you, and that
+I shall be glad indeed to have you with me."
+
+A few days after Lionel left him Geoffrey was passing along
+Chepe, when he stopped suddenly, stared hard at a gentleman who
+was approaching him, and then rushed towards him with outstretched
+hand.
+
+"My dear Gerald!" he exclaimed, "I am glad to see you."
+
+The gentleman started back with an expression of the profoundest
+astonishment.
+
+"Is it possible?" he cried. "Is it really Geoffrey Vickars?"
+
+"Myself, and no other, Gerald."
+
+"The saints be praised! Why, I have been thinking of you all these
+years as either dead or labouring at an oar in the Moorish galleys.
+By what good fortune did you escape? and how is it I find you here,
+looking for all the world like a merchant of the city?"
+
+"It is too long a story to tell now, Gerald. Where are you staying?"
+
+"I have lodgings at Westminster, being at present a suitor at
+court."
+
+"Is your wife with you?"
+
+"She is. I have left my four children at home in Ireland."
+
+"Then bring her to sup with me this evening. I have a wife to
+introduce to yours, and as she is also a Spaniard it will doubtless
+be a pleasure to them both."
+
+"You astound me, Geoffrey. However, you shall tell me all about it
+this evening, for be assured that we shall come. Inez has so often
+talked about you, and lamented the ill fortune that befell you
+owing to your ardour."
+
+"At six o'clock, then," Geoffrey said. "I generally dwell with my
+father in law at Chelsea, but am just at present at home. My house
+is in St. Mary Ave; anyone there will tell you which it is."
+
+That evening the two friends had a long talk together. Geoffrey
+learnt that Gerald Burke reached Italy without further adventure,
+and thence took ship to Bristol, and so crossed over to Ireland.
+On his petition, and solemn promise of good behaviour in future,
+he was pardoned and a small portion of his estate restored to him.
+He was now in London endeavouring to obtain a remission of the
+forfeiture of the rest.
+
+"I may be able to help you in that," Geoffrey said. "Sir Francis
+Vere is high in favour at court, and he will, at my prayer, I feel
+sure, use his influence in your favour when I tell him how you
+acted my friend on my landing in Spain from the Armada."
+
+Geoffrey then gave an account of his various adventures from the
+time when he was struck down from the deck of the Barbary corsair
+until the present time.
+
+"How was it," he asked when he concluded, "that you did not write
+to my parents, Gerald, on your return home? You knew where they
+lived."
+
+"I talked the matter over with Inez," Gerald replied, "and we agreed
+that it was kinder to them to be silent. Of course they had mourned
+you as killed in the fight with the Armada. A year had passed, and
+the wound must have somewhat healed. Had I told them that you had
+escaped death at that time, had been months with me in Spain, and
+had, on your way home, been either killed by the Moors or were a
+prisoner in their galleys, it would have opened the wound afresh,
+and caused them renewed pain and sorrow."
+
+"No doubt you were right, Gerald, and that it was, as you say, the
+kindest thing to leave them in ignorance of my fate."
+
+Upon the next visit Sir Francis Vere paid to England, Geoffrey spoke
+to him with regard to Gerald Burke's affairs. Sir Francis took the
+matter up warmly, and his influence sufficed in a very short time
+to obtain an order for the restoration to Gerald of all his estates.
+Inez and Dolores became as fast friends as were their husbands; and
+when the Burkes came to England Geoffrey's house was their home.
+
+The meeting with Gerald was followed by a still greater surprise,
+for not many days after, when Geoffrey was sitting with his wife
+and Don Mendez under the shade of a broad cypress in the garden of
+the merchant's house at Chelsea, they saw a servant coming across
+towards them, followed by a man in seafaring attire.
+
+"Here is a person who would speak to you, Master Vickars," the
+servant said. "I told him it was not your custom to see any here,
+and that if he had aught to say he should call at your house in St.
+Mary Axe; but he said that he had but just arrived from Hedingham,
+and that your honour would excuse his intrusion when you saw him."
+
+"Bring him up; he may be the bearer of a message from my father,"
+Geoffrey said; and the servant went back to the man, whom he had
+left a short distance off.
+
+"Master Vickars will speak with you."
+
+The sailor approached the party. He stood for a minute before Geoffrey
+without speaking. Geoffrey looked at him with some surprise, and
+saw that the muscles of his face were twitching, and that he was
+much agitated. As he looked at him remembrance suddenly flashed
+upon him, and he sprang to his feet. "Stephen Boldero!" he exclaimed.
+
+"Ay, ay, Geoffrey, it is me."
+
+For a time the men stood with their right hands clasped and the
+left on each other's shoulders. Tears fell down the sailor's weather
+beaten cheeks, and Geoffrey himself was too moved to speak. For
+two years they had lived as brothers, had shared each other's toils
+and dangers, had talked over their plans and hopes together; and it
+was to Stephen that Geoffrey owed it that he was not now a galley
+slave in Barbary.
+
+"Old friend, where have you been all this time?" he said at last,
+"I had thought you dead, and have grieved sorely for you."
+
+"I have had some narrow escapes," Stephen said; "but you know I am
+tough. I am worth a good many dead men yet."
+
+"Delores, Senor Mendez, you both remember Stephen Boldero?" Geoffrey
+said, turning to them.
+
+"We have never forgotten you," the Spaniard said, shaking hands with
+the sailor, "nor how much we owe to you. I sent out instructions
+by every ship that sailed to the Indies that inquiries should be
+made for you; and moreover had letters sent by influential friends
+to the governors of most of the islands saying that you had done
+great service to me and mine, and praying that if you were in any
+need or trouble you might be sent back to Cadiz, and that any moneys
+you required might be given to you at my charge. But we have heard
+nought of you from the day when the news came that you had left
+the ship in which you went out."
+
+"I have had a rough time of it these five years," Stephen said.
+"But I care not now that I am home again and have found my friend
+Geoffrey. I arrived in Bristol but last week, and started for London
+on the day I landed, mindful of my promise to let his people know
+that he was safe and well, and with some faint hope that the capture
+of Cadiz had set him at liberty. I got to Hedingham last night,
+and if I had been a prince Mr. Vickars and his dame and Sir Lionel
+could not have made more of me. They were fain that I should stop
+with them a day or two; but when I heard that you were in London and
+had married Senora Dolores, and that Senor Mendez was with you --
+all of which in no way surprised me, for methought I saw it coming
+before I left Cadiz -- I could not rest, but was up at daylight this
+morning. Your brother offered to procure me a horse, but I should
+have made bad weather on the craft, and after walking from Bristol
+the tramp up to London was nothing. I got to your house in the city
+at four; and, finding that you were here, took a boat at once, for
+I could not rest until I saw my friend again."
+
+Geoffrey at once took him into the house and set him down to a meal;
+and when the party were gathered later on in the sitting room, and
+the candles were lighted, Stephen told his story.
+
+"As you will have heard, we made a good voyage to the Indies. We
+discharged our cargo, and took in another. I learned that there were
+two English ships cruising near San Domingo, and the Dons were in
+great fear of them. I thought that my chance lay in joining them,
+so when we were at our nearest port to that island I one night
+borrowed one of the ship's boats without asking leave, and made
+off. I knew the direction in which San Domingo lay, but no more.
+My hope was that I should either fall in with our ships at sea, or,
+when I made the island, should be able to gather such information
+as might guide me to them. When I made the land, after being four
+days out, I cruised about till the provisions and water I had put
+on board were exhausted, and I could hold out no longer. Then I
+made for the island and landed.
+
+"You may be sure I did not make for a port, where I should be
+questioned, but ran ashore in a wooded bay that looked as if no
+one had ever set foot there before. I dragged the boat up beyond,
+as I thought, the reach of the sea, and started to hunt for food
+and water. I found enough berries and things to keep me alive,
+but not enough to stock my boat for another cruise. A week after
+I landed there was a tornado, and when it cleared off and I had
+recovered from my fright -- for the trees were blown down like
+rushes, and I thought my last day was come -- I found that the boat
+was washed away.
+
+"I was mightily disheartened at this, and after much thinking
+made up my mind that there was nought for it but to keep along the
+shore until I arrived at a port, and then to give out that I was
+a shipwrecked sailor, and either try to get hold of another boat,
+or take passage back to Spain and make a fresh start. However, the
+next morning, just as I was starting, a number of natives ran out
+of the bush and seized me, and carried me away up into the hills.
+
+"It was not pleasant at first, for they lit a big fire and were
+going to set me on the top of it, taking me for a Spaniard. Seeing
+their intentions, I took to arguing with them, and told them in
+Spanish that I was no Spaniard, but an Englishman, and that I had been
+a slave to the Spaniards and had escaped. Most of them understood
+some Spanish, having themselves been made to work as slaves
+in their plantations, and being all runaways from the tyranny of
+their masters. They knew, of course, that we were the enemies of
+the Spaniards, and had heard of places being sacked and ships taken
+by us. But they doubted my story for a long time, till at last
+one of them brought a crucifix that had somehow fallen into their
+hands, and held it up before me. When I struck it down, as a
+good Protestant should do, they saw that I was not of the Spanish
+religion, and so loosed my bonds and made much of me.
+
+"They could tell me nothing of the whereabouts of our ships, for
+though they had seen vessels at times sail by, the poor creatures
+knew nothing of the difference of rig between an English craft
+and a Spaniard. I abode with them for two years, and aided them in
+their fights whenever the Spaniards sent out parties, which they
+did many times, to capture them. They were poor, timorous creatures,
+their spirits being altogether broken by the tyranny of the Dons;
+but when they saw that I feared them not, and was ready at any time
+to match myself against two or, if need be, three of the Spaniards,
+they plucked up heart, and in time came to fight so stoutly that the
+Spaniards thought it best to leave them alone, seeing that we had
+the advantage of knowing every foot of the woods, and were able
+to pounce down upon them when they were in straitened places and
+forced to fight at great disadvantage.
+
+"I was regarded as a great chief by the natives, and could have
+gone on living with them comfortably enough had not my thoughts
+been always turning homeward, and a great desire to be among my
+own people, from whom I had been so long separated, devoured me.
+At last a Spanish ship was driven ashore in a gale; she went to
+pieces, and every soul was drowned. When the gale abated the natives
+went down to collect the stores driven ashore, and I found on the
+beach one of her boats washed up almost uninjured, so nothing would
+do but I must sail away in her. The natives tried their hardest to
+persuade me to stay with them, but finding that my mind was fixed
+beyond recall they gave way and did their best to aid me. The boat
+was well stored with provisions; we made a sail for her out of
+one belonging to the ship, and I set off, promising them that if
+I could not alight upon an English ship I would return to them.
+
+"I had intended to keep my promise, but things turned out otherwise.
+I had not been two days at sea when there was another storm, for
+at one time of the year they have tornadoes very frequently. I
+had nothing to do but to run for it, casting much of my provisions
+overboard to lighten the boat, and baling without ceasing to keep
+out the water she took in. After running for many hours I was,
+somewhere about midnight, cast on shore. I made a shift to save
+myself, and in the morning found that I was on a low key. Here I
+lived for three weeks. Fortunately there was water in some of the
+hollows of the rocks, and as turtles came ashore to lay their eggs
+I managed pretty well for a time; but the water dried up, and for
+the last week I had nought to drink but the blood of the turtles.
+
+One morning I saw a ship passing not far off; and making a signal
+with the mast of the boat that had been washed ashore with me
+I attracted their attention. I saw that she was a Spaniard, but
+I could not help that, for I had no choice but to hail her. They
+took me to Porto Rico and there reported me as a shipwrecked sailor
+they had picked up. The governor questioned me closely as to what
+vessel I had been lost from, and although I made up a good story
+he had his doubts. Fortunately it did not enter his mind that I was
+not a Spaniard; but he said he believed I was some bad character
+who had been marooned by my comrades for murder or some other crime,
+and so put me in prison until he could learn something that would
+verify my story.
+
+"After three months I was taken out of prison, but was set to
+work on the fortifications, and there for another two years I had
+to stop. Then I managed to slip away one day, and, hiding till
+nightfall, made my way down through the town to the quays and swam
+out to a vessel at anchor. I climbed on board without notice, and
+hid myself below, where I lay for two days until she got up sail.
+When I judged she was well away from the land I went on deck and
+told my story, that I was a shipwrecked sailor who had been forced
+by the governor to work at the fortifications. They did not believe
+me, saying that I must be some criminal who had escaped from justice,
+and the captain said he should give me up at the next port the ship
+touched. Fortunately four days afterwards a sail hove in sight and
+gave chase, and before it was dark was near enough to fire a gun
+and make us heave to, and a quarter of an hour later a boat came
+alongside, and I again heard English spoken for the first time
+since I had left you at Cadiz.
+
+"It was an English buccaneer, who, being short of water and fresh
+vegetables, had chased us, though seeing we were but a petty trader
+and not likely to have aught else worth taking on board. They
+wondered much when I discovered myself to them and told them who
+I was and how I had come there; and when, on their rowing me on
+board their ship, I told the captain my story he told me that he
+thought I was the greatest liar he had ever met. To be a galley slave
+among the Spaniards, a galley slave among the Moors, a consorter
+with Indians for two years, and again a prisoner with the Spaniards
+for as much more than fell to the lot of any one man, and he, like
+the Spanish governor, believed that I was some rascal who had been
+marooned, only he thought that it was from an English ship. However,
+he said that as I was a stout fellow he would give me another
+chance; and when, a fortnight later, we fell in with a great Spanish
+galleon and captured her with a great store of prize money after
+a hard fight for six hours, the last of which was passed on the
+deck of the Spaniard cutting and slashing -- for, being laden with
+silver, she had a company of troops on board in addition to her crew
+-- the captain said, that though an astonishing liar there was no
+better fellow on board a ship, and, putting it to the crew, they
+agreed I had well earned my share of the prize money. When we had
+got the silver on board, which was a heavy job I can tell you,
+though not an unpleasant one, we put what Spaniards remained alive
+into the boats, fired the galleon, and set sail for England, where
+we arrived without adventure.
+
+"The silver was divided on the day before we cast anchor, the
+owner's share being first set aside, every man his share, and the
+officers theirs in proportion. Mine came to over a thousand pounds,
+and it needed two strong men to carry the chest up to the office
+of the owners, who gave me a receipt for it, which, as soon as I
+got, I started for London; and here, as you see, I am."
+
+"And now, what do you propose to do with yourself, Stephen?" Geoffrey
+asked.
+
+"I shall first travel down again to Devonshire and see what friends
+I have remaining there. I do not expect to find many alive, for
+fifteen years make many changes. My father and mother were both
+dead before I started, and my uncle, with whom I lived for a time,
+is scarce like to be alive now. Still I may find some cousins and
+friends I knew as a boy."
+
+"I should think you have had enough of the sea, Stephen, and you
+have now ample to live ashore in comfort for the rest of your life."
+
+"Yes, I shall go no more to sea," Stephen said. "Except for this
+last stroke of luck fortune has always been against me. What I
+should like, Master Geoffrey, most of all, would be to come up and
+work under you. I could be of advantage in seeing to the loading
+and unloading of vessels and the storage of cargo. As for pay, I
+should not want it, having, as you say, enough to live comfortably
+upon. Still I should like to be with you."
+
+"And I should like to have you with me, Stephen. Nothing would give
+me greater pleasure. If you are still of that mind when you return
+from Devonshire we can again talk the matter over, and as our
+wishes are both the same way we can have no difficulty in coming
+to an agreement."
+
+Stephen Boldero remained for a week in London and then journeyed
+down to Devonshire. His idea of entering Geoffrey's service was
+never carried out, for after he had been gone two months Geoffrey
+received a letter from him saying that one of his cousins, who had
+been but a little girl when he went away, had laid her orders upon
+him to buy a small estate and settle down there, and that as she
+was willing to marry him on no other terms he had nothing to do
+but to assent.
+
+Once a year, however, regularly to the end of his life Stephen
+Boldero came up to London to stay for a fortnight with Geoffrey,
+always coming by road, for he declared that he was convinced if he
+set foot on board a ship again she would infallibly be wrecked on
+her voyage to London.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII
+
+THE SIEGE OF OSTEND
+
+
+On the 5th of July, 1601, the Archduke Albert began the siege of
+Ostend with 20,000 men and 50 siege guns. Ostend had been completely
+rebuilt and fortified eighteen years previously, and was defended
+by ramparts, counterscarps, and two broad ditches. The sand hills
+between it and the sea were cut through, and the water filled
+the ditches and surrounded the town. To the south the country was
+intersected by a network of canals. The river Yper Leet came in
+at the back of the town, and after mingling with the salt water in
+the ditches found its way to the sea through the channels known as
+the Old Haven and the Geule, the first on the west, the second on
+the east of the town.
+
+On either side of these channels the land rose slightly, enabling the
+besiegers to plant their batteries in very advantageous positions.
+The garrison at first consisted of but 2000 men under Governor
+Vander Nood. The States General considered the defence of Ostend
+to be of extreme importance to the cause, and appointed Sir Francis
+Vere general of the army in and about Ostend, and sent with him
+600 Dutch troops and eight companies of English under the command
+of his brother, Sir Horace. This raised the garrison to the strength
+of 3600 men. Sir Francis landed with these reinforcements on the
+sands opposite the old town, which stood near the seashore between
+the Old Haven and the Geule, and was separated from the new town
+by a broad channel. He was forced to land here, as the Spanish guns
+on the sand hills commanded the entrances of the two channels.
+
+Sixteen thousand of the Spanish troops under the order of the
+archduke were encamped to the west of the town, and had 30 of their
+siege guns in position there, while 4000 men were stationed on the
+east of the town under Count Bucquoy. Ten guns were in position
+on that side. Ostend had no natural advantages for defence beyond
+the facility of letting the sea into the numerous channels and ditches
+which intersected the city, and protected it from any operations
+on the south side. On the east the Geule was broad and deep, and
+an assault from this side was very difficult. The Old Haven, on
+the west side, was fast filling up, and was fordable for four hours
+every tide.
+
+This, therefore, was the weak side of the town. The portion
+especially exposed to attack was the low sandy flat on which the
+old town stood, to the north of Ostend. It was against this point,
+separated only from the enemy's position by the shallow Old Haven,
+that the Spaniards concentrated their efforts. The defence here
+consisted of a work called the Porc Espic, and a bastion in its
+rear called the Helmond. Three works lay to the north of the ditch
+dividing the old from the new town, while on the opposite side of
+this ditch was a fort called the Sand Hill, from which along the
+sea face of the town ran strong palisades and bastions.
+
+The three principal bastions were named the Schottenburg, Moses'
+Table, and the Flamenburg, the last named defending the entrance to
+the Geule on the eastern side. There was a strong wall with three
+bastions, the North Bulwark, the East Bulwark or Pekell, and the
+Spanish Bulwark at the southeast angle, with an outwork called the
+Spanish Half Moon on the other side of the Geule. The south side
+was similarly defended by a wall with four strong bastions, while
+beyond these at the southwest corner lay a field called the Polder,
+extending to the point where the Yper Leer ran into the ditches.
+
+Sir Francis Vere's first step after his arrival was to throw
+up three redoubts to strengthen the wall round this field, as had
+the enemy taken possession of it they might have set the windmills
+upon it to work and have drained out many of the ditches. Having
+secured this point he cut a passage to the sea between the Northwest
+Bulwark and the Flamenburg Fort, so that shipping might enter the
+port without having to ascend the Geule, exposed to the fire of
+the Spanish guns. To annoy the enemy and draw them away from the
+vital point near the sea, he then stationed 200 men on some rising
+ground surrounded by swamps and ditches at some distance to the
+south of the city, and from here they were able to open fire on
+the enemy's boats coming with supplies from Bruges.
+
+The operation was successful. The Spaniards, finding their line
+of communication threatened, advanced in force from their position
+by the sea, and their forts opened a heavy fire on the little work
+thrown up. Other similar attempts would have been made to harass
+the Spaniards and divert them from their main work, had not Sir
+Francis Vere been severely wounded in the head on the 4th of August
+by a shot from the Spanish batteries, which continued to keep up
+a tremendous fire upon the town. So serious was the wound that the
+surgeons were of opinion that the only chance of saving his life
+was to send him away from the din and turmoil of the siege; and on
+the 10th he was taken to Middelburg, where he remained for a month,
+returning to Ostend long before his wound was properly healed.
+
+On the 1st of August a batch of recruits had arrived from England,
+and on the 8th 1200 more were landed. The fire of the besiegers
+was now so heavy that the soldiers were forced to dig underground
+quarters to shelter themselves. Sir Horace Vere led out several
+sorties; but the besiegers, no longer distracted by the feints
+contrived by Sir Horace Vere, succeeded in erecting a battery on
+the margin of the Old Haven, and opened fire on the Sand Hill Fort.
+
+On the 19th of September Sir Francis Vere returned to the town, to
+the great joy of the garrison. Reinforcements continued to arrive,
+and at this time the garrison numbered 4480. There were, too, a
+large number of noblemen and gentlemen from England, France, and
+Holland, who had come to learn the art of war under the man who was
+regarded as the greatest general of the time. All who were willing
+to work and learn were heartily welcomed; those who were unwilling
+to do so were soon made to feel that a besieged city was no place
+for them.
+
+While the fighting was going on the archduke had attempted to
+capture the place by treason. He engaged a traitor named Coningsby;
+who crossed to England, obtained letters of introduction to Vere,
+and then went to Ostend. Thence he sent intelligence to the besiegers
+of all that took place in the town, placing his letters at night
+in an old boat sunk in the mud on the bank of the Old Haven, a
+Spaniard wading across at low tide and fetching them away. He then
+attempted to bribe a sergeant to blow up the powder magazine. The
+sergeant revealed the plot. Coningsby was seized and confessed
+everything, and by an act of extraordinary clemency was only
+sentenced to be whipped out of town.
+
+This act of treachery on the part of the archduke justified the
+otherwise dishonourable stratagem afterwards played by Vere upon
+him. All through October and November the Spaniards were hard at
+work advancing their batteries, sinking great baskets filled with
+sand in the Old Haven to facilitate the passage of the troops, and
+building floating batteries in the Geule. On the night of the 4th
+of December they advanced suddenly to the attack. Vere and his
+officers leapt from their beds and rushed to the walls, and after
+a fierce struggle the besiegers were driven back. Straw was lighted
+to enable the musketeers and gunners to fire upon them as they
+retreated, and the assault cost them five hundred lives.
+
+On the 12th a hard frost set in, and until Christmas a strong gale
+from the southeast blew. No succour could reach the town. The
+garrison were dwindling fast, and ammunition falling short. It
+required fully 4000 men to guard the walls and forts, while but 2500
+remained capable of bearing arms. It was known that the archduke
+soon intended to make an assault with his whole force, and Vere
+knew that he could scarcely hope to repel it. He called a council
+of his chief officers, and asked their opinion whether with the
+present numbers all parts of the works could be manned in case of
+assault, and if not whether it was advisable to withdraw the guards
+from all the outlying positions and to hold only the town.
+
+They were unanimously of opinion that the force was too small to
+defend the whole, but Sir Horace Vere and Sir John Ogle alone gave
+their advice to abandon the outlying forts rather than endanger the
+loss of the town. The other officers were of opinion that all the
+works should be held, although they acknowledged that the disposable
+force was incapable of doing so. Some days elapsed, and Vere
+learned that the Spanish preparations were all complete, and that
+they were only waiting for a low tide to attack. Time was everything,
+for a change of wind would bring speedy succour, so without taking
+council with anyone he sent Sir John Ogle with a drummer to the
+side of the Old Haven.
+
+Don Mateo Serrano came forward, and Ogle gave his message, which
+was that General Vere wished to have some qualified person to speak
+to him. This was reported to the archduke, who agreed that Serrano
+and another Spanish officer should go into the town, and that Ogle
+and a comrade should come as hostages into the Spanish camp. Sir
+John Ogle took his friend Sir Charles Fairfax with him, and Serrano
+and Colonel Antonio crossed into Ostend. The two Englishmen were
+conducted to the archduke, who asked Sir John Ogle to tell him if
+there was any deceit in the matter. Ogle answered if there were
+it was more than he knew, for Vere had simply charged him to carry
+the message, and that he and Fairfax had merely come as hostages
+for the safe return of the Spanish officers.
+
+Ogle was next asked whether he thought the general intended sincerely
+or not, and could only reply that he was altogether unacquainted
+with the general's purpose.
+
+The next morning Serrano and Antonio returned without having seen
+Vere. The pretext on which they had been sent back was that there
+was some irregularity in their coming across; but instead of their
+being sent back across the Old Haven they were sent across the
+Geule, and had to make a long round to regain the archduke's camp.
+
+Thus a day and a night were gained. The next day, towards evening,
+the two Spanish officers were admitted into Ostend, and received
+very hospitably by Sir Francis. After supper many healths were drunk,
+and then Sir Francis informed them to their astonishment that his
+proposal was not that he should surrender Ostend, but that the
+archduke should raise the siege. But it was now far too late for them
+to return, and they went to bed in the general's quarters. During
+the two nights thus gained the defenders had worked incessantly in
+repairing the palisades facing the point at which the attack would
+take place, a work that they had hitherto been unable to perform
+owing to the tremendous fire that the Spaniards kept up night and
+day upon it.
+
+At break of day five men of war from Zeeland came to anchor off the
+town. They brought four hundred men, and provisions and materials
+of war of all kinds. They were immediately landed under a heavy
+fire from the enemy's batteries on both sides. The firing awoke the
+two Spanish envoys, who inquired what was taking place. They were
+politely informed by Sir Francis Vere that succour had arrived,
+and the negotiations were of course broken off; and they were
+accordingly sent back, while Ogle and Fairfax returned to Ostend.
+
+Vere's account of the transaction was that he had simply asked for
+two Spanish officers to speak with him. He had offered no terms,
+and there was therefore no breach of faith. The commander of a
+besieged town, he insisted, is always at liberty to propose a parley,
+which the enemy can accept or not as he chooses. At any rate, it
+was not for the archduke, who had hired a traitor to corrupt the
+garrison, to make a complaint of treachery. Twelve hundred men
+were employed for the next eight days in strengthening the works,
+Sir Francis being always with them at night, when the water was
+low, encouraging them by his presence and example.
+
+Early in January he learned that the enemy were preparing for the
+assault, and on the 7th a crushing fire was kept up on the Porc
+Espic, Helmond, and Sand Hill forts. The Spaniards had by this
+time fired 163,200 cannon shot into the town, and scarcely a whole
+house was left standing. Towards evening they were seen bringing
+scaling ladders to the opposite bank of the Haven. Two thousand
+Italian and Spanish troops had been told off to attack the sand
+hill, two thousand were to assault Helmond and the Porc Espic, two
+parties of five hundred men each were to attack other works, while
+on the east side Count Bucquoy was to deliver a general assault.
+
+The English general watched all these preparations with the
+greatest vigilance. At high water he closed the west sluice, which
+let the water into the town ditch from the Old Haven, in the rear
+of Helmond, in order to retain as much water as possible, and
+stationed his troops at the various points most threatened. Sir
+Horace Vere and Sir Charles Fairfax, with twelve weak companies,
+some of them reduced to ten or twelve men, were stationed on the
+sand hill.
+
+Four of the strongest companies garrisoned the Porc Espic; ten weak
+companies and nine cannon loaded with musket bullets defended the
+Helmond. These posts were commanded by Sergeant Major Carpenter and
+Captain Meetkerk; the rest of the force were disposed at the other
+threatened points. Sir Francis himself, with Sir Lionel Vickars as
+his right hand, took his post on the wall of the old town, between
+the sand hill and the Schottenburg, which had been much damaged by
+the action of the waves during the gales and by the enemy's shot.
+Barrels of ashes, heaps of stones and bricks, hoops bound with
+squibs and fireworks, ropes of pitch, hand grenades, and barrels
+of nails were collected in readiness to hurl down upon the assailants.
+
+At dusk the besiegers ceased firing, to allow the guns to cool.
+Two engineer officers with fifty stout sappers, who each had a rose
+noble for every quarter of an hour's work, got on to the breach in
+front of the sand hill, and threw up a small breastwork, strengthened
+by palisades, across it. An officer crept down towards the Old
+Haven, and presently returned with the news that two thousand of
+the enemy were wading across, and forming up in battalions on the
+Ostend side.
+
+Suddenly a gun boomed out from the archduke's camp as a signal
+to Bucquoy, and just as the night had fairly set in the besiegers
+rushed to the assault from all points. They were received by a
+tremendous fire from the guns of the forts and the muskets of the
+soldiers; but, although the effect was serious, they did not hesitate
+a moment, but dashed forwards towards the foot of the sand hill and
+the wall of the old town, halted for a moment, poured in a volley,
+and then rushed into the breach and against the walls. The volley
+had been harmless, for Vere had ordered the men to lie flat until it
+was given. As the Spaniards climbed up barrels of ashes were emptied
+upon them, stones and heavy timbers hurled down, and flaming hoops
+cast over their necks. Three times they climbed to the crest of the
+sand hill, and as many times gained a footing on the Schottenburg;
+but each time they were beaten back with great slaughter. As fiercely
+did they attack at the other points, but were everywhere repulsed.
+
+On the east side three strong battalions of the enemy attacked the
+outwork across the Geule, known as the Spanish Half Moon. Vere, who
+was everywhere supervising the defence, ordered the weak garrison
+there to withdraw, and sent a soldier out to give himself up, and
+to tell them that the Half Moon was slenderly manned, and to offer
+to lead them in. The offer was accepted, and the Spaniards took
+possession of the work.
+
+The general's object was to occupy them, and prevent their supporting
+their comrades in the western attack. The Half Moon, indeed, was
+quite open towards the town. Tide was rising, and a heavy fire was
+opened upon the captors of the work from the batteries across the
+Geule, and they were driven out with the loss of three hundred men.
+At length the assault was repulsed at all points, and the assailants
+began to retire across the Old Haven. No sooner did they begin to
+ford it than Vere opened the west sluice, and the water in the town
+ditch rushed down in a torrent, carrying numbers of the Spaniards
+away into the sea.
+
+Altogether, the assault cost the Spaniards two thousand men.
+An enormous amount of plunder in arms, gold chains, jewels, and
+rich garments were obtained by the defenders from the bodies of
+the fallen. The loss of the garrison was only thirty killed and a
+hundred wounded.
+
+The repulse of the grand attack upon Ostend by no means put an end
+to the siege. Sir Francis Vere, his brother Horace, Sir John Ogle,
+and Sir Lionel Vickars left, the general being summoned to assume
+command in the field; but the siege continued for two years and a
+half longer. Many assaults were repulsed during that time, and the
+town only surrendered on the 20th September, 1604, when the sand
+hill, which was the key of the whole position, was at last captured
+by the Spaniards.
+
+It was but a heap of ruins that they had become possessed of after
+their three years' siege, and its capture had not only cost them
+an immense number of men and a vast amount of money, but the long
+and gallant defence had secured upon a firm basis the independence
+of Holland. While the whole available force of Spain had been so
+occupied Prince Maurice and his English allies had captured town
+after town, and had beaten the enemy whenever they attempted to show
+themselves in the open field. They had more than counterbalanced
+the loss of Ostend by the recapture of Sluys, and had so lowered
+the Spanish pride that not long afterwards a twelve years truce was
+concluded, which virtually brought the war to an end, and secured
+for ever the independence of Holland.
+
+During the last year or two of the war Sir Francis Vere, worn out
+by his fatigues and the countless wounds he had received in the
+service of the Netherlands, had resigned his command and retired
+to England, being succeeded in his position by Sir Horace. Lionel
+Vickars fought no more after he had borne his part in the repulse
+of the great assault against Ostend. He had barely recovered from
+the effect of the wound he had received at the battle of Nieuport,
+and the fatigues and anxiety of the siege, together with the damp
+air from the marshes, brought on a serious attack of fever, which
+completely prostrated him as soon as the necessity for exertion
+had passed. He remained some weeks at the Hague, and then, being
+somewhat recovered, returned home.
+
+While throughout all England the greatest enthusiasm had been
+aroused by the victory of Nieuport and the repulse of the Spaniards
+at Ostend, the feeling was naturally higher in the Vere's county
+of Essex than elsewhere. As soon as Lionel Vickars was well enough
+to take any share in gaieties he received many invitations to stay
+at the great houses of the county, where most of the gentry were
+more or less closely connected with the Veres; and before he had
+been home many months he married Dorothy Windhurst, one of the
+richest heiresses in the county, and a cousin of the Veres. Thus
+Geoffrey had, after Juan Mendez retired from taking any active part
+in the business, to work alone until his sons were old enough to
+join him in the business. As soon as they were able to undertake
+its active management, Geoffrey bought an estate near Hedingham,
+and there settled down, journeying occasionally to London to see
+how the affairs of the house went on, and to give advice to his
+sons. Dolores had, two or three years after her arrival in England,
+embraced the faith of her husband; and although she complained a
+little at times of the English climate, she never once regretted
+the step she had taken in leaving her native Spain.
+
+ÿ
+
+
+
+
+*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, BY ENGLAND'S AID OR THE FREEING OF THE NETHERLANDS (1585-1604) ***
+
+This file should be named enaid10.txt or enaid10.zip
+Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks get a new NUMBER, enaid11.txt
+VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, enaid10a.txt
+
+Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we usually do not
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance
+of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing.
+Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections,
+even years after the official publication date.
+
+Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til
+midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement.
+The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at
+Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month.  A
+preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment
+and editing by those who wish to do so.
+
+Most people start at our Web sites at:
+http://gutenberg.net or
+http://promo.net/pg
+
+These Web sites include award-winning information about Project
+Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new
+eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!).
+
+
+Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement
+can get to them as follows, and just download by date.  This is
+also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the
+indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an
+announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter.
+
+http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext04 or
+ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext04
+
+Or /etext03, 02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90
+
+Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want,
+as it appears in our Newsletters.
+
+
+Information about Project Gutenberg (one page)
+
+We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work.  The
+time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours
+to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright
+searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc.   Our
+projected audience is one hundred million readers.  If the value
+per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2
+million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text
+files per month:  1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+
+We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002
+If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total
+will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end.
+
+The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks!
+This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers,
+which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users.
+
+Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated):
+
+eBooks Year Month
+
+    1  1971 July
+   10  1991 January
+  100  1994 January
+ 1000  1997 August
+ 1500  1998 October
+ 2000  1999 December
+ 2500  2000 December
+ 3000  2001 November
+ 4000  2001 October/November
+ 6000  2002 December*
+ 9000  2003 November*
+10000  2004 January*
+
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created
+to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium.
+
+We need your donations more than ever!
+
+As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people
+and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut,
+Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois,
+Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts,
+Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New
+Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio,
+Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South
+Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West
+Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming.
+
+We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones
+that have responded.
+
+As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list
+will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states.
+Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state.
+
+In answer to various questions we have received on this:
+
+We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally
+request donations in all 50 states.  If your state is not listed and
+you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have,
+just ask.
+
+While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are
+not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting
+donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to
+donate.
+
+International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about
+how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made
+deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are
+ways.
+
+Donations by check or money order may be sent to:
+
+Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+PMB 113
+1739 University Ave.
+Oxford, MS 38655-4109
+
+Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment
+method other than by check or money order.
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by
+the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN
+[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154.  Donations are
+tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law.  As fund-raising
+requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be
+made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states.
+
+We need your donations more than ever!
+
+You can get up to date donation information online at:
+
+http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html
+
+
+***
+
+If you can't reach Project Gutenberg,
+you can always email directly to:
+
+Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com>
+
+Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message.
+
+We would prefer to send you information by email.
+
+
+**The Legal Small Print**
+
+
+(Three Pages)
+
+***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START***
+Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers.
+They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with
+your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from
+someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our
+fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement
+disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how
+you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to.
+
+*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK
+By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
+eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept
+this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive
+a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by
+sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person
+you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical
+medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request.
+
+ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS
+This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks,
+is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart
+through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project").
+Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright
+on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and
+distribute it in the United States without permission and
+without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth
+below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook
+under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark.
+
+Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market
+any commercial products without permission.
+
+To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable
+efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain
+works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any
+medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other
+things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
+intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged
+disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer
+codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
+
+LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES
+But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below,
+[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may
+receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims
+all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including
+legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR
+UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT,
+INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE
+OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of
+receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any)
+you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that
+time to the person you received it from. If you received it
+on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and
+such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement
+copy. If you received it electronically, such person may
+choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to
+receive it electronically.
+
+THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS
+TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT
+LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
+PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or
+the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the
+above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you
+may have other legal rights.
+
+INDEMNITY
+You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation,
+and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated
+with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
+texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including
+legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the
+following that you do or cause:  [1] distribution of this eBook,
+[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook,
+or [3] any Defect.
+
+DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm"
+You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by
+disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this
+"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg,
+or:
+
+[1]  Only give exact copies of it.  Among other things, this
+     requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the
+     eBook or this "small print!" statement.  You may however,
+     if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable
+     binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form,
+     including any form resulting from conversion by word
+     processing or hypertext software, but only so long as
+     *EITHER*:
+
+     [*]  The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and
+          does *not* contain characters other than those
+          intended by the author of the work, although tilde
+          (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may
+          be used to convey punctuation intended by the
+          author, and additional characters may be used to
+          indicate hypertext links; OR
+
+     [*]  The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at
+          no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent
+          form by the program that displays the eBook (as is
+          the case, for instance, with most word processors);
+          OR
+
+     [*]  You provide, or agree to also provide on request at
+          no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the
+          eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC
+          or other equivalent proprietary form).
+
+[2]  Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this
+     "Small Print!" statement.
+
+[3]  Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the
+     gross profits you derive calculated using the method you
+     already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  If you
+     don't derive profits, no royalty is due.  Royalties are
+     payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation"
+     the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were
+     legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent
+     periodic) tax return.  Please contact us beforehand to
+     let us know your plans and to work out the details.
+
+WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO?
+Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of
+public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
+in machine readable form.
+
+The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time,
+public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses.
+Money should be paid to the:
+"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or
+software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at:
+hart@pobox.com
+
+[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only
+when distributed free of all fees.  Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by
+Michael S. Hart.  Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be
+used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be
+they hardware or software or any other related product without
+express permission.]
+
+*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END*
+